Teledyne PDS User Manual

User Manual
Teledyne PDS
Version 4.3.12
May 2019
Teledyne RESON B.V.

Stuttgartstraat 42- 44
3047 AS Rotterdam
The Netherlands
Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

www.teledyne-reson.com
Teledyne RESON has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document;
however, because ongoing development efforts are made to continually improve the capabilities of our
products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for
errors, omissions, or future changes herein.
The accompanying software and documentation are proprietary products owned by Teledyne RESON and
protected under international copyright law.
Copyright © All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated,
without the prior written consent of Teledyne RESON. No part of this publication may be stored or
transmitted in any electronic form without the prior consent of Teledyne RESON. Any unauthorized use is
a violation of copyright laws. Teledyne PDS™ is a trademark of Teledyne RESON.
Amendment Record Sheet

Rev. Date Reason for Modifications
4.3.12 13/03/2019 Replayer: Add note error message when opening a file set.
Vessel Configuration – s7k format: Add record 7041 to table.
View: Text modified Alerts view.
Installation: Add note about usage of charts. (They do not replace official
charts.)
Import Post Processed GPS data: Add note import file must in UTC time.
Removed chapter Documents.
Contents
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Teledyne PDS ........................................................................................................ 1
2 Installation 3
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 Requirements ................................................................................................ 3
2.1.2 Memory Improvement ................................................................................... 4
2.2 Install PDS .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2.1 Start PDS Installation .................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS ................................................................................ 7
2.2.3 Auto start PDS .............................................................................................. 8
2.2.4 File Structure ................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Adapting Hardware ............................................................................................... 10
2.3.1 Network Card .............................................................................................. 10
2.3.2 Serial Extender Cards ................................................................................. 10
2.3.2.1 USB to serial converters .................................................................... 10
2.3.2.2 Other cards ........................................................................................ 10
2.3.3 Monitors ...................................................................................................... 12
2.4 PDS Dongle .......................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1 Update of PDS Dongle................................................................................ 13
2.5 Installing a Remote Presentation ......................................................................... 16
2.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation ................................................................. 18
2.6 Installing and Using C-Map .................................................................................. 18
2.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map.................................................... 19
2.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License ..................................................................... 26
2.6.3 Updating C-Map Database ......................................................................... 32
2.6.4 Changing eToken Dongle ........................................................................... 33
2.6.5 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS ................................................................... 34
2.7 Installing and Using Tresco .................................................................................. 36
2.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver ..................................................... 36
2.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe ....................................................................... 39
2.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS .................................................................. 43
2.8 Installing and Using S-57 Charts .......................................................................... 44
2.8.1 Add S-57 charts in PDS .............................................................................. 45
2.8.2 Add the S-57 chart layer in a Plan or 3D View ........................................... 48
2.8.3 S-57 Chart Layer Properties ....................................................................... 50
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  i

2.8.4 Considerations using S-57 Charts in PDS ................................................. 57
3 Using Teledyne PDS 59

3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 59
3.2 Docking ................................................................................................................ 60
3.2.1 Dock Areas ................................................................................................. 61
3.3 Context Menus ..................................................................................................... 61
3.4 Navigation in a 3D View ....................................................................................... 62
3.4.1 Rotate the Data .......................................................................................... 63
3.4.2 Shift the Data .............................................................................................. 63
3.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data .............................................................................. 63
3.4.4 Scale the Data ............................................................................................ 64
3.4.5 Center the Data .......................................................................................... 64
4 Starting Teledyne PDS 65

4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 65
4.1.1 Project......................................................................................................... 65
4.1.2 Application Type ......................................................................................... 65
4.1.3 Configuration .............................................................................................. 66
4.2 Project Structure .................................................................................................. 67
4.3 Projects Common Files ........................................................................................ 68
4.4 New Project Wizard .............................................................................................. 69
4.4.1 Project Configuration .................................................................................. 71
4.4.1.1 Description ........................................................................................ 71
4.4.1.2 Units .................................................................................................. 72
4.4.1.3 Coordinate System ........................................................................... 72
4.4.1.4 Formats ............................................................................................. 73
4.4.1.5 Log Files ............................................................................................ 73
4.4.1.6 File History ........................................................................................ 75
4.4.1.7 Disk Space ........................................................................................ 75
4.4.1.8 Alert Sounds...................................................................................... 76
4.4.1.9 Options .............................................................................................. 76
4.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters .................................................................... 77
4.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters ............................................................... 77
4.4.1.12 Icon Images..................................................................................... 78
4.4.2 Selecting the Application Type ................................................................... 79
4.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 80
4.4.4 Vessel Selection ......................................................................................... 80
4.4.5 Layout ......................................................................................................... 82
4.4.6 Events ......................................................................................................... 83
4.4.7 Alarms......................................................................................................... 83
4.4.8 Closing the Wizard ..................................................................................... 84
4.5 Create Project from Log Data .............................................................................. 84
ii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

5 Coordinate System 87
5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 87
5.2 Project Coordinate System ................................................................................... 88
5.3 Coordinate System Wizard ................................................................................... 89
5.3.1 New Coordinate System ............................................................................. 89
5.3.2 Select Coordinate System .......................................................................... 90
5.3.3 Ellipsoids ..................................................................................................... 91
5.3.4 Datum Transformation ................................................................................ 92
5.3.5 Select Datum Transformation ..................................................................... 93
5.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters ............................................................ 94
5.3.7 Geoid Model ................................................................................................ 95
5.3.8 Unit .............................................................................................................. 99
5.3.9 Projection .................................................................................................. 100
5.3.10 Select Projection ..................................................................................... 101
5.3.11 Projection Parameters ............................................................................ 102
5.3.12 Post Correction ....................................................................................... 103
5.3.13 Save Coordinate System ........................................................................ 104
5.3.14 Coordinate System Overview ................................................................. 105
5.4 Edit Coordinate System ...................................................................................... 105
5.5 VDatum ............................................................................................................... 108
5.6 DC File ................................................................................................................ 108
6 Vessel Configuration 111

6.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 111
6.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration ............................................................................. 111
6.2.1 New Vessel Configuration......................................................................... 112
6.3 Geometry ............................................................................................................ 113
6.3.1 Vessel Contour ......................................................................................... 117
6.4 Equipment........................................................................................................... 119
6.4.1 Sub System ............................................................................................... 121
6.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace ...................................................................... 122
6.4.3 Outputs...................................................................................................... 122
6.4.3.1 Create a User defined Output Driver ............................................... 124
6.5 Computations ..................................................................................................... 128
6.5.1 Advanced Computations ........................................................................... 129
6.6 Data Sources ...................................................................................................... 130
6.7 Guidance ............................................................................................................ 131
6.8 Tools ................................................................................................................... 132
6.8.1 Anchor Definition ....................................................................................... 133
6.8.2 Crane Configuration .................................................................................. 134
6.8.3 Cutter ........................................................................................................ 136
6.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings .......................................................................... 137
6.8.5 Interval Logging ........................................................................................ 138
6.8.6 Magnetometer Dialog ................................................................................ 140
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  iii

6.8.7 Pipe Configuration .................................................................................... 141
6.8.8 Pipe Detection .......................................................................................... 142
6.8.9 Production Parameters ............................................................................. 143
6.8.10 Trip Registration ..................................................................................... 144
6.8.11 Statistics Report ..................................................................................... 145
6.9 Logging .............................................................................................................. 147
6.9.1 File Formats .............................................................................................. 148
6.9.1.1 PDS Format .................................................................................... 148
6.9.1.2 PDS (active) Grid Model ................................................................. 149
6.9.1.3 Winfrog Format ............................................................................... 149
6.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format .................................................................. 150
6.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data .......................................................................... 150
6.9.1.6 Production Format .......................................................................... 150
6.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format ...................................................................... 150
6.9.1.8 DXF Format..................................................................................... 151
6.9.1.9 XTF Format ..................................................................................... 151
6.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model ................................................................. 152
6.9.1.11 S7K Format ................................................................................... 152
6.9.1.12 SDS Format .................................................................................. 155
6.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format ................................................................ 155
6.9.1.14 FAU Format................................................................................... 155
6.9.1.15 GSF Format .................................................................................. 156
6.9.2 Log Space Management .......................................................................... 157
6.9.3 Condition Check ....................................................................................... 158
6.9.4 Create New Log File ................................................................................. 158
6.10 Simulation ........................................................................................................ 159
6.11 Aliases .............................................................................................................. 160
6.12 Alarms .............................................................................................................. 161
6.12.1 Vessel Alarms ......................................................................................... 161
6.12.2 Alarm on Difference ................................................................................ 162
6.12.3 Device Alarms ........................................................................................ 165
6.12.4 Object Distance Alarm ............................................................................ 166
7 Guidance 167
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 167
7.2 Route .................................................................................................................. 168
7.3 Runlines ............................................................................................................. 168
7.4 Waypoints .......................................................................................................... 169
7.5 Design Model ..................................................................................................... 170
7.5.1 3D Design Model Editor............................................................................ 171
7.6 Cutter Dredge ..................................................................................................... 173
7.7 Work Areas ........................................................................................................ 174
7.8 Restricted Areas ................................................................................................. 175
7.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor............................................................................. 175
iv  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

7.9 Vessel Placement ............................................................................................... 176
7.9.1 Placement Points Editor............................................................................ 177
7.10 Dredge Instruction ............................................................................................ 178
7.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor ........................................................................ 178
7.11 Object Distance ................................................................................................ 179
7.12 Guidance Editor ................................................................................................ 180
8 Events 183
8.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 183
8.2 Events Mode ....................................................................................................... 183
8.2.1 Mode ......................................................................................................... 184
8.2.2 Conditions ................................................................................................. 184
8.2.3 Push Button .............................................................................................. 184
8.2.4 Event Definition ......................................................................................... 185
8.2.4.1 Separator Delimited ......................................................................... 186
8.2.4.2 Fixed Field ....................................................................................... 186
8.2.4.3 Field Selection ................................................................................. 187
8.3 Events Data Source ............................................................................................ 188
8.4 Events Numbering .............................................................................................. 189
9 Control Center 191

9.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 191
9.2 Menu bar............................................................................................................. 192
9.2.1 File Menu .................................................................................................. 192
9.2.2 System Menu ............................................................................................ 194
9.2.3 Acquisition Menu ....................................................................................... 195
9.2.4 Processing Menu ...................................................................................... 196
9.2.5 Tools Menu ............................................................................................... 197
9.2.6 Help Menu ................................................................................................. 198
9.3 Toolbar................................................................................................................ 199
9.4 PDS Explorer ...................................................................................................... 201
9.5 Bottom Pane ....................................................................................................... 202
10 Editors 203
10.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 203
10.2 Tide Station Editor ............................................................................................ 204
10.2.1 Tide Station Editor Toolbar and Context Menu ...................................... 205
10.2.2 Using a Tide Station in Realtime ............................................................ 209
10.3 Clipping Polygon Editor .................................................................................... 218
10.4 Design Profile Template Editor ......................................................................... 219
10.5 Profile Design Model Editor .............................................................................. 220
10.5.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines .............................................. 220
10.5.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route ............................................... 222
10.6 GeoTIFF Images Raster Editor ........................................................................ 223
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  v

10.7 Excluded Areas Editor...................................................................................... 225
10.8 Sound Velocity Profile Editor ........................................................................... 225
10.8.1 Import an ASCII Sound Velocity File ...................................................... 227
10.8.2 Editing SVP File ...................................................................................... 229
11 Explorer 231
11.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 231
11.2 Tree View ......................................................................................................... 232
11.2.1 Project List Page .................................................................................... 234
11.2.1.1 General ......................................................................................... 234
11.2.1.2 Context Menu -Project List Page .................................................. 234
11.2.1.3 Context menu – Project ................................................................ 235
11.2.2 Project Tab Page .................................................................................... 236
11.2.2.1 General ......................................................................................... 236
11.2.2.2 Context Menu – Project Tab Page ................................................ 236
11.2.2.3 Context Menu – Files and Branches ............................................. 237
11.2.2.4 3D Models ..................................................................................... 238
11.2.2.5 Camera Images Databases Files.................................................. 239
11.2.2.6 Clipping Polygons ......................................................................... 239
11.2.2.7 Color Tables .................................................................................. 240
11.2.2.8 Design Profile Templates .............................................................. 245
11.2.2.9 Grid Models ................................................................................... 246
11.2.2.10 OpenGIS KML Encoding Standard (KML) files ........................... 247
11.2.2.11 OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ) files .............. 247
11.2.2.12 Placement Points ........................................................................ 247
11.2.2.13 Profile Design Models ................................................................. 248
11.2.2.14 Restricted Areas ......................................................................... 248
11.2.2.15 Runlines ...................................................................................... 249
11.2.2.16 Sonar Targets ............................................................................. 250
11.2.2.17 Sound Velocity Profiles ............................................................... 250
11.2.2.18 Tide Stations ............................................................................... 251
11.2.2.19 Track Guides Routes .................................................................. 251
11.2.2.20 User Maps ................................................................................... 252
11.2.2.21 Waypoints ................................................................................... 253
11.2.2.22 Work Areas ................................................................................. 254
11.2.3 Charts Tab Page .................................................................................... 254
11.2.3.1 General ......................................................................................... 254
11.2.3.2 Context Menu Charts Tab Page ................................................... 255
11.2.3.3 Context Menu Branches and Files ................................................ 255
11.2.3.4 Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Drawings ................................. 256
11.2.3.5 ESRI Shapes (SHP) ...................................................................... 257
11.2.3.6 MicroStation Design File (DGN) Drawing ..................................... 257
11.2.3.7 PDS1000 Electronic Charts .......................................................... 257
11.2.3.8 Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images ............................. 257
vi  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

11.2.3.9 S-57 ............................................................................................... 257
11.2.3.10 C-MAP Databases ....................................................................... 257
11.2.3.11 C-MAP Filters .............................................................................. 258
11.2.3.12 Convert S-57 to C-Map ............................................................... 258
11.2.4 Geoid Models Tab Page ......................................................................... 261
11.2.4.1 Context Menu Geoid Model Tab page .......................................... 261
11.2.5 Log File Tab Page ................................................................................... 262
11.2.5.1 General .......................................................................................... 262
11.2.5.2 Context menu Log File Tab Page .................................................. 263
11.2.6 Other Tab Page ...................................................................................... 265
11.2.6.1 Context Menu Other Tab page ...................................................... 266
11.2.6.2 Context Menu – Branches and Files ............................................. 266
11.2.6.3 Charts ............................................................................................ 268
11.2.6.4 Multimedia ..................................................................................... 268
11.2.6.5 Report ............................................................................................ 268
11.2.7 Advanced Tab Page ............................................................................... 268
11.2.7.1 General .......................................................................................... 268
11.2.7.2 Context Menu Advanced Tab Page .............................................. 269
11.2.7.4 Camera Images ............................................................................. 271
11.2.7.5 System ........................................................................................... 271
11.2.7.6 Project ........................................................................................... 272
11.2.7.7 Projects Common .......................................................................... 276
11.2.7.8 Sonar Targets ................................................................................ 281
11.3 Explorer Project 2D, 3D and Globe View ......................................................... 281
11.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 281
11.3.2 2D Project View ...................................................................................... 282
11.3.2.1 Toolbar .......................................................................................... 282
11.3.3 3D Project View ...................................................................................... 285
11.3.3.1 Toolbar .......................................................................................... 285
11.3.4 Globe View .............................................................................................. 287
11.3.4.1 Toolbar .......................................................................................... 288
11.3.4.2 MGRS grid (UTM zones) ............................................................... 288
11.3.4.3 Project Extents .............................................................................. 289
11.4 Using the PDS Explorer.................................................................................... 290
11.4.1 Selecting a Project .................................................................................. 290
11.4.2 Changing the Project Path ...................................................................... 291
11.4.3 Adding a File to the Project or PDS ........................................................ 293
11.4.4 Setting up the Project.............................................................................. 293
11.4.5 Locate or Go To Data in the Project View .............................................. 296
11.4.6 GPS Track Files ...................................................................................... 297
11.4.7 Create a File Set ..................................................................................... 298
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  vii

12 Configuration 301
12.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 301
12.2 Select a New Application Type ........................................................................ 302
12.3 Select or Create a New Configuration ............................................................. 302
12.4 Add, Remove or Edit a Vessel Configuration .................................................. 302
12.5 Add, Remove or Edit Layouts .......................................................................... 303
12.6 Add, Remove or Edit Events ............................................................................ 303
12.7 Add, Remove or Edit Alarms ............................................................................ 303
13 Acquisition 305
13.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 305
13.2 Start Acquisition ............................................................................................... 305
13.2.1 Simulation ............................................................................................... 305
13.2.2 Realtime ................................................................................................. 305
13.3 Data Visualization ............................................................................................ 306
13.3.1 Layout ..................................................................................................... 306
13.4 Acquisition Menu Bar and Toolbar ................................................................... 308
13.4.1 Selecting Guidance ................................................................................ 314
13.4.1.1 Making Runlines or Routes Real Time ......................................... 315
13.5 Logging ............................................................................................................ 315
13.5.1 Check the Logging .................................................................................. 316
13.6 Shortcuts .......................................................................................................... 316
13.6.1 F-Keys .................................................................................................... 318
13.6.2 Attribute Actions ..................................................................................... 319
13.6.2.1 Attach to Button............................................................................. 321
13.6.3 Manual Input Actions .............................................................................. 321
13.6.4 View Attribute Actions............................................................................. 322
13.6.5 Shortcut Keys ......................................................................................... 325
13.7 Presentations ................................................................................................... 325
14 Views 327
14.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 327
14.2 3D View ............................................................................................................ 328
14.2.1 3D View – Online .................................................................................... 328
14.2.2 3D View – Online Dredge ....................................................................... 329
14.2.3 3D View – Online Water Column ............................................................ 331
14.2.3.1 Water Column Samples ................................................................ 335
14.2.3.2 Water Column Projection .............................................................. 337
14.2.3.3 Sonar Wedge ................................................................................ 342
14.2.4 3D View – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................................... 343
14.2.5 3D View – Layers ................................................................................... 345
14.2.6 3D View – Properties .............................................................................. 346
14.3 Alerts View ....................................................................................................... 346
14.3.1 Error Messages ...................................................................................... 348
viii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

14.4 Compass View .................................................................................................. 349
14.4.1 Compass – Properties ............................................................................ 349
14.5 Device Configuration Views.............................................................................. 349
14.5.1 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View ............................................... 350
14.5.1.1 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Settings ............................................ 350
14.5.1.2 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Gates ............................................... 353
14.5.1.3 RESON SeaBat 7K – Ocean Menu ............................................... 354
14.5.1.4 RESON SeaBat 7K – Data Recording .......................................... 355
14.5.1.5 RESON SeaBat 7K - Sonar Steering ............................................ 356
14.5.2 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat View ..................................... 358
14.5.2.1 RESON HydroBat – Multibeam Settings ....................................... 359
14.5.2.2 RESON HydroBat – Ocean Menu ................................................. 360
14.5.3 Device Configuration – BlueView View................................................... 360
14.5.4 Device Configuration - Interferometry GeoSwath View .......................... 361
14.5.5 Device Configuration – Pan and Tilt Positioners Control ........................ 364
14.6 Dredge Views ................................................................................................... 366
14.6.1 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View ............................................................... 366
14.6.2 Dredge – Bars Vertical View ................................................................... 367
14.6.3 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View .............................................. 367
14.6.3.1 Flow/Concentration Meter – Properties ......................................... 368
14.6.4 Dredge – Load and Draught View .......................................................... 369
14.6.5 Dredge – SCADA View ........................................................................... 370
14.6.5.1 SCADA – Properties ...................................................................... 370
14.7 Dredge Status View .......................................................................................... 370
14.8 Echosounder Graphical Trace View ................................................................. 371
14.8.1 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Toolbar ................................................ 372
14.8.2 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Settings ............................................... 373
14.8.2.1 General Page ................................................................................ 374
14.8.2.2 Advanced Page ............................................................................. 374
14.8.2.3 Color Page ..................................................................................... 375
14.8.2.4 Channels Page .............................................................................. 376
14.8.2.5 Paper Page .................................................................................... 377
14.8.2.6 Various Page ................................................................................. 378
14.8.2.7 Communication Page .................................................................... 378
14.9 Helmsman View ................................................................................................ 379
14.9.1 Helmsman – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................................ 379
14.9.2 Helmsman – Properties .......................................................................... 380
14.10 Icon Image View ............................................................................................. 381
14.11 Interval Logging View ..................................................................................... 382
14.12 Laser Scan Control View ................................................................................ 382
14.12.1 Laser Scan – MDL View ....................................................................... 383
14.12.2 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View ........................................................ 383
14.13 Manual Input View .......................................................................................... 384
14.14 Messages Views ............................................................................................. 385
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  ix

14.14.1 Messages – HydroBat or Messages – SeaBat 7K View ...................... 385
14.14.1.1 Main Page ................................................................................... 385
14.14.1.2 Event Page.................................................................................. 386
14.14.1.3 BITE Page ................................................................................... 386
14.14.2 Messages – I/O Port View .................................................................... 386
14.14.3 Messages – System Messages View ................................................... 387
14.15 Multibeam QC Views...................................................................................... 387
14.15.1 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View ....................................................... 387
14.15.2 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile View .................. 392
14.15.3 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View ....................................................... 392
14.15.4 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors View ............ 395
14.15.5 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors View .................................. 396
14.15.5.1 Vertical Total Propagation Error.................................................. 396
14.15.5.2 Horizontal Total Propagation Error ............................................. 397
14.15.5.3 List of Standard Deviations of the TPE’s .................................... 398
14.15.6 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View .............................................. 400
14.15.7 Multibeam QC – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................ 401
14.15.8 Multibeam QC – Properties .................................................................. 403
14.15.9 Multibeam Filters View ......................................................................... 404
14.15.9.1 Depth and Range Filter ............................................................... 410
14.15.9.2 Intersection and Slope Filter ....................................................... 410
14.15.9.3 Flying Object Filter ...................................................................... 411
14.15.9.4 Nadir Filter................................................................................... 411
14.15.9.5 Statistic Filter............................................................................... 413
14.15.9.6 IHO Error Filter ............................................................................ 414
14.15.9.7 Smart Filter.................................................................................. 414
14.15.9.8 Amplitude Detection Filter ........................................................... 418
14.16 Numerics View ............................................................................................... 418
14.16.1 Numerics – Standard View ................................................................... 419
14.16.1.1 Primary Data Source Name in the Numeric View ....................... 420
14.16.1.2 Numerics Alarm........................................................................... 422
14.16.2 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 422
14.17 Output Control View ....................................................................................... 423
14.18 Pipe Lay Views ............................................................................................... 424
14.18.1 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View ................................................................. 424
14.18.2 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View .............................................................. 425
14.18.3 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View ............................................................... 426
14.19 Plan Views ..................................................................................................... 426
14.19.1 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars .................................................. 427
14.19.2 Plan View – Dredge Instruction ............................................................ 428
14.19.3 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning ......................................................... 429
14.19.4 Plan View – General Dredge Operation ............................................... 430
14.19.5 Plan View – Navigation ........................................................................ 431
14.19.6 Plan View – Production ........................................................................ 432
x  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

14.19.7 Plan View – Survey Coverage .............................................................. 433
14.19.8 Plan View – Survey Coverage and Edit ................................................ 434
14.19.9 Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 434
14.19.9.1 Sonar Target Options in Plan Views ........................................... 439
14.19.9.2 User Maps ................................................................................... 440
14.19.10 Plan View – Layer Control .................................................................. 442
14.19.10.1 AIS Layer ................................................................................... 443
14.19.11 Plan View – Properties........................................................................ 444
14.19.12 Coverage Settings .............................................................................. 446
14.20 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View ................................................. 448
14.21 Profile Views ................................................................................................... 450
14.21.1 Profile – Grid Model View ..................................................................... 450
14.21.2 Profile – Multibeam View ...................................................................... 451
14.21.3 Profile – Projected Runline View .......................................................... 451
14.21.4 Profile – Realtime Design View ............................................................ 453
14.21.5 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View ................................................. 454
14.21.6 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View .......................................... 455
14.21.7 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View .................................................. 456
14.21.8 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View .................................................... 457
14.21.9 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical View ....................................... 458
14.21.10 Profile – Sound Velocity View ............................................................. 459
14.21.11 Profile – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................................... 459
14.21.12 Profile – Properties ............................................................................. 460
14.22 Raw Data View ............................................................................................... 462
14.22.1 Statistics ................................................................................................ 463
14.22.2 Drag & Drop .......................................................................................... 464
14.23 Scatterplot View .............................................................................................. 464
14.24 Sonar Targets View ........................................................................................ 466
14.25 Sonar Contact view ........................................................................................ 466
14.26 Sonar Views ................................................................................................... 467
14.26.1 Sonar – Wedge View ............................................................................ 467
14.26.1.1 Sonar Bathy ................................................................................. 467
14.26.1.2 Sonar Wedge - Sonar Bathy Toolbar and Context Menu ........... 470
14.26.1.3 Obstacle Avoidance – Forward looking data ............................... 471
14.26.1.4 Sonar Wedge - Obstacle Avoidance Toolbar and Context Menu 473
14.26.2 Sonar – Sidescan View ......................................................................... 475
14.26.3 Sonar – Snippets View.......................................................................... 476
14.26.4 Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu ...................................................... 476
14.26.4.1 TVG ............................................................................................. 478
14.26.4.2 Auto Scaling ................................................................................ 478
14.26.4.3 Speed Correction......................................................................... 478
14.26.4.4 Slant Range Correction ............................................................... 478
14.26.4.5 Lambert’s Law Correction ........................................................... 478
14.26.4.6 Range mode ................................................................................ 478
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xi

14.26.4.7 Sonar Target Options in Sonar Views ........................................ 479
14.27 Status Views .................................................................................................. 480
14.27.1 Status – Alarms View ........................................................................... 480
14.27.2 Status – Computations View ................................................................ 481
14.27.3 Status – Equipment View ..................................................................... 481
14.27.4 Status – Logging View .......................................................................... 482
14.27.5 Status – Remote Connections View ..................................................... 482
14.28 Tide Manual Input View ................................................................................. 482
14.29 Time Series View ........................................................................................... 483
14.29.1 Time Series – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................... 484
15 Replay 485
15.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 485
15.1.1 Controlling the Replayer ......................................................................... 485
15.1.2 External Replay Settings ........................................................................ 487
15.1.3 Saving Layout and Vessel Configuration ............................................... 487
15.1.4 Recomputation and Saving Results ....................................................... 487
16 Processing 489
16.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 489
16.2 Validating and Presenting Survey Results ....................................................... 489
17 Editing 491
17.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 491
17.1.1 Available Editors ..................................................................................... 491
17.2 Open Editing .................................................................................................... 492
17.2.1 Selecting a File Set................................................................................. 493
17.2.2 Select the Editors ................................................................................... 494
17.2.2.1 Active Editor .................................................................................. 495
17.2.3 Selecting Points ...................................................................................... 495
17.2.4 Editing Toolbar ....................................................................................... 496
17.2.4.1 Jumping ......................................................................................... 496
17.2.4.2 Play Options .................................................................................. 496
17.2.4.3 Undo – Redo ................................................................................. 496
17.2.4.4 Edit Mode ...................................................................................... 496
17.2.4.5 Auto Recache................................................................................ 496
17.2.4.6 Find Exceptional Data ................................................................... 497
17.2.5 Tools Options ......................................................................................... 497
17.2.5.1 Modify Vessel Configuration ......................................................... 498
17.2.5.2 Select Vessel Configuration .......................................................... 498
17.2.5.3 Compare Vessel Configurations ................................................... 499
17.2.5.4 Transponder Position Update ....................................................... 500
17.2.5.5 Print File Status ............................................................................. 501
17.2.5.6 Apply Tide Data............................................................................. 501
xii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

17.2.5.7 Data Source Switch ....................................................................... 502
17.2.5.8 Cable Route Generation ................................................................ 504
17.2.5.9 Multibeam Statistics Report ........................................................... 505
17.2.5.10 Import Post-Processed GPS Data............................................... 505
17.2.5.11 Quick Calibration ......................................................................... 510
17.2.5.12 Generate TPE Results File .......................................................... 510
17.2.5.13 Validate All Caches ..................................................................... 512
17.2.5.14 Force Recache Selected Item ..................................................... 513
17.2.5.15 Revert To Original ....................................................................... 513
17.2.5.16 Repair File ................................................................................... 514
17.2.5.17 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps ............................................. 514
17.2.5.18 Force Recache GPS Positions .................................................... 514
17.3 Editing Data ...................................................................................................... 515
17.3.1 Editing Multibeam Data in a 3D View ..................................................... 515
17.3.2 Editing Data Points ................................................................................. 517
17.4 3D Box View ..................................................................................................... 517
17.4.1 3D Box Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 518
17.5 3D View ............................................................................................................ 521
17.5.1 3D View – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu .................................... 522
17.5.1.1 Beam Color Mode.......................................................................... 525
17.5.2 3D View – Standard Properties .............................................................. 526
17.5.3 3D View – Standard Layers .................................................................... 527
17.6 Data Source Switching ..................................................................................... 528
17.6.1 Edit Data Source Switches ..................................................................... 529
17.6.1.1 Insert a Data Source Switch .......................................................... 529
17.6.1.2 Modify a Data Source Switch ........................................................ 530
17.6.2 Data Source Switching Toolbar and Context Menu ................................ 530
17.7 Dekdienst .......................................................................................................... 532
17.8 Line-Based Editing ........................................................................................... 533
17.8.1 Select Data for the Line-Based Editing ................................................... 533
17.8.2 Line-Based Editing – Standard View ...................................................... 534
17.8.3 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View ........................................................ 535
17.8.4 Line-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ...................................... 536
17.9 Messages ......................................................................................................... 537
17.10 Multibeam Area Editing .................................................................................. 538
17.10.1 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View ............................................. 538
17.10.2 CUBE Model Mode ............................................................................... 539
17.10.2.1 CUBE ........................................................................................... 540
17.10.2.2 Create a CUBE Model ................................................................. 541
17.10.2.3 Information of the CUBE Model ................................................... 543
17.10.2.4 Editing the CUBE Model .............................................................. 544
17.10.2.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with a CUBE Model ............................ 545
17.10.2.6 Export the CUBE Model .............................................................. 546
17.10.2.7 Sync the CUBE Model ................................................................. 546
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xiii

17.10.3 Grid Model Mode .................................................................................. 547
17.10.3.1 Create a Grid Model .................................................................... 548
17.10.3.2 Information of the Grid Model ..................................................... 550
17.10.3.3 Editing the Grid Model ................................................................ 552
17.10.3.4 Remove Spikes in the Grid Model .............................................. 553
17.10.3.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with Grid Model .................................. 555
17.10.3.6 Export the Grid Model ................................................................. 556
17.10.3.7 Create IHO statistics Report ....................................................... 557
17.10.3.8 Sync the Grid Model ................................................................... 562
17.10.4 Multibeam Filter Mode .......................................................................... 562
17.10.4.1 Filter ............................................................................................ 563
17.10.4.2 Area Filter .................................................................................... 565
17.10.4.3 Show Filtered .............................................................................. 570
17.10.5 Multi Detect Mode ................................................................................. 571
17.10.5.1 Visualization page ....................................................................... 576
17.10.5.2 Multi Detect Filters ...................................................................... 578
17.10.5.3 Multi Detect Considerations ........................................................ 579
17.10.6 Multibeam Calibration Mode ................................................................. 580
17.10.7 Pipe Detection Mode ............................................................................ 581
17.10.8 Water Column Samples Mode ............................................................. 581
17.10.9 Sound Velocity Editor Mode ................................................................. 582
17.10.10 Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu .......................... 584
17.11 Numerics View ............................................................................................... 595
17.11.1 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 595
17.12 Ping View ....................................................................................................... 595
17.12.1 Ping Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................... 598
17.13 Position Editing .............................................................................................. 600
17.13.1 Position Editing – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu ...................... 600
17.13.2 Selecting Position Data for Editing ....................................................... 602
17.13.3 Dead Reckoning ................................................................................... 603
17.14 Profile View .................................................................................................... 603
17.14.1 Profile Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 604
17.15 Sonar .............................................................................................................. 607
17.15.1 Sonar View Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 608
17.16 Sonar Targets View........................................................................................ 610
17.16.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 611
17.17 Tide Station .................................................................................................... 612
17.17.1 Tide Station – Viewer ........................................................................... 612
17.18 Time-Based Editing ........................................................................................ 613
17.18.1 Select Data for the Time-Based Editing ............................................... 613
17.18.2 Time-Based Editing – Standard View................................................... 614
17.18.3 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View ................................................. 615
17.18.4 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph View ........................................... 615
17.18.5 Time-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu .................................. 616
xiv  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

18 Create Model 619
18.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 619
18.1.1 Create Model Toolbar and Context Menu............................................... 620
18.1.2 Model Preview Layer Properties ............................................................. 620
18.2 Importing Data .................................................................................................. 622
18.2.1 Selecting Data Files ................................................................................ 622
18.2.2 Data File Parameters .............................................................................. 623
18.2.2.1 Grid Model ..................................................................................... 624
18.2.2.2 PDS Log Data................................................................................ 624
18.2.3 Preview ................................................................................................... 624
18.3 Create Grid or TIN Model ................................................................................. 625
18.3.1 Grid Model............................................................................................... 625
18.3.2 TIN Model................................................................................................ 625
19 Grid Model 627

19.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 627
19.2 Grid Model Editor .............................................................................................. 628
19.2.1 Grid Model View Toolbar and Context Menu .......................................... 629
19.3 Actions .............................................................................................................. 631
19.3.1 Create Page ............................................................................................ 631
19.3.2 Info Page ................................................................................................. 636
19.3.3 Edit Page................................................................................................. 637
19.3.4 Filter Page ............................................................................................... 641
19.3.5 Update Page ........................................................................................... 643
19.3.5.1 Update with Grid Model ................................................................. 643
19.3.5.2 Update with 3D Model ................................................................... 644
19.3.6 Export Page ............................................................................................ 644
19.3.6.1 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid ............................................................ 645
19.3.6.2 Export to OpenGIS ........................................................................ 645
19.3.6.3 Export to GeoTIFF ......................................................................... 646
19.3.6.4 Generate Update Package ............................................................ 646
19.3.7 Import Page ............................................................................................ 647
19.3.8 Operations Page ..................................................................................... 649
19.3.8.1 Generate Color Table .................................................................... 650
19.3.8.2 Apply Z Corrections ....................................................................... 651
19.3.8.3 Set/Clear Value ............................................................................. 651
19.3.8.4 Create Resampled Model .............................................................. 652
19.3.8.5 Create Difference Model ............................................................... 652
19.3.8.6 Compute Volumes ......................................................................... 654
19.3.8.7 Extract Profiles .............................................................................. 657
19.3.9 Interpolate Page ...................................................................................... 659
19.3.9.1 Clean Interpolated ......................................................................... 659
19.3.9.2 Interpolate Circular ........................................................................ 659
19.3.9.3 Interpolate Triangular .................................................................... 660
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xv

19.3.9.4 Interpolate Directional ................................................................... 660
19.3.9.5 Interpolate Singlebeam ................................................................. 661
19.3.10 Port Export ............................................................................................ 661
19.3.10.1 Main Grid Model tab .................................................................... 663
19.3.10.2 Options tabs ................................................................................ 664
19.3.11 ASCII Export ......................................................................................... 666
19.3.12 Contour ................................................................................................. 667
20 TIN Model Viewer 671

20.1 General ............................................................................................................ 671
20.1.1 Drag & Drop ............................................................................................ 672
20.2 TIN Model Viewer Menu Bar ............................................................................ 672
20.2.1 File .......................................................................................................... 672
20.2.2 Edit.......................................................................................................... 673
20.2.3 Tools ....................................................................................................... 673
20.2.3.1 Decimate Model ............................................................................ 673
20.2.3.2 Filter Triangles .............................................................................. 676
20.2.3.3 Generate Contours ....................................................................... 676
20.3 TIN Model Viewer Toolbar ............................................................................... 676
20.4 TIN Model Viewer Context Menu ..................................................................... 677
21 End Area Volumes 679

21.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 679
21.1.1 Operation Method ................................................................................... 679
21.2 Volume Computation........................................................................................ 680
21.2.1 Volume Computation Wizard .................................................................. 680
21.2.2 Setup ...................................................................................................... 683
21.2.2.1 Views in the End Area Volumes.................................................... 683
21.2.3 Volumes .................................................................................................. 684
21.2.3.1 The Table of the Volumes ............................................................. 684
21.2.4 Vertical Areas ......................................................................................... 685
21.2.5 Report ..................................................................................................... 686
21.2.5.1 Comma Separated Report ............................................................ 686
21.2.5.2 Standard Report ............................................................................ 687
22 Plot 689
22.1 Getting Started ................................................................................................. 689
22.1.1 Create a Plot Project .............................................................................. 689
22.1.2 Add Data Files ........................................................................................ 690
22.1.3 Place a Plan View ................................................................................... 691
22.1.4 Create a Plot ........................................................................................... 693
22.1.5 Place Panels ........................................................................................... 695
22.1.6 Add Layers ............................................................................................. 696
22.1.7 Print or Export a Plot .............................................................................. 696
xvi  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

22.2 How Plotting Works .......................................................................................... 697
22.2.1 Regeneration .......................................................................................... 697
22.2.2 Panel and Layer Order............................................................................ 698
22.2.3 Overwrite Suppression ............................................................................ 698
22.2.4 Templates ............................................................................................... 699
22.2.5 Keywords ................................................................................................ 699
22.3 Available Panels ............................................................................................... 699
22.3.1 Plan Panel ............................................................................................... 700
22.3.2 North Arrow Panel ................................................................................... 701
22.3.3 Profile Panel ............................................................................................ 702
22.3.4 Profile Volume ......................................................................................... 703
22.3.5 Profile Series Panel ................................................................................ 706
22.3.6 Profile Cross Series Panel ...................................................................... 707
22.3.7 Profile Info Panel ..................................................................................... 708
22.3.8 Text Block Panel and Text Box ............................................................... 709
22.3.9 DXF Panel ............................................................................................... 710
22.3.10 Color Mapping Panel ............................................................................ 710
22.3.11 Image Panel .......................................................................................... 711
22.3.12 Key Map Panel ...................................................................................... 711
22.3.13 Scale Bar Panel .................................................................................... 712
22.4 Available Layers ............................................................................................... 712
22.4.1 Clipping Polygon Layer ........................................................................... 714
22.4.2 CMap Layer ............................................................................................ 714
22.4.3 Dredge Track Layer ................................................................................ 715
22.4.4 DXF Layer ............................................................................................... 715
22.4.5 Events Layer ........................................................................................... 716
22.4.6 Event Markers Layer ............................................................................... 716
22.4.7 Geographic Grid Layer ............................................................................ 716
22.4.8 GLW Grid Layer ...................................................................................... 717
22.4.9 Grid Model Layer .................................................................................... 718
22.4.10 Grid Model Contour Layer..................................................................... 719
22.4.11 Grid Model Difference Layer ................................................................. 720
22.4.12 Grid Model Profile Layer ....................................................................... 721
22.4.13 Grid Model Profile Statistics Layer ........................................................ 721
22.4.14 KP Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 723
22.4.15 Log Data Layer ..................................................................................... 723
22.4.16 Log Data Profile Layer .......................................................................... 724
22.4.17 PDS1000 Electronic Chart Layer .......................................................... 724
22.4.18 Pipe Profile Layer .................................................................................. 725
22.4.19 Plan Views Layer .................................................................................. 725
22.4.20 Raster Layer ......................................................................................... 726
22.4.21 Route Layer .......................................................................................... 726
22.4.22 Runlines Layer ...................................................................................... 727
22.4.23 Satellite Geographic Grid Layer ............................................................ 727
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xvii

22.4.24 Sonar Targets ....................................................................................... 728
22.4.25 Streak Lines Layer ................................................................................ 729
22.4.26 Text Layer ............................................................................................. 729
22.4.27 Theoretical Model Layer ....................................................................... 730
22.4.28 TIN Model Layer ................................................................................... 730
22.4.29 TIN Model Contour Layer ..................................................................... 731
22.4.30 User Map Layer .................................................................................... 732
22.4.31 Waypoints Layer ................................................................................... 733
22.4.32 Work Areas Layer ................................................................................. 733
22.4.33 XY Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 734
22.5 DXF Export Wizard .......................................................................................... 735
22.5.1 Output DXF File Page ............................................................................ 736
22.5.2 Select Data Page .................................................................................... 737
22.5.3 Plan Panel Page ..................................................................................... 738
22.5.4 Log Data Page ........................................................................................ 738
22.5.4.1 Log Data Settings Page ................................................................ 739
22.5.5 Grid Model Page ..................................................................................... 740
22.5.5.1 Grid Model Settings ...................................................................... 740
22.5.6 Contours Page ........................................................................................ 741
22.5.6.1 Contours Settings Page ................................................................ 741
22.5.7 Runlines Page ........................................................................................ 742
22.5.7.1 Runlines Settings Page ................................................................. 742
22.5.8 Waypoints Page ..................................................................................... 743
22.5.8.1 Waypoints Settings Page .............................................................. 743
22.5.9 Options and Preview Page ..................................................................... 744
23 Quick Profile Plot 745

23.1 introduction ....................................................................................................... 745
23.2 Quick Profile Plot Setup ................................................................................... 745
23.2.1 Filesets ................................................................................................... 746
23.2.2 DTM ........................................................................................................ 746
23.2.3 Design..................................................................................................... 747
23.2.4 Text ......................................................................................................... 747
23.3 Quick Profile Plot Options ................................................................................ 748
24 Batch Plot 751

24.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 751
24.2 Batch Plot Dialog .............................................................................................. 751
25 Import 755
25.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 755
25.2 Import Utility ..................................................................................................... 756
25.3 Single Beam XYZ Import.................................................................................. 757
25.3.1 ASCII File Options .................................................................................. 758
xviii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

25.3.2 Runline Options ...................................................................................... 759
25.3.3 File Selection .......................................................................................... 760
25.3.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards ........................................................................... 761
25.3.5 Parsing XYZ Data ................................................................................... 762
25.3.6 Parsing Date And Time ........................................................................... 764
25.3.7 Parsing Runline Data .............................................................................. 765
25.4 XTF Import ........................................................................................................ 765
25.5 S7K Import ........................................................................................................ 766
25.5.1 Offsets ..................................................................................................... 766
25.6 SZ Import .......................................................................................................... 768
25.7 Simrad EM3000 Import..................................................................................... 769
25.8 GeoSwath Import.............................................................................................. 770
25.9 BlueView Son Import ........................................................................................ 772
25.10 EdgeTech (.jsf) Import .................................................................................... 773
25.11 Marine Sonic Technology (.mst) Import ......................................................... 774
25.12 Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) Import ........................................................ 774
25.13 Klein (.sdf) Import ........................................................................................... 775
25.14 Pico MB Multibeam Data (.dat) Import ........................................................... 776
25.15 Save Import Configuration .............................................................................. 776
25.16 PDS Log Data File .......................................................................................... 777
26 Export 779
26.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 779
26.1.1 Export Configuration File ........................................................................ 779
26.1.2 Export Type ............................................................................................. 780
26.2 Export Window ................................................................................................. 781
26.2.1 Excel and Comma Separated ................................................................. 782
26.2.2 Simrad EM Datagram ............................................................................. 785
26.2.3 Multibeam Points .................................................................................... 785
26.2.4 XTF ......................................................................................................... 787
26.2.5 S7K ......................................................................................................... 789
26.2.6 SDS ......................................................................................................... 790
26.2.7 SZ ............................................................................................................ 791
26.2.8 Magnetometer DAT ................................................................................. 792
26.2.9 FAU ......................................................................................................... 793
26.2.10 GSF ....................................................................................................... 793
26.2.11 Backscatter points (ASCII) .................................................................... 793
26.2.12 UKOOA P1/90 ....................................................................................... 794
26.3 Exporting........................................................................................................... 795
27 Clock Synchronization 797

27.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 797
27.2 Clock Synchronization Settings ........................................................................ 798
27.3 Activate Clock Synchronization ........................................................................ 799
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xix

27.4 SetTime Service ............................................................................................... 800
28 Geo Calculator 801

28.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 801
28.2 Manual Coordinate Conversion ....................................................................... 801
28.2.1 Convergence .......................................................................................... 803
28.2.2 Point Scale Factor .................................................................................. 804
28.3 Advance Manual Conversion ........................................................................... 804
28.4 Compute 3 Shift Parameters ............................................................................ 805
28.5 File Coordinate Conversion ............................................................................. 806
29 Interfacing 809
29.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 809
29.2 Interfacing Page ............................................................................................... 809
29.2.1 XSE......................................................................................................... 810
29.2.2 Socket ..................................................................................................... 811
29.2.3 Serial....................................................................................................... 812
29.2.4 RTA......................................................................................................... 812
29.2.5 RGL ........................................................................................................ 812
29.2.6 RESON Remote IO ................................................................................ 813
29.2.7 R7KI ........................................................................................................ 813
29.2.8 R7K ......................................................................................................... 814
29.2.9 OPC ........................................................................................................ 814
29.2.10 NCC ...................................................................................................... 815
29.2.11 Edgetech .............................................................................................. 815
29.2.12 BlueView ............................................................................................... 816
29.2.13 File ........................................................................................................ 816
30 User Accounts 819

30.1 introduction ....................................................................................................... 819
30.2 User Account window....................................................................................... 819
30.3 Manage User Levels ........................................................................................ 820
30.4 New User Account ........................................................................................... 822
30.5 Changing User Account ................................................................................... 822
31 Options 823
31.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 823
31.2 Language ......................................................................................................... 823
31.3 Power Management ......................................................................................... 824
31.3.1 Power Management Check .................................................................... 825
31.4 Explorer View ................................................................................................... 826
31.4.1 Show Advanced tab................................................................................ 827
31.4.2 Show Tooltip ........................................................................................... 827
31.5 OpenGL Check ................................................................................................ 827
xx  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

31.6 General Settings ............................................................................................... 827
32 Copyright Information 829

32.1 Glew.................................................................................................................. 829
33 Amendment record sheet 833
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xxi

1 Introduction
1.1 Teledyne PDS

Teledyne PDS (PDS) is a software package for hydrographic survey and
dredging operations. It offers modules that cover the entire operation from
acquisition to an end product. The software runs on standard PC’s with
the Windows operating system. PDS is available in different versions
tailored to specific operations.
The purpose of all the measurements is real time reading of data from
one or more sensors, make computations with the data, show the results
of the computations and simultaneously log the data. To be able to control
those processes a number of Views has been developed that will show
the reading, computations, results and logging processes. A view can
show the data either graphically or alpha-numerically.
Data needs to be checked after the measurements. PDS gives several
options to remove anomalies and outliers, either manually or
automatically.
The final presentation of the cleaned data can be in the form of models,
tables, files, volumes, nautical charts and reports.
This manual is also available as a HTML Help file. Press F1 or select
Help > Help Topics to open the PDS help files.
More documents are available after a Teledyne PDS installation in the
Manuals folder to help you using Teledyne PDS or describing the specific
application. The Manuals folder is also accessible from the Teledyne PDS
Control Center, Help menu.
All Teledyne PDS related manuals are also available from the PDS
website. Download manuals.
Teledyne PDS instruction movies are available at the PDS YouTube
channel. Watch Teledyne PDS instruction movies.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Introduction  1

2 Installation
2.1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the minimum requirements, how to
install Teledyne PDS (PDS), C-Map charts and Tresco charts on a
computer and how to configure the computer for optimum use with PDS.
2.1.1 Requirements
The supported operating systems are for 32 bit and 64 bit:
 MS Windows Vista (and SP1, SP2)
 MS Windows 7 (and SP1)
 MS Windows 8 (and 8.1)
 MS Windows 10
Running Teledyne PDS in a virtual environment is known to work with:

MS - Virtual PC, VM-Ware and Parallels Desktop 9 for Mac.
However note that configuring these virtual environments for proper use
of Teledyne PDS can be cumbersome and is not by default supported by
Teledyne RESON.
Problem areas are for instance: USB shared Teledyne PDS dongles,
serial ports transport from host machine operating system to client
operating system, proper usage of display adapters (in 3D OpenGL
usage).
The system requirements for a desktop and laptop system are (check
also below notes):
Minimal requirements:
 CPU: modern Quad Core Processor
 Monitor: single monitor system with minimum 1024 x 768
resolution
 Graphic card with OPENGL support and 1 Gb of memory
 4 Gb internal memory
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Installation  3

 1 x 500 Gb Hard disk*
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
Preferred requirements:
 CPU: modern eight core processor
 Monitor: dual monitor system with both minimum 1024 x 768
resolution
 Dual Graphic card with OpenGL 3.30 support and min. 4 Gb of
memory
Having a 32 bit operating
system limits the amount of  8 Gb internal memory
usable internal memory to
 Raid 0 Hard disk system for data storage: 1 Tb minimum
4 Gb.
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
 The above system requirements may be subject to change. Check the

latest system requirements on the PDS website http://www.teledyne-
pds.com/support/pds-system-requirements/
* Note that Teledyne PDS can be very data intensive. This can have
severe impact on the hard disk usage. It is preferred that SSD type hard
 disks are used if you are a data intensive Teledyne PDS user. The data
processing performance of Teledyne PDS will increase enormously if you
will use the SSD type hard disks
The requirements for the PC are depending on the application. A single-
 beam application requires less computer power then a multibeam

application. Between these two applications a lot of other applications or
combinations are possible.
2.1.2 Memory Improvement

For some applications in the PDS the Large Address Aware is enabled.
As result of this the applications Editing, Backscatter Processing, Grid
Model Editor, LiteView and Plot can use more than 2 Gb of memory on 32
bit platforms when the operating system boot.ini file is adjusted.
 For Windows 7 platforms the following line has to be executed in
the command prompt with the proper user rights to increase the
applications maximum memory to 3072 Mb:
bcdedit /set IncreaseUserVa 3072
See also http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/windows/hardware/ff542202(v=vs.85).aspx
 For Windows XP platforms the boot.ini has to be adjusted as
follows:
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS=
"Microsoft Windows XP Professional 3GB" /3GB /fastdetect
See also http://support.microsoft.com/kb/289022
The crucial part is to add the /3GB option. It might be that your MS
Windows boot.ini file looks a bit different.
4  Installation Teledyne PDS - User Manual

 Do this only once! It will be remembered by Windows the next time the
system is started.
When these steps are not performed the application can only use the
default maximum memory. So it is not necessary to apply these changes
but when done you get more memory for the applications.
The modification is only needed for 32 bit Windows operating systems.
 64 Bit Windows operating systems don’t need to be modified. They

already are able to give the applications memory allocation bigger than 2
Gb.
2.2 Install PDS

The Teledyne PDS software is downloaded from the Teledyne PDS
website (http://www.teledyne-pds.com/product-category/downloads/)
Download the PDS x64 version for Windows 64 bit computers.
Download the PDS x86 version for Windows 32 bit computers or
computers using the Windows XP operating system.
Check the PDS system requirements (http://www.teledyne-
pds.com/support/pds-system-requirements/).
2.2.1 Start PDS Installation

a. Select in Windows Explorer the file ‘setup.exe’ to start the installation
of PDS. The welcome page of the PDS InstallShield Wizard will
appear. Click on to continue.
Figure 2-1 Welcome page of the PDS InstallShield Wizard

b. Before the actual installation will start the user has to select the type of
setup.
Figure 2-2 Type of setup in the PDS InstallShield Wizard
 Client Control Center. A stripped Control Center made for Boraciet.

See for detailed information the Boraciet manual, ‘Boraciet.pdf’.
 Full. The full version of PDS will be installed.
 Remote Presentation via Cable. For an installation on computers
that are connected through a network cable with the main PDS
computer (see page 16).
 Remote Presentation via WiFi.For an installation on computers that
are connected through a WiFi network with the main PDS computer
(see page 16).
After the selection of the setup type click on to continue.
c. The next page asks for a destination to install the program. The default
directory is ‘C:\Program Files\Teledyne\PDS Vx.x.x.x’, where x.x.x.x is
the version number. With the option any directory name can
be selected. Click on to continue.
d. A window will pop up in which the ACL installer will make the PDS
Project folder accessible for each user.
ACL also makes for MS Windows 7 the folder ‘C:\Program
Data\TELEDYNE\PDS’ and for MS Windows XP the folder
‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\TELEDYNE\PDS’ accessible.
e. If already an older PDS version is/was installed with not the latest C-
Map software, then an Update C-Map SDK dialog will appear.
 C-map is not supported for the PDS 64 bit versions. Refer to the
technical bulletin Teledyne PDS 64 bit 3rd party feature incompatibility.

Figure 2-3 Update C-Map SDK software
From this new PDS version onwards PDS will only run with the new
version of the C-Map software. Click on to start with the
installation of the new C-Map software. If the user clicks on no
C-Map software will be installed and PDS will not run with C-Map
anymore. Only when the user install later on the new C-Map software
PDS will run again with C-Map.
See the chapter ‘Installing and Using C-Map’ on page 18 for a detailed
explanation of the C-Map installation.
f. Click on in the next page of the install wizard to start the PDS
installation. Click on to finish the installation. Installing PDS
will place the PDS and the Dongle software on the hard disk of the
computer.
g. Click on on the desktop to start PDS.
2.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS
Figure 2-4 Repair or Remove PDS in the PDS InstallShield Wizard
After PDS is installed and the PDS InstallShield Wizard is started again, a
faulty installation of PDS can be repaired or the installed PDS version can
be removed from the system.

2.2.3 Auto start PDS
When PDS is installed from a command line user interface (E.g. Windows
‘cmd’) with the command ‘setup AutoStart’, PDS will be installed and
added to the Windows Startup folder. When the computer is started PDS
will start automatically and with a valid time synchronization also the
Acquisition will start automatically.
Figure 2-5 Autostart
Alternatively with the command “Master.exe” –A’ PDS will start as also
the Acquisition if a valid time synchronization is available.
Figure 2-6 Start the Acquisition automatically from the Master.
2.2.4 File Structure

After the installation is finished, in several folders on the hard disk PDS
files are created.
The PDS program is placed in the folder ‘C:\Program Files\TELEDYNE’
with the following folders:
Figure 2-7 File structure of PDS
PDS V.x.x.x.x
Where x.x.x.x is the installed version number. This folder contains the
programs and supporting files to run PDS.
General
Contains device drivers and more supporting files.
GeoidModels
Contains the files with the geoid models (see page 95) and X, Y
and Z post corrections (see page 95) which are used in some
coordinate systems of the predefined database.

Northarrows
Contains DXF files which are used for the North Arrow in Plot (see
page 701).
Obsolete
Contains device drivers which are replaced by more general or
improved drivers in the equipment list. If these obsolete drivers are
already selected in a project then they can still be used in that
project. The obsolete drivers cannot be selected anymore in the
equipment list and the replaced drivers have to be used (see the
release notes for an updated list of the obsolete drivers).
ReportDefinitions
Contains the definitions for all the different types of reports PDS
can generate.
Symbols
Contains the symbols which are used in the User Maps (see page
440).
HTML Help
Contains the online HTML Help files which can be activated with the
F1 key or with Help > Help Topics in the menu bar.
localizations
Contains the translations of PDS. At the moment next to the English
version a Dutch, an Italian, a German, a French, a Russian and a
Chinese version is available. For more information see the chapter
‘Options – Language’ on page 823.
manuals
Contains next to this manual several other manuals in PDF format.
Release Notes
Contains the release notes of this PDS version.
System Requirements
Contains the system requirement for PDS.
Team Viewer
Contains the RESON Support file to start Team Viewer setup specific
for RESON users. With Team Viewer the RESON support team can
then take over the system to assist the user.
During the installation a project folder called ‘PDS Projects’ is created. For
MS Windows XP this folder is located in ‘C:\Documents and Settings\All
 Users\Shared Documents’ and for MS Windows Vista and MS Windows 7

in ‘C:\Users\Public\Public Documents’. If the user wants a different
location for the project folder, he can create his own folder before PDS is
started.
 In the project folder a general folder called ‘Projects Common Files’ is

created. Common vessel settings will be stored in this folder.
For MS Windows XP the setting files of PDS are placed in ‘C:\ Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\RESON\PDS’ and for MS
 Windows Vista and MS Windows 7 in ‘C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS’.

These files contain information that can be used over different projects.
Also when a new PDS version is installed these files will not be
overwritten, so the old settings can be used in the new PDS version.

2.3 Adapting Hardware
Sometimes it is necessary to make hardware changes in the computer to
run PDS.
 Install a network card (see below).
 Install one or more serial extenders (see page 10).
 Optionally, connect multiple monitors (see page 12).
 Place the dongle on a parallel port or USB port (optional) (see page
12).
2.3.1 Network Card

PDS uses network protocols to transfer data internally between the
various sections. In case the computer has a network installed and
configured, no further adjustments are required.
However is the computer a standalone machine then the installation of a
network card and adding TCP/IP protocols is required. Configuring
TCP/IP is necessary in case sensors use network interfaces.
2.3.2 Serial Extender Cards

Most of the supported sensors use serial connections to transfer data.
Modern computers have one or two serial ports only. To have the
possibility to use more sensors the installation of a serial extender is
necessary. In principle, any card supported by the operating system is
acceptable; however Teledyne RESON B.V. prefers to use PCI cards of
the brand Moxa. The port numbers (COM n:) that Windows assigns to the
ports are also valid for PDS.
Three types of serial extenders are available.
1. USB to serial converters.
2. PCI cards. Various brands are available, usually with 4 or 8 serial
ports.
3. PCMCIA cards for laptop/notebook computers.
The use of extender cards requires special drivers.
2.3.2.1 USB to serial converters

These converters can only be used for non-time-critical applications. The
ports are multiplexed/demultiplexed and therefore by nature rather
unstable in timing. It is acceptable to use these converters for
measurements that do not require a strict time control. Use the drivers
supplied by the manufacturer that suit the operating system.
2.3.2.2 Other cards

For the other cards use the drivers supplied by the manufacturer of the
card. If in Windows XP the Moxa card C168H/PCI has to be installed, use
the drivers that are available on the distribution CD-Rom in the directory
‘Moxa’.
Select the option Add Hardware in the ‘Control Panel’ of Windows XP and
select manually a ‘Multi-port serial adapter’.

After the driver is installed for each port, the receive buffers must be set to
the fastest timing:
a. Select in the ‘Control Panel’ the option System and the System
Properties window will be opened. Select in this window the tab
Hardware, click on to open the Device Manager
window and look for the ‘Multi-port serial adapters’.
Figure 2-8 Device Manager window with the Moxa extender card
b. Double click on the card to get the card properties.

c. Select in the tab Port Configuration one of the ports and click on
.
Figure 2-9 Port settings for a COM port
d. Set the Rx FIFO Trigger to 1. Check the option Set the change to all
the ports and click on .
This sets the timing for all ports to optimal, giving the shortest possible
delays.

2.3.3 Monitors
This is not a specific PDS feature. All Windows versions support multiple
It is recommended to monitors. This can be achieved by a dedicated graphics card with more
install the drivers which are
outputs or with additional adapter cards in the computer. When multiple
supplied with the graphic
card monitors are installed on the PC, PDS can use them. It is required that
the graphics card has full support for Open GL.
2.4 PDS Dongle

PDS is protected with a dongle or a key. The dongle software is loaded
during the installation of the PDS software. A dongle is supplied with each
PDS license and contains the purchased options.
Teledyne PDS supports ‘USB’ dongles and Soft Dongles. The Soft
Dongle is only used:
1. For Teledyne PDS demonstration or trial purposes.
2. Internal on workstations.
3. As emergency fix in occasion the hardware dongle is defective and
must be replaced to continue work.
The Soft Dongle is a unique code and works only on the computer from
where the Soft Dongle is requested. See the technical note – Soft Dongle
for more information.
When an USB key is used, Windows will detect the key and extra
software to use the USB key on that USB port has to be installed.
Figure 2-10 Welcome page of the Found New Hardware Wizard
Select in window Found New Hardware Wizard dialog the option Yes, this
time only and click on to continue with the wizard.

Figure 2-11 Install page of the Found New Hardware Wizard
Select the option Install the software automatically (Recommended) and

click on to start the installation for the USB port. Click after the
installation on to finish the wizard. If the USB key is placed on a
different USB port then the extra software for the dongle has to be
installed again.
During startup, PDS looks for the dongle or key on all parallel or USB
ports until it is found. Thereafter that port is checked at intervals. Is the
dongle or key not present at startup or removed during working, then PDS
falls into a simulation mode. This means logging of data and saving or
printing is not possible.
2.4.1 Update of PDS Dongle

Each PDS dongle is related to a maintenance contract. When this
maintenance contract ends an update of the dongle is necessary. If the
dongle is not updated it is not possible to use newer PDS versions.
To update the dongle a patch has to be loaded with the latest information
for the dongle. This patch can be available with the latest PDS release or
is sent to the user as a separate file. The update procedure is for both
patches identical.

Select in the Control Center the menu option Help > About Control Center
to open the About Control Center window.
Figure 2-12 The About Control Center window where the PDS dongle can be
updated
At the bottom of this window the dongle information is available. Click on

to start the update of the dongle. An information window will
be opened where the dongle settings are displayed.
Figure 2-13 Dongle Update information window
Click on to start the file selection for the dongle update.

Figure 2-14 The All Dongles.dk4 file
When the dongle update is available with the latest PDS installation select
the ‘All Dongles.dk4’ file. This file contains the dates for all PDS released
dongles as maintained by Teledyne RESON.
Figure 2-15 The separate patch for the dongle update
When the user has received a separate patch for his dongle then browse
to the correct folder and select the dk4 file as received from Teledyne
RESON.
Click on to start the update of the dongle. When the update is
not successful contact your local agent or Teledyne RESON B.V. and
inform them on the internal ID and the dongle s/n.

2.5 Installing a Remote Presentation
A remote presentation can be run on any computer provided it is
connected to the main PDS computer over a network.
For the installation of a remote presentation the same procedure as for
the installation of PDS (see page 5) has to be followed. Select in the page
where the type of setup has to be selected the option Remote
Presentation via Cable or Remote Presentation via WiFi (see Figure 2-2
on page 6).
When the option via Cable is selected the installation copies some files to
the PDS folder, makes some system changes and a remote presentation
icon ( ) will be placed on the desktop. These changes will ensure that
the remote presentation program runs at startup.
When the option via WiFi is selected the installation installs a full PDS
and a remote presentation icon will be placed on the desktop.
 The Remote Presentation should have the same version number as the
PDS version on the main computer!!
If a new driver is added to PDS then when as remote presentation via

 WiFi is used this new driver has to be added to the PDS and to the
remote presentation.
If PDS is already installed on the remote computer then starts up the file
‘RemotePresentation.exe’ from the PDS folder.
 1. On the main PDS computer the PDS program folder in the directory
‘C:\Program Files\TELEDYNE’ and the project folder have to be
shared with the remote computer. Also the folder PDS in the directory
 ‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\TELEDYNE’

(MS Windows XP) or ‘C:\Program Data\TELEDYNE’ (MS Windows 7)
has to be shared with the remote computer.
If it is not possible to share one of the folders try to share the folder
one or two levels higher
When a folder does not appear in Windows Explorer it possibly is a
hidden folder. By the Windows Explorer menu Tools>Folder Options it
is possible to show the hidden folders.

Figure 2-16 Show Hidden files
2. If both computers are in a network and are only accessible with a user
name and a password, then the authorization to read data on the PDS
computer has to be set. Use Windows Explorer on the remote
computer to logon to the data on the PDS computer.
 If this is not done an error message (error 0) will appear when the
remote presentation is started.
 When using MS Windows 10. Make sure the windows 10 network is a

private network and not a public network.
3. On the main PDS computer the Control Center should be running

before the remote presentation can be started. Select from the list the
main PDS computer when the remote presentation is started for the
first time. The remote presentation program tries to find the Control
Center and when successful, minimizes itself into the right side of the
taskbar with a green ‘connect’ icon . Double click on the icon will
open the Remote Presentation window.

Figure 2-17 Remote Presentation window with PDS-Develop-5 as the main
computer
As long as the Control Center on the main PDS computer is not

running, the connection icon on the remote computer is orange or
yellow. As soon as the Control Center is started on the main PDS
computer, this icon turns to green. The Connections window in the
Control Center will indicate a connection with the remote computer.
Figure 2-18 Connections window with a connection to the remote PC

(RESON)
2.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation

Before the remote presentation can be running, a presentation has to be
added to the layouts. There are two methods to add a presentation.
1. Open the vessel configuration with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar in the Control Center. Add a
presentation to the layout page of the vessel configuration (see page
82).
2. Add a presentation in the Connections window of the main PDS
computer. This is only possible when the Acquisition is running. Open
in the Connections window with a right click the context menu, and
select the option Add Presentation… and the Layout dialog will be
opened to select the remote computer and layout (see page 82).
If a presentation is added to the layouts on the main PDS computer and
the connect icon is green, then when the Acquisition is started
automatically the Presentation will be opened on the remote computer.
2.6 Installing and Using C-Map


The usage of C-map charts in Teledyne PDS is intended as a survey
preparation, an area overview and an addition to other sea charts. It
cannot replace official sea charts or Electronic Navigation Charts.
  C-map is supported for all the PDS 32 bit versions and the PDS
64 bit versions (higher as V4.1.4.1).
 The old type C-Map dongle eToken PRO (32k) does not work on
64 bit operating systems.
 The new type C-Map dongle eToken PRO 72k (JAVA) does work
on both 32 bit and 64 bit operating systems.
 Do NOT use the Firefox web browser. The C-Map de eToken is
installed as a security device and possibly disabled.
 Do not install the Windows driver when Windows detect the
eToken and wants to install it.
 A C-Map license from C-Map is necessary. Teledyne RESON
B.V will assist where required.
C-Map is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)

that optionally can be used with PDS. When C-Map is installed it can be
used as a layer in different views of PDS.
To get C-Map in your system, the following steps have to be taken:
1. Buy C-Map from Teledyne RESON B.V or directly from C-Map.
A DVD with C-Map charts in the CM-93 format and an eToken dongle
is supplied.
2. Install the eToken dongle driver and C-Map (see page 19).
3. Install the C-Map charts on your computer.
4. Get a license from the C-Map distributor (see page 26).
The procedure is described below.
2.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map

The driver for the eToken dongle has to be installed before the C-Map
 software installation is started. When the eToken dongle is installed after

the C-Map installation C-Map does not work!!
If the user has an existing C-Map license which is not expired yet, it is not
 necessary to install the driver for the eToken.

a. Open the ‘CMap’ folder from the PDS distribution.
Figure 2-19 PDS distribution CMap folder
b. Start the file ‘Setup.exe’.
Figure 2-20 Setup.exe
c. The Setup dialog opens.
Figure 2-21 Setup dialog
Insert the eToken dongle and click on to continue with the

installation of the eToken driver.

It is very important not to install the driver when Windows detects the
eToken driver and wants to install it.

d. The next dialog opened is the C-Map Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 2-22 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken
dongle and the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the eToken dongle and the

C-Map software. Click on to stop the installation.
e. A dialog will be opened where the user has to select which dongle is
used. With a new dongle, eToken PRO 72k (JAVA), it is possible that
this dialog does not appear, the installation detect then automatically
the right dongle. The type of the dongle can be checked on the dongle
itself.
Figure 2-23 eToken dongle selection
The eToken PRO (32k) does Select when the old eToken dongle is used, select
not work on MS Windows 7 when the new dongle is used.
64bits!!!!!
f. It is possible that after the installation of the eToken driver or after
removing an old eToken driver or C-Map version, the installation ask to
 restart the computer. Restart always the computer and the installation
dialog will start again and answer the questions from the beginning to
continue with the installation. This restart request can appears 1, 2 or
 3 times, depends on the Windows settings on the computer and what
have to be installed. Repeat step a-e if the installation does not start
automatically after restarting the computer.

g. The welcome page for the C-Map software will appear.
Figure 2-24 Welcome page of the C-Map Professional SDK Runtime Setup
wizard
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map Professional

SDK software.
h. When old C-Map software with a license was active before the new
software is installed then the next dialog will ask what to do with the
license.
Figure 2-25 C-Map user setup dialog
Click on to keep the active license and no new license has

to be activated.
Click on when a new license has to be activated, the old

one will be removed.
 When the license is for an old eToken dongle and now a new eToken
dongle is used then click always on .The new eToken dongle
does not work with the license for the old eToken dongle.
The next dialog will be opened when is clicked. Click

when the license have to be removed.

Figure 2-26 Confirmation to remove licenses
i. The next page will be the Installation Folder page.
Figure 2-27 Installation folder for the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map software.

j. Ignore the installation of the features.
Figure 2-28 Features

Click on to continue the installation.
k. In the next page of the wizard the user has to confirm the start of the
installation.
Figure 2-29 Confirm the installation of the C-Map software
Click on to confirm the start of the installation.

l. The C-Map software is installed indicated by a progress bar.
m. In the next dialog the screen diagonal has to be entered.
Figure 2-30 Calibrate the screen diagonal
The diagonal of the main computer screen used for PDS has to be set.
This will be used to find the best display resolution. Click on
when the diagonal is not known.
Click on after the right screen diagonal is entered.

n. The last page of the C-Map installation opens.
Figure 2-31 Last page of the C-Map installation wizard
Click on to close the installation wizard.

o. As confirmation of the installation the next dialog will show what is
installed.
Figure 2-32 eToken dongle driver and C-Map software is installed
When only the C-Map software has to be installed then this dialog will
show only the C-Map software.
Click on to close the complete installation.
2.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License

A chart database can also To be able to display a C-Map chart database in full precision, a license
be one or more imported from C-Map is necessary and Teledyne RESON B.V. will assist where
S-57 charts. The charts required.
should be in one folder, so
C-Map can see the folder A C-Map license is only valid for one eToken dongle. C-Map can be
as a database. installed on more computers but only the computer with the eToken
dongle, for which the license is installed, will give a full precision of C-
Map.
By default the location for the C-Map software is ‘C:\Program Files\C-Map
Professional SDK Runtime’.
Figure 2-33 C-Map Chart Manager with the Databases page

 The users who are only using the S-57 converted charts in C-Map can
skip the items b – h and continue with item i on page 30.
a. Use ‘Windows Explorer’ to locate the file 'ChartManager.exe' in the

folder ‘System’ of the C-Map directory and double click on the file to
run the application.
It is also possible to open the C-Map Chart Manager from the PDS
Explorer Charts tab page. Right click on the Projects Common – C-
MAP branch and select ‘C-MAP chart Manager’.
Figure 2-34 Open C-MAP Chart Manager from PDS Explorer
C-MAP Chart Manager opens.
b. If the database Professional+ is not present in the list of registered

databases click on and browse to the (DVD) location
and click on to copy the database to the PC. When this is
finished a message appears that the database registration was
successful.
It is recommended to copy the database to the local disk of the
computer.

Figure 2-35 Database registration is successful
c. If the database is registered then it will be displayed in the list of

registered databases.
Figure 2-36 C-Map Chart Manager with the registered database
d. Select the database Professional+ and click on to set

the database as the default database for C-Map.
Figure 2-37 C-Map Chart Manager with the Professional+ database set as
default

It is also possible to set databases from the PDS Explorer – Charts C-
MAP Databases branch as the default database for C-MAP. Right click on
the database and select ‘set as default’.
Figure 2-38 Set database as default from PDS Explorer
e. Before C-Map can be used the license information has to be obtained

from C-Map. Open in the C-Map Chart Manager the System Info page.
Figure 2-39 System Info page of the C-Map Chart Manager
The eToken dongle number will be displayed as the System ID and

click on to export a user file with the information
about the dongle.
f. Send an E-mail to Teledyne RESON B.V. (Sales@reson.nl) or to C-
Map with the user file as attachment.
Make sure to include the following information in the e-mail:
- The full company name and e-mail return details.
- Reason (Purchase or Subscription).
g. Teledyne RESON B.V. will process the information and get the license
information from C-Map or C-Map will send the information directly.

h. The user will receive a return e-mail with an attachment called
‘password.usr’ with the following information.
Example for an eToken PRO (32k):
[Reson eT 30021]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for an eToken PRO 72k (JAVA) dongle:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for S-57 to C-Map conversion:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Software Modules.1
Expired=7.2011
CM933CMP=F695465EF659F83A
V3CATMGR=BFC33C0FB0825A52
i. On receipt of the email, open the C-Map Chart Manager application
once more and select the Licenses page.
Figure 2-40 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager
To use C-Map with the Select the right database at the top and choose one of the license
same eToken dongle on a actions.
different computer the
same license information Click on when the user wants to read the usr file with
has to be activated again. the license information. Select the file and click on in the
‘Select a license file’ dialog to read the license code(s) from the file.
For clients who are only using the converted S-57 files select as
 database ‘Software Modules’ and use always
this database does not have a Zone defined in the usr file.
because
Click on when the user wants to enter the license

code(s) manually. An ‘Add License Manually’ window will be opened.

Figure 2-41 Add License Manually window to add the license code(s)
Select the right zone with the right area and enter the license code as
given in the email or from the usr file. Click on to activate
the license for the selected zone. Repeat this for each zone and/or
area that needs a license.
j. After the licenses are activated, in the Licenses page of the C-Map
Chart Manager the selected zone(s) and area(s) are displayed with an
expiry date.
Figure 2-42 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager with a license for
a zone.
k. C-Map with the right database is now installed and can be used in the
views of PDS.

2.6.3 Updating C-Map Database
The C-Map Chart Manager For updating the C-Map database the C-Map Chart Manager has to be
can also be opened in the opened again.
PDS Charts- Projects
Common – C-map branch
(see page 257)..
Figure 2-43 C-Map Chart Manager
a. Place the new DVD with the database in the DVD drive and click on
.
b. When the copying is finished a message appears that the database is
updated.
Figure 2-44 Database is updated

c. In the C-Map Chart Manager the database is updated.
Figure 2-45 Professional+ database is updated
d. Also the license is updated for the new database.
Figure 2-46 License is updated for new database
2.6.4 Changing eToken Dongle

When a different eToken Dongle is used as originally installed a re-install
of C-Map from the PDS CD is required.
Each dongle needs a unique license, therefore the license associated to
the replacement eToken dongle must be used.
Follow the instruction for a new eToken installation as described in
section ‘Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map’ on page 19.

2.6.5 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS
The new C-Map software will also work with PDS versions before 3.3.0.0.
 But before it will work in one of these ‘old’ versions, the file ‘CMGBase.dll’
located in the ‘PDS Vx.x.x.x’ folder of the ‘old’ version has to be deleted.
In some dedicated plan views in PDS, C-Map can be viewed as a layer.
Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context menu to
get the Layers window.
Figure 2-47 Layers window with a C-Map layer
If there is no C-Map layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the C-Map layer. Automatically the
properties of the C-Map layer will be opened.
If the C-Map layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing C-Map layer.
Figure 2-48 C-Map Layer Properties

Symbolization
There are three options:
S52 is the international standard for drawing a chart, and describes the
way chart items are drawn. The difference between the traditional and
the simplified mode is the way chart colors are used.
C-Map has its own standard for charting and does not show some
navigational areas (such as danger area or anchor area).
Scale Level
Controls the detail of the C-Map chart in the view. When scale level is
set to Automatic, the scaling is controlled by the current zoom factor of
the view. Other options are fixed modes, from coarse to fine, which are
mentioned in the table below:
Chart Scale Chart
Scale Level Accuracy
From To (m)
Z – Background (small) 1:50,000,000 1:5,000,001 15,000.00
A – Background (medium) 1:5,000,000 1:500,001 1,500.00
B – Overview 1:1,500,000 1:500,001 450.00
C – General 1:500,000 1:150,001 150.00
D – Coastal 1:150,000 1:50,001 45.00
E – Approach 1:50,000 1:15,001 15.00
F – Harbor 1:15,000 1:5,001 4.50
G – Berthing 1:5,000 1:1,501 1.50
C-Map charts are digitized with a precision of 0.3 mm. This results in
chart accuracy on the display, which is given in the table above for the
largest scale of each scale level.
Display Detail
For the details of the C-Map chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the C-Map
chart.
Show Light Info
The light information can be switched on or off.
Show Generic Text
The names of ports and areas can be switched on or off.
Show Other Text
Additional text such as names of features can be switched on or off.
Anti Cluttering
Switch override suppression (C-Map's anti-cluttering engine) on or off.
Show Chart Boundaries
The red chart boundaries in the display can be switched on or off.
Use C-Map Filters
C-Map filters are not user definable. Contact RESON B.V. in case
special requirements for C-Map filters are needed. This function
enables or disables the filters.
C-Map Filter Name
At the moment three filters are available:
- No Buoys
- No Buoys and Beacons
- No Buoys, Beacons and Piles
These filters remove the filtered items from the chart.

2.7 Installing and Using Tresco

The usage of Tresco charts in Teledyne PDS is intended as a survey
 Tresco is not supported for the PDS 64 bit versions. Refer to the
technical bulletin Teledyne PDS 64 bit 3rd party feature incompatibility.
Tresco is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)

that optionally can be used with PDS. When Tresco is installed it can be
used as a layer in different views of PDS. The charts can be displayed as
background with the Tresco S-52 presentation library.
To get Tresco in your system, the following steps have to be taken.
1. Buy Tresco from Teledyne RESON B.V.
A DVD with Tresco charts and Navigis software is supplied. Also a
Sentinel dongle is needed to open Tresco charts in PDS.
2. Install the DVD; the Tresco charts, the Navigis software and the
Sentinel dongle driver will be installed.
3. Run the extra file ‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’ to get Tresco charts
working with PDS.
The procedure is detailed below.
2.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver

The Navigis software is normally used to display the Tresco charts. The
setup from the Navigis software now be used to display the Tresco charts
in PDS.
a. Place the Tresco DVD in the DVD drive and run the file ‘setup.exe’.
Figure 2-49 Select language for the installation
Select the language and click on to start the installation.

b. The welcome page for the Navigis software will appear.
Figure 2-50 Welcome page of the Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard
Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.

c. The next page will be the Select Destination Location page.
Figure 2-51 The installation folder for the Navigis software
Click on to continue with the installation.

d. On the next page some additional tasks can be selected which will be
performed during the installation.
Figure 2-52 Additional tasks
The option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ should be selected when the Tresco
charts are installed for the first time and no Sentinel driver is installed
yet.
The other three options are not needed for a proper installation of the
Navigis software.
Click on to continue.
e. The next page is to start the installation of the Navigis software.
Figure 2-53 Ready to install the software
Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software

and the additional tasks, click on to go back to check the
settings.
f. This will be next page of the installation wizard.

Figure 2-54 The installation of the software
When the installation is finished the following window will be displayed.
Figure 2-55 The Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard is finished
Click on to finish the installation.
 g. When the installation is finished the Sentinel dongle can be inserted

and the device driver for the dongle will be installed.
2.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe

At this stage the Tresco charts are not working in PDS. An extra setup file
has to be run to set all the settings so PDS has access to the Tresco
charts.
Select the folder ‘Tresco’ on the CD-Rom of PDS and start the file
‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’.

a. When the file is started the first page will be the welcome page of the
wizard.
Figure 2-56 Welcome page of the Tresco Kernel Setup Wizard
Click on to continue with the setup.

b. The next page is the Select Destination Location page for the kernel.
Figure 2-57 Installation folder of the kernel
 The selected folder should be identical with the folder that is selected
for the Navigis software in Figure 2-51 on page 37.
Click on to continue with the installation.

Figure 2-58 Folder exist
This will be displayed when the same folder is selected. Click on

to continue. This setup will overwrite some existing files in
the selected folder.
c. In the next page the Sentinel driver can be selected to install as
additional task.
Figure 2-59 Additional task
Don’t select the option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ because the driver is
already installed during the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
Click on to continue with the setup.

d. In the next page the installation of the kernel can be started.
Figure 2-60 Ready to install the kernel
Click on to start the installation of the kernel, click on

to go back to check the settings.
e. During the installation of the kernel a screen width has to be entered.
Figure 2-61 Screen width
The Tresco kernel needs to know the width of the screen to calculate
the scale to display the charts in the correct scale on the screen.
Click on after the right screen width is entered and the
installation will be finished. Click on to finish the installation of
the kernel.
When no detailed information on the Tresco chart is displayed it is
possible that the file TE.PMT, which has to be used in conjunction with
 the dongle, is not installed on the right location. Check if the file is present
on the DVD, if not contact RESON BV or Tresco about this problem. If the
file is present copy the file to the folder ‘C:\Navichart\S-57’.

2.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS
In some dedicated plan views in PDS, Tresco charts can be viewed as a
layer. Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 2-62 Layers window with a Tresco layer
If there is no Tresco layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the Tresco layer. Automatically the
properties of the Tresco layer will be opened.
If the Tresco layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing Tresco layer.
Figure 2-63 Tresco Layer Properties
Display Detail
For the details of the Tresco chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the Tresco
chart.

Show Geographic Names
The geographic names can be switched on or off.
Show Names For Position Reporting
The labels for the position reporting can be switched on or off.
Show Buoys and Beacons
The buoys and beacons can be switched on or off. The light for the
buoys and beacons can be switched on or off with the option ’Show
Lights’.
Show Lights
The light and the labels can be switched on or off.
Show Light Descriptions
The labels for the lights can be switched on or off.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Show Full Length Sector Lights
The full length for some of the sector lights can be switched on or
off. Most of the lights don’t have a full length option.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Text Resolution
The size of the text on the charts can be defined in dpi.
Symbol Resolution
The size of the symbols on the charts can be defined in dpi.
2.8 Installing and Using S-57 Charts

The usage of S-57 charts in Teledyne PDS is intended as a survey
IHO standard S-57 Electronic Navigation Charts (ENC) can be added in

the Plan View(s) and 3D View(s) as a background layer. The S-57 charts
as displayed in PDS have small limitations. The following limitations
apply:
 Only support for Base, Standard and Other IMO display
categories;
 Depth sounding values displayed in the PDS Project units and
format instead of the S-52 standard format;
 Default symbols, lines and area coloring as defined in the S-52
pslb03_3.dai file. Military and inland water marks are not
available;
 Plain boundaries indication only. Symbolized boundaries are not
available;
 No conditional symbols indication;
 No simplified symbol indication. Only paper chart symbols;
 No light sector symbols;
 No extended light sector symbols;
 No Top Mark(s) symbols;

 Two or four depth depth coloring. With two colors and using a
large scale chart as for example an overview chart the coloring
in areas less than a defined shallow depth is blue and the rest
white. With 4 colors, a shallow depth, a safety depth and a deep
depth must be defined. There are different colors for areas less
than "Shallow Depth", areas between a "Shallow Depth" and
"Safety Depth", areas between "Safety Depth" and "Deep
Depth" and finally for areas deeper than "Deep Depth".
2.8.1 Add S-57 charts in PDS

Many European countries publish free S-57 ENC charts for their inland
waterways. For US waters all S-57 charts are available as free downloads
at the NOAA OSC Website. ( http://www.nauticalcharts.noaa.gov ). The
East Asia Hydrographic Commission provides free offshore S57 vector
charts for the South China Sea area. ( http://scsenc.eahc.asia/main.php )
A S-57 ENC is delivered as an ‘ENC Exchange Set’, placed in a folder
‘ENC-ROOT’. An Exchange Set consists of :
 One or more data set file(s) and update(s)
 One Catalog files with information about all files in the exchange
set.
 Optionally the ENC Exchange Set may also contain text files
and/or image files.
For the Exchange set the following convention is used:
 Data Cells. (For example ‘1R5AM252.000’)
aabccccc.ddd With:
aa: Two letter IHO code of the Producer
b: ENC usage code – 1:Overview,
2: General,
3:Coastal,
4:Approach,
5:Harbour,
6:Berthing
ccccc: Cell code
ddd Data cell file extension
– 000 for all new ENC’s, new edition ENC’s or ENC
Reissues
- 001 for first ENC update (002 for 2nd, 003 for third etc.)
 Catalog files.
Always’CATALOG.031’.
The following table lists the steps to add a S-57 chart in PDS.

Step Action
1 The available Exchange set could be dragged and dropped into
the PDS Explorer’s, Charts page. When the exchange set is
zipped there is no need to unzip the folder as PDS will unzip it
automatically.
Only files compressed in the .Zip format are extracted

automatically. Other file formats must be extracted first and
then dragged into the chart tab.
 When the file is not zipped, then copy the ‘Exchange Set’
file in a folder and drag this folder to the Charts page.

Step Action
2 When the Exchange set has successfully been loaded into PDS
it is listed in the Charts – Project Common – S-57 folder.

2.8.2 Add the S-57 chart layer in a Plan or 3D
View
The PDS Views are made up of Layers. The next table lists the steps to
add S-57 ENC charts as a background layer in a Plan View. The same
procedure applies for 3D Views.
Step Action
1 Open the ‘Layer control’ of the plan view.
2 Click in the Layers dialog box ‘Add’ and select the ‘S-57 Chart
Layer’ followed by pressing ‘OK’.

Step Action
3 Select the folder with the S-57 charts.in the properties dialog
box.
Other properties of the S-57 charts are set in the properties

dialog as well. Refer to section ‘S-57 chart Layer Properties’ for
a description of the S-57 Chart Properties.
The S-57 chart is now added as a background layer in the Plan View.
Figure 2-64 Plan View with S-57 chart added

Or in a 3D View.
Figure 2-65 S-57 Chart Layer in 3D View
2.8.3 S-57 Chart Layer Properties

A certain area is possibly covered by different scaled charts. For example
an Overview chart, an Approach chart, a Harbor chart etc. Depending of
the zoom factor of the View a certain Chart is used as the background
and certain symbols are displayed. This feature as also showing certain
objects as text, depth soundings, symbols etc. can be set by the Chart
Layer properties.
Properties of the S-57 Chart Layer are accessible by the Plan or 3D View
Layer control or Properties.

Figure 2-66 S-57 Chart Layer Properties

The next table lists the properties of the S-57 Chart Layer.
Function Description
S-57 ENC Selected S-57 Chart database.
Folder Name S-57 Databases available in the project are listed and selectable.
Refer to section ‘Adding S-57 Charts in PDS’ for the procedure to
add new charts in PDS.
Chart Range With the ‘Chart Range’ property the range from of the View’s center
(Km) to display charts is defined. When a chart falls (for a part) within this
range it is displayed. With this setting it is possible to display more
or less charts.
See the example below for the functionality.
 Selection of a Small chart range: Some (available) charts

are not displayed as they fall out the defined Chart range.
 Large Chart Range: More (available) charts displayed as

they now fall into the defined chart range.

IMO display
category
The IMO specified display categories as available in PDS are:
-Base. The IMO specifies the Base category as a list of basic

objects which the IMO consider are required at all times, in all
geographic areas and under all circumstances’.
-Standard. Everything in ‘Base’ and aids to navigation, channel
limits, restricted navigation zones etc.
-Other. Contains every object in the Electronic Navigation Chart
which is not classed as "Standard Display.
Depending of the chosen category more or less information is

displayed in the Chart. Refer for example to the IHO site for more
details about IMO display categories.(www.iho.int).
See the following example of a chart with different categories

selected.
Base: Standard: Other:

Scale level
The scale level determines the information displayed in relation with

the zoom level . A certain area is possibly covered by different
charts with a different scale level. It is possible to fix the S-57 layer
to a certain chart. This Chart must be available otherwise nothing is
showed as this chart is not available. It is also possible to switch off
the scale level resulting in the available chart displayed without
scaling to a finer available chart when zoomed in.
The scale level is selectable as:
-OFF; Switch off level scaling. Available chart will be displayed but
when zoom in or out in the view, there will not be switched to a other
available chart.
-Automatic; Scaling is controlled by the current zoom factor of the

view. This means when zoomed in, a chart with a finer defined scale
level will be displayed. Or when zoomed out a chart with a coarser
scale level will be displayed.
-Overview;
Only Overview charts displayed with scaling ranging from
1;1500000 or smaller
-General;
Only General charts displayed with scaling ranging from 1:600000 –
1:1500000
-Coastal;
Only Coastal charts displayed with scales ranging from 1:150000 –
1:600000
-Approach;
Only Approach charts displayed with scales ranging from 1:50000 –
1:150000
-Harbour;
Only Harbour charts displayed with scales ranging from 1:5000 –
1:50000
-Berthing;
Only Berthing charts displayed with a scale ranging larger than
1:5000

Object Scale When the object scale filter is enabled it will filter objects (like text)
Filter at a certain zoom factor to avoid cluttering of objects.
Disabled. Enabled:
Show Chart When disabled, the Chart Extents are not displayed.
Extents
Disabled: Enabled:
Show Buoys When disabled, the Buoys and Beacons are not displayed.
and Beacons
Disabled: Enabled
Show Lights When disabled, the Lights are not displayed.
Disabled: Enabled:

Show Text When disabled, information is not displayed. This does not apply for
Depth sounding information and object information.
Disabled: Enabled.
Show Depth When disabled, the depth soundings are not displayed.
Soundings Disabled: Enabled:
Show Depth When disabled, the depth coloring is not displayed.

Coloring
Disabled: Enabled:
When depth coloring is used the ‘Shallow water depth’, the Safety
Depth’ and the Deep water depth should be set.
For large scale charts as for example an overview chart the coloring
in areas less than a defined shallow depth is blue and the rest white
For fine scaled charts as for example berthing charts four color
coloring is used:
Areas with water depth shallower as the defined ‘shallow water

depth’ will color dark blue.
Areas with water deeper as the defined ‘Shallow Depth’ but

shallower as the defined ‘safety depth’ will color paler blue.
Areas with water deeper than the specifies ‘Safety Depth’ but less
than the defined ‘Deep water Depth’ will color light gray.
Areas with water deeper than the specified ‘Deep Water Depth’ is
displayed in white.

Symbol The resolution of the symbol could be set in dots per inch (dpi).
resolution
(120dpi) When changed the resolution of the object is changed which result
in a more or less clearer and detailed symbol.
60dpi: 120dpi
Diagonal The diagonal size (inch) of the screen must be set correctly. A
Screen Size wrong entered diagonal size will degrade the scaling of the objects.
(in)
Font Name Font, Font Size, Font Italic Style and Font Bold of all the displayed
text (including the depth soundings) are set here.
2.8.4 Considerations using S-57 Charts in PDS

This section will describe some considerations the user should take in
account when using the S-57 Chart Layer in PDS.
 Auto Scale level.
When the scale level property is set to ‘Auto’ the user zoom level
determines the chart to be displayed. This means when zoomed
out a lot and there is for example no overview chart available;
nothing will be displayed.
However when zoomed in, the scale will be changed to a chart
with a finer scaling when such a fine scaled chart is available in
the S-57 Exchange set. (As copied in the PDS Control Center
Chart tab). Otherwise the chart with the finest scaling will be
displayed. When for example a harbor chart is displayed and the
customer zooms in only the berthing chart will be displayed when
available, otherwise the scaling remains at the harbor chart level.
 When instead of Scale level ‘Auto’; the Overview, General,
Coastal, Approach, Harbour or Berthing scale level is selected,
and the user zooms in, the scale will be fixed on this selected
scale level chart. Thus the scale will not be switching to a finer
scaled level chart in this case. (E.g. from overview to harbor
scale.) Also only a chart will be displayed when this selected
scale chart is available in the used S-57 database.
 Diagonal Screen Size
For correct objects scaling it is important to set this value
correctly in the properties. Refer to the specifications of the used
screen.
 Building the Chart Layer in the View will costs CPU time.
Performance is approved by disabling for example features as
depth soundings displayed or text displayed and to reduce the
Chart Range.

 S-57 symbols not defined in the PDS S-57 Chart Layer are
indicated with a question mark.
Figure 2-67 Question mark

3 Using Teledyne PDS
3.1 Introduction
Teledyne PDS (PDS) is designed with a Windows ‘Look and Feel’. On top
of that PDS has some additional features.
Double click on ‘PDS Control Center’ (older PDS versions ) on the

desktop to open the Control Center of PDS. From the Control Center
every module of PDS can be started. See for a detailed explanation of the
Control Center the chapter ‘Control Center’ on page 191.
Before the Control Center of PDS is started PDS will do a check on the
 Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is Windows XP

SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A message will
appear on the screen.
With the options Tools > Customize… in the menu bar of the Control
Center the layout of the toolbar can be changed and shortcut keys can be
defined for several macros (see page 316).
Each module has its own menu bar, one or more toolbars and a status
bar. In each module it is possible to select a number of windows that
show the processes of the module. In PDS these windows are called
views.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Using Teledyne PDS  59

3.2 Docking
Figure 3-1 Docking
A fixed location for a view is often desirable. A possibility to lock views on

a fixed location in a window is called ‘docking’.
A dedicated button is located on the title bar of each view. Clicking on
this button fixes the view in one of the docking areas. Clicking on the
button once more undocks the view again.
Another way to dock a view is giving a right click on the title bar of the
view and a context menu will appear with a number of choices.
Figure 3-2 Docking context menu
Docked
The view is fixed in one of the dock areas (see below).
Floating
The view is docked but movable. Floating views can be located
outside the window.
60  Using Teledyne PDS Teledyne PDS - User Manual

MDI Child
‘Multiple Document Interface’ child. The view behaves like any other
view in a Windows application.
Docked to
When pressed, the choice is given to dock a view to any of the four
dock areas (see below).
MDI Child as
Minimized, Maximized or Restored.
Dragging with the Ctrl-key All the type of views can be moved and resized by dragging the borders.
makes a docked view One click on the title bar brings a floating view back to the previous dock
floating. location.
3.2.1 Dock Areas
Figure 3-3 Dock areas
As shown above, the client area has four dock areas: top, bottom, left and
right. Each dock area can have multiple views.
3.3 Context Menus

Right click in a view or in a specific view area opens a context menu.
Nearly every view in PDS has one. The context menus can be used to
add displays (views), to start a command or to zoom in/out in the view.
There are two types of context menus available in PDS, one for the
modules and one for the views. The context menu for the modules is to
add, (de)select or remove views in that module.

Figure 3-4 Context menu in the Acquisition
With the option Displays the Displays window can be opened in which
views can be added, modified or removed from the module. The option
Add Display is a quick method to add a new view to the module. Check
one of the existing views and this view will appear in the module. When a
view is unchecked this view is still available for the module but will not be
displayed in the module.
The context for the views contains commands for the view. Most of these
commands are also available through the toolbar of the view.
Figure 3-5 Context menu of a Plan View
3.4 Navigation in a 3D View

In the Acquisition, Editing and Grid Model Editor several types of 3D
Views can be opened. Because a 3D View has three dimensions, which

are shown on a two-dimensional screen, a special way to navigate in the
view is created.
3.4.1 Rotate the Data

In some editors, the left The center of the rotation is always the center of the view.
mouse button can be used
for other options, and then With the left mouse button or the mouse wheel pressed and dragging the
only the mouse wheel is mouse around will rotate the data in the view.
left to rotate the view.  Rotate the data clockwise.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the Shift + left arrow keys.
 Rotate the data counter-clockwise.

Drag the mouse to the right or use the Shift + right arrow keys.
 Rotate the bottom of the screen (near the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the Shift + up arrow
keys.
 Rotate the top of the screen (far from the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the Shift + down
arrow keys.
3.4.2 Shift the Data

With the Shift key + left mouse button or Shift key + mouse wheel pressed
and dragging the mouse will shift (pan) the data only in a horizontal
direction.
 Shift the data to the left.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the left arrow key.
 Shift the data to the right.
Drag the mouse to the right or use the right arrow key.
 Shift the data away from the user.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the up arrow key.
 Shift the data towards the user.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the down arrow
key.
 Shift the data down.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Shift + ‘numerical –’ keys.
 Shift the data up.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Shift + ‘numerical +’ keys.
3.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data

With the mouse wheel, the user can zoom in or out in the data.
 Zoom out.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the ‘numerical –’ key.
 Zoom in.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the ‘numerical +’ key.

3.4.4 Scale the Data
With the Ctrl key + mouse wheel will modify the scale factor of the Z-axis
of the data.
If the scale factor > 1, the  Increase the scale factor.
color of the vertical axis of Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical +’ keys.
the grid will change to red.
 Decrease the scale factor.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical –‘ keys with a
minimum scale factor of one.
3.4.5 Center the Data

Double click with the left mouse button or the mouse wheel on a location
with data and that location will move to the center of the view. It will not
work on the sea level.

4 Starting Teledyne PDS
4.1 Introduction
The Control Center should From the Control Center every module of Teledyne PDS (PDS) can be
always be running while started. But before one of the modules is started a project, an application
PDS is used. type and a configuration have to be created or selected. The Control
Center does not start when no project is available.
4.1.1 Project
A project can be an area to be surveyed, a harbor to be made, a river that
has to be dredged to a navigable depth, etc. It may require the
employment of one or more vessels (survey vessels, dredgers, work
ships, excavators) and each vessel can have a special task in the project.
A project has the information on the method of measuring and all the
information necessary to do the measurements.
PDS stores all the details of a project in one folder.
Refer to ‘Selecting a project’ on page 290 how to select another project.
Refer to ‘New project Wizard’ on page 69 to create a new project.
Refer to ‘Configuration’ on page 66 how to make changes to the
configuration of a project.
 Always store the PDS projects in a folder (e.g. Projects/..). Do not save
the projects on the root.
4.1.2 Application Type

In a project, one or more tasks can be carried out. A task can be a vessel
surveying the seafloor, a dredger dredging a river mouth, etc. Such a task
is called an application type in PDS.
The application type determines how PDS behaves.
The application is set during the New Project wizard (see page 69)
The application type is indicated in the Configuration dialog. (Press

from the Control Center toolbar to open the Configuration.)
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Starting Teledyne PDS  65

Figure 4-1 Application type
Do not change the application type of an existing configuration.
4.1.3 Configuration
A Configuration describes the way an application type is carried out. It
contains the used vessel(s), the layout used for the Acquisition and (if
present) Presentation(s), how events are used and alarms are managed.
Multiple configurations are possible for all application types.
Any object that carries sensors is defined as a vessel in PDS. Some
application types can handle multiple vessels, and each vessel can have
multiple sensors. This makes it necessary to have a set-up for each
vessel in an application type. The vessel set-up is called the Vessel
Configuration (see page 111).
A configuration is created during the New Project wizard (see page 69).
From the Configuration dialog a configuration is selected from an existing
project or a new configuration created by pressing the ‘New’ button.
Press from the Control Center toolbar to open the Configuration

dialog.
66  Starting Teledyne PDS Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Figure 4-2 Configuration (selection and new )
4.2 Project Structure

Each project contains of one or more application types (measuring
methods). Each application type has at least one, but may have multiple
configurations.
By selecting a project in the acquisition bar, followed by selecting a
configured application type, it is possible to choose between
configurations in case more than one was made.
Project 1 Project 2
Application Application Application Application

Type 1 Type x Type 1 Type x
Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration

1.1 x.1 1.1 x.1
Configuration Configuration Configuration

x.2 1.2 x.2
Configuration Configuration
1.n x.n
Figure 4-3 Project structures
There are three different ways to make or adjust a project.

1. Existing projects can be amended and adapted for a new
measurement. The configuration can be changed if necessary. By
selecting Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking

on in the toolbar of the Control Center the configuration is opened.
The project configuration can be accessed by selecting Edit > Project
Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking on in the toolbar in
the Control Center.
2. Open the New Project Wizard with File > New Project… to create a
new project.
When a project is copied
from one system to
3. Existing projects can be copied in the project folder and if necessary
another system the related with the logged data. This method is also usable for copying projects
files in the Projects from an office to another location and vice versa. Copying the projects
Common Files folder has can be done with Windows Explorer. The Control Center needs to be
to be copied manually. restarted before the added projects can be selected.
4.3 Projects Common Files

In the PDS projects directory is a map created called ‘Projects Common
Files’. In this map vessel setups will be stored. If a vessel (or crane) is
used for several projects, most of the time the same setup will be used.
When for the same vessel a new project is created, the common
 information from the vessel will be copied from the ‘Projects Common
Files’ map. The changes made in the vessel configuration will be copied
back the common information in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.
See also the Project The common information contains the following items:
Common tab in the
Explorer (see page 276).  Geometry information.
 Vessel contours, vessel wireframes and 3D studio models.
 Equipment setup.
 Crane configurations with the calibration results for (rope) excavators.

 Pipe configurations with the calibration results for trailing suction
hoppers; the pipe configurations are stored in the crane configuration
file.
 Draught tables and hopper tables for the trailing suction hoppers.
 Setup of the pages for the Numerics – Standard view in the
Acquisition.
 Import and export configurations.
 Events.
 These common information files are not stored in the project folder
anymore. For existing projects the files are not updated in the project
folder, but are stored in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map. For projects
 created with the PDS 3.2.0.0 version or later the files are only available in
the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.

4.4 New Project Wizard
If PDS is started for the first time, there will be no project selected. It is
then possible to start the new project wizard directly after the start up.
Figure 4-4 Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard
checked
If there are no projects available in the project folder, then an error

window will come up. Click on in the error window and the Select
Project window will be opened. Check in this window the option Run the
New Project wizard and click on to start the project wizard.
If PDS is already started with an existing project, the New Project wizard
can be started from the menu of the Control Center with File > New
Project…. That action starts the wizard’s first dialog window.

Figure 4-5 Start of the new project wizard
On the first page a choice has to be made, start from scratch with an
empty project or use an existing project as template. When an existing
 project is selected, all relevant files from the existing project are copied
into the new project. The logdata subfolders, grid models, CUBE models,
dtm XML files, logdata file sets and sound velocity profiles files are not
 copied to the new project. The new project can then be checked and
changed with the wizard.
As this is a wizard, each dialog window has that will close the
current page and will open the next one. The last page will have .
It is recommended to step through all pages of the wizard. Click on
to stop the wizard at that page without writing the required files
into the project folder. So it is advisable not to click on but to
finish the wizard even without entering data in the pages. That way a
project is made and data can be entered at a later stage.

4.4.1 Project Configuration
Figure 4-6 Project Configuration window
The Project Configuration With both choices in the previous page, the next page gives the Project
can be modified with Edit > Configuration window. When a project was copied the inputs fields
Project Configuration from contain data from the old project, when an empty project was started
the menu bar or with these fields contain default values.
from the toolbar in the
Control Center. In both cases it is advised to check each possible input and the
corresponding input fields. All possible inputs with their input fields are
detailed below.
4.4.1.1 Description
Figure 4-7 Project description
A project description is not compulsory and for project reference purposes

only. All or one of the lines may be left blank.

4.4.1.2 Units
Figure 4-8 Units dialog
The project and all computations in the project use the selected units.
These units are only for display purposes; PDS has its own internal units
for logging the data.
4.4.1.3 Coordinate System
Figure 4-9 Coordinate System information
Click on to select one of the existing coordinate systems that are

available in the database (see page 88) or click on to open the
coordinate system wizard to create a new coordinate system (see page
89). The button is only available when the coordinate system is

created by the user. The coordinate systems which are already created
by PDS cannot be modified.
4.4.1.4 Formats
Figure 4-10 Formats dialog
The project formats are used to present computation results throughout

the project.
Chart coordinates can be shown in grid or geographical coordinates. The
selection above is for the standard displays.
4.4.1.5 Log Files
Figure 4-11 Log Files settings

Enter for Log directory the required name of the folder that has to be used
as logging directory. The default name is ‘LogData’ and will be a sub-
folder of the project folder. In case a different name and/or path are
wanted, enter the name (with the complete path) of the desired folder.
The folder will be created by PDS on the given location.
Check the option ‘Use backup log directory’ when the user wants a copy
of the PDS Format log data files and / or the S7K Format log data files.
The backup log file is made simultaneous with the standard logging, so
the file size increases during logging. Click on to select or
change the log directory for the backup. The directory will be displayed in
the box. Additional in the Vessel Setup – Logging page the option ‘Enable
Backup log’ must be enabled in the PDS Format and / or the S7K Format
log data files in order to log this file(s) See page 148 and 152.
For the log file names the user can choose how the log files are called.
The first option, Automatic log file names, is the default option with the
standard PDS log file names (see example in the dialog).
The second option, User defined log file names, is the option where the
user can create a log file name with some standard items and/or with a
user text. The different items that can be selected for the log file name are
 Vessel name
The name of the vessel configuration in the Vessels page of the
Configuration (see page 80). The vessel name cannot be unchecked
and will be always in the log file name.
 Survey type
This is the name of the application type that is selected for the project
(see page 79).
 Run line name
The name of the active runline file as selected in the Runline tab of the
Guidance page (see page 168).
 Start date
The date when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
When no start time is  Start time
selected, a sequence The time when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
number will be used to
differentiate the different  User text
log files. Text that can be added to the log file name. Enter behind the option
User text: the text that has to be added to the log file name.
Check the items that have to be in the log file name. The order of the
items in the log file name can be changed by using or .
Select the item that has to be moved and use one of the buttons to move
the item upwards or downwards.
Between the different items in the log file name a separator is needed.
Selected for the option Separator the right separator (- _ . ,).
At the bottom the option Replace all dots in the log file name will replace
the dots with a dash (or an underscore when a dash is selected as
separator. This means that all the dots, also in the name of the runline,
will be replaced.
With the log file name will be reset to the default log file setting.
In the Acquisition it is possible to change the name of the log file name. If
 the option is active in the Acquisition and a new logdata file is created the
user can specify a different log file name (see page 311).

4.4.1.6 File History
Figure 4-12 Selected file types for a backup
Historical data can be stored in the ‘Backup’ folder in the project. For all
the file types that are checked in the list a copy is made when a new
logging file is opened. The copy will only be made if the file is changed
after the last backup.
Check the option Keep history of files for Replayer and Editing if the
backups have to be made. The backups are used in the Replayer (see
page 485) and in the Editing (see page 491) when a log data file is
opened. The log data file will use the available files from the backup to
show the information. For instance when the color table is changed after
the data is logged; the color table that was used during the logging will be
used if ‘Color Tables’ is checked for a backup.
To avoid that the backup folder will be overloaded with backups, a
maximum number of days can be set. If a backup is older it will be
removed from the backup folder.
4.4.1.7 Disk Space
Figure 4-13 Set when the oldest log data files have to be deleted
It is possible that a lot of information is logged during a survey, for

instance two sonar’s with snippets and side scan data, and then the hard
disk will be full in a short period. To avoid this problem the user can define
when the oldest log data files are removed (deleted) from the hard disk.
Two different options can be used to define the criteria to delete the
oldest log data files.

With the option When files are older than the files older than the number
of days set will be deleted.
With the option When free disk space is lower than the oldest files will be
deleted when the free hard disk space is lower than the specified GB’s.
The user can select one of the option or both. When both options are
selected then when one of the two options is valid the oldest log data files
will be deleted.
It is advisable to select always the option When free disk space is lower
 than because if the number of days is too high then it is possible that the
hard disk is full before the oldest log data files are deleted. A full hard disk
will stop the system.
 It is very important to backup the old log data files before one of the
options becomes valid; otherwise the log data files are lost.
4.4.1.8 Alert Sounds
Figure 4-14 Select the alerts sounds for the alarms
If external speakers are connected to the PC the alert sounds can be

used. These three sounds are .WAV files and are placed in the PDS tab
of the Explorer.
For the three severities are a low, intermediate and high sound created.
Click on to hear the selected sound.
If no external speakers are available, the internal speaker of the computer
can be used to generate beeps. Select the option Use beeps and three
different predefined beeps will be used.
The different severities for the alarms can be set for each alarm in the
Conditions window for the Alarms (see page 161).
4.4.1.9 Options
Figure 4-15 Select the options
This page will show options that can be important to display or compute
data.
Show multibeam beams with no bottom detection
In PDS the beams that have no bottom detection get a 0 (zero) for the
beam Z. By default the zero beams will not be displayed in the views

of PDS. When the user wants to see the zero beams then he can
check this option.
Lat/Lon on Local Spheroid – Lat/Lon on Satellite Spheroid
The user can select by selecting one of these options which latitude
and longitude are displayed in PDS.
Lat and Lon mean the latitude and longitude on the local spheroid and
Sat Lat and Sat Lon on the satellite spheroid (normally WGS’84).
Auto-Show Alerts
When this checkbox is unchecked Auto-alerts will not pop up any
more.
4.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters
Figure 4-16 Leap seconds as a GPS time parameter
This page will show the settings for the GPS time parameters. At the
moment only one setting is available.
Leap Seconds
From 31st of December
The leap seconds for GPS receivers with a GPS time. The leap
2016 the number of leap
seconds is 18.
seconds are used to correct the GPS time to UTC time.
The leap seconds as set here will be used through PDS.
4.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters
Figure 4-17 Sonar Targets file selection and list with classifications
Select or create in this page the active sonar targets file which can be
used in the Acquisition, Presentations, Replay and Editing.

The sonar targets can be classified. The user can make his own list of
classifications which can be used to classify the sonar targets. It is always
possible to classify a sonar target with a classification that is not in the list.
The coverage width is the width of the target for a pipeline target.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
in the Chapter Views (see page 466).
4.4.1.12 Icon Images
Figure 4-18 Icon Images file selection
Select or create in this page the active icon images file which can be used
at the moment only in the Acquisition, Presentations, and Replay.
For more information about the sonar targets see the option Add Icon
Image in the chapter Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu on page
437.

4.4.2 Selecting the Application Type
Figure 4-19 Select Application Type
From the list of application types, select the one that describes the project
the best. The type and number of possible sensors and computations that
can be used in PDS is set by the application type. The availability of
application types depends on the purchased options that are laid down in
the dongle.

4.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard
Figure 4-20 Run Configuration Wizard page
By checking Run the configuration wizard the wizard goes over in a menu
where the configuration can be saved. When a name is given, click on
and the wizard will continue with the configuration name and the
vessels page (see below).
Is Run the configuration wizard not checked then by clicking on
the wizard will be finished and the configuration will not be saved. A new
configuration has to be made with the menu option Acquisition > New >
Configuration….
4.4.4 Vessel Selection
Figure 4-21 Vessels page to add or select the vessels

Depending on the application type, one or more vessel(s) can be entered
on the page and the used vessels will be checked.
With a vessel can be added to the project and with the
vessel configuration of the selected vessel will be opened (see for the
vessel configuration the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 111).
Local
All the vessels from the Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Select one of
projects on the local the available vessel configurations.
computer and all the
Click on to create a new vessel configuration. The vessel
common vessels are
available in Add Local wizard will start with the Vessel Name page where a new name for the
Vessel. vessel has to be defined and will continue through all the pages of the
vessel configuration (see page 111).
Figure 4-22 Select a vessel (configuration) or create a new vessel
Remote
Vessels which are created on another location, that means for
instance on another ship, can be added or edited. This other ship can
be monitored by reading the data from that ship. To get a connection
with the other ship the Control Center on the remote vessel has to be
running.
Figure 4-23 Select a Remote Vessel and download the vessel

configuration
 Give the hostname or the IP-address of the remote vessel. The port
704 will be used to get the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel. Do not change this port number!!
During the acquisition the sensor data from the remote vessel can be
read, but because of the data load an update rate can be set. Check
the option Use limited data update rate and set the update rate (in the
example above on 5 seconds).
Click on to download the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel.
If the vessel configuration on the remote vessel is changed or the
update rate has to be changed, click on under ‘Remote’ to
download the new vessel configuration or modify the update rate.

4.4.5 Layout
Figure 4-24 Layouts page of the configuration
The layouts page shows where the real time modules are displayed. The
module Control Center is by default on the local computer. The
acquisition server and presentations can be on the local computer or on
another computer in the network.
Click on to add new presentations to the list. Select one of the
modules and click on or just click on to go to the Layout
dialog.
Figure 4-25 Layout dialog
If the layout is not running on the local computer (main PDS) but on a
remote computer, give the name of the remote computer or select with
the computer in the network.
The name of the layout can be selected. Click on to create a new
empty layout. This empty layout can be filled with views in the Acquisition
or Presentation. It is better not to use the same name for the layout in the
Acquisition and in the Presentation.
The UI (User Interface) profile is always the default. The user can defined
a UI profile where his own toolbar and ‘shortcut keys’ settings are saved.
Click on , give a new name for the profile and make the module
according the wishes of the user. A new UI profile starts always with the
default settings for the shortcuts and the toolbar.

4.4.6 Events
Figure 4-26 Events page of the configuration
On this page the events can be defined. Three automatic eventing modes
In the real time mode
are available, conditions can be set and an event string can be defined.
manually eventing is
possible with F6.
For more detailed information about events see chapter ‘Events’ on page
183.
4.4.7 Alarms
Figure 4-27 Alarms page in the configuration
On the alarms page real time alarms can be defined. The alarms are
related to the configuration and will be active for each vessel in the
configuration.
Vessel specific alarms can be set in the vessel configuration (see page
161).
When an alarm is added a Conditions window, similar to the one in the
Vessel Alarms on page 161, is opened. In this window the alarm can be
defined.

If the condition for an alarm is not known yet leave the alarms page
empty. When an alarm is required on a measurement it is easy to make a
condition in the Acquisition with Edit > Alarms (see page 308). That way,
alarms can be checked immediately.
4.4.8 Closing the Wizard
Figure 4-28 Last page of the new project wizard
Click on in the alarms page to close the wizard and once more on
in the ‘Wizard is Finished’ page.
4.5 Create Project from Log Data

If the user has only a standard PDS logging file available, it is possible to
create a new project with the project configuration and the vessel
configuration from the logging file.
To create a new project select File > Create Project from Log Data… from
the menu bar in the Control Center and a standard Open dialog will be
opened. Select in this dialog the logging file for the new project.
Give in the Project Name dialog a new project name and click on
and the new project will be created.
The selected logging file will be copied from the original location to the
LogData folder in the new created project.
At the moment a configuration file is not created, because the relevant
 information for the configuration is not available in the logging file. The
user has to create a new configuration with the configuration wizard.
Select Acquisition > New > Configuration…from the menu bar in the
Control Center to start the wizard and the Configuration Name window will
be opened. Give a name for the configuration and click on to
continue the wizard. The wizard will open sequentially the vessels page

(see page 80), the layouts page (see page 82), the events page (see
page 83) and the alarms page (see page 83).

5 Coordinate System
5.1 Introduction
In Teledyne PDS (PDS), a coordinate system database is available where
for the most common countries the standard coordinate systems are
predefined. It is also possible for the user to add new coordinate systems
to the database.
The active coordinate system has to be selected in the Project
A new coordinate system can be created in the Project Configuration The
new coordinate systems will be stored in a separate database, where all
the user defined coordinate systems are available.
Edit a user defined coordinate system or the geoid of an predefined
coordinate system by pressing ‘Click to edit the Coordinate System’ from
the PDS Explorer Geoid Models tab page (see page 261).
In the PDS tab of the Explorer two different databases are available, the
It is not possible to modify pdsgeodatabase and the pdsusergeobase. The pdsgeodatabase is the
the predefined coordinate database with all the predefined coordinate systems and the
systems. pdsusergeobase is the database with all the user defined coordinate
systems.
In this chapter will be discussed how to select, to create and/or modify a
coordinate system through the Project Configuration. For creating and/or
modifying a coordinate system in the ‘Explorer – General’ the same
dialogs and windows will be used.
Select in the Control Center the menu item Edit > Project Configuration or
click on in the toolbar and select in the Project Configuration window
the option ‘Coordinate System’.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Coordinate System  87

Figure 5-1 Project Configuration with the option Coordinate System
5.2 Project Coordinate System

The coordinate system that has to be used in the project can be selected
in the Project Configuration window, see Figure 5-1.
If another coordinate system has to be used, click on and select
one of the existing coordinate systems in the Select Coordinate System
window (see page 90). The predefined coordinate systems are specified
per country and the coordinate systems which are created by the user are
in the group ‘User Defined Coordinate Systems’ or in a group created by
the user.
If none of the coordinate systems can be used for the project, a new
coordinate system has to be created with the Coordinate System
Wizard(see below).
88  Coordinate System Teledyne PDS - User Manual

5.3 Coordinate System Wizard
Click on in the Project Configuration to create a new coordinate
system and the coordinate system wizard will be started.
5.3.1 New Coordinate System
Figure 5-2 New Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Give a name for the new coordinate system and check the option Based
on existing coordinate system if an existing coordinate system has to be
used as a start for the new coordinate system.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard.
If the option Based on existing coordinate system is checked the next
page is the Select Coordinate System page (see below) to select from the
list an existing coordinate system.
If the option is not checked the user can select a satellite and local
ellipsoid from the list in the Ellipsoids page (see page 91).

5.3.2 Select Coordinate System
Figure 5-3 Select Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The base of an existing On this page the user can select one of the existing coordinate systems
coordinate system is as a base for the new coordinate system. All the coordinate systems as
always both ellipsoids. The defined in both databases (pdsgeodatabase and pdsusergeobase) are
other settings of the available in the list of coordinate systems.
system can be modified.
If an existing coordinate system is selected, click on to go to the
next page of the wizard. The next page will be the Datum Transformation
Parameters page (see page 94).

5.3.3 Ellipsoids
Figure 5-4 Ellipsoids page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if the user create a new coordinate system that
is not based on an existing coordinate system.
It is not possible to create Click on to select a satellite ellipsoid and a local ellipsoid from the
a new ellipsoid. list of ellipsoids.
Figure 5-5 Select an ellipsoid from the list of available ellipsoids in PDS
If both ellipsoids are selected, click on to go to the next page of

the wizard. This page will be the Datum Transformation page (see below).

5.3.4 Datum Transformation
Figure 5-6 Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing datum transformation or create a

new datum transformation that can be based on an existing datum
transformation or not.
If the option Use existing datum transformation is selected the parameters
of the selected datum transformation cannot be modified. With option
New datum transformation in combination with the option Based on
existing datum transformation an existing datum transformation can be
modified.
Select only the option New datum transformation if a complete new datum
transformation has to be created.
If only the option New datum transformation is checked, the next page will
be the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see page 94).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Datum
Transformation page (see below).

5.3.5 Select Datum Transformation
Figure 5-7 Select Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page only the datum transformations that are possible between
the two selected ellipsoids of the new coordinate system will be available.
If one of the datum transformations is selected, click on to go to
the next page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the
Datum Transformation page (see page 92) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing datum transformation was checked the next
page will be the Geoid Model page (see page 95).
For the other options the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see
page 94) will be opened.

5.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters
Figure 5-8 Datum Transformation Parameters of the Coordinate System

Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Datum Transformation page (see page
92) the option New datum transformation is checked. If also the option
Based on existing datum transformation is checked, first the Select Datum
Transformation page (see page 93) is opened before the Datum
Transformation Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a new name for the to be created new datum transformation.
Method.
The datum transformation convention used in PDS is the Bursa Wolf
convention.
Note:
There are two datum transformation conventions. The Position Vector
transformation convention and the Coordinate Frame transformation
convention. The difference between both conventions is the sign of the
rotation. It is easy to convert the transformation parameters from one
convention to the other, simply by changing the signs of the three
rotation values.
 The Position Vector transformation convention is also known as Bursa

Wolf convention, Bomford convention, European convention. This is
the convention used in PDS.
The Coordinate Frame transformation convention is also known as
Helmert convention or US Department of Defense convention.
Distinguish the 7 parameters Bursa/Wolfe transformation and the 14
parameters Bursa/ Wolfe transformation. The 14 parameters
Bursa/Wolfe transformation is in fact a 7 parameters Bursa/ Wolfe
transformation with the addition that the 7 parameters change in time.
The second set of 7 parameters represent the speed of change of
these parameters with time to compensate for the tectonic plate

movement. See the Technical Note ‘14Parameters Datum
Transformation’ for full details.
Shift X, Y and Z
The translations in the X, Y and Z direction, to translate from the
satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Rotation X, Y and Z
The rotations around the X, Y and Z axis, to rotate from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Scale factor (ppm)
The scale factor between the two ellipsoids in parts per million (ppm).
Prime meridian shift Greenwich (deg)
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
File name
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Description
The user can enter a short description for the new datum
transformation.
If all the parameters are entered, click on to go to the next page
of the wizard. The next page will be the Geoid Model page (see below).
5.3.7 Geoid Model
Figure 5-9 Geoid Model page of the Coordinate System Wizard
In this page a geoid model can be selected for the coordinate system.
The geoid model will correct the satellite ellipsoid height to a local height.
The methods available at the moment are:
.byn format
Geoid model for Natural Resources Canada in .byn format. Drag and
drop the .byn file into the PDS Explorer – Geoid Models tab page to
add it to PDS.

Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest geoid model for Belgium.
DeMin
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
Denmark DVR90
The latest geoid model for Denmark.
EGM2008
The Earth Gravitational Model 2008 is a spherical harmonic model of
the earth’s gravitational potential. After the EGM2008 Geoid is
selected and the project configuration closed, PDS comes up with the
below message when the associated file is not selected or could not
be found.
Figure 5-10 PDS message EGM2008 geoid model
Follow the instructions of the message in order to use the EGM2008

geoid model.
GEONZ97 (Noordzee 1997)

This is a preliminary Geoid used at the Dutch sector of the North Sea.
Grid Model (Grid coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
The geoid model grid model with grid projection coordinates (easting and northing).
has to be created in the grid
model editor (see page 648). Grid Model (Satellite coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
with satellite ellipsoid coordinates (latitude and longitude in WGS’84).
Noordzee1997+LAT2006
Geoid model from satellite geoid via MSL to LAT2006
Norway
For Norway the latest geoid model file is available: HREF2008a.
Null Model
A geoid model with a 0 (zero) correction. This model can be used to
get the GPS antenna height as a local height.

OSGM02 – GB
Geoid model for England, Scotland and Wales.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is
that this geoid model contains the National Grid coordinates and not
the latitude and longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the
other geoid models do.
OSGM02 – NI
Geoid model for Northern Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
OSGM02 – RoI
Geoid model for Republic of Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.

OSGM15
The latest geoid model covering the UK and Ireland. OSGM15 is an
improvement to the OSGM02 geoid models. The horizontal
transformation grid for the UK OSTN02 is also updated to OSTN15.
The horizontal transformation polynomial for Ireland and Northern
Ireland is unchanged.
The OSGM15 geoid model for the UK can only be used in a coordinate
system with ETRS89 – GR80 and the National Grid as projection.
(This geoid model contains the National Grid coordinates)
In Ireland and Norther Ireland there are two separated OSGM15 files
based on a latitude/longitude graticules.
See also the Teledyne PDS Technical Note – OSGM15 & OSTN15 for
more information.

OSGM15_Marlin
OSGM15 file for Ireland for Marlin datum.
The geoid model contains (different as OSGM02) latitude and
longitude coordinates.

OSGM15_Belfast
OSGM15 file for Northern Ireland for Belfast datum.
The geoid model contains (different as OSGM02) latitude and
longitude coordinates.
Quasigeoid EGG97
The European Gravimetric Geoid based on all high-resolution gravity
and terrain data available in 1997.
If this option is selected, a BIN file can be selected. This BIN file is
standard not available in PDS, it has to be order. The BIN file has to
be placed in the folder Project Common Files.
Quasigeoid GCG
For Germany, the German Combined QuasiGeoid 2011.

For this method a GCG2011_NO file is needed. This file is not
supplied within the PDS package and needs to purchased externally.
For PDS the file needs to have the extension “*.bin”. When this is not
the case it needs to be renamed to GCG2011_NO.bin.
Copy the file to the PDS Projects/Projects Common Files and select at
the file selection this file.
Figure 5-11 Select file for the Quasigeoid GCG method
RDNAPTRANS2004
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest geoid model for The Netherlands.
Sweden
For Sweden the following geoid models are available: SWEN01L,
SWEN08_RH2000 and SWEN08_RH70.
Trimble Geoid Grid File (.ggf format)
From PDS version 4.1.6.2 or newer you can use Geoid model: Trimble
Geoid Grid Format files.
US State Plane
The geoid models for the United States on the NAD83 State Planes.
The geoid models for the united states can be downloaded from the
NOAA website http://vdatum.noaa.gov/download.php. Download the
file and drag and drop the downloaded ip file to the Geoid Models
page of the PDS Explorer to add the file to PDS.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Unit page (see below).

5.3.8 Unit
Figure 5-12 Unit page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Select an unit that will be used for the projection parameters. Because
this unit is used for the projection it will become the system unit for the
project.
Click on to create a new unit type and the New Unit dialog will be
opened.
Figure 5-13 New Unit dialog to create a new unit type
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created unit type.
Meters per unit
Enter the number of meters per one new unit.
Name suffix
Give a suffix for the new unit type, like a ‘m’ for meters.
If the right unit is selected or create, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. The next page will be the Projection page (see
below).

5.3.9 Projection
Figure 5-14 Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing projection or create a new

projection that can be based on an existing projection or not.
If the option Use existing projection is selected the parameters of the
selected projection cannot be modified. With the option New projection in
combination with the option Based on existing projection an existing
projection can be modified.
Select only the option New projection if a complete new projection has to
be created.
If only the option New projection is checked, the next page will be the
Projection Parameters page (see page 102).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Projection page
(see below).

5.3.10 Select Projection
Figure 5-15 Select Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
On this page all the projections will be available. If a projection is selected

with a different unit as selected before an error message will appear
where is mentioned that an other unit has to be selected if this selected
projection has to be used.
If one of the projections is selected, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the Projection
page (see page 100) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing projection was checked the next page will be the
Post Correction page (see page 103).
For the other options the Projection Parameters page (see page 102) will
be opened.

5.3.11 Projection Parameters
Figure 5-16 Projection Parameters page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Projection page (see page 100) the
option New projection is checked. If also the option Based on existing
projection is checked, first the Select Projection page (see page 101) is
opened before the Projection Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created projection.
Unit
The unit that will be used cannot be changed on this page. If the unit
has to be changed click on to go back to the Unit page (see
page 99).
Method
In PDS several projection methods are available.
 Cassini-Soldner
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (A)
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (B)
 Lambert 1 Parallel
 Lambert 2 Parallel
 Mercator
 RD (is only valid with the unit Meters)
 Transverse Mercator
 Stereographic
 Universal Transverse Mercator (is only valid with the unit
Meters)
The number of parameters on this page will depend on the projection
method that is selected. The values of the parameters False Easting and
False Northing have to be in the unit, which is mentioned on this page.

If all the parameters are entered, click on to get to the next page
of the wizard. This next page will be the Post Correction page (see
below).
5.3.12 Post Correction
Figure 5-17 Post Correction page of the Coordinate System Wizard
It is possible that a position calculated on the local grid not match with the
actual X, Y and Z for that point. With a post correction this point can be
moved so it match with the actual grid coordinates. This post correction is
only applied when a calculation is done from the local ellipsoid to the local
grid or vice versa.
On this page two ways to add a post correction are possible, manual or
with a model. The manual post correction is always a fixed shift in all the
X, Y and/or Z coordinates, while with post correction with a model for
each point a different shift can be used.
The models available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest post correction model for Belgium.
Denmark DVR90
The latest post correction model for Denmark.
HARN
The latest correction model for the United States.
If HARN or OSTN02 is In theory is HARN a correction on the local latitude and longitude and
selected, PDS will correct the not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS the only place for a post
local ellipsoid coordinates correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
before the coordinates are
projected on the grid.
OSTN02
Post correction model for England, Scotland and Wales. OSTN02 is
updated to OSTN15.

In theory is OSTN02 a correction on the local latitude and longitude
and not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS the only place for a post
 correction is on the X and Y coordinates.

This correction can only be used in a coordinate system with ETRS89
– GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is that this
correction are specific calculated for this coordinate system.
RDNAPTRANS2004
The old post correction model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest post correction model for The Netherlands.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Save Coordinate System page (see below).
5.3.13 Save Coordinate System
Figure 5-18 Save Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
A new coordinate system cannot be saved in the group with the

predefined coordinate systems, it has to be saved in the User Defined
Coordinate Systems group or in a group which is created by the user.
Select where the new coordinate system has to be saved, click on
to go to the last page of the wizard, the Coordinate System
Overview page (see below).

5.3.14 Coordinate System Overview
Figure 5-19 Coordinate System Overview page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page an overview is given of all the settings for the new
coordinate system.
Click on to check the new coordinate system by entering a
known point in the GeoCalculator (see page 801).
If the new coordinate system is accepted, click on to save the
coordinate system in the group as selected by the user. If one of the
settings in the overview is not right, click on to go back the
relevant page in the wizard to change the settings. It is also possible to
save the coordinate system and use the Edit option (see next section) to
change the coordinate system.
5.4 Edit Coordinate System

It is possible to modify the selected coordinate system in the Project
Configuration window (see Figure 5-1 on page 88). Click on in
the Project Configuration window to open the Coordinate System window
to edit.
Alternatively, open the Geoid page of the PDS Explorer and press ‘Click
to Edit the coordinate system”.

Figure 5-20 Edit Coordinate system
If the coordinate system is created by the user or is created with the

information from an old project, it is possible to modify the complete
 coordinate system. For the pre-defined coordinate systems only the geoid
model can be modified!!
The coordinate system cannot saved if for a pre-defined coordinate
 system a different geoid model is selected. It will be available in the

project, but it cannot be selected from the database. If this coordinate
system has to be used for other purposes it is better to make a new (user
 defined) coordinate system that is based on the existing pre-defined

coordinate system (see page 89) with a different geoid model. This user
defined coordinate system is stored in the database.
This window can also be opened in the PDS Explorer – Advanced tab –
PDS –Coordinate System Databases branch (see page 272). Select in
the Coordinate System Databases the file pdsusergeobase and click on
the option Edit in the context menu to open the Select Coordinate System
window.
Figure 5-21 Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined
coordinate systems
Select one of the user defined coordinate systems and click on

to open the Edit Coordinate System Window.

Figure 5-22 Edit Coordinate System window with an user defined coordinate
system
This window shows the settings of the selected user defined coordinate
system. In this window it is possible to modify the settings.
From the pre-defined coordinate systems only the geoid model can be
modified. For a pre-defined coordinate system only the geoid models,
 EGM models, Grid Model (Grid and Satellite coordinates) and Null Model
are available and for some systems also the local geoid model (if
available).
For different geoid models first the method or country has to be selected
 before a geoid model file, if needed, can be selected. This is for instance
valid for Sweden and the US State Plane.
When a geoid model is added to a pre-defined coordinate system, the
coordinate system cannot be stored in the geodatabase. In the project the
 coordinate system can be used. But when the user wants to use it in the
Geo Calculator or in other projects it is better to make an user defined
coordinate systems based on the pre-defined system and add the geoid
model.
The different parts of the above window have the same functionality as
the different pages in the coordinate system wizard (see page 89).
It is possible to select a different ellipsoid for the coordinate system. But
the consequence is then that also the datum transformation parameters
and the name has to be modified.
If the parameters of a datum transformation are changed and the name of
 the datum transformation not, then when the coordinate system is saved
with the datum transformation is also changed in the coordinate
systems where the same name for the datum transformation is used.
There is a relation between the selection of the projection and the units.
Because the parameters of for instance the Easting and Northing in the

projection are specified in the unit that is selected for the coordinate
system.
5.5 VDatum
With NOAA’s VDatum (Vertical datum transformation) database it is
possible to convert easily ellipsoid heights into a reference chart datum.
This reference datum is selectable in PDS. The database applies for the
USA waters (including Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands.) and is
based on different regions. PDS selects automatically the correct region
depending on the vessel’s position.
The downloaded VDatum database (http://vdatum.noaa.gov/downlad.php)
should be loaded into the PDS project common files. This can be done by
drag and drop the VDatum files in the ‘Geoid Models’ page of the PDS
Explorer. Zipped files (*.ZIP) will extract automatically when dragged into
the ‘Geoid Models’ tab page.
In the Project Configuration are the correct coordinate system, U.S state
plane geoid model method, the desirable geoid and chart datum selected.
Figure 5-23 Coordinate system with VDatum setup
The technical note ‘VDatum’ describes in detail the VDatum setup in PDS.
(See C:\Program Files\Teledyne\PDS Vx.x.x.x\manuals\Technical
Notes\...).
5.6 DC File
It is possible to import Trimble DC files.
Press from the Project Configuration – Coordinate system dialog the
‘Import DC File’ button and browse to the DC file to open it.

Figure 5-24 Import DC File
Use this button to import a Trimble DC file (*.dc) which saves typing in or
selecting coordinate system values. The Trimble Construction site
workflow uses a DC file to hold the Map and Geodetic settings. On some
sites a unique geodetic Site Calibration is carried out with Trimble
technology and the DC file holds the Site Calibration. A Site Calibration
includes a map projection, a datum transformation, and optional post
projection settings such as a Geoid file, horizontal shift / rotation and
inclined plane vertical correction. The initial implementation of this import
to PDS will accept a Map Projection and Datum Transformation. If the DC
file has extra parameters which PDS does not yet support then the file will
be rejected.

6 Vessel Configuration
6.1 Introduction
Teledyne PDS (PDS) always needs a vessel configuration before the
Acquisition can be started. The vessel configuration will contain all the
settings which are necessary to do all the measurements.
Before a vessel configuration can be made a project has to be setup as
discussed in chapter ‘Starting Teledyne PDS’ on page 65.
6.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration

There are several ways in PDS to create or modify a vessel configuration.
1. In the New Project Wizard a new vessel configuration can be created
in the Vessel Selection (see page 80).
2. In the PDS Explorer – Advanced tab page – Vessels branch a vessel
configuration can be created (option New File) or the existing one
(option Edit) can be modified (see PDS Explorer>Advanced tab
page>Vessels on page 276).
3. With Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or press from
the toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window is opened
and in the tab Vessel the existing vessel configuration can be edited.
Click on to view and/or modify the settings of the vessel
configuration.
Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Click on
to start the vessel wizard to create a new vessel
configuration.
4. With Acquisition > New > Vessel… from the menu bar of the Control
Center a vessel wizard will be started to create a vessel configuration.
Use and to go through the vessel configuration
wizard. The tabs are not visible.
This vessel wizard is identical with the vessel wizard that can be
started in the Vessel Selection of the New Project Wizard (see page
80).
The vessel configuration editor will be used to explain the setup of the
vessel configuration. Each page in the vessel wizard is a tab in the vessel
configuration editor. In the editor are even more tabs available then pages
in the wizard.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Vessel Configuration  111

6.2.1 New Vessel Configuration
With one of the above mentioned methods a new vessel configuration can
be created. The first page of the wizard is the Vessel Name page.
Figure 6-1 First page of the new vessel wizard
A new name for the vessel configuration has to be entered. The user can
choose to create a complete new vessel configuration or to use an
existing vessel configuration as template.
When the option Use existing vessel as template is checked, the user can
select from all the vessel configurations that are available in the Projects
Common Files map.
 Click on to continue with the wizard. It can take a while before the
next page of the wizard will be opened. The reason is that PDS first check
if the new vessel configuration name exists or not. If the name already
exists an error message will appear and the user can enter a different
name.
The next pages of the wizard will be explained with the separate tab
pages below.
112  Vessel Configuration Teledyne PDS - User Manual

6.3 Geometry
Figure 6-2 Geometry page of the vessel configuration
The first page in the vessel configuration is the vessel geometry with the
vessel visualization, vessel draught, vessel turn radius, sea level, vertical
position and the offsets on the vessel.
Visualization
As visualization a standard shape or a custom shape could be
selected by the associated radio button.
Standard Shape
Pre defined standard shapes are selectable by the drop down

menu.
Figure 6-3 Dropdown menu with selectable standard shapes
Press the shape size button to define the

dimensions of the used standard shape.
A Standard Shape Size Definition dialog box appears.
Figure 6-4 Shape size definition dialog box
Enter the relative distances with respect to the chosen Reference

point as also used for the equipment offsets. All numbers are
positive.
Custom shape
With Custom Shape selected the user is able to use a created
shape.
Shapes used for 3D Views could be wireframe (DXF) drawings,
3D Studio (3DS) Models or SketchUp models (SKP). Appropriate
software is to be used to create the shape file and copied in the
PDS explorer’s, Projects common folder.
 From PDS version 4.3.0.6 and higher is the Trimble

SketchUp SDK (x64) for drawing models drawn/saved with
SketchUp versions 2013 and higher implemented. This
version also includes model origin shift compensation.
SketchUp drawings made with Sketchup version 2016 or higher
are not shown in PDS 32 bits versions.

Press the Custom Shapes button and
select from the drop down list the shape type.
In the other selection field the associated shape file could
selected from the drop down menu. Only shapes with the type as
selected in the shape type selection will be displayed in the drop
down list.
Figure 6-5 Custom shape selection dialog
When the ‘Use same shape for 2D displays’ checkbox is ticked

the selected 3D shape is also used for the 2D displays. When
this checkbox is unticked a different shape as used for the 3D
display could be selected. Besides the wireframe (DXF), 3D
studio (3DS) models or SketchUp models (SKP) also a vessel
contour (made in PDS) could be selected. For a survey vessel
usually only a top view is selected.
Vessel contour
A vessel contour as optional used in the custom shape selection dialog
(see above) could be created or an existing edited.
Click to create a new vessel contour or click to edit
an existing vessel contour in PDS. In both cases the PDS Vessel
Contour Editor will be opened. (See page 117)
Vessel
Draught
The draught is the distance from the waterline to the deepest point
on the vessel and is always positive. It is used in computations
such as depth below keel.
Click to define a squat table. Squat is the hydrodynamic
phenomenon causing a change in vessel’s draught with respect to
vessel’s speed. The squat table defines this effect. When for
example a squat value of 0.15 m is defined in the table for a speed
of 1 m/s it means in PDS the draft will increased with 0.15m at a
vessel speed of 1m/s.
The squat table is normally empirically determined. The values
defined in the table are interpolated in PDS.

Figure 6-6 Squat table
The user has control on the squat integration period by setting

squat speed calculation parameters. Squat speed calculation
parameters (Integration value and speed) could be set in the Sea
level computation properties.
These properties are accessible by the ‘Vessel
Configuration’>’Computations’. Double click at ‘Sea Level’.
Figure 6-7 Sea Level Properties

Turn radius
Turn radius of the vessel is used to compute the lead-in lines (see
page 168) and for autopilot outputs.
Sea level
Sea level is the distance from the CGP (Center of Gravity Point) on
the vessel to the waterline and will be positive when the waterline is
above the CGP.
Center of Gravity Point Offset
Enter the offset from the CRP (Common Reference Point) to the
CGP (Center of Gravity Point).
When RTK is used the This offset is needed when tide is used in combination with sea
Center of Gravity Point level and the CRP is far away from the CGP; for instance the CRP
Offset is not relevant. is on the bow where the multibeam with its sensors is located.
Vessel vertical position
Select that the selected vessel is above water level (Surface) or under
water (Subsurface). PDS has to know how the depths have to be
calculated. For a surface vessel the measured depth is the actual
depth but for a subsurface vessel the measured depth has to be
combined with the depth of the vessel (for instance a ROV or an AUV)
to get the actual depth.
Offsets
This is just a list of offsets,
An offset is a point of interest on the vessel, such as the location of a
at a later stage offsets are
assigned to the sensors.
sensor. The ’Zero Offset’ is a PDS pre-defined offset, the CRP and
cannot be changed.
Click on for an overview of the vessel contour and offsets. A top-
and a starboard view of the vessel are shown. If no vessel contour is
available, a default contour will be used.
PDS uses a vessel coordinate system. This system is centered around an
arbitrary point on the vessel. This point is called the CRP and has the
coordinates X=0, Y=0 and Z=0. The units used are the PDS computation
units. Offsets and contour points are entered relative to the CRP, using
the sign convention as shown in the figure below. Sensor offsets are
entered from the CRP to the sensor.
+Z
Top
-X +Y
Port Bow
CRP
X=0
Y=0
Z=0
-Y +X
Stern Starboard
-Z
Bottom
Figure 6-8 Vessel coordinate system
6.3.1 Vessel Contour
 See the Vessel Contour Editor manual (the file Vessel contour Editor.pdf
in the folder manuals’) for a description of the Vessel Contour editor.

Figure 6-9 Vessel Contour editor

6.4 Equipment
Figure 6-10 Equipment page of the vessel configuration
In the Equipment page the devices (sensors) are selected, linked

computation parameters are set and device tests are carried out. Which
groups of devices are available depends on the selected application type.
The vessel configuration supports also sub systems. A sub system is a
set of sensors/computations which act together and are loosely
 connected to the vessel (main system). Currently only a few sensor
groups are supported for a sub system: Multibeam, VRU, Heading and
Bearing.
The procedure to add sensors to the list is:
 From the ‘Groups’ list, select a group of devices, e.g. ‘Positioning
system Geogs’.
 From the ‘Device Drivers’ list, select the required device, e.g. ‘NMEA
2.30 GGA’ and click on to place the device in the device list. It
is not possible to give directly a distinguished name for the selected
device, see for more information ‘Aliases’ on page 160.
 When a sub system is needed, click on to add a sub system

and automatically a sub system position device is added. From now on
when a device driver is added with PDS will ask to which
system the device has to be added.
Now it is also possible to move devices from the main system to the
sub system. Select a device in the main system and click on to

move the device to the sub system. From sub system to main system
is also possible.
For more information about how the sub system works see Sub
System below.
 There is a group called ‘Multibeam (All Options)’. In this group a
RESON HydroBat or RESON SeaBat 7K can be selected. When one
of these device drivers is selected, it is possible to add all related
device drivers in one time. For instance select RESON SeaBat 7K and
click on . Now a display will open where all related devices are
already selected. If necessary uncheck one of the devices and click on
to add all these devices.
 After a device driver is added to the device list, check the items in the
device or computation by selecting the device or computation and click
on to open the properties.
Most of the sensors have a timestamp mode available. When this is
set on Computer Clock latency can be applied when available in the
data. For the other timestamps the latency have no effect.
For some equipment, like multibeam, position and VRU, an offset

must be selected or specified. By a radio switch selection it is possible
to:
-Select the offset as specified in the Geometry page;
-Enter the offset manually.
For Snippets devices the

offset (and multibeam
calibration values) are
taken from the multibeam
computation. For sub system devices the offset has to be entered manually.
 For several devices the units for the incoming data can be specified.
Normally the units as set by PDS will be the system unit. If for instance
the coordinate system is in feet then the system unit is feet and most
of the values related to distance are then in feet. With the units
 can be modified when the input data has a different unit than the
system unit.

 Each device has to be assigned to a communication port. Select the
device from the device list and click on . Select a port and
If as echo sounder one of change the settings if necessary. Add a new port by clicking on .
the Navisound Graphical See for more information about the interfacing on page 809. By default all
Trace device drivers is the selected devices are active ( ) in the device list. If one of the devices
selected, the option is not connected yet, it will give alarms in the Acquisition. To avoid these
and alarms, the device can be switched off in the device list by unchecking (
will give a ) the device.
different view (see page
122). An equipment test is possible when the selected device is attached to the
port. Click on and a test program checks the communication
with the device and the device driver.
It is recommended to test the equipment interfacing prior to the start of
the Acquisition.
Figure 6-11 Device Test
6.4.1 Sub System

An example of a sub system can be a multibeam mounted on a platform
in a moonpool of the vessel where the platform is not solid linked to the
vessel. The multibeam will require its own attitude and heading sensors.
When a sensor is added to the sub system it will not be added to a group
of the data sources. This is to avoid a selection of the wrong sensor
during a data source switching.
The sub system sensor offsets cannot be selected from the offset list but
have to be entered manually. The offsets are local offsets relative to the
sub system reference point.
The Sub System Reference Position Computation will use the local
attitude and heading sensors when available. When there is no sub
system heading, the heading from the main system reference point
computation will be used. When there is no sub system attitude, the main

system attitude will be used and converted to use the sub system heading
to sub system attitude.
The sub system position will be computed using the offset and the main
system reference point, main system heading and main system attitude.
The sub system heave will be replaced by the local heave when available.
The sub system position Z will be obtained using the offset reference
point Z minus the remote heave plus the local heave.
6.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace
Figure 6-12 Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the
communication with the echo sounder
This view will be opened when in the Equipment one of the Navisound
Graphical Trace devices is selected and on or is
clicked.
Click on in the Navisound Control Center to set the Input Port(s)

for the echo sounder. When the port(s) are set, click on or
and if the port(s) settings are right data will be displayed in the
view.
In the Equipment page the port is always NCC. The port settings for the
Navisound are stored in a different way than all the other devices in PDS,
it will be done through .
6.4.3 Outputs
It is possible to output data to a different system. Select in the equipment
list the output device from the Output device group. The default settings
for the outputs can be used. If more than one sensor of the same type is
selected the output message always use the sensor as set as primary.
The user can change this by selecting the output device and click on the
Output button to open the Output Messages window.

Figure 6-13 Outputs
For specific output messages when the output message is selected the
Data to trigger output message becomes available. In this box the data
item can be selected that will trigger the output message.
Select an item of the output message and the Output message element
source becomes available. In this box the source for that selected item
can be set.
Figure 6-14 Output message dialog

6.4.3.1 Create a User defined Output Driver
It is possible to create a user output driver. The definition of the driver is
based on the event definition dialog. The next table lists the steps to
create a user defined output driver.
Ste Action
p
1 1. Select from the vessel configuration – equipment tab the
Output device group.
2. The ‘Create/Edit user output driver’ button will appear.
2 Press the Create/Edit user output driver button.

Select an existing user output driver from the list or add a new
driver by entering a name and click Save.

Ste Action
p
3 Select from the output device definition dialog the Add button
to add a message.
4 Select the delimiter.

Ste Action
p
5 See the next figure.
a. Create the template. The template can contain text
and/or data items. The text can be typed directly in the
template.
b. For the data items reserve space or place separators
depending of the used delimiter. In this example the
delimiter (step 4) was selected as separator delimited
with a comma as separator.
c. Press the Add button to add a data item. See step 6
Refer to chapter Event Definition on page 185 for an

explanation of creating a template.
a. Select the field number. Field nr 1 is the first field; field

nr 2 is the field after the first delimiter, field nr 3 is the
field after the 2nd delimiter etc.
b. Define the field settings and press the Select button to
add a data item.

Ste Action
p
Refer to chapter Event Definition on page 185 for an
explanation of the field definition dialog. (The same dialog is
used.)
Select OK when finished.
7 Repeat step 5 and 6 to define additional fields.

With three fields added, the driver looks for example as in the
next picture.
8 Press OK when finished. The output driver is created but not

automatically added to the equipment list.
Select the created output driver from the output group and
press the Add> button to add it to the equipment list.

Ste Action
p
Select for the driver the I/O port. See chapter Interfacing on
page 809.
6.5 Computations
Figure 6-15 Computations page in the vessel configuration
A number of standard computations are default in PDS. These are

displayed in the Computations page.
The number and type of standard computations depends on the selected
application type. Click on to edit the properties of the selected

computation. For the standard computations the user influence on the
properties is limited. Nevertheless, it is advisable to check and inspect
each property carefully and set the associated parameters as required.
6.5.1 Advanced Computations

Apart from the standard computations, advanced or user computations
can be added. For normal survey operations it is expected that these
additional computations are not required. Advanced computations are
seen as an option for special operations. A lot of the advanced
computations are already available as a linked computation with a
selected device driver.
Click on in the Computations page (see above) to open the
Advanced Computations page.
Figure 6-16 Advanced Computations page
is grayed out The user selects the required computations from the left window and adds
when a computation is not these with to the list of defined computations. By default the given
possible (anymore) for the computation name will be used and the properties of the selected
chosen application type. computation will be opened.
The properties of the added computations can be opened by selecting the
computation in the defined computations list and click on to
access the properties of that computation.

6.6 Data Sources
Figure 6-17 Data Sources page in the vessel configuration
A data source is a computation in PDS. An item in the ‘Data groups' can

be a computation or a device and can give an input to a data source with
assigned priorities.
Example: The data source 'Position' computes the position of the vessel.
In the ‘Data Groups’ two items can compute the position. One item can be
moved to the top and gets number 1, that item becomes the primary data
input for the Position computation. The others become the secondary
computation.
PDS can automatically switch between data groups with a user definable
condition. Double click on the first data group item or select the first data
group item and click on to enter the switch parameters.
At the start of every cycle in PDS the order in the data group is as
specified in the data group list and the conditions will be checked. It is not
necessary to set a condition for the secondary device to go back to the
primary. This will be done automatically after each cycle in PDS.

Figure 6-18 Condition added
Figure 6-19 Creating a condition
Multiple conditions can be set on any data source. If one of the conditions
is ‘true’ it will lower the rank of the source, provided automatic switch is
checked in the Data Sources page.
6.7 Guidance
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks or towards a pre-defined location or area. The guidance methods
are:
1. Route
2. Runlines
3. Waypoints
4. Design Model
5. Cutter Dredge
6. Work Areas
7. Restricted Areas
8. Vessel Placement
9. Dredge Instruction
10. Object Distance
The number of guidance methods that is available is depending on the
selected application type.

Each method has its own definitions and computations. An application
can have many guidance files of any of the types above and it is possible
to select a file in the Acquisition.
There is a number of ways the guidance can be setup or modified. As it is
a part of the vessel configuration, all methods to open the vessel
configuration can be used to open the guidance window. On top of that
most of the individual guidance file can be opened in the Explorer –
Project tab page (see page 236).
For more details about guidance see the chapter Guidance on page 167.
6.8 Tools
The Tools page is skipped in the vessel configuration wizard. If the vessel
configuration is opened outside the wizard always the interval logging tab
is available.
For several applications like (Rope) Excavator, Cutter, Trailing Suction
Hopper, Maggy Survey and Multibeam Survey extra tabs are added to the
Tool page.
The different tabs in the Tools Page are:
 Anchor Definition (see below)
 Crane Configuration (see page 134)
 Cutter (see page 136)
 Dredge Logging Settings (see page 137)
 Interval Logging (see page 138)
 Magnometer Dialog (see page 140)
 Pipe Configuration (see page 141)
 Production Parameters (see page 143)
 Trip Registration (see page 144)
 Statistics Report

6.8.1 Anchor Definition
The Anchor Definition is only available when the option is set in the
dongle.
Figure 6-20 Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge
application
In the Anchor Definition page the anchor definitions for the vessel
(pontoon) and the handling tugs can be specified.

6.8.2 Crane Configuration
The crane configuration is available for the (Rope) Excavator application.
Excavator:
Figure 6-21 Tools page with the Crane Configuration page of the excavator
application
This page is to setup the crane configuration for an excavator with a

backhoe, a pump or a grab.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the stick and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom, stick and tool can be calibrated (see page 312). For some ‘Dredge
Positioning Systems’ a fourth subpage is available for the bucket steering
and the engine control.
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the
‘Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS.

Rope Excavator:
Figure 6-22 Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application
This Tools page is valid for the Rope Excavator application to setup the
crane configuration for a rope excavator with a backhoe.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the rope and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom and rope can be calibrated (see page 312).
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the ‘Rope
Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS.

6.8.3 Cutter
Figure 6-23 Tools page with the Cutter configuration page
This Tools page is valid for the Cutter Dredge application to setup the
cutter configuration.
For more information about the Cutter see the manual for the ‘Cutter
Dredge’ application in the manuals folder of PDS.

6.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings
Figure 6-24 Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the
excavator application
This page is to setup the logging conditions for the grid model logging
with a (rope) excavator, cutter or hopper.
In the Logging page the grid model logging should be setup as explained
 on page 149. Next to that setup the option Enable grid model logging
should be checked otherwise there is no grid model logging in the
Acquisition.

6.8.5 Interval Logging
Figure 6-25 Tools page with the Interval Logging page of a cutter dredge
application
This Tools page is present for all different type of applications.

Check the option Enable interval logging and a table will be displayed. In
the table items can be selected that will be displayed in the Interval
Logging view in the Acquisition and logged in an interval log file.
At the bottom of the window the user can select if he wants the interval
logging file per day or per week. For the week period the start day can be
set. Also the logging interval in the file can be specified.
The user can set the what type of time format has to be logged in the file.
The option Use windows date, time makes a date and time column in the
file, while the option Use only item values makes a column with the
number of days since 1st of January 1900.
 In the Logging page the interval logging format have to be checked before
an interval log file is created (see page 155).
Item to log
Double click on a field and the Select Data window will be opened. In
this window the item from one of the available computations can be
selected.
When an item is selected automatically the row is filled with the default
settings.

User name
Double click on a field and the text in the field can be modified.
This name will be visible in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Method
Three options are available to select as method to display the values
in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Sampling. The last value will be displayed.
Averaging. The displayed value is the average of all the values in that
period.
Cumulating. All the values of that period are added together, a
cumulated value is displayed.
Start day
Select a day when the interval logging has to start.
Now. The interval logging will be started directly.
Today. The interval logging will start today at the time as specified in
the column ‘Start time’.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and
Saturday. The interval logging will start on the specified day of the
week at the time as specified in the column ‘Start time’.
Start time
The interval logging will start on the time as specified in the start time.
When the start time is earlier than the actual time the interval logging
will not start.
When for ‘Start day’ today or one of the days of the week is selected
the default start time become 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and the
user can modify the start time.

Period
At the end of a period the actual value will be logged to the interval log
file.
By default the period is set on 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and
the user can modify the period.
Reset
The reset is for the methods averaging and cumulating.
Yes. The calculation starts again when a new period starts.
No. The calculation continues after a new period is started.
In the Acquisition the interval logging can be monitored in the Raw Data
view and in the Interval Logging view (see page 382).
 When in the Logging page the Interval Logging Format is checked (see
page 155) then the data will be logged in the file xxxx_Interval.log-
yyyymmdd.csv in the Logdata directory of the project, where xxxx is the
vessel name.

6.8.6 Magnetometer Dialog
Figure 6-26 The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy
survey application
This Tools page is valid for the Maggy Survey application to setup the
offsets for a multi-channel magnetometer.
The number of channels that will setup by default will depend on the
magnetometer device driver that is selected in the Equipment.

6.8.7 Pipe Configuration
Figure 6-27 Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application to setup the
pipe segments.
In the Pipe Configuration page the configuration for a suction tube with a
bend, an upper pipe, a lower pipe and a draghead (suction head) has to
be setup. When the trailing suction hopper has a starboard and port
suction tube two Pipe Configuration pages are available in the Tools
page.
‘Trailing Suction Hopper’ application in the manuals folder of PDS.

6.8.8 Pipe Detection
Figure 6-28 Tools page with the Pipe Detection page
The pipe detection will be available for applications where the multibeam
is available.
For more information about the pipe detection see the manual Pipe
detection.pdf in the manuals folder of PDS see Pipe Detection in the Help
file.

6.8.9 Production Parameters
Figure 6-29 Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing
suction hopper application for two bunkers
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application.

In the Production Parameters page the settings for the production
computation has to be set. With these settings and the draught the load
and the production of the vessel can be calculated.
The same page with only the Product specification section is valid for the
Cutter Dredge and the Excavator applications.

6.8.10 Trip Registration
Figure 6-30 Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trialing Suction Hopper application.

In the Trip Registration page the definition for a start and end of a trip can
be set. Also the definition for a track plot and/or a report at the end of the
trip can be defined.

6.8.11 Statistics Report
Figure 6-31 Statistics Report
With Statistics Report the user can collect data over a self-defined period
and it will calculate the mean, the standard deviation, the minimum and
the maximum of that collected data. The results will be presented in a
PDF report together with a time series graph.
The next table lists the functions of the Statistics Report.
Items to log List with selected Data item(s).
Double click in the ‘New Item’ field
and select from the Data selection
box the required Data value to add
a new item to measure the
statistics.

Graph Select ‘Yes’ to add a time series
graph of the statistics from the
selected data item in the created
PDF report.
Time series graph settings. Here the time series graph

parameters can be set:
-The color
-The scaling (automatic or manual)
-Minimum and Maximum values of
the graph.
Statistics Here the statistics of each
observation is displayed.
Remove Row(s) Remove a selected row from the

list.
Timespan A timespan for measuring the

statistics of the selected data items
can be defined by checking the box
and enter the required time span.
Channel layout By the channel layout selecting

buttons it could be selected to stack
or overlay the time series graphs in
the report.
Observation period Period of the observations taken.
Start Click to start collecting data. Only in

Realtime the statistics could start.
(Access the Statistic Report tab by
the Acquisition menu bar,
Tools>Tools settings menu>)
Stop Click to stop collecting data.
Report Style Select a pre-defined report style.

When the statistic measurements is stopped a PDF report representing
the results is created The PDF report could be viewed in the PDS
Explorer’s Report menu.
Figure 6-32 PDF report file
6.9 Logging
Figure 6-33 Logging page in the vessel configuration
How the logging is done is defined in the Logging page. The dialog sets
the file formats, manages log space and sets the log conditions. The
layout of the Logging page depends on the selected application type and
on the selected logging formats.
On top of the page it is possible to change the log directory. Select an
existing directory or enter in the box a new log directory. This is same
option as in the Log Files page of the Project Configuration (see page 73).

6.9.1 File Formats
The number of available file formats depends on the selected application
type. The following file formats are supported by PDS:
 PDS Format (see below)
 PDS Grid Model (see page 149)
 Winfrog Format (see page 149)
 Simrad EM3000 Format (see page 150)
 Cleaned XYZ Data (see page 150)
 Production Format (see page 150)
 Dredge Track Format (see page 150)
 DXF Format (see page 151)
 XTF Format (see page 151)
 Backscatter Grid Model (see page 152)
 S7K Format (see page 152)
 SDS Format (see page 155)
 Interval Logging Format (see page 155)
 FAU Format (see page 155)
 GSF Format (see page 156)
If one of the files is created in the Replay, its name will be extended with ‘-
R-date-time’ whereby ‘date-time’ are the date and time of the replay.
Every time PDS opens a module, like the Control Center or Acquisition,
the activities done in that module are logged in a file. There will be one file
per day. The file name is ‘Modulename_date.LOG’
6.9.1.1 PDS Format

This is the standard PDS logging format. The file contains configuration
parameters and raw sensor data.
Figure 6-34 Log File Index in the logging page for PDS format
Index file after logging means that direct after the log file is closed an
index file of the log file is created. This will save time when the log file is
opened in for instance the Editing.
Figure 6-35 Backup log in the logging page for PDS format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 73). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the PDS logdata file also in the backup log
directory which is specified in the Project Configuration.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.PDS
The runline name is for a (rope) excavator application replaced by the
project name and for the dredge applications by the trip number.
This file name mentioned above is the default file name. With the option

user defined log file names in the Project Configuration a user-defined file
name can be defined (see page 73).
 From PDS version 3.6.0.0 onwards, the sonar image, side scan and
snippets data in the PDS log file is compressed to reduce the size of the
log files. When this PDS log file is opened in an earlier version (3.5.0.x or
 older) the data of the sonar image, side scan or snippets cannot be
opened anymore!
From multibeam data all the pings will be logged in the PDS format, even
the pings that are out of order. The pings with a bad time stamp will only
be logged when they are newer than the ping before and when they meet
the data rate criteria.
6.9.1.2 PDS (active) Grid Model

An (active) grid model is filled with data such as depths and can be used
as an on-line coverage.
For echo sounder surveys

the grid model is not filled
with depths, but with
heights. Selection of the
minimum value gives in
that case the minimum
height, which is identical to
the maximum depth.
Figure 6-36 PDS Grid Model setup in the logging page
Select the grid model file name. If no file exists click on and give a
new file name. Select one or more data types and enter a cell size.
The grid model is filled with data from the added device in Data for grid
model logging.
File name: Name of the grid model.DTM
The data source used for the grid model logging must be added. Press
the Add button to add the data source for the grid model logging. Press
the Del button to delete a selected data source.
For the multibeam data update mode it is possible to select for the active
grid model:
 Average values.
The existing data of grid cells are averaged with new
measurements.
 Replace values.
The existing data of grid cells are replaced by new
measurements.
6.9.1.3 Winfrog Format

This is standard single-beam data in Winfrog format and cannot be edited
in PDS. Single beam data can also be logged in PDS Format and edited
in the standard PDS editors.
File name: Runline name-day-time.RAW.

6.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format
An industry accepted standard format for multibeam data. Raw data files
in this format can be processed with HDCS cleaning software.
File name: Vessel name_runline name_date_time_RAW.ALL
6.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data

The file is a space separated XYZ file in ASCII format.
The data is filtered according the criteria of the sensor computation. A
further reduction is possible for every swath of the multibeam data.
Figure 6-37 Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page
The tolerance is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous
Z-value. If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.05 m) the data
point is added to the file.
The width of a sway is defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance
(e.g. 10%) a point at every 10% of the width of the sway is added to the
file.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XYZ
6.9.1.6 Production Format

A grid model with production data from the device driver ‘Dredge
Production’.
Figure 6-38 Grid model input for the production
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS Grid Model (see page 149).
File name: Name of the Grid Model.DTM
6.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format

This file logged the position of the drag head(s). The calculated position
comes from the device driver computation ‘Absolute Dredge Head
Computation’.
Figure 6-39 Dredge track sampling rate
By setting the sampling rate the logging interval is defined (e.g. 30 sec).
File name: Vessel name[application type]_year_month_day.TRK

6.9.1.8 DXF Format
This format is only available with the application type ‘Barsweep’. Each
time the event button is pressed, the location and the size of the bar plus
the direction of sailing is logged in the DXF file.
Figure 6-40 File name for the DXF file
File name: File name.DXF
6.9.1.9 XTF Format

The XTF (eXtended Triton Format) format is only available for multibeam
applications and can contain multibeam, side scan , water column and/or
snippets data.
 Not all the Multibeam types could be logged in XTF format as they are not
all specified.
Click on to go through the settings of XTF format. See for a

detailed explanation of the XTF settings in the chapter ‘Export’ on page
787.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XTF
The XTF_HEADER_POSITION record is mentioned in XTF
documentation but it is not explained. Below this record will be explained.
Byte aligned structure of XTF_HEADER_POSITION:

typedef struct
{
WORD MagicNumber; // Set to 0xFACE
BYTE HeaderType; // XTF_HEADER_POSITION (100)
BYTE SubChannelNumber; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD NumChansToFollow; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD Reserved1[2]; // Unused. Set to 0.
DWORD NumBytesThisRecord; // Must be 64.
DWORD ID; // Unique id for this sensor. In case
// multiple GPS are used in survey.
DWORD TimeTag; // Millisecond timetag.
double PositionX; // X position as reported by GPS
// (Easting(meters) or
// Longitude(degrees))
double PositionY; // Y position as reported by GPS
// (Northing(meters) or
// Latitude(degrees))
double PositionZ; // Z position as reported by GPS
// (always meters)
BYTE IsHeightUsed; // 0 = Z not used.
// 1 = Z is used (RTK).
BYTE TypeUnits; // Applies to PositionX and PositionY
// above. 0 = lat/lon, 1 = E/N.

BYTE Reserved2[16]; // Unused. Set to 0.
} XTFPOSITIONDATA;
6.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model

A grid model where next to the depth an extra layer is added for the
backscatter data (the intensity) of the side scan sonar or snippets data.
Figure 6-41 Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS Grid Model (see page 149)
but with an extra layer for the backscatter data.
The old backscatter grid models (created with the Sidescan sonar format
 in the PDS versions before 3.4.0.0) can still be used for logging the side
scan sonar or snippets data). Only in these old grid models is no Z
Average available to show the data in a 3D view.
File name: Name of the Grid Model [Backscatter-Model].DTM
6.9.1.11 S7K Format

This format is only available for a multibeam application with a RESON
SeaBat 7K or RESON T series system and can contain multibeam, side
scan sonar, water column and snippets data.
Figure 6-42 7K logging reduction
Check the option Reduce on nadir filter if not all the data has to be
logged. The data that is rejected by the nadir filter (see page 411) will not
be logged.
Figure 6-43 Backup log in the logging page for S7K format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 73). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the S7K file also in the backup log directory as
specified in the Project Configuration.
 Select a coordinate system in PDS matching the location. A coordinate

system not matching the location will result in an erroneous conversion to
Lat/Lon coordinates.

 NOTES:
1 PDS is adding optional data to an S7k file compared to an S7k

file recorded by a RESON 7KCenter. This optional data is
described in appendix A of the Teledyne RESON ‘Data Format
Definition’ (DFD) document.
2 In PDS records 1003 and1015 are using the vessel reference
point. The vessel reference point is in Lat/Lon and is reverse
computed from projection coordinates. The 1003 and 1015
records created by the RESON 7kCenter use the sensor (GPS)
data in Lat/Lon (no conversions or shift to reference position).
3 Using a PDS version 3.9.0.4 or later all RESON 7K and T-
series sonars will be exported to one file with proper
enumeration. The first sonar of a type will receive enum 0 and
the second sonar of the type will receive the next enum 1, etc.
The s7k file is designed for many sonars in one file.
4 Because PDS supports multiple positioning systems and the
s7k file only one, the vessel reference position will be recorded
in the 1015 record so switching between systems can be done
without switching to another 7k file. Therefor there are no
offsets in the 7030 record. The data in record 1015 is
compensated for the offsets (contains vessel reference position)
so they can be read and applied in automated system which
also reads the 1015 record.
5 Heave of record 1016 is using the vessel reference point.
6 S7k records generated by PDS for sonar data will have the
device ID of the sonar, not that of PDS! All other records
generated by PDS will have the PDS device ID, e. g. GPS data,
7030 record, etc.
7 File name format of the PDS generated s7k file is:
date_time.s7k
8 Multiple applied sound velocity profiles get maintained when the
data is also stored in s7k during acquisition or exported.
See the 7k DFD for the record definitions. The next table lists the s7k
records exported or logged from Teledyne PDS together with possible
differences with the DFD format and if PDS adds optional data to the
record.
Record Name Data generated Description of Difference Optional

by PDS should data
be interpreted added by
different as it PDS
was generated by (See
7kCenter DFD)
1003 Position YES The position is the position
of the vessel reference
point. The height is the
height of the vessel
reference point relative to
sea level when height
source is ‘None’, otherwise
the height is relative to
chart datum.
1008 Depth NO

by PDS should data
different as it PDS
7kCenter DFD)
1010 CTD NO
(sound velocity
profile)
1015 Navigation YES The position is the position
of the vessel reference
point. The height is the
height of the vessel
reference point relative to
sea level when height
source is ‘None’, otherwise
the height is relative to
chart datum.
1016 Attitude YES Heave is using the vessel
reference point.
7000 7k Sonar Settings NO
7004 7k Beam NO
Geometry
7006 7k Bathymetry NO YES
Data
This record is
superseded by
record 7027
7007 7k Side Scan NO YES
Data
7008 7k Generic Water NO YES
Column Data
This record is
superseded by
record 7042
7009 Vertical Depth NO
7027 7k Raw Detection NO YES
Data
7028 7K Snippets Data NO YES
7030 Sonar installation YES PDS will leave all offsets to
parameters be 0 because the 1003 and
1015 records are
compensated for these
installation parameters
already.
7041 Compressed NO
beamformed
intensity data
(7042 record
deprecates the 7041

by PDS should data
different as it PDS
7kCenter DFD)
record. 7041 record is
supported only for
7111 and 7150
system)
7042 Compressed NO
Water Column
Data
7047 7k Segmented NO
Raw Detection
Data
7057 7k Calibrated Side NO YES
Scan Data
7058 Snippet NO YES
Backscatter
Strength
7200 7k File Header NO
7400 7k Time Message NO
6.9.1.12 SDS Format

The SDS (Self Defining Structure) format will be available for multibeam
applications and is special made to collect large amount of multibeam
data. Click on to open the SDS settings. Next to the SDS file a
CTL file will be created with a format that is depending on the selections
made in the SDS settings. See for a detailed explanation of the SDS
settings and the CTL file formats the chapter ‘Export’ on page 790.
File name: Vessel name_runline name-date-time(1).SDS
The number 1 mentioned the first multibeam system from the equipment
list. If more multibeam systems are logged simultaneously then the
second gets a 2, the third a 3, etc.
6.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format

The interval logging format is available for all applications. In the Tools
page (see page 138) the interval logging has to be enable and specified
before any data can be logged in the interval logging file, which will be
one file for each day.
File name: Vessel name_Interval.log-date.CSV
6.9.1.14 FAU Format

The FAU (FArvandsvæsenets Utm) format from the Danish Hydrographic
Office is available for the multibeam applications and will contain only
multibeam data. The raw multibeam data, that means unfiltered, will be
logged in the FAU file.
The FAU logging is available in two formats where one field can be beam
angle or beam number.

Figure 6-44 FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.FAU
When the number of beams is changed during the logging the actual file
will be closed and a new FAU file will be created. In a FAU file the number
of beams is placed in the header of the file.
At the moment some fields in the header of the file are not filled in due to
 varies reasons. The fields that are not filled are TimeOffset,
SensorValsEdited, SwathNtPosJump, MaxNonLinearity, Major, Minor,
Autoflags, RotRectValid and BB_Tilt. All these fields will have a value 0.
 The FAU format is made for UTM projections, but in PDS all different
projections will be accepted. The header for the field
Minilab[MAXLABLNG] will have normally the UTM zone and the satellite
ellipsoid mentioned, like ‘#utm32nNwgs84’ for UTM Zone 32 and
WGS’84.
 For non UTM projections the field will be empty, except for the places
which are restricted. The field will look like ‘# N’.
6.9.1.15 GSF Format

The GSF (Generic Sensor Format) format is designed to efficiently store
and exchange information produced by geophysical measurement
systems, particularly for data sets created by systems such as multibeam
echosounders.
The GSF logging is available for the multibeam applications and can
contain uncorrected or corrected multibeam data from RESON SeaBat
7K, RESON SeaBat 8K. RESONT20 series and ODOM MB1.The
multibeam data will be logged in the GSF file.
Figure 6-45 Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the
GSF logging
Select Uncorrected when the raw multibeam data has to be logged in the
GSF file. Select Fully Corrected when the corrected multibeam data has
to be logged in the GSF file. The corrected multibeam data in the GSF file
is computed according the multibeam xyz computation in the multibeam
device data.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.GSF

Below is a short explanation of the current implementation of GSF File
Logging in PDS:
 The GSF logging is based on a modified version of the GSF 2.09
library provided by SAIC.
 The logger uses CF_MBXYZREL PDS data blocks as a starting point.
 Only fully computed results are stored in the GSF File.
 Sonar specific data is only written for sonar models: 8101, 8111, 8124,
8125, 8150 and 8160.
 Multi-head sonar data is logged into two separate GSF files.
 Single beam sonar’s are not supported.
The following GSF types are written to the GSF file:
 GSF header
 GSF Processing Parameters
 GSF Sensor Parameters
 GSF Comment
 GSF MB Ping
 GSF Attitude
 GSF Ping Summary
For the GSF MB Ping record the following fields are written to the GSF
file:
 depth
 across_track
 along_track
 travel_time
 quality_flags
 beam_flags
 vertical_error
 horizontal_error
6.9.2 Log Space Management

PDS has some possibilities to keep an eye on the amount of logged data.
Figure 6-46 Log space management
System required free disk space

This is 1% of the system disk and cannot be changed.
Next to the settings below an automatic free disk space system is also
 in place. The checks for that system are 1% on the system disk with a
minimum of 500 MB and 100 MB on the data disk.
The logging will stop when one of these two limits is reached. One
 hour, 30 minutes and 15 minutes before these limits are reached a
message will be reported.

Minimum free disk space warning
Give the amount of disk space that should be kept free at all times, in
MB.
Allowed log space warning
The maximum space to be used by PDS for logging purpose, in MB.
The log space management system is not active when the minimum free
disk space and/or the allowed log space are zero.
PDS will generate a warning signal when the limit for the minimum free
disk space or the allowed log space is reached and it will continue to log
the data.
6.9.3 Condition Check

Logging can take place under selectable conditions. When that is required
activate the Condition check and check the wanted conditions. Logging
will be suspended when one of the conditions is true.
Figure 6-47 Logging conditions
Guidance online condition

The offtrack limit which is set in the runlines page of the guidance (see
page 168). PDS stops logging when the offtrack exceeds the limit
value.
Inside clipping polygon
PDS logs only when the vessel is inside a polygon. Choose a polygon
from the selection window. The clipping polygons can be created in the
Explorer (see page 239).
No user alarms
When one of the conditions of the alarms set in the configuration is
active, PDS stops with logging. The alarms can be set in the
configuration (see page 83) and in the vessel configuration (see page
161).
User conditions
Click on and set a condition (the same menu as on page 131)
which stops the logging in PDS.
6.9.4 Create New Log File

PDS allows the user to define when a new log file has to be created.
Figure 6-48 Create new log file
A maximum size of the log file can be set. This means that when the file
exceeds the file size a new log file will be created.
Another option is by setting a time limit on logging in one file. If the time
limit is reached a new log file will be created.

6.10 Simulation
Figure 6-49 Simulation page in the vessel configuration
On this page the simulation parameters can be set. The simulator is build-
in for training purposes.
Vessel position
Enter the grid position where the simulator will start.
Heading
The initial heading of the vessel.
Vru
Maximum values of the VRU simulator, Max. Heave in project units,
Max. Roll and Max. Pitch in degrees.
Depth
For each channel a depth value. Depth channel 1 is also used to
simulate a multibeam echo sounder.
Speed
Initial speed of the vessel. Depending on the chosen project units, in
knots or meters/second.
Simulate using runlines
Check Use Runlines to have the simulator running over the runlines.
Check Automatic Mode and the simulator will select the next runline
automatically.
Multibeam noise factor
Adds noise to the simulated multibeam swath, giving a more realistic
effect.

6.11 Aliases
Figure 6-50 Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA
GGA
Aliases are used to give multiple sensors of the same type distinguished
names. E.g. when there are two GPS sensors both using the device
driver ‘Standard NMEA GGA’, these sensors will have the same name in
the program. To give those sensors aliases such as ‘GPS1’ and ‘GPS2’ it
is more clear to the user.
Aliases are used throughout PDS wherever the device name comes
forward.

6.12 Alarms
Figure 6-51 Alarms page in the vessel configuration
The alarms that can be set in this page are vessel specific or device
specific alarms and will be valid only for the vessel that is setup in this
vessel configuration.
6.12.1 Vessel Alarms

A vessel alarm is related to device readings and the related computations.
Click on to create a new alarm file for the vessel and click on
to edit the selected alarm file. In both cases the Alarms window
will be opened where alarms can be added, edited, removed or renamed.
Figure 6-52 Alarms window with an alarm
Click on to edit the selected alarm or on to add a new

alarm. In both cases the Conditions window will be opened where the

alarm can be modified, the sound alarm can be set and the severity can
be selected.
Figure 6-53 Conditions window with an alarm
Check the option Enable Alarm when the alarm has to be active.
Check the option Sound Alarm when the alarm should give a sound when
the alarm becomes valid. Each Severity (Low, Intermediate or High) gives
a different sound for the alarm.
With or a Condition dialog will be opened where the
selected condition can be modified or added. In this dialog an attribute
from the equipment or computation list can be selected and a condition
with a value for this attribute can be defined.
Figure 6-54 Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an

attribute can be selected
The vessel alarm file will be placed in the PDS Explorer – Advanced tab
page – Project – Alarms branch (see page 273), but cannot be edited
 through the explorer. It is only possible to modify a vessel alarm file in the
6.12.2 Alarm on Difference

It is possible to define an alarm on difference between two devices. A
value difference computation must be defined for this purpose, followed
by defining the alarm as discussed in the section ‘Vessel Alarms’. The
next table lists the steps to generate an alarm on difference.

Step Action
1 Press the ‘Advanced’button to add an advanced computation
in the vessel configuration.
See section ‘Advanced computations’ on page 129 for the
advanced computations menu.
2 Add the computation ‘Value Difference Computation’.

Step Action
3 Select the two values to be compared. (In this example two
grid headings of two heading devices.)
4 Define in the vessel alarms an alarm with the ‘Value

Difference Computation’.
Refer to the section ‘Vessel Alarms’ on page 161 how to
open the vessel alarms menu.
5 Click ‘Add’ and give the alarm a name. (In this example
‘alarm heading difference’.)

Step Action
6 A dialog box opens:
a. Click ‘Add’;
b. Select in the ‘User computations’, ‘Difference’;
c. Define the condition to generate an alarm with the
associated values. In this example the <> (within)
condition with minimum 1 and maximum 1. As the
heading data behaves cyclic (360 degrees around) the
minimum and maximum values could be interpreted as
negative and positive. In this example it means an alarm
is generated when the difference is less as one degree or
more as one degree.
7 Enable the alarm, define the action and the severity.
6.12.3 Device Alarms

A Device alarm is an alarm related to the device data. The device alarm is
only available for certain devices.
When for example, in the Equipment list the VRU device ‘IXSEA
OCTANS TAH’ driver is added as Attitude device then several device
alarms will be added to the Alarms.
Figure 6-55 Device alarms IXSEA Octans

In the driver are status flags to check the quality of the data. The status
flags are used as a check.
Press to modify each device alarm. The same windows and
dialogs are available as describe above in the vessel alarms.
6.12.4 Object Distance Alarm

The object distance alarm is a special alarm available for excavator and
grab crane dredge applications. This alarm is not defined in the alarm
page. Refer to ‘Object Distance’ on page 179.

7 Guidance
7.1 Introduction
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks, towards a pre-defined target or in/out pre-defined areas.
The number of guidance methods available in Teledyne PDS (PDS)
depends on the application type that is selected. At the moment the
different guidance methods shown below are available through the
different application types:
1. Route (see page 168). A route is a sequence of points connected
with lines. The lines are straight lines between tangent points, or
circle segments when a center point is given. Routes are often used
in rivers and channels, but can also be used to follow a pipe or a
cable.
2. Runlines (see page 168). Runlines are straight lines or route wing
lines which can be grouped in blocks. A number of block methods are
available.
3. Waypoints (see page 169). A waypoint is a location towards the
vessel is moving.
4. Design Model (see page 170). A selection can be made between a
3D model and a grid model as guidance for dredging.
5. Cutter Dredge (see page 173). A work route for a cutter dredger.
6. Work Areas (see page 174). A work area is an area where the work
takes place. A work area can be a rectangle or a polygon area.
7. Restricted Areas (see page 175). A restricted area is an area where
it is not allowed to come or work. A restricted area can be a polygon
or an area on both sides of a route (e.g. a pipe or a cable route).
8. Vessel Placement (see page 176). A vessel placement is a location
with a heading towards the vessel is moving.
9. Dredge Instruction (see page 178). A dredge instruction gives the
dredge area with the depths for the dredger.
10. Object Distance (see page 179). Generate alarms when distance to
selected object become in alarm range.
Each method has its own definitions and computations and can have
many guidance files. In the Acquisition the user can change from
guidance file.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Guidance  167

7.2 Route
Figure 7-1 Route page in the guidance
When a new route is created the user can select from three different
types of route; a generic route, a pipe route or a cable route. The generic
route is the standard route with Eastings and Northings. The pipe / cable
route has next to the Eastings and Northings also a Z-value or a depth.
This way a pipe / cable route can be used to show a pipe / cable with the
right depth.
The route editor can also A route is a number of points connected by lines. The route points can be
be opened in the PDS either tangent points (TG) or center points (CP). Tangent points can be
Explorer - Project tab page connected with a straight line or with a curve.
– Track guidance routes
branch (see page 251). On the route page a route file can be selected and edited or a new file
can be created. This opens automatically the Guidance Editor. See page
180.
7.3 Runlines
Figure 7-2 Runlines page in the guidance
168  Guidance Teledyne PDS - User Manual

The runlines guidance A runline can be a straight line or a route wing line. It is possible to have
editor can also be opened several groups of runlines in a runlines file.
in the Explorer - Project
with the Runlines option or On the runlines page a runlines file can be selected and edited or a new
by opening the guidance file can be created. This will automatically open the Guidance Editor see
editor from the PDS page 180) .
Control Center. Refer to
the Guidance Editor
manual for full details.
Lead-in Lines
When the option Show lead-in lines is checked, PDS computes a lead-
in line from the current vessel position to the start point of the next
runline. The lead-in curve is based on the lead-in line length and the
‘Vessel turn radius’ as set in the vessel geometry (see page 113).
The lead-in line length is the length of the straight line that is in line
with the next runline.
Check Use lead-in lines to compute off-line distances; distance to go
and traveled distances along the lead-in line.
Next line selection
In the next line selection the runline retrieval method needs to be set.
Normal. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the coordinates as defined in the runlines file.
Reverse. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the end and start coordinates.
Alternate. Each time a next line is selected from the list, the start and
end coordinates are alternately as normal or reversed. This allows
sailing line-by-line in a continuous way.
Enter or choose a number of lines to skip each time a next line is taken
automatically.
Check the option Automatic next line and click on to set a
condition to discard the current line and goes to the next runline in the
list. The condition editor is equal to the one described on page 131.
Online condition
This condition is used for logging purposes. Check the Offtrack limit
and give a value for the offtrack limit. When a vessel is further away
from the selected runline than the offtrack limit, logging stops if the
appropriate check marks are set in the ‘Condition Check’ in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration (see page 158).
7.4 Waypoints
Figure 7-3 Waypoints page in the guidance

The waypoints editor can Waypoints are target points or points of interest. Around a waypoint
also be opened in the PDS tolerance circles can be drawn. In the Acquisition a wayline can be drawn
Explorer – Project tab page from the current vessel position to a waypoint, indicating distance and
– Waypoints branch (see bearing from the vessel to the waypoint.
page 253).
On the waypoints page a waypoints file can be selected and edited or a
new file can be created. This will automatically open the Guidance Editor.
See page 180
7.5 Design Model
Figure 7-4 Design Model page in the guidance
The 3D design model A design model is often used as reference for a maximum dredge depth.
editor and the grid model In PDS two different model types can be used: 3D Models or Grid Models.
editor can also be opened
in the Explorer - Project tab On the Design Model page a model type and a model file can be selected
– 3D Models branch (see or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the 3D design
page 238) or the Grid model editor (see below) or the grid model editor (see page 628).
Models branch (see page
Offset
238).
When checked, an offset perpendicular to the design model will be
applied. Only a positive offset could be applied.
Z Shift
When checked, an offset to the Z-value of the design model will be
applied. A positive or a negative Z shift could be applied.
Z lower limit
When checked, the new Z-value for the design model.
Underdredge limit
The value is an offset perpendicular to the design model and is shown
in the different Profile – Realtime Design views just as an indication
(see ‘Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View’ on page 455). At the
moment no alarm is set or checks are done with this limit.
Overdredge limit
Same as for the ‘Underdredge Limit’.

7.5.1 3D Design Model Editor
Figure 7-5 3D Design Model editor
In the 3D design model editor data can be imported, checked and

exported. There are three types of data that can be imported:
DXF
A 3D-DXF file made with e.g. AutoCAD can be converted to a 3D
model.
There are some restrictions to the DXF file: no blocks, no circles or
circle segments and remove the text if possible. PDS works with
straight lines and every point should have an X, Y and Z value.
Profile Design Model
Convert a profile design model to a 3D model.
Clipping Polygon
Select a clipping polygon and enter a Z-value to create a 3D model
inside the clipping polygon.
PDS will check every imported file automatically. An already existing 3D
model can be checked by clicking on .
When a file is checked and everything is OK the message in the info box
should look like as shown above in the example of the 3D design model
editor.

If data is checked and there are errors the info box looks like:
Figure 7-6 A checked 3D model with errors
After the check the errors are visible in the plan view of the editor. Zoom
in to one of the errors and click on the error to open a Fix window to solve
the error. After the error is fixed, click on again to check if the error
is gone. Continue to solve all the errors. Click on or to save
the model, this is only possible when there are no errors left. As
mentioned in the info box the non-flat and overlapping areas cannot be
fixed.
If an error is fixed but the result is not what the user wants then with
the modification made to the error can be undone.
The 3D model can be exported to a 3D-DXF file. When it is not possible
to solve all the errors in the model, like the non-flat and overlapping
areas, the only option is to export the data to a DXF file and try to solve
the errors outside PDS e.g. in AutoCAD.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions ( )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the 3D design model editor created by the user will be
saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the 3D design
model editor.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model that is added to the view (see page
446.)

Properties ( )
The background color of the view can be modified.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
7.6 Cutter Dredge
Figure 7-7 Cutter Dredge page in the guidance
The Route editor can also A cutter dredger uses a work route as guidance. A work route is the same
be opened in the PDS as a route in ‘Route’ on page 168.
Explorer - Project tab page
– Track guidance routes Work route
branch (see page 251). On the cutter dredge page a (work) route file can be selected and
edited or a new file can be created. This opens automatically the route
editor (see page 168).
Work offset
An offset can be given to the work route. This offset route becomes
then the guidance route for the cutter dredger.
Swing limits
Angular swing limits
The maximum swing of the cutter to port and starboard side in
degrees.
Use also distance limits
Check this option to make it active.
The maximum distance from the cutter to the center line on port and
starboard side.
Prewarning distance end of cut
The distance from the end of cut (distance limits) from where a
warning is generated.

7.7 Work Areas
Figure 7-8 Work Areas page in the guidance
A work area can be a dredge or dump area, and each area has a name
that can be descriptive and shown in the plan view.
With the option Only allow In the Acquisition one or more work areas can be selected and becomes
single area selected in the the active work area(s). A line is drawn from the current vessel position to
Acquisition only one work the active work area or the center of active work areas. That line stays on
area can be selected and the vessel’s tracking point while the vessel moves, guiding the vessel
will be active.
toward the active work area.
The work areas editor can A work areas file can be selected or created with . Different work
also be opened in the PDS areas can be kept together in one work areas file in the work areas editor.
Explorer – Project tab page There is no limit to the number of areas in one file.
– Work Areas branch (see
page 254). Click on to create a new work area. Two work area types are
available:
Polygon Area
Select an existing clipping polygon from the project as work area.
Rectangular Area
Enter a name, the center coordinate, the width, the height and the
rotation of the work area.
Alternatively, work areas can be created by importing ASCII files, click on
and converts these files to work areas. The ASCII file should be a
comma separated file with the format <Name>, <Center X>, <Center Y>,
<Length>, <Width>, <Rotation>.

7.8 Restricted Areas
Figure 7-9 Restricted Areas page in the guidance
Restricted areas are areas where dredging is forbidden or are dangerous.

Such an area can be enclosed in a polygon, or it can be a route with a
certain tolerance (width). Route areas are often pipelines, cables etc.
The restricted areas editor Restricted areas are kept together in files. A restricted areas file can hold
can also be opened in the multiple areas; each area is either a polygon or a route. All areas of the
PDS Explorer - Project tab current file are valid in the Acquisition.
page – Restricted Areas
branch (see page 248). On the restricted areas page a restricted area file can be selected and
edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
restricted areas editor.
7.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor
Figure 7-10 Restricted Areas editor
To create a new area click on and select as restricted area a

polygon or a route with a tolerance. The polygon or route should exist in
the project.
In the tab Options, options can be set for action when a vessel is inside a
restricted area:
 Highlight the area when the vessel is inside.

 Generate an alarm when the vessel is inside the restricted area.
 Additional Positions. An offset position computation that triggers the
alarm. E.g. in case the tracking offset point is used, the bulk of the
vessel can already be inside the restricted area before the alarm is
triggered. Then, an advanced or user computation ‘Offset Position’ can
be set on another point on the vessel, f.i. the bow. If this computation
is added as an additional position, alarm trigger occurs the moment
this offset point enters the restricted area.
The Advanced tab has additional possibilities for the restricted areas.
 A data condition can be set. The alarm is triggered in case this
condition is met.
 Advanced actions are: Highlight area in plan view, Generate alarm and
Trigger Output.
 Advanced actions take place when the (offset point on the) vessel is
inside or outside the area.
7.9 Vessel Placement
Figure 7-11 Vessel Placement page in the guidance
The placement points A vessel placement is a target location with a heading. In the Acquisition
editor can also be opened a line will be drawn from the current vessel position to a placement point,
in the Explorer - Project indicating distance and bearing from the vessel to the placement point.
with the Placement Points
option (see in the ‘Project On the vessel placement page a placement point file can be selected and
Database’ on page 247). edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
placement points editor.

7.9.1 Placement Points Editor
Figure 7-12 Placement Points editor
Click on to add a new placement point to the list. The details of

the new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the placement
points editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the placement point.
Enter the coordinates; several coordinate types can be used. The

latitude and longitude are on the local or satellite ellipsoid; depends on
the selection in the project configuration (see page 76).
Lat/Lon (º) Latitude/Longitude in degrees.
Lat/Lon (º ’) Latitude/Longitude in degrees and minutes.
Lat/Lon (º ’ ”) Latitude/Longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds.
X/Y Grid coordinates.
Heading
The heading for the vessel when it arrives at the placement point
location.
From the menu bar some extra functions can be selected:
Options > Electronic Chart…
Select a PDS1000 electronic chart as background.
Options > Grid Properties…
Select the grid to be shown in the plan view: Grid Crosses, Solid Line
Grid, Dotted Line Grid or Scale Bar. The grid can be with or without a
grid annotation.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with the
zoom functions, which are also on the right side in the editor.

7.10 Dredge Instruction
Figure 7-13 Dredge Instruction page in the guidance
The dredge instruction This option is only available for one specific client.
editor can also be opened
in the Explorer - Project tab A dredge instruction is an instruction for the dredger where all related
page. data and information is defined. The dredge location will be set by
selecting a dredge polygon.
On the dredge instruction page an existing instruction can be edited or a
new one can be created. In both cases automatically the dredge
instruction editor will be opened.
7.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor
Figure 7-14 Dredge Instruction Editor
On the left side of the dredge instruction editor all the information can be
added or modified. This information will be shown directly in the plan view
on the right side.

Grid model
The grid model that will be shown the actual situation at the dredge
area.
3D design model
The 3D model that will be used in the dredge area.
Dredge depth offset
It is possible, by giving an offset to the 3D model, to dredge to an other
depth as specified in the 3D model.
Dredge polygon
The dredge polygon is the area where has to be dredged. A new
dredge polygon can be created through the context menu of the plan
view.
Create grid model update
A dredge instruction can be send to a vessel with all the information as
given in the instruction, that means also the data. The file size of a grid
model can be very large. To avoid sending every time the whole grid
model only the data of the grid model inside the dredge polygon will be
send.
Historical vessel tracks
The tracks from several vessels can be shown in the plan view and will
be send to the vessel.
Description
A description of the dredge instruction.
Class
One of the four classes for the quality of the dredge material can be
specified.
Disposal location
The location where the dredge material has to be dumped.
When the user is finished with the dredge instruction the instruction can
be saved and send later or send directly to the vessel.
7.11 Object Distance
Figure 7-15 Object Distance page in the guidance
 This option is available for the (rope) excavator and grab crane dredge
applications and will only work when 3D shapes of the crane are used.

PDS can generate alarms to warn the user when he is too close to an
object. The object can be selected as a DXF file in this page.
In the Object Distance page two alarms can be defined. Add a distance
for which the alarm becomes valid and enter a text that will be displayed
in the Acquisition. In the Profile – Realtime Design view and Plan View –
General Dredge Operation when the alarm becomes valid the frame will
be highlighted (grey or red) and the added text will be displayed in the
frame (see below).
Figure 7-16 Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text
7.12 Guidance Editor

Routes, waypoints and runlines are edited or created in the Guidance
Editor. With the Guidance Editor the user cannot only modify or creates
routes, waypoints or runlines by changing the coordinates but also by a
graphically way. Refer to the Guidance Editor manual (Product

Manuals/Guidance%20Editor.pdf) for a full description of the Guidance
Editor.
Figure 7-17 Guidance editor with runlines

8 Events
8.1 Introduction
Before events can be viewed in the Messages – System Messages view
in the Acquisition, the event and the conditions to show the event have to
be defined. At the same time when an event is shown in the Messages –
System Messages view the information is logged in the PDS log file.
The Events page can be opened in two different ways:
1. Through the New Project wizard. Select File > New Project… from the
menu bar of the Control Center to open the wizard (see page 83).
2. With Acquisition > Configure from the menu bar or with on the
toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window will be opened.
Click on the tab Events to open the Events page.
8.2 Events Mode
Figure 8-1 Mode page of the Events page
On this page the eventing interval, the conditions and the event definition
have to be set.
The option Enable eventing has to be checked if the user wants events in
the Acquisition.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Events  183

When the option Follow Logging Enable is checked the event logging is
started and stopped with the PDS logging. This option overrules the
option Enable eventing. When the Acquisition is started and the option
Enable eventing is checked the event logging is started even if the PDS
logging is off, but when the PDS logging is started and stopped the event
logging follows the PDS logging.
For each day an event logfile is generated with the information as defined
in the event definition (see page 185).
The name of the event logfile is ‘Acquisition_EVENT_yyyymmdd.log’.
8.2.1 Mode
Select one of the three interval modes for the eventing:
Time
Set a time interval, e.g. 60 sec. Every 60 sec an event is generated.
Distance
Set a distance interval, e.g. 100 m. Every 100 m sailed an event is
generated.
Line
Set a line distance interval, e.g.100 m. Every 100 m sailed along a
runline, a route or a wayline an event is generated.
8.2.2 Conditions
Click on to define the conditions for the eventing.
Figure 8-2 Conditions menu
An event can only be generated when this is according the selected

interval mode and when all the conditions set in the Conditions menu are
‘true’.
8.2.3 Push Button

In the Acquisition use F6 Next to the automatic eventing with the interval mode and the conditions a
for a manual event. state event can be generated. Check the option Generate manual event if
a state event is needed. Click on to select a push button device. This
device has to be selected in the Equipment page (see page 119).
This state event works independent from the automatic eventing. It only
looks at the information from the push button device to generate an event.
184  Events Teledyne PDS - User Manual

8.2.4 Event Definition
The way events are shown in the Messages – System Messages view
(see page 387) in the Acquisition is defined in the ‘Event Definition’.
Multiple definitions can be made and each definition has a name. The
event messages can be selected by that name in the Acquisition.
Select one of the event definitions and click on to open the Event
Definition editor. If no events are available, click on and a new
event definition can be created in the Event Definition editor. Another way
to open this editor is in the PDS Explorer>Advanced page>Project
common>Events folder.
Figure 8-3 Event Definition editor
The characteristics for an event are:

 An event can have multiple messages.
 Each message is divided into fields.
 The fields in one message have either field separators or fixed fields.
 Each field may contain text or a PDS data item.
The way to build an new event definition is as follows:
 Create in the Explorer a new event. Enter a descriptive file name and
click on to open the Event Definition editor. Click on
in the editor to save the empty event.
 The event can be defined in the Acquisition (see page 308) or through
 the Event Definition editor in the Events page of the Configuration (see
page 83).
 In the Event Definition editor click at the bottom of the editor on
to add a new message. An event can contains several
messages. Select the type of message: Separator Delimited or Fixed
Field.
 Start creating a template. The template can contain text and/or data
items. The text can be typed directly in the template. For the data
items reserve space or place separators depending on the type of
message.
 Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.

 If all the data items are selected the event string can be checked by
clicking on .
8.2.4.1 Separator Delimited

An example of a separate delimited event looks like:
>>>EVENT,[data item: event nr.],TIME,[data item: time of event],<<<
1. Select in the ‘Field separator’ the field separator needed for the event
message; in this case a comma ‘,’.
2. Type the following text in the template box: >>>EVENT,,TIME,,<<<
Where:
Field 1 is ‘>>>EVENT’
Field 2 is still empty
Field 3 is ‘TIME’
Field 4 is still empty
Field 5 is ‘<<<’
3. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 8-4 Field definition for a separator delimited message
In this example select for ‘Field number’ number 2 or 4 to add one of

the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the field selection see the
‘Field Selection’ on page 187.
8.2.4.2 Fixed Field

An example of a fixed field event looks like:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
1. Type the following text in the template box:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
Where the x’s and y’s are the placeholders for the data items.

2. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 8-5 Field definition for a fixed field message
In this example select for ‘Start character’ 23 for the X or 40 for the Y
and for ‘Field length’ in both cases 12 to add the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the fixed field see the ‘Field
Selection’ below.
8.2.4.3 Field Selection

The fields that are in both field definitions, separator delimited and fixed
fields, will be explained.
Label Mode
This describes the method how the data item is written in the event
string.
None. Only the value of the data item.
Data Description. The full data description plus the value of the data
item.
Data Mnemonic. A reduced data description (only its mnemonic) plus
the value of the data item.
User Label. The users can make their own label in the ‘User Label’
window.
User Label
The label in the event string created by the user. Only when for ‘Label
Mode’ the option User Label is selected.
Factor
A multiplication factor to multiply the value of the data item.
Offset
A constant that is added to the value of the data item.
Number of Decimals
The number of decimals for the value of the data item in the event
string.
Single Field
One data item can be selected for the location in the event string.
Double Field
Two data items can be selected for one location in the event string.
Between the data items a separator can be selected.

Select a data item for the event string.
If the Event Definition editor is started from the Explorer, the
 button is not available anymore.
If the Event Definition editor is started in the Configuration or in the
Acquisition, the standard PDS equipment and computations tree is
shown.
Figure 8-6 Select Data in the event definition editor
8.3 Events Data Source

On this page the data sources can be selected for the events, e.g. in case
the distance interval is selected in the mode page, PDS has to know the
data item for the distance measurement; a position source.
Figure 8-7 Data Source page of the events
Click on to select from the Select Data dialog the data item for the
relevant data source.

Figure 8-8 Select Data item for the position source
8.4 Events Numbering

On the numbering page the event number sequence can be set.
Figure 8-9 Numbering page of the events
Set a start number for the first event number and set the number
increment to the next event numbers. If the counting of the event numbers
is decreasing, check the Count down checkbox.

9 Control Center
9.1 Introduction
The PDS Control Center always opens when Teledyne PDS (PDS) is
started.
From the Control Center all modules of the program can be started.
Before the Control Center of PDS is started PDS will do a check on the
 Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is Windows XP

SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A message will
It is possible that after the Control Center is opened a popup is displayed
about the power management. See for more information about this
message and the checks the chapter Option – Power management on
page 824.
The Control Center includes:

 A Menu bar.
From the menu bar it is possible to start PDS modules and
features (see page 192).
 A toolbar.
From the toolbar it is possible to start PDS modules and to set the
display modes (see page 199).
 PDS Explorer with a Globe View, 2D, or 3D Project view.
From the PDS explorer it is possible to start Editors, project
selection and acts as a file management system for the PDS
projects.
See for more information the chapter ‘Explorer’ on page 231.
 A bottom pane displaying Connections and Messages. The
bottom pane auto hide after 10 seconds (see page 202).
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Control Center  191

Figure 9-1 Control Center with 2D project view
9.2 Menu bar

The Control Center includes the following menu bar.
Figure 9-2 Menu bar Control Center
Each menu has menu options. The next sections describe each menu
and its menu options.
9.2.1 File Menu
Figure 9-3 File Menu options
192  Control Center Teledyne PDS - User Manual

The next table lists the File menu options.

Menu option Description
New Project… Select this menu option to create a new
project. The new project wizard opens. See
page 69.
Select PDS Project Select this menu option to specify the PDS
Path… Project path. The project path is the location
where the PDS projects are saved.
Create Project from Select this menu option to create a PDS
Log Data… project from a PDS log file.
Backup Current Creating a zip file to start easily a project on a
Project… different computer including the screen layout.
The zip files contain the common project folder
files, the InterfaceDef.ini file and master.ini file.
Restore Project… Restore the backup project zip file.
Restore Project with Restore the backup project zip with
confirmation confirmation
Print Setup Select this menu option to setup the printer.
Exit Select Exit to exit Teledyne PDS
9.2.2 System Menu
Figure 9-4 System Menu options
The next table lists the menu options of the System menu.

Project Select this menu option to open the project
Configuration configuration dialog box (see page 71).
Clock Select this menu option to open the Clock
Synchronization Synchronization dialog (see page 797).
Clock synchronization is used to synchronize the
received data stream of the sensors.
Interfacing Select this menu option to open the Interfacing
dialog (see page 809).
The interfacing is used to set-up the
communication with the sensors.
Display mode Select this menu option to change the display
mode.
There are four display modes: Normal, Night,
Twilight and Bright. See also the display toolbar
buttons (see page 199).

9.2.3 Acquisition Menu
Figure 9-5 Acquisition Menu options
The next table lists the menu options of the Acquisition menu.

New Vessel… Select this menu option to create a new vessel
configuration (see page 111).
Configuration Select this menu option to add or edit a
From the configuration it is possible to select or
create a new configuration and a different PDS
application.
Add Presentation Select this menu option to add a presentation (see
page 82).
Start Realtime Select Start Realtime to start the PDS Realtime
Acquisition mode.
Start Simulate Select Start Simulate to start the PDS simulator.
This option is not available for general PDS users.
Use the PDS simulator from the Tools menu for
simulate purpose.
Start Replay Select Start Replay to replay PDS log files (see
page 485).
Start PES Select Start PES to start the PES application. This
option is only available for the PDS PES
application.
Use Vessel Select (enable) this option to start Realtime
Backup Acquisition with a backup of the vessel
configuration.
When Realtime is started a dialog pops-up to
select the required backup. The Vessel back-up
settings are set in the Realtime Acquisition Edit
menu.

9.2.4 Processing Menu
Figure 9-6 Processing Menu options
The next table lists the menu options of the Processing menu.
Guidance Editor Select this menu option to open the Guidance
Editor module (see the ‘Guidance Editor’ manual
from the Help>Open Manual folder menu).
Editing Select this menu option to open the editing module
(see page 491).
Calibration Select this menu option to open the calibration
module (see the manual ‘Multibeam Calibration’
from the Help>Open Manual folder menu).
USBL Calibration Select this menu option to open the USBL
Calibration module (see the USBL manual from the
Help>Open Manual folder menu).
GapFill Select this menu option to open the GapFill module
(see the GapFill manual from the Help>Open
Manual folder menu).
Create Model Select this menu option to open the Create Model
module (see page 619).
Grid Model Editor Select this menu option to open the Grid Model
Editor module (see page 628).
Backscatter Select this menu option to open the Backscatter
Processing Processing module.
Plot Select this submenu to open the Plot module (see
page 689).
End Area Select this menu option to open the End Area
Volumes Volumes module (see page 679).
TIN Model Select this menu option to open the TIN Model
Viewer viewer module (see page 671).

9.2.5 Tools Menu
Figure 9-7 Tools Menu options
The next table lists the menu options of the Tools menu.
Import Select this menu option to import selected files into
PDS (see page 755).
Export Select this menu option to export PDS files to a
selected file format (see page 779).
Simulator Select this menu option to open the PDS Simulator
application.
The PDS Simulator can generate several sensor
data streams with different protocols.
Geo Calculator Select this menu option to open the Geo Calculator
(see page 801).
The Geo Calculator is a tool for coordinate
conversions.
Batch Plot Select this menu option to open the Batch Plot
(see page 751).
The batch plot is a tool to generate a plot with grid
model data based on a plot template.
Quick Profile Plot Select this menu option to open the Quick Profile
Plot (see page 745).
The quick profile plot is a tool to generate quickly
profile plots based on a plot template.
Print Select this menu option to print the configuration. A
Configuration… dialog opens to select the configuration.
Lite View Select this menu option to open the PDS Lite View
application (see the manual ‘Lite View’ from the
Help>Open Manuals folder menu).
SonarSwath Select this menu option to open the Sonar Swath
application (see the manual ‘Sonar Swath’ from the
Help>Open Manuals folder menu).

Machine Setup Select this menu option to open the machine setup
application. With the machine setup application are
drivers created for the excavator application.
User Accounts… Select the User Accounts submenu to define and
manage user accounts (see page 819).
Customize… Select the Customize menu option to customize
toolbar buttons and the shortcut keys.
Options… Select the options menu option to set language,
power management and explorer view settings
(see page 823).
9.2.6 Help Menu

In the menu item Help of the Control Center are several items available to
assist the user to update PDS or contact RESON.
Figure 9-8 Help menu options of the Control Center
For some menu options PDS will try to open the default mail editor. PDS
will check in the Microsoft mail handler the set default mail editor. PDS
will only open the mail editor of Microsoft outlook or Mozilla Thunderbird.
When a different mail editor is set then PDS will create a text file if
applicable. The text file may be attached in the used mail message.
The next table lists the menu options of the Help menu.

Help topics Select this menu option to open the Help file of
PDS which contains a copy of all the PDS
manuals. The Help file can also be open with the
F1-key.
Open Manuals Select this menu option to open the folder with all
folder the PDS manuals.
Download PDS Select this menu option to open the FTP site of
Updates… PDS to download the latest version of PDS.
PDS On the Web Select this menu option to open the PDS website.
From the website it is possible to download new
PDS versions and manuals.

PDS On Twitter Select this menu option to open the PDS twitter site
where the latest information of PDS is available.
View Release Select this menu option to open the release notes
Notes of PDS in the default PDF reader
Send Feedback Select this menu option to send feedback:
to PDS
 Via email
The default email editor will be opened to
send an email to the helpdesk of PDS
( pds-support@teledyne.com ).
 Via the web
The Teledyne PDS Support website page
opens.
Show Support Select this menu option to show the telephone
Phone Numbers numbers for the PDS support in The Netherlands
and for the RESON support in Denmark and USA.
Start PDS Select this menu option to start the PDS remote
Remote assistance. In the start dialog the ID of the user will
Assistsance be displayed. If the user tells his ID to the PDS
support, the PDS support can log in on the
computer of the user to see what the problem is.
Request Select this menu option to open the default email

Maintenance editor to send an email to the PDS sales
Contract department (info@teledyne-reson.com). This
(Update) contact can be used to send an email when the
dongle has to be updated or for questions about
the maintenance contract.
About Control Select this menu option to display information

Center about the PDS version, the dongle and the
maintenance contract. See also the chapter Update
of PDS Dongle on page 13.
9.3 Toolbar
The Control Center has the following toolbar (functions are also available
in the menubar).
Figure 9-9 Toolbar Control Center
The next table lists the functions of the toolbar buttons.

Toolbar Function
button
Select this button to save a screen capture of the
Control Center in a jpg or bmp format.
Save Screen

Toolbar Function
button
Select this button to open the project configuration
dialog box (see page 71).
Project
Configuration
Select this button to open the Clock Synchronization

dialog (see page 797).
Clock
Synchronization Clock synchronization is used to synchronize the
received data stream of the sensors.
Select this button to open the Interfacing dialog (see
Interfacing page 809).
The interfacing is used to set-up the communication
with the sensors.
Select this button to add or edit a Configuration (see
page 301).
Configuration
From the configuration it is possible to select or
create a new configuration and a different PDS
application.
Select this button to add a presentation (see page
82).
Add
Presentation
Select this button to start the PDS Realtime

Acquisition mode.
Start Realtime
Select this button to start the PDS simulator. This
Start Simulate option is not available for general PDS users. Use
the PDS simulator from the Tools menu for simulate
purposes.
Select this button to replay PDS log files (see page
485).
Start Replay
Select this button to open the Guidance Editor (see
the ‘Guidance Editor’ manual from the Help>Open
Guidance
Manual folder menu).
Editor
Select this button to open the editing (see page
491).
Editing
Select this button to open the Create Model module
(see page 619).
Create Model
Select this button to open the Grid Model Editor (see
page 628).
Grid Model
Editor
Select this button to open the Backscatter
Processing module.
Backscatter
Processing

Toolbar Function
button
Select this button to open the Plot module (see page
689).
Plot
Select this button to open the End Area Volumes
module (see page 679).
End Area
Volumes
Select this button to import selected files into PDS

(see page 755).
Import
Select this submenu to export PDS files to a

selected file format (see page 779).
Export
Press this button for standard light conditions.

Display mode
Normal
Press this button for less contrast and brightness.

Can be used during the night.
Display mode
Night
Press this button for less contrast. Can be used

when there is a twilight condition.
Display mode
Twilight
Press this button for extra contrast and brightness.
Can be used when there is a sunshine light
Display mode
condition.
Light
The display modes are working fine for the Windows Themes
‘Windows Classic’ and ‘Windows 7 Basic’. For Night, Twilight and
 Bright in the Windows Theme ‘Windows 7’ (Aero Theme) not all the
items will be supported!
9.4 PDS Explorer

The Control Center includes the PDS Explorer view. See chapter Explorer
on page 231 for a full description of the PDS Explorer view.
The PDS Explorer consists of:
 A tree view pane
 A globe view, 2D Project or 3D Project view.

9.5 Bottom Pane
A Bottom pane is displayed when from the 2D or 3D view the Hide / Show
Bottom pane is selected (see page 282). After 10 seconds the bottom
pane automatically hides.
The bottom pane displays a:
 Message Window.
The message window display all PDS view relevant information,
errors and / or status messages.
Figure 9-10 Messages
 Connections Window.
The connection window displays all PDS connection processes
with the local computer. This includes the Acquisition,
Presentations, Remote presentations and the Clock Sync.
Figure 9-11 Connections.

10 Editors
10.1 Introduction
Editors are used to edit or create data files. Each data type has its own
editor.
This chapter describes the :
 Tide station Editor (see page 204)
 Clipping Polygon Editor (see page 218)
 Design Profile Template Editor (see page 219)
 Profile Design model Editor (see page 220)
 GeoTIFF Images Raster Editor (see page 223)
 Sound Velocity Profile Editor (see page 225)
The next editors are described in a separate chapter of this manual:
 Guidance Editor (see page 167
 Grid Model Editor (see page 628)
 Create Model Editor (see page 619)
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Editors  203

10.2 Tide Station Editor
This editor is opened by double clicking on an existing tide station or by
selecting the option New File in the context menu of the branch ‘Tide
Stations’ from the Project tab page of the PDS Explorer (see page 251).
Figure 10-1 Tide Station editor
Before the tide station can be used, the tide station has to be setup. Click
on to setup the information for the tide station.
Figure 10-2 Tide Station information
If more than one tide station will be used the location (Easting and
Northing) has to be entered. The ‘Station ID’ is only relevant if multiple
tide gauges are used with a tide gauge driver that supports multiple tide
gauges. With the ID, PDS can relate the tide data from the incoming
message to the right tide station.
The gaps between two tide values in the predicted tide data will be
interpolated as long the gap between two tide values in the predicted tide
data is smaller then the specified maximum gap. The value for the
maximum gap has to be entered in seconds.
204  Editors Teledyne PDS - User Manual

The maximum extend is the time in seconds that PDS will extrapolate the
tide data after a tide value. This can happen after the last tide value in the
file or when the gap is bigger than the maximum gap.
After the tide station information is set, it will depend on how the tide
station is used in PDS what the next step will be. If in the Acquisition
online tide gauges are used the editor can be closed. If predicted tides will
be used or the tide data will be applied in the Editing, then the tide data
has to be imported in the editor (see the option Import Tide Values
below).
Available tide will be indicated in the calendar to the left by highlighting
Select multiple days by and underscoring the dates where tide is available. Selecting a date will
dragging the mouse over show the tide of that day in the graph. Selecting multiple days in the
the days. calendar expands the tide graph accordingly.
10.2.1 Tide Station Editor Toolbar and Context

Menu
Right clicking in the graph gives the context menu. In the context menu all
the options from the toolbar and some extra options are available.
Zoom Horizontal ( )
Zoom in/out horizontal, the vertical is fixed.
Zoom Vertical ( )
Zoom in/out vertical, the horizontal is fixed
Zoom Window, Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom extents applies to the selected day(s) only.
Selector ( )
Toggles the ‘Selector’ on/off.
Channel Partition
With multiple tide stations in the editor the data can be displayed as
stacked views or the data can be overlaid.
Set Y Scale
The low and high value of the tide data can be set.
Enable Channel Control ( )
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager. The Channel Manager allows editing the
properties of the current tide station and adding other tide stations
(e.g. for comparing purposes).

Edit Tide Values ( )
Opens the Edit Tide Values editor where the tidal data can be viewed
and modified.
Figure 10-3 Edit Tide Values editor
In the table new entries can be made at the bottom of the table. After
added an entry the tidal data will be order according the date and time.
By double clicking on a cell in the date column the date can be
modified. The cell will change to and the date can be
change with the arrows on the right or manually. Also by double on the
cell in the time column the time can be modified. The data in the tide
column can be modified when the cell is selected.
The time can be entered as hours (hh), hours minutes (hh:mm) or as
hours minutes seconds (hh:mm:ss). Below is displayed what can be
entered in the cell of the time column and what the time will be in the
column.
Entered value Displayed time
1 00:01:00
12 00:12:00
123 01:23:00
1234 12:34:00
12345 12:34:05
123456 12:34:56
With at the bottom of the editor a empty row is added to enter

one tide value to the table. By default the actual date is entered, the
time and tide value has to be entered by the user. The date can be
modified as explained above.

With multiple tide values can be entered with a fixed time
interval. A dialog will be opened where the start time, end time and
time increment can be set.
Figure 10-4 Time Range Setting dialog
 Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Enter the date for which a tide values have to be added. Enter a start
time, end time and an interval (increment). Click on to accept
the settings. In the table the time is already filled in according the
start/end time and increment from the dialog. Only the tide values have
to be entered manually.
With one or more rows in the table can be deleted. Use the
Ctrl and Shift key to select more than one row. It is also possible to
drag with the mouse over the rows to select the rows that have to be
deleted.
Import Tide Values ( )
Import tide data from ASCII files.
Figure 10-5 Import window for ASCII tide files

 Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Select the long date/time format and give the order of the data by
selecting the date, time and tide with the separator between the data
fields. For the date and time a format and a separator have to be
selected. If everything is set, click on to import the ASCII data
and the data will be displayed in the editor. In the group ‘Tide Values’
of the Explorer one or more PDS tide files are added with the name of
the station, the year and the month. PDS will create for each tide
station a separate PDS tide file per month.
The following separators are supported:
When in a file the GPS has Import PDS Log Tide Values ( )
been in RTK mode for at Import tide from PDS data files. PDS will find all PDS data files in the
least one minute, and over
current project from all log data folders. Make a selection of the PDS
20 valid real time Z values
are available in that files to extract tide data from. Next select the device that has tide
minute, then the tide list is values, e.g. the GPS RTK positioning system.
appended with one mean
tide over the minute. Generate Report ( )
Generation of a tide report. When the option View report is checked
the report is opened in the PDS Reporter where it can be saved with
an user defined name. If not checked the report will be saved as a
PDF file with a default filename in the ‘Reports’ branch of the PDS
Explorer’s ‘Other’ tab page.
Figure 10-6 Tide Station Report generator
Enter a start and an end date and when View report is checked, the
report is opened automatically after generation. The width and height
of the images (graphs) can be set in the appropriate windows.
Channel Properties
The Properties window for the active tide station data will be opened.
Properties
The Properties window for the Tide Station editor will be opened.

10.2.2 Using a Tide Station in Realtime
This section lists the steps to use a tide gauge station during Acquisition.
Step1
Add a tide station to the project by the PDS explorer.
Right click in the PDS explorer at the ‘Tide stations’ branch.
Select in the context menu ‘New File’.
Give a file name and click ‘Save’.

The tide station editor opens.
Click the ‘Info’ button.
Fill in the parameters as described in section ‘Tide Station Editor’ (see

page 204).

Step 2.
Add a tide gauge to the vessel configuration's equipment list with the
correct I/O settings. (In this example, a Vyner Mk1 connected to COM
port 1).
Select the correct device from the vessel configuration’s ‘Tide gauge’
group.
Step 3.
Select the tide station for the associated tide gauge device.
Double click at the device.

The Device properties window opens.
Select for the tide station the corresponding station from the list.
Step 4.
Create an Advanced Tide computation.
Click ‘Advanced’ in the ‘vessel configuration>Computations’.

Select ‘Tide Computation’ and click ‘Add>’.
Enter a name and click OK.

The properties window opens.
Select for the ‘Tide Station Name’ the associated tide station from the
list.
Select for the ‘Tide Reduction Computation Mode’: ‘Single tide station’
when one tide station is used. Select ‘Multiple Tide Stations’ or ‘Tide
stations along route’ when more tide stations are used, or tide station
along a route are used. In this case, the associated tide stations and
route must be selected additionally in the properties. (The route must
be available/added to the project as well.)

Click ‘OK’ when finished.
Close the advanced computations dialog window.

Step 5.
Set primary Tide Data source.
Select ‘Tide’ in the ‘Data Sources’ of the vessel configuration.
Select (by the arrow keys) the created advanced computation as the
primary data source.
The standard tide computation should not be used as primary
computation as this computation do not include tide station offsets and
cannot be used in tide stations along route and multiple tide station
modes.
Click ‘OK’ when finished.

Step 6.
Considerations.
The height source in the Reference Point computation of the position
source should be set to ‘Tide’.
Double click at the positioning device’s ‘Reference point computation’
to open the properties and select Height Source: ‘Tide’.
As an advanced tide computation was made the data can be checked

in the raw data view at the ‘User computations>Tide Computations’
node.

10.3 Clipping Polygon Editor
The Clipping Polygon editor opens by double clicking on an existing
clipping polygon or by selecting the option New File in the context menu
of the branch ‘Clipping Polygons’ from the PDS explorer’s ‘Project’ tab
page (see page 239).
Figure 10-7 Clipping Polygon editor
A clipping polygon is always closed (lines connected). The clipping

polygon editor automatically close (connect lines) the polygon, the user
do not have to add the first point again to close the polygon. The (red) dot
in the editor is the selected point from the table at the top.
Click on to add a new point to the table. The coordinates can be
added in the upper right corner of the editor. Click on to select the
coordinate type, grid or geographical coordinates. Click on to
insert a point above the selected point in the table and click on to
delete the selected point in the table.

From the Options menu additional functions are available:
Figure 10-8 Polygon Editor - Options menu
Options > Electronic Chart…

Select a PDS1000 electronic chart as background.
Options > Grid Properties
Select the grid to be shown in the view of the editor: Grid Crosses,
Solid Line Grid, Dotted Line Grid or a Scale Bar. The grid can be with
or without a grid annotation.
Options > Import from ASCII…
An ASCII import wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings. The ASCII file should contain the X and Y coordinates
of the clipping polygon.
Options > Import from DXF…
Select a DXF file with a polygon and the polygon will be imported in
the Clipping Polygon editor.
Options > Export to DXF
The clipping polygon as displayed in the editor will be exported to a
DXF file. The DXF file will be stored in the project.
10.4 Design Profile Template Editor

A design profile template is a 2D shape of a profile. In the profile design
model editor a template can be combined with a route or runlines to
generate a profile design model.
The Design Profile Template Editor is opened by double clicking on an
existing design profile template or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the ‘Design Profile template’ branch from the PDS
Explorer’s - Project page (see page

Figure 10-9 Design Profile Template editor
Create a new template. Give a name for the new template and add the
offsets and heights.
Rename the selected template.
Delete the selected template.

If the design profile template is used in combination with a runline, the
zero offset is in the center of the runline. The start of the runline has a
negative offset and the end a positive offset.
If the design profile template is used in combination with a route, the zero
offset is on the route. The profiles are perpendicular to the route with on
the left side of the route a negative offset and on the right side a positive
offset.
Click on to delete the selected offset and the height.
10.5 Profile Design Model Editor

The design model editor is opened by double clicking on an existing
profile design model or by selecting the option New File in the context
menu of the branch ‘Profile Design Models’ in the ‘Project’ tab page of the
PDS Explorer (see pagexx).
The design profile template can be linked to runlines or to KP positions on
a route. Both the options have their own Profile Design Model Editor.
10.5.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines

Figure 10-10 Profile Design Model Editor with runlines
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
A template with the runlines can be added to the model. An Add to

Design Model window will be opened where the template and the
runlines can be selected.
Figure 10-11 Add a template to a design model
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.
The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template

Editor (see page 219).
The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template.

The plan view and the template view have their own context menu. In
both context menus the standard zoom functions Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Zoom Window and Zoom Extents are available.
10.5.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route
Figure 10-12 Profile Design Model Editor with a route
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
Before a design profile template can be added the right track guidance
route has to be selected. After that a template can be added with
. An Add to Design Model window will be opened where the
template can be selected.
Figure 10-13 Select a template for the profile design model

The template can be added to three different locations on the route;
Start KP, End KP or Specified KP.
If only one template is used for the whole route, it does not matter
where the template is located. The profile design model will be
generated over the whole route using the selected template.
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.
The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template

The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template.
It is possible to have different design profile templates over the route.
Locate each template on a different KP position and the model will be
generated over the route using the different templates.
Check the options Link template to route Z level when the templates have
to move up and down with the Z value of the route. This is only possible
when the route is created as a pipe / cable route (see page 168).
Check the options Show template at specified KP and give a KP value to
show in the template view the template belonging to that specified KP
value. In the plan view the template on that KP position will become red.
10.6 GeoTIFF Images Raster Editor

A GeoTIFF image is a geo referenced TIFF file. This means that the file
contains information about the location of the image.
The GeoTIFF files can be used as a background in a plan view and can
be created in the Raster Editor.
It is also possible to create Geo TIFF files from the view in the grid model
editor (see page 628) and in the plan views (see page 436)
The Raster Editor can be opened by double clicking on an existing
GeoTIFF image or by selecting the option New File in the context menu of
the branch ‘Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images’ of the Charts
tab page of the PDS Explorer (see page 257).

Figure 10-14 Raster Editor with a satellite image
The only way new files can be created is through the option New File in
the Explorer. After a filename is given the user can import a TIFF or a
JPG file to create a GeoTIFF file.
In the Raster Editor are two methods available to create from the
imported file a GeoTIFF file.
Tiepoint/Scale Mode
If one of the corners of the image is known in local grid coordinates
enter the pixel X and Y and the grid coordinates directly in the left
pane.
If not, select one location in the image that is known in local grid
coordinates. Use the zoom in and zoom window functions to get a
clear picture of the location, double click with the mouse on the
location and enter the right grid coordinates for that location.
Figure 10-15 Enter the local grid coordinates for the selected location
After that enter a scale X and scale Y in m/pixel to define the size of
the image.
Calibration Point Mode
For this mode two points have to be known in the image with local grid
coordinates. Enter the grid coordinates directly in the left pane or
select the option Calibration Point 1, double click with the mouse on

the known location in the image and enter the grid coordinates as
shown above. Repeat this for Calibration Point 2.
If one of the modes is finished, click on to save the image as a
GeoTIFF file. During the saving of the file the calibration point will be
recalculated to the bottom right corner and top left corner of the image.
This means when the saved image is opened again in the Raster Editor
the calibration points will be always 0,Y and X,0 as shown in the example
above, where X and Y represents the size of the image in number of
pixels.
10.7 Excluded Areas Editor

The Excluded Areas editor opens by double clicking on an existing
excluded area file or by selecting the option New File in the context menu
of the branch ‘Excluded Areas‘ in the Advanced tab page’s Project branch
of the PDS Explorer (see page 274).
Figure 10-16 Exclude Areas editor with one excluded area
Click on to add a new exclude area to the list. Check the option
Polygon or Route and select the right clipping polygon or route with a
tolerance. The clipping polygon or route should exist in the project.
10.8 Sound Velocity Profile Editor

The Sound Velocity Profile Editor opens:
 In the PDS Explorer; double clicking on an existing sound
velocity profile of the branch ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ in the
Project branch of the Other tab page (see page 250).
 In the PDS Explorer; selecting the option New File in the context
menu of the branch ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ in the Project
branch of the Other tab page (see page 250),
 in Realtime Acquisition from the Tools>Import sound velocity
profile menu,
 in Realtime Acquistion, by pressing the toolbar button Multibeam
filters and sound velocity.

Figure 10-17 Sound Velocity Profile Editor
When a new sound velocity profile is created the editor will be empty. The
table of the profile can be filled manually or an ASCII file with sound
velocity data can be imported with the option . Before this button
is opened to select the type of import the user has to select which part of
the data has to be imported; the upcast, the downcast or both.
The units for the four columns are not depending on the settings in the
Project Configuration (see page 71). The depth is always in meters, the
velocity is in m/s, the temperature is in °C and the salinity is in parts per
ton (ppt).
To add a SVP value to the table, fill in a depth value on the empty place
at the bottom of the depth column. When the next column is selected the
depth values will be automatically sorted.
A depth value can be deleted by selecting one of the values in a row and
click on . The whole row will be removed from the table. With
the Ctrl-key multiple values can be selected and with multiple
rows can be deleted.
If the data density is too dense, a reduction of the data is possible with
 . With too dense data it will take more time to do the

computations for the ray-bending.
The values for the velocity can be modified by adding an offset. This way
an imported profile that is not fully correct, which could be caused by a
wrong SVP probe, can be used. Add a value behind Sound velocity offset.

10.8.1 Import an ASCII Sound Velocity File
The following table lists the steps to import an ASCII sound velocity file.
Ste Action
p
1 Open the Other tab page of the PDS explorer and Right click
at the ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ branch.
2 Select in the context menu ‘New File’.
3 Enter a name and click ‘Save’.

Ste Action
p
4 Click ‘Import’.

Ste Action
p
5 The ASCII Import wizard starts.
a. Click to browse to the required ASCII file.

b. Click to select a predefined import format:
Comma Delimited
ASCII file where the columns are separated with a
comma. The data has to be in the same order as in the
table of the editor.
Space Delimited
As above but with a space as seperator.
Tab Delimited
As above but with a tab as seperator.
SVP 20, Format String
The sound velocities taken with the SVP20 probe and
saved as a *.log file can be imported directly in the
editor.
Be aware the comma delimited, space delimited and tab
delimited ASCII files import only the depth and the
velocity. Use the ‘ASCII import wizard’ if also the
temperature and salinity have to be imported. (See step
c.)
c. Alternatively select ‘Use wizard settings’ to start the
ASCII wizard to import a file. Refer to chapter ASCII
Import Configuration on page 276 for a description of the
ASCII import wizard.
10.8.2 Editing SVP File

The sound velocity profile data can be modified by changing the values in
the table or by moving the points in the graph.

Select in the table the cell that has to be modified and enter a new value.
If the cell is a depth then the table will be sorted on depths after the new
value is entered.
Move the mouse in the view on the right side and the cursor will change
to a cross with a line segment. Select one of the white squares in the
graph and drag the point. During dragging the point, automatically the
depths are sorted. When the dragging is stopped the table will be
updated. With undo ( ) and redo ( ) the modifications done in the
graph can be undone or redone.
The actual sound velocity profile data can be compared with other sound
velocity profiles. In the Layer Control ( ) a sound velocity profile layer
can be added in where an different sound velocity profile can be selected.
Each added sound velocity profile will be colored automatically and the
file name will be displayed with the same color in the top left corner of the
view.

11 Explorer
11.1 Introduction
The PDS Explorer is integrated in the PDS Control Center. The Explorer
is used for:
 File management.
Teledyne PDS (PDS) uses different types of data files to store the
relevant information and settings. All these data files are
accessible through the Explorer.
 PDS project selection.
All projects available in the PDS project folder are listed in the
Explorer and are selectable.
 Start the new PDS project wizard.
The new PDS project wizard is started from the Project List tab
page’s context menu.
 Copy a PDS project.
It is possible to copy a backup of a project from the Projects tab
page.
 Project pre-setup visualized in the Explorer 2D or 3D view. The
files are also placed in the 2D and 3D plan views Project Layer.
 Background chart selection for the 2D and 3D plan views and the
editors.
The PDS Explorer consists of:

 A Tree view.
 A Globe view, 2D or 3D project view.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Explorer  231

Figure 11-1 Explorer
11.2 Tree View

All projects and files used by PDS are available from the tree view. It is
possible to drag and drop files in or from the tree view.
The information of the tree view is divided in six and optional seven tab
pages:
 Project List
 Project
 Charts
 Geoid Models
 Log Data
 Other
 (Optionally) Advanced
A directory structure is made in the tab pages with a branch (node) for
each data type. The branch with a plus sign in front of a side branch
(sub node) contain data files. Click on the plus sign or double click on
the branch to expand the contents and make the data files accessible.
With a double click on one of the data files the specific editor for that data
file will be opened. Not all the data files have an editor. Refer to chapter
Editors on page 203 for a description of the PDS Editors.
It is possible to display for some files of the explorer a tooltip. The tooltip
contains information about the file.
232  Explorer Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Figure 11-2 Tooltip
Hoover the mouse over the file to display the tooltip.

It is possible to enable or disable this feature in the Explorer view tab
page from the Control Center menu Tools>Options…
Figure 11-3 Show tooltip option

11.2.1 Project List Page
11.2.1.1 General
The Projects List page lists all available PDS projects from the selected
PDS project path.
A project is selected by ticking the radio button in front of the project. Only
one project can be selected at a time. From the context menu another
project path is selected or the new project wizard is started.
Figure 11-4 Projects Lists page
11.2.1.2 Context Menu -Project List Page

Right click in the root folder of the Project List page to open the context
menu.
Figure 11-5 Context menu PDS Project tab page
The next table lists the menu options of the Project List page context
menu.
New Project… Select this menu option to open the new project
wizard. With the new project wizard a new project is
created. Refer to chapter ‘The New Project Wizard’
on page 69.
Select Project Select this menu option to set or change the path
Path… (location) of the PDS projects.
Only the PDS projects on this location are listed in
the PDS Projects page.
The same applies for the Projects common files path.
By default this is on the same location as the PDS
project.

Create Project Select this menu option to create a PDS project from
From Log Data… a selected PDS log data file.
Update file Select this menu option to update for all listed PDS
Visualization info projects the GPS track files. The GPS tracks are
for all projects. showed in the globe and project view.
Recreate file Select this menu option to (re)create for all listed
Visualization info PDS projects the GPS track files. The GPS tracks
for all projects. are showed in the globe and project view.
Show details Select the show details option to show from the
projects the: date created, date modified and the
application type.
11.2.1.3 Context menu – Project

Right click on a project from the list to open the context menu for the
project.
Figure 11-6 Project Context menu
The next table lists the menu options of the project context menu.
Go To Press this menu option to zoom in to the project on
the globe view.
Update file Select this menu option to update for the PDS project
Visualization info the GPS track files. The GPS tracks are showed in
the globe and project view.
Recreate file Select this menu option to (re)create for the PDS
Visualization info. project the GPS track files. The GPS tracks are
showed in the globe and project view.

11.2.2 Project Tab Page
Figure 11-7 Project tab page
11.2.2.1 General
The Project tab page shows the folder tree with all the branches
containing the settings and data files for the selected project. These files
are project related and apply only for the selected project (See Project
List tab page on page 234 to select a PDS project).
The selected files (with checkbox) are displayed in the 2D or 3D Project
view. On this way it is quickly seen by the user how the project is set up.
The selected files are also added to the Acquisition and Presentation’s 2D
and 3D view’s project layer. Files without a checkbox cannot be displayed
in the 2D or 3D project view and are not added to the view’s Project layer.
Most of the modules in PDS (e.g. the editor) read the information from the
Project tab page when the module is started. If modifications are made to
the files in the project database, the module have to be closed and started
again before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different branches of the Project Tab page are described in the next
sections. The availability of specific branches depends of the project
application type.
11.2.2.2 Context Menu – Project Tab Page

Right click on the Project tab page to open a context menu.
Figure 11-8 Context menu Project tab page

The next table lists the menu options of the Project tab page context
menu.
Menu Option Description
Add Files Add a file to the selected tab page (files can
also be dragged into the explorer and will be
placed automatically in the correct folder).
Copy Project Copy the project to a different location on the
pc.(only available from the project or
Advanced tab)
Expand all Folder Expand all folders of the selected tab page.
Collapse all folder Collapse all folders of the selected tab page.
Deselect all files Deselect all selected files of the selected tab
page.
Show details Show the file sizes and the date a file is
modified.
Properties Show the file properties of the project file.
11.2.2.3 Context Menu – Files and Branches

Besides the context menu of the tab page also a context menu is
available for a selected branch and for a selected file. It depends of the
selected branch or file which menu options of the context menu are
available.
Refer to the description of the branch for the branch’s context menu (see
next sections).
The next table lists the menu options of the file context menu. The
available menu options depends of the selected file. Right click on a file to
open the file’s context menu.
Figure 11-9 Examples of context menu from a selected file
File Context menu option Description

Edit Edit the selected file. The editor of
the corresponding file format
opens. (The Edit menu is hidden
when for the file no editor is
available.)
View Opens text editor (Notepad)
including the alphanumerical
information of the file contents.

(The View menu is hidden when it
is not possible to open the file with
notepad.)
Go To The 2D view or 3D view will zoom
to the extent center of the file
information. A locator will be visible
at this location and automatically
hides after 10 seconds.
Duplicate Make a copy of the file. The copy is
placed automatically in the folder.
Export to ASCII… Export the file to a ASCII TXT file.
(Not for all file types available.)
Export to DXF… Export the file to a DXF file. The file
is stored in the project. It is
possible to export multiple files.
(Not for all file types available.)
Properties Lists the properties of the file.
Delete Delete the file. Only files which are
not selected (unchecked checkbox)
can be deleted.
Rename Rename the file. (Only not selected
files can be renamed)
11.2.2.4 3D Models
This branch includes 3D models that can be used as a guidance in the
project (see page 170).
Right click on the ‘3D Models’ branch to open its context menu.
Figure 11-10 Context menu 3D Models
The next table lists the menu options of the 3D Model branch’s context
menu.
New File Select this menu to create a new
3D model with the 3D Model
editor.
Add Files Select this menu to add a camera
image file from a selectable
location.
Deselect All Files Select this menu to deselect all the
camera image files.
Refer to section Context Menu – Files on page 237 for a description of the
context menu for the files.

Refer to chapter 3D Design Model editor on page 171 for a description of
the 3D Design Model editor.
11.2.2.5 Camera Images Databases Files

This branch includes the icon images data as generated in PDS.
Right click on the ‘Camera Images Databases files’ branch to open the
context menu.
Figure 11-11 Context menu – Camera Images Databases files
The next table lists the menu options of the branch context menu.
Add Files Select this menu to add a camera
image file from a selectable
location.
camera image files.
The only place where images can be attached to the icons are in the Plan
View – Survey Coverage and in the Plan View – Navigation. To each icon
image location one image can be attached. See for more information the
option Add Icon Image in the chapter Plan View – Toolbar and Context
Menu on page 437.
11.2.2.6 Clipping Polygons

This branch includes the defined polygons.
Right click on the ‘Clipping Polygons’ branch to open the branch’s context
menu.
Figure 11-12 Context menu clipping Polygons
polygon with the Clipping Polygon
Add Files Select this menu to add a polygon
from a selectable location.
polygons.
Import from DXF Select this menu to import a dxf
drawing from a selectable location
as a polygon.

A clipping polygon defines the borders of an area and can be used for
various purposes in PDS.
 Make a condition check on the logging (see page 158).
 Import a plane in the 3D model (see page 171).
 Create a work area (see page 174).
 Create a restricted area (see page 175).
 Create an excluded area (see page 274).
 Use as a boundary in the create model editor (see page 619).
 Use as a boundary in the grid model editor (see page 628).
A clipping polygon is created or edited with the Clipping Polygon editor.

The clipping polygon editor opens by double clicking on an existing
clipping polygon or by selecting the option New File in the context menu
of the folder
 Refer to chapter Editors for a description of the Clipping Polygon Editor

on page 218.
11.2.2.7 Color Tables

The color tables that can be used for the grid models, the 3D
views, in the plotting, etc.
Color tables are used to show measured values in different
colors in the various models and views.
Right click on the ‘Color Tables’ branch to open the context menu.
Figure 11-13 Context menu Color Tables
The next table lists the menu options of the context menu.
color table with Color Table
Generator.
Add Files Select this menu to add a color
table from a selectable location.
The color table generator can be opened by double clicking on an existing
color table, by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the file
group ‘Color Tables’ in the Explorer and by double clicking on the color
table on the right side in the views.
The color table of the bottom classification, [bottom-type], cannot be
opened in the color table generator. This type cannot be generated, only
the color and the label can be modified (see page 244).

The dredge differential color table has a special color table generator to
set the colors for the under- and overdredge limits (see page 244).
 Color Table Generator
Figure 11-14 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and
-5) to the existing color table
Add the values for the maximum and minimum range, select the number
of colors or the step size and click on to create a color table. With
a color table can be added to the existing color table.
If the option is selected the generator will use the whole color spectrum
to generates the colors. It will start with the selected color for the
maximum value and will stop with the color of the minimum value. With
the option only the two selected colors will be used to generate the
color table. The color starts with the selected color for the maximum value
and will stop with the color of the minimum value and for the intermediate
values the colors will run into one another.
The items in the color table generator are:
Name
This is the name of the color table.
When the Color Table generator is opened in a view or editor this option
becomes active and the user can select a different color table.
Generate range
Maximum
Select a color for the maximum value and add a maximum value
for the color table. All the values above the maximum value get
the same color as the maximum value.
Minimum
Select a color for the minimum value and add a minimum value
for the color table. The minimum value color will be used for all
the values below the minimum value.
Number of colors
Add a number and the Color Table generator will automatically calculates
the step size.

Step size
Add a step size to get a fixed interval and the Color Table generator will
automatically calculates the number of colors.
Mode
With this option the whole spectrum will be used to go from the
color of the maximum value to the color of the minimum value.
Figure 11-15 Color table with the option from 0 to -2
With this option only the colors of the maximum and

minimum value and the colors that run into one another will
be used.
Figure 11-16 Color table with the option from 0 to -2
A color table will be generated using a part ( )or the whole ( ) spectrum
started with the maximum value and stops with the minimum value. The
number of colors will depend on the number of colors or the step size that
is selected.
Set the maximum, minimum, number of colors or step size and a color
table will be added to the existing color table using the selected settings.
The values from the existing color table that overlaps with the added color
table will be overwritten.
Range colors

The maximum color becomes white and the minimum color
becomes black. The colors in between are divided in grey scales.
The maximum color becomes purple and the minimum color

becomes red. The colors in between are divided in the colors of
the spectrum.
The maximum color becomes yellow and the minimum color

becomes brown. Below the minimum the color is black. The will
be used to color the color table for the sidescan or snippets data.
The maximum and minimum colors will be reversed.
Select one of the colors on the left side and click on .A

Color Table Entry dialog will be opened where the color and the
minimum value for the selected color can be changed. Click on
to confirm the change and a star will be placed in the
edited color as an indicator (see below).
Figure 11-17 Color Table Entry
When the color table is

generated again the edited Add a new color and a minimum value to the color table. The
values with a star will be same Color Table Entry dialog as above will be opened. The
kept in the color table. added color gets a star, the same as above.
Figure 11-18 Value -1.10 is added to the color table
Will delete the selected color from the table.
Will delete the whole color table.

,
The colors in the table can be moved up and down.

Will show only the color table, there will be no buttons to
generate a color table.
Will show the Color Table generator again. This button appears
when is used to show only the color table.
 Color Table for Bottom Classification
Figure 11-19 Color table for bottom classification
In this color table only the colors and the text of the labels can be
modified. Click on if it is needed to reset the colors and text
to the default settings.
Double click on one of the colors and the Color Table Entry dialog
will be opened.
Figure 11-20 Color Table Entry for the bottom classification color table
For the values between the minimum and maximum value as

displayed on top of the dialog a different color can be selected and
another text can be entered.
 It is not possible to modify the range and the steps for this type of
color table.
 Dredge Differential Color Table

Figure 11-21 Dredge differential color table generator
The dredge differential color table generator has three section;

above underdredge limit, below overdredge limit and between
the two limits. For each section the number of colors and
maximum/minimum color can be set. The edges between the
section are defined by the underdredge limit and overdredge
limit.
In the Acquisition the underdredge limit and overdredge limit will
be automatically synchronized with the settings of the design
model. So when the limits for the design model are specified as 1
and -1 then the limits in the color table will be changed from 0.5
to 1 and from -0.5 to -1. The color scheme stays the same.
See the 3D View – Online Dredge on page 329 for an example of
the dredge differential color table.
11.2.2.8 Design Profile Templates

This branch includes the templates that can be used for creating 3D
models in the project.
Right click on the ‘Design Profile Templates’ branch to open the branch’s
context menu.
Figure 11-22 Context menu Grid model folder
The next table lists the menu options of the design Profile Templates
Model branch context menu.

profile template with the Profile
Design Model editor(see page
Add Files Select this menu to add a profile
template from a selectable
location.
profile template files.
A design profile template is a 2D shape of a profile. In the Profile Design
Model editor a template can be combined with a route or runlines to
generate a profile design model (see page 220)
The Design Profile Template Editor is opened by double clicking on an
existing design profile template or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu.
Refer to chapter Editing on page 219 for a description of the Design
Profile Templates Editor.
11.2.2.9 Grid Models

This branch includes the defined grid models that are created or
generated in the project.
Right click on the ‘Grid Models’ branch to open the branch’s context
menu.
Figure 11-23 Context menu Grid model folder
The next table lists the menu options of the Grid Model branch context
menu.
grid model with the grid model
Add Files Select this menu to add a grid
model from a selectable location.
grid model files.
A Grid Model is created or edited with the Grid Model Editor. The Grid
Model Editor opens by double clicking on an existing grid model or by
selecting the option New File in the context menu of the folder.
 Refer to chapter Grid Model on page 628 for a description of the Grid
Model Editor.

11.2.2.10 OpenGIS KML Encoding Standard (KML) files
The KML files are point cloud files with the Z values of a grid model.
These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid Model Editor
(see page 645). The KML files can be opened in an OpenGIS system, i.e
Google Earth.
The KML files contain the X and Y which are converted to WGS’84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS’84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The Z
value is the value of the selected data type of the grid model.
Right click on the ‘OpenGIS KML Encoding Standard (KML) files’ branch
to open the context menu.
Figure 11-24 Context menu
The next table lists the menu options of the branch’s context menu.
file.
Add Files Select this menu to add a file from
a selectable location.
11.2.2.11 OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ)

files
The KMZ files contain a compressed GeoTIFF file representing a grid
model. These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid Model
Editor (see page 645). The KMZ files can be opened in an OpenGIS
system, i.e. Google Earth.
Right click on the ‘OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ) files’
branch to open the context menu.
file.
11.2.2.12 Placement Points

The created vessel placement points which can be used as a guidance in
the project (see page 176).

11.2.2.13 Profile Design Models
This branch includes the profile design model files created or generated in
the project.
Right click on the ‘Profile Design Models’ branch to open the branch’s
context menu.
Figure 11-26 Context menu clipping Polygons
profile design model with the
Design Profile Template Editor
(see page 219)
design model from a selectable
location.
profile design models.
A Profile Design model is a combination of a design profile template with
a route or runlines. The design profile template is generated in the Design
Profile Template Editor (see page 219). The Profile Design Model Editor
is opened by double clicking on an existing profile design model or by
selecting the option New File in the context menu of the file group ‘Profile
Design Models’ in the Explorer.
By selecting the option New File a wizard with two pages will be opened.
In the first page the new file name has to be added. In the second page
the design profile template can be linked to runlines or to KP positions on
a route. Both the options have their own Profile Design Model Editor
Refer to chapter Editors on page 220 for a description of the Profile
Design Model editor.
11.2.2.14 Restricted Areas

This branch includes all created restricted areas that can be used as a
guidance in the project (see page 175).
Right click on the ‘Profile Design Models’ branch to open the branch’s
context menu.
Figure 11-27 Context menu Restricted Areas

Menu Description
restricted area with the Restricted
Area editor (see pagexx).
design model from a selectable
location.
profile design models.
Refer to chapter Restricted Area Editor on page 175 for a description of
the Restricted Area editor.
11.2.2.15 Runlines
Refer for more information about Runlines and the Guidance Editor to the
Guidance manual from the Help>Open manuals menu.
This branch includes all created runlines that can be used as a guidance
in the project (see page 168).
Right click on the ‘Runlines’ branch to open the branch’s context menu.
Figure 11-28 context menu Runlines folder
runline file with the guidance editor
(see page 180).
Add Files Select this menu to add a runline
file from a selectable location.
runline files.
Import from ASCII Select this menu to open the
ASCII import wizard (see page
276) to create a runline file from a
ASCII file.
Import from DXF Select this menu to create a
runline file from a DXF file . From
the DXF file only the lines that
contain two points (straight lines)
can be converted to runlines. The
lines have to be of the line type
‘Line’ One runlines file is
generated which contains all the
lines from the DXF file.

Refer to section Context Menu – Files and Branches on page 237 for a
description of the context menu for the files.
Refer to chapter Guidance on page 180 or to the Guidance Editor manual
for a description of the Guidance Editor.
11.2.2.16 Sonar Targets

This branch includes all sonar targets created in the Project Configuration
(see page 77) and filled with targets in the Acquisition or Replay. See for
more information the Sonar Targets view (see page 466).
Right click on the ‘Sonar Targets’ branch to open the folder context menu.
Figure 11-29 Context menu Sonar targets folder
Add Files Select this menu to add a sonar
target from a selectable location.
sonar target files.
context menu for the files. Export to Waypoints and Export to Commas
Separated Values (CSV) are extra options in the file group context menu
of the sonar targets.
11.2.2.17 Sound Velocity Profiles

The sound velocity profiles that are created and can be used in a
multibeam or single beam survey project
Before a multibeam echo sounder survey can be carried out, a sound
velocity profile is required to correct for the sound velocity in the water. It
is also possible to have a sound velocity profile for a single beam echo
sounder survey.
The Sound Velocity Profile Editor opens:
 By double clicking on an existing sound velocity profile,
 by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the folder
‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ in the Explorer,
 by the Tools>Import sound velocity profile menu in Realtime
Acquisition,
 or by the Realtime toolbar Multibeam filters and sound velocity
button.
Refer to chapter Editor on page 225 for a description of the Sound
Velocity Profiles editor.
Right click on the ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ branch to open the context
menu.

file with the Sound Velocity Editor..
11.2.2.18 Tide Stations

This branch includes all tide stations created in the project.
Right click on the tide stations branch to open the branch’s context menu.
tide station with the Tide Station
Add Files Select this menu to add a tide
station file model from a selectable
location.
tide stations.
Refer to section Context Menu – Files on page 237.
See also the manual Tide from the Help>Open manuals menu for more
information about Tide and Teledyne PDS.
Instead of using GPS RTK as height source, one or more tide stations
can be used to calculate the absolute height or depth.
During the acquisition the tide information can come from one or more
tide gauges or from predicted tide data. If predicted tide data is used the
tide data can be imported in PDS through an ASCII file with date, time
and tide data. It is also possible to apply the tide data to the log data files
in the Editing (see page 501).
Before tide data can be applied in the Acquisition or in the Editing the tide
station with or without the tide data has to be setup in the Tide Station
editor. This editor can be opened by double clicking on an existing tide
station or by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the
folder ‘Tide Stations’.
Refer to chapter Tide Station Editor on page 204 for a description of the
tide station editor.
11.2.2.19 Track Guides Routes

Refer to the Guidance manual for more information about track guides
route files and the Guidance Editor. Manuals are available from the
Help>Open manuals menu.
The Track Guides Routes branch includes all track guides routes created
or generated in the project.
Right click on the Track Guides routes to open the folder context menu.

Figure 11-31 Context menu Track Guides routes
track guides route file with the
guidance editor (see page 180).
Add Files Select this menu to add a track
guides route file from a selectable
location.
track guides route files.
Import from ASCII Select this menu to open the
ASCII import wizard (see page 276
or the Guidance manual) to create
a track guides route file from a
ASCII file.
Import from DXF Select this menu to create a tack
guides route file from a DXF file .
From the DXF file only the
polylines can be converted to track
guidance routes. For each polyline
a separate track guidance route
will be generated (see also the
Guidance manual).
Import from GPX… Select this menu to create a tack
guides route file from a GPX file
(see the guidance manual).
Refer to section Context Menu – Files and Branches on page 237 for a
description of the context menu for the files.
11.2.2.20 User Maps

The branch ‘User maps’ includes all user maps created or used in the
project.
Right click on the branch ‘User Maps’ to open the branch’s context menu.
Figure 11-32 Context menu User Maps

user map.
Add Files Select this menu to add a user
map from a selectable location.
user maps.
The user maps are files with user objects that can be created in the plan
views. The different user objects are lines, rectangles, circles, polygons,
text and symbols (see page 440).
11.2.2.21 Waypoints
Refer to the Guidance manual from the Help>Open manuals menu for
more information about track guides route files and the Guidance Editor.
The branch ‘Waypoints’ includes all created waypoints that can be used
as a guidance in the project (see page 169).
Right click on the ‘Waypoints’ branch to open the branch’s context menu.
Figure 11-33 Context menu Waypoints folder
The next table describes the menu options of the branch context menu.

waypoint file with the guidance
editor (see page 180or the
Guidance manual.
Add Files Select this menu to add a waypoint
file from a selectable location.
waypoint files.
Import from ASCII… Select this menu to open the
ASCII import wizard (see page 276
or the Guidance manual) to create
a waypoint file from a ASCII file.
Import from GEO… Select this menu to create a
waypoint file from a GEO file (see
the Guidance manual).

Import from DXF… Select this menu to create a
waypoint file from a DXF file (see
the Guidance manual)..
Import from GPX… Select this menu to create a
waypoint file from a GPX file (see
the guidance manual).
context menu for the files. Export Waypoints to ASCII,Geo,DXF and GPX
are extra options in the file context menu of the waypoints.
11.2.2.22 Work Areas

The ‘Work Areas’ branch includes all the created work areas that can be
used as a guidance in the project (see page 174).
Right click on the Work Areas branch to open the branch’s context menu.
Figure 11-34 Context menu Work Areas folder
work area from the work area
dialog window.
Add Files Select this menu to add a work
area from a selectable location.
work areas.
11.2.3 Charts Tab Page

11.2.3.1 General
Figure 11-35 Charts tab page
The Charts tab page shows all available background charts for PDS. The
Charts Database is divided in a project common and project branch. The
project branch contains charts, converted in a project specified projection.

The project common branch contains charts, which are project
independent.
The selected charts are showed in the 2D or 3D Project view. On this way
the user quickly see what chart is used in its project.
The selected charts are also set in the project layer of the Acquisition,
Presentation and Editing 2D and 3D plan views.
11.2.3.2 Context Menu Charts Tab Page

Right click on the root folder of the Charts tab page to open the context
menu.
The next table lists the menu options of the charts tab page context
menu.
page.
modified.
11.2.3.3 Context Menu Branches and Files

available.
Right click on a branch to open its context menu.
Figure 11-37 context menu Charts tab folder(s)
The next table lists the (branch depended) menu options of the context
menu.

file in the folder.
a selectable location to the folder.
Deselect All Files Deselect all the files of the selected
folder.
Import from BSB Charts Only available for the Tagged
Image File format (GeoTIFF)
folder.
A dialog opens to select a BSB
(*.KAP) chart from a selectable
location.
The next table lists the (file depended) menu options of the context menu.
Right click on a file to open the file’s context menu.
Figure 11-38 Examples of Context menu from a selected file

View Opens text editor (Notepad)
including the alphanumerical
information of the file contents.
(The View menu is hidden when it
is not possible to open the file with
notepad.)
Duplicate Make a copy of the file. The copy is
placed automatically in the folder.
Delete Delete the file. Only files which are
not selected (unchecked checkbox)
can be deleted.
Rename Rename the file. (Only not selected
files can be renamed).
The different branches (file groups) of the Project Tab page are described
in the next sections.
11.2.3.4 Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Drawings

This folder includes all different DXF drawings used in the project. The
DXF drawing can be used as background layer or as import file in several
editors.
The DXF wireframes (e.g. shape of an excavator) that are used in the
project are available in the wireframe (DXF) Drawings folder of the

Projects Common folder of the Advanced tab page of the PDS Explorer
(see page 280).
11.2.3.5 ESRI Shapes (SHP)

This branch includes all ESRI shapes which can be added in the Plan
View – Navigation
11.2.3.6 MicroStation Design File (DGN) Drawing

This branch includes all the drawings of the MicroStation Design file
(DGN) format used in the project. The DGN drawing can be used as
background layer.
Only DGN V7 format files could be used. Used Database objects in the
DGN drawing will not be displayed in PDS.
11.2.3.7 PDS1000 Electronic Charts

This branch includes all the charts that are created with the obsolete
PDS1000 software which can be used as a layer in several views or in the
plotting.
11.2.3.8 Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images

This branch includes all Geo referenced TIFF files which are created with
the raster editor. The images can be used as background in the Plan
views and in the Grid Model Editor.
Figure 11-39 File group context menu of the Tagged Image File Format
(GeoTIFF) Images

Import From BSB Charts is an extra option in the file group context
menu of the Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images. A BSB Chart
with the extension KAP can be imported and is converted to a GeoTIFF
image.
Refer to chapter Editors on page 223 for a description of the Raster
Editor.
11.2.3.9 S-57
This branch includes all the imported S-57 charts. Charts could be
dragged and dropped into the Charts tab. The files are automatically
placed in the correct folder. Zipped folders are automatically unzipped by
PDS. Refer to section ‘Installing and using S-57 Charts’ on page 44 for a
full description of S-57 Charts in PDS.
11.2.3.10 C-MAP Databases

This branch includes all the C-map databases; the original C-Map
databases from the C-Map DVD and databases from the conversion from
S-57 to C-Map. The S-57 converted files can be used as a C-Map
database in PDS. The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific
scale. When in the views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the
chart cannot be displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level

available’ will be displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of
the charts is hatched.
From the branch’s context menu (see next picture) the menu option
Convert S-57 to C-map is available. Refer to the section ‘Convert S-57 to
C-map’ on page 258 for a description of this option.
From the branch’s context menu the menu option C-Map Chart Manager
– is available.This is the same Chart Manager as explained in the
Installation (see page 26).
Figure 11-40 C-map branch context menu
The file context menu has only two options, which are not in the standard
context menu:
Figure 11-41 File context menu of the C-MAP Databases
Set as default database – With this option the selected database can be
set as default, which means that the selected database will be used in the
C-Map layers in PDS. It is also possible with the Chart Manager from C-
Map to set a default database.
Unregister database – The selected database will be unregistered from
the available databases in the Chart Manager.
11.2.3.11 C-MAP Filters

There are three C-Map filters available; for not showing the buoys, the
buoys and beacons and the buoys, beacons and piles in the C-Map layer
(see page 34).
11.2.3.12 Convert S-57 to C-Map

The dialog to convert S-57 data to a C-Map database can be opened with
the folder context menu option Convert S-57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in the
views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
 displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level available’ will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.

Figure 11-42 Convert S-57 to C-Map dialog
Convert S-57 to C-Map

ENC root path
The location where the S-57 files are located. With the
right folder can be selected.
See Conversion to C-map with S-57 Updates on page 260 when
 next to the original file (.000) also updates (.001, .002, etc.) are
available.
SENC database destination path
The location where the converted files will be stored as a C-Map
database, this can be any folder on the computer. With the
right folder can be selected.
Database name
Enter the name for the C-Map database in which the converted S-
57 files will be stored. Click on to start the conversion.
Before the conversion can be started, an eToken dongle from C-
 Map with the permission to convert S-57 files to C-Map should be

installed!!!!
If the S-57 files are encrypted with S-63 protection then the S-63
 support option have to be filled before the conversion can be
started.
S-63 support
S-63 is an IHO standard for encrypting and securing electronic
navigational chart (ENC) data. This option is to decrypt encrypted ENC
data, authenticate and verify it in compliance with the procedures
defined in the S-63 protection scheme.
To decrypt the data an hardware ID is needed, this can be

available in the eToken dongle or can be added manually.

Figure 11-43 Store HW ID for S-63 support
The permits to decrypt, authenticate and verify the S-63 encrypted

data have to be installed before the data can be converted.
Figure 11-44 Install permits for S-63 support
A SA certificate given by C-Map has to be installed before the S-63

encrypted data can be converted.
Figure 11-45 SA Certificate information for S-63 support
Processing
Information will be displayed for each converted file.
For each file conversion a log file is generated with the conversion
information, warnings and errors. With this button the list with log files
becomes available.
Close the dialog when the conversion is finished.

Conversion to C-map with S-57 Updates

The original file has When updates for the S-57 charts are available then the updates and the
extension 000, while the original S-57 file have to be converted at the same time. The update files
updates have 001, 002, need the original file to do the conversion to the C-Map database.
etc.
The original file cannot be the old original file that is converted before;
there should be a new one next to the update files. The new original file
knows how much update files are available and need them to make the
new database.
It is possible that the update is only a new original file. Then convert only
the new original file. Keep in mind that when the conversion is started the
folder with the existing database is replaced by a new database. This
 means that for an update of some files, all S-57 files have to be converted
again to create a new C-Map database.
11.2.4 Geoid Models Tab Page
Figure 11-46 Geoid Models tab page
This tab page contains the Geoid models loaded by the user. In case a
geoid model is missing for a selected datum transformation, a message
window opens. The message window states the geoid file is missing and
refers to a website to download the geoid file. This geoid file must be
dragged and dropped to the Geoid models tab page. Zip files (*.zip) are
extracted automatically.
Select ‘Click to edit the Coordinate System’ to edit a coordinate system.
From predefined coordinate systems, only the geoid model may be
modified. The user defined coordinate systems may be modified
completely. Refer to ‘Edit Coorinate System’ on page 105.
11.2.4.1 Context Menu Geoid Model Tab page

Right click on the root folder of the Charts tab page to open the context
menu.
Figure 11-47 Context menu Geoid Model tab page
The next table lists the menu options of the Geoid Model tab page context
menu.


modified.
11.2.5 Log File Tab Page

11.2.5.1 General
Figure 11-48 Log Data Tab page
This tab page shows the logging directory, as specified in the project
configuration (see page 73), with the different logging files.
Only the file types logged in the selected project are listed in the Log Files
tab page.
Most of the logging files are identical with the file formats in the logging
page of the vessel configuration (see page 144). The PDS Grid Model,
the Production Format and the Backscatter Grid Model are not logged in
the logging directory, they are logged as grid models in the project tab
page. The DXF format will be logged in the Advanced tab page - Project
folder.
In the log data tab page is also the ‘Event Log Data’ available. In the
‘Event Log Data’ the activities per view or editor are logged in a file per
day. The information about when the view or editor is opened, closed and
what actions are done in the view or editor will be logged in these files.
The standard PDS logdata files are available in the folder PDS Log Data
and are listed per vessel. With the user defined log file names it can be
that it is not possible anymore to read information from the log file name.
If the user moves the mouse over a PDS logdata file a tool tip will be
opened with the relevant information of the PDS logdata file.
Figure 11-49 A tool tip of a PDS logdata file
Next to the information that can be available in the file name, two extra
items are available: PDS version and File version. The different file
versions are:
File version PDS version Reason modification
1.0 Before 3.4.0.0 Original
2.0 3.4.x.x & 3.5.x.x User defined log file names
2.1 ≥ 3.6.0.0. Compression of side scan, snippets
and sonar image data

11.2.5.2 Context menu Log File Tab Page
Right click on the Log Files tab page to open a context menu.
The next table lists the menu options of the Log Files tab page context
menu.
page.
modified.

selected folder or file which menu options of the context menu are
available.
Right click on a branch to open the folder context menu. It depends of the
branch which context menu options are available.
Figure 11-51 Context menu PDS Log Data folder
The next table lists the (folder depended) menu options of the context
menu.

a selectable location to the
corresponding folder item.

Deselect All Files Deselect all the files of the selected
folder.
Create Log Data File Set for This menu option is only available
selected files for the PDS Log Data folder.
A file set is created with the
selected PDS Log data files.
Right click on a file from the Log files folder to open the context menu of
the file.
Figure 11-52 Examples of context menu from a selected file
The next table lists the (file depended) contents of the file context menu.
File Context Description

menu option
Duplicate Make a copy of the file. The copy is placed
automatically in the folder.
Delete Delete the file. Only files which are not selected
(unchecked checkbox) can be deleted.
Go To The selected file is zoom extents in the view. A
locator indicates the selected file for 10 seconds.
The Go To menu option is only available when the

PDS log data file contains GPS track data.
Rename Rename the selected file.
Show log info This option is only available for the PDS logdata
files.

File Context Description
menu option
Next to the same information as given in the tool

tip it is possible in the Log File info dialog to
modify the runline name for the selected PDS log
data file. In the Plot module a profile or profiles
are plotted with the use of a runline that should be
mentioned in the log data file name.
If the PDS log data file is logged with the wrong
runline or the user wants profiles over a different
runline then it is now possible to change the
runline in the log data file. Type a new runline
name and click on to apply the new
runline name to the log data file.

View Opens a text editor including the contents of the
file.
11.2.6 Other Tab Page

The Other tab page includes:.
 Charts
o BSB Charts (KAP)
 Multimedia
o Audio Video Interleave (AVI) Files
o Bitmap (BMP) Images
o Joint Photographic Group (JPG) Images
 Report
o Comma Separated Values (CSV) Files
o Portable Document File (PDF) Files
o TPE Report data file

Figure 11-53 Other Tab page
11.2.6.1 Context Menu Other Tab page

Right click on the root folder of the Log Files tab page to open the context
menu.
Figure 11-54 Context menu Other tab page
The next table lists the menu options of the Other tab page context menu.
also be dragged into the explorer and are
Advanced tab)
modified.
11.2.6.2 Context Menu – Branches and Files

selected folder or file which menu options of the context menu are
available.
Right click on a branch to open the branch’s context menu.
Figure 11-55 Context menu folder
The next table lists the menu option of the (branch) context menu.

a selectable location to the
corresponding folder.
Right click on a file from the Other tab folder(s) to open the file context
menu. It depends of the selected file which menu options of the context
menu are available.
Figure 11-56 Examples of context menus from a specific selected file
The next table lists the (file depended) menu options of the (file) context
menu.
File Context menu Description

option
Delete Delete the file. Only files which are not
selected (unchecked checkbox) can be
deleted.
Edit Opens the corresponding editor to edit the
file.
View Opens text editor (Notepad) including the
alphanumerical information of the file
contents.
Export to GeoTIFF Export to GeoTIFF is an extra option in the

file context menu of the BSB Charts. The
BSB charts cannot be used in PDS. The file
has to be exported to a GeoTiFF
Export to Waypoints Export the file to waypoints
Export to Comma Export the file to a Comma Separated
Separated Values (CSV) Value file.
The different branches (file groups) of the Project Tab page are described
in the next sections. Right click on the branch to open the branch’s
context menu. From the branch context menu it is possible to add a file. It

is also possible to drag and drop files to the Other tab. Files will be placed
in the correct folder automatically.
Figure 11-57 Context menu folder
11.2.6.3 Charts
BSB Charts (KAP)
The raster (navigational) charts in BSB file format. The extension for the
BSB charts is KAP.
Export to GeoTIFF is an extra option in the file context menu of the BSB
Charts.
11.2.6.4 Multimedia
This branch lists the multimedia files as generated or used in PDS:
In the Plan View – Survey Coverage and in the Plan View – Navigation it
is possible to add an icon image. To each icon image location one image
can be attached, BMP or JPG image. See for more information the option
Add Icon Image in the chapter Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu on
page 437.
The Multimedia folder includes three file type branches:
Audio Video Interleave (AVI) Files
The AVI files as recorded in the Acquisition.
Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP files that are generated when a snapshot is made from a view.
Joint Photographic Group (JPG) Images
The images that are generated when a snapshot is made from a view.
Also the JPG images can be used in the plotting.
11.2.6.5 Report
This branch shows the reports files as generated in PDS. The branch
includes three sub-branches:
Comma Separated Values (CSV) Files
The CSV files that are generated in PDS.
Portable Document File (PDF) Files
The PDF files from the reports that are saved in the PDS Reporter.
TPE Report data file
Contains the text file with TPE (Total Propagation Error) results that is
generated when the Editor’s ‘Tools>Generate TPE results file’ have
been run.
11.2.7 Advanced Tab Page

11.2.7.1 General
The advanced tab page is only available when enabled from the Control
Center Tools>Options…>Explorer view menu (see the next figure).

Figure 11-58 Show Advanced tab in Explorer view
The advanced tab page contains all (advanced) files from the other tabs.
It is not possible to visualize these files in the project layer of the views
used in PDS.
It depends of the project application type if specific branches are
available.
Figure 11-59 Advanced Tab page
11.2.7.2 Context Menu Advanced Tab Page

Right click on the root folder of the Advanced tab page to open the
context menu.
Figure 11-60 Context menu Advanced tab page
The next table lists the menu options of the Advanced tab page context
menu.
also be dragged into the explorer and are


Advanced tab)
modified.

available.
Right click on a branch to open the branch’s context menu. It depends of
the branch which menu options are available.
Figure 11-61 Context menu branch
The next table lists the menu option of the (branch) context menu.
file in the folder.
a selectable location to the folder.
Right click on a file to open the file context menu.
Figure 11-62 Examples of context menus from a specific selected file
The next table lists the (file depended) menu options of the (file) context
menu.

option
Delete Delete the file. Only files which are not
selected (unchecked checkbox) can be
deleted.
Edit Opens the corresponding editor to edit the
file.

option
View Opens text editor (Notepad) including the
alphanumerical information of the file
contents.
The different branches (file groups) of the Advanced Tab page are
described in the next sections. Right click on the branch to open the
branch’s context menu. From the folder context menu it is possible to
create a new or add a file. It is also possible to drag and drop files to the
Advanced tab. Files will be placed in the correct branch automatically.
Figure 11-63 Context menu branch
11.2.7.4 Camera Images

This branch contains the advanced camera images branches.
Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP images that can be attached to the icon location in the icon
image database.
Joint Photographic Group (JPG) Images
The JPG images that can be attached to the icon location in the icon
image database.
11.2.7.5 System
This branch includes the general information for PDS. This general
information is not project related and can be used by all the projects.
Most of the modules in PDS (e.g. the Editor or Realtime) read the
information from the System branch when the module is started. If
 modifications are made to the files in this branch, the module have to be
closed and started again before the modifications are visible in the
module.
The different sub-branches of the System branch will be mentioned
below. The branches which are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will have a detailed explanation.
Application Types
The different applications which are possible with PDS.
The use of an application type is set in the dongle, so it is not
advisable to setup a project with a different application type then the
type(s) that is/are set in the dongle.
Color Maps
The four different display modes (light conditions) which are available
in the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation).

Coordinate System Databases
A new coordinate system The different databases for the coordinate systems. The
that is created through pdsgeodatabase is the database with the coordinate systems as given
New File, will be stored in by PDS and the pdsusergeobase is the database with the coordinate
the pdsusergeobase. systems made by the user. see page 87 for more information about
the coordinate system database.
Devices
The devices which are available in the Equipment page (see page
119).
Display Support Files
The files with setup information for different modules in PDS.
Dredge Status Configurations
The configuration files with dredge settings special made for Boraciet.
In these configuration files are defined which button are available in
the Manual Input – Dredge Status view (see page 384) and how the
flow will be displayed in the Dredge – SCADA view (see page 370).
These configuration files are only available for Boraciet application
types.
Formats
The formats as defined in the project configuration (see page 73).
PDS Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP files as used in the views in PDS.
Presentation Definitions
The views which can be opened in the Control Center, in the
Acquisition and/or in the Presentation.
System Files
The system files as used by PDS.
Units
The units as defined in the project configuration (see page 72).
Wave Sounds (WAV)
The WAV files for the alerts sounds as specified in the Alert Sounds
page of the Project Configuration (see page 76).
11.2.7.6 Project
This folder includes the advanced project branches.
The number of visible The files from the branches are project related and can therefore only be
folders depends on the used in the selected project.
dongle settings and the
application type. Most of the modules in PDS (e.g. Realtime and the Editor) read the
information from the project branch when the module is started. If
modifications are made to the files in the project folder then the module
 have to be closed and started again before the modifications are visible in
the module.
The different sub-branches will be mentioned below:

3D Objects
The 3D Objects file with the objects as added to the 3D Object Manager
in the Acquisition (see page 309). There will be only one 3D Objects file
per project.
Don’t rename the file otherwise the objects aren’t visible anymore in the
3D view.

Alarms
The alarm files as created in the vessel configuration. These files can only
be edited in the tab Alarms of the vessel configuration (see page 161).
Configurations
The different configurations that are created in this project. The active
configuration can also be opened with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with in the toolbar of the Control Center.
Contour Definitions
The contour definitions that can be used in the plotting.
The contour definitions are used to plot contours in the plotting.
The Contour definition generator can be opened by double clicking on an
existing contour definition or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Contour Definitions’ in the Explorer.
 Contour Definition Generator
Figure 11-64 Contour definition generator
If a new contour definition has to be generated, the left side will be

empty. Start then with or
generate a contour definition with the option or .
A contour line can be added to the list on the left side. A Contour
Properties window will be opened, where the settings for the line
can be set.
Figure 11-65 Contour Properties

Add a value for the level and select a color for the contour line.
For the line style three options are available; a continuous, a
dashed or dotted line.
Give a line width for the contour line.
 If a label with the depth value has to be plotted, check the
option Show labels.
Will delete the selected contour line.
Will edit the selected contour line. The Contour Properties

window will be opened (see above).
A contour definition will be generated based on a minimum level,

a maximum level and an interval. A Generate Contours window
will be opened.
Figure 11-66 Generate Contours
A color table will be used to generate the contours. Each value

from the color table becomes a contour line with the color from
the color table.
CUBE Models
The CUBE models as generated in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view (see page 539).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Export Files
The DXF export setting files which are created after the DXF Export
Wizard in the plot module is finished (see page 735).
With the file context menu option Edit, the DXF Export Wizard will be
opened.
Excluded Areas
An excluded area is an area that will be used to excluded areas during
the creation of a CUBE model (see page 541).
This item is only available in the multibeam application type with a specific
dongle.
An excluded area is a clipping polygon or a route with a tolerance. One
excluded area file can contain several excluded areas.
The Excluded Areas editor is opened by double clicking on an existing
excluded area file or by selecting the option New File in the context menu
of the folder ‘Excluded Areas’ in the Advanced tab page of the Explorer.
Refer to chapter Editor on page 225 for a description of the Exclude Area
Editor.
Generic ASCII (ASC) Files
All the ASCII files that are generated in the project.

GPS Exchange Format (GPX)
All the GPS Exchange Format files generated or available from the
project.
Grid Model Filters
The filters that are created in the grid model editor for the option ‘make
empty’ . See for the grid model filter dialog on page 652.
Grid Model Metadata
The grid model metadata files contain the information about the related
grid model; how it is created, which data is used, etc.
Grid Model Update Package (ZIP)
All the Grid model update package files generated or available from the
project. A grid model update package is created from the Grid Model
Editor.
Log Data File Sets
These files are the file sets that are created with the File Set Editor (see
page 493) or with the Import Utility (see page 755).
Module Configurations
The only configuration at the moment is made for a specific client and can
be used for data exchange between vessels and onshore.
Multibeam Area Filters
All the multibeam area filters that are generated in the project.
Multibeam Calibrations
The configurations of the multibeam calibrations.
Project Files
The project configuration files of the project. The project configuration
can also be opened with Edit > Project Configuration from the menu bar
or with in the toolbar of the Control Center. See for more information
on page 71.
Screen Layouts
The screen layout files as they are used in the Acquisition, the
Presentation and Editing.
Stations
The station files with a position for a range – range system.
Text (TXT) Files
The TXT files as generated in PDS.
Tide Stations
The tide stations (see page 251).
Tide Values
The monthly files belonging to the tide stations that are setup in ‘Tide
Station’.
TIN Models
The TIN models that are created in the project (see page 671).
User Interface Profiles
The UI Profiles which are used for the Control Center, the Acquisition and
the Presentation(s). These profiles contains the settings of the toolbars
used in the three windows. When the user changes one of the toolbars it
will be saved and the next time the new toolbar layout will come up.
Delete in the Explorer the UIP file of a window, if the user wants to go
back to the original (default) toolbar for that window.
User Maps
The user maps are files with user objects that can be created in the plan

views. The different user objects are lines, rectangles, circles, polygons,
text and symbols (see page 440).
User Presentation Defaults
There is only one file available, the file ‘EditorView’ and it contains all the
defaults for the editors. When in the context menu of a view the option
Save as Default is selected, the file ‘EditorView’ will be created or
updated.
Vessels
The vessel configurations which are setup in the project. See for more
information the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 111.
Volume Computations
The end area volume computations that are computed during the project
(see page 679).
11.2.7.7 Projects Common

This branch shows the file groups with the projects common information
for PDS (see page 68) and can be opened by selecting the tab Projects
Common at the top of the Explorer.
The different sub-branches of the ‘projects common files’ branch will be
mentioned below. It will depend on the application type which groups are
visible.
3D Studio (3DS) Models
3D models made in Studio. At the moment these models can be used as
3D vessel contours.
ASCII Import Configurations
The import configuration files for the import options in the following
places:
 Route Editor (see page 168)
 Runlines Editor (see page 169)
 Clipping Polygon Editor (see page 218)
 Sound Velocity Profile Editor (see page 225)
 Waypoints Editor (see page 170)
 File Coordinate Conversion in the Geo Calculator (see page
806)
In the next table the steps of an ASCII import configuration wizard are
listed. In this example to create a waypoint list.

Step Action
1 The ASCII Import wizard start with the following dialog
box.
Select in this dialog box:

a. The ASCII file to import. By clicking it is possible
to browse to this file.
b. When already an earlier ASCII import configuration
was made, it is possible to browse and select it by
clicking . Otherwise continue to c.
c. Select ‘Use wizard settings’ to generate a new ASCII
import configuration file.
Tick the ‘Save configuration as’ checkbox and enter a

name for the configuration. (In this example ‘waypoint
ascii import’). Now the created ASCII import file is saved.
It is possible to select this file the next time the ASCII
wizard starts at step 1 –c.

Step Action
3 Click ‘Next’.
In the ‘Preview data’ field the data as available from the

selected ASCII file is shown. In this example waypoint
names with its position divide by commas.
Select the file type: Delimited or fixed width.

In this example we select ‘Delimited’ as the data was
divided by commas.
Press ‘Next’ to continue the wizard.

Step Action
5
a. Select the character used as delimiter. As in this

example commas are used; ‘Comma’ is selected.
b. As the first line in the file is not containing data but
text ‘Waal 02-02-2013’, this line must be skipped.
Tick the checkbox and define the line(s) to skip. In
this example line 1.
c. Right click at the first column for a context menu.
6 Select the data type of the column. In this example

‘Name’.
7 Do the same for the other columns.
8 Click ’Finish’ to finish the wizard. The data is

imported successfully.

Step Action
Crane Configurations
The crane configuration file with the configurations for the boom, stick and
tool of the (rope) excavators as they are used in the Tools page of the
vessel configuration (see page 134).
The file contains also the pipe configurations for the suction pipes of the
trailing suction hoppers as they are used in the Tools page of the vessel
configuration (see page 141).
Draught Tables
The draught tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 143). Also the bending table and the
ballast table is incorporated in the draught table.
Events
The available events in PDS (see page 183).
 The events can also be edited in the Events page in the Configuration
(see page 83).
Export Configuration
The export configuration files as created in the Export Utility (see page
779).
Hopper Tables
The hopper tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 143).
Import Configuration
The import configuration files as created in the Import Utility (see page
755).
Numerics Pages
These are the numeric pages that are created in the Numerics – Standard
view of the Acquisition and Presentation (see page 419).
SketchUP Models
SketchUp 3D models made in SketchUp. These models can be used as
3D vessel contours.
Vessel Contours
The contours that are drawn in the vessel contour editor (see page 117).
Vessel Setups
The part of the vessel configuration with the geometry and the equipment
setup.
Wireframe (DXF) Drawings
The DXF files that are used as wireframes for the vessels and cranes.

11.2.7.8 Sonar Targets
This branch shows the sonar targets data as generated in PDS. The sub-
branches of the Sonar Targets are:
Sonar Targets
The sonar target files as created in the Project Configuration (see
page 77) and filled with targets in the Acquisition or Replay. See for
more information the Sonar Targets view (see page 466).
 Export to Waypoints and Export to Commas Separated Values (CSV)
are extra options in the file group context menu of the sonar targets.
Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images
The GeoTIFF images which are generated when a sonar target is
created.
11.3 Explorer Project 2D, 3D and Globe View
11.3.1 Introduction
It is possible to display in the Explorer a:
 2D Project view
 3D Project view
 Globe view
The project tab of the PDS Explorer is used to pre-select files for the
project. The selected files are displayed in the 2D or 3D Project view and
automatically placed in the Project layer of the Acquisition and
Presentation views.
Press the 2D or 3D view button to toggle between the 2D or 3D
Presentation view.
Figure 11-67 2D and 3D View button
 When the PDS Projects tab page is selected then the globe view is
showed instead of the 2D or 3D project view.

11.3.2 2D Project View
Figure 11-68 2D Project view
The 2D Project view shows the added data items from the tree view’s
Project tab and Chart tab in 2D.
11.3.2.1 Toolbar
The 2D view has the following toolbar.
Toolbar button Description

Press this button to toggle on or off the tree view.
Hide pane
Press this button to toggle on or off the message

and connection view. The bottom pane hides
Hide bottom pane automatically after 30 seconds.

Press these buttons to zoom in or out.
Zoom in. zoom out It is also possible to zoom by using the scroll
wheel.
Press this button to drag a window around an
area to zoom in.
Zoom window
Press this button to adjust the view such that all
the data added to the view is showed.
Zoom extents
Press this button to zoom to the previous zoom
level.
Zoom previous
Press this button to toggle on or off auto zoom
extents. When the auto zoom extents is on; then
Auto zoom extents the view is zoomed such that all data added to
the view is showed. Also when new data is added
to the view. The auto zoom extents is toggled off
when zoomed in or out manually.
Press this button to toggle on or off the locator
functionality. When the locator is turned on and
Show locator data is added to the view then the location is
showed by a locator.
Press this button to toggle on or off the
visualization of track-lines and the project extents
Show project bounding box.
extents
Press this button to toggle on or off the pan

function. When toggled on it is possible to move
Pan through the data in the view by moving the mouse
and keeping the left mouse button.
Press this button to toggle on or off the measure
function.
Measure
Click on a point in the view and draw a measure
line. The distance and bearing between the two
points is given.
Press this button to toggle on or off the interactive
selection function.
Interactive
selection The cursor change in an arrow and it is possible
to select items in the view (such as the color
table).
Press this button to toggle on or off the display of
the color table in the view.

Showcolor table
Press this button to open the layer properties
dialog.
Properties

11.3.3 3D Project View
The 3D Project view shows the added data items from the tree view’s
Project tab and Chart tab in 3D.
Figure 11-69 3D Project View
11.3.3.1 Toolbar
The 3D Project view has the following toolbar.
Figure 11-70 Toolbar 3D Project View

Hide pane

wheel.
Press this button to drag a window around an
area to zoom in.
Zoom window

Zoom extents
Press this button to toggle on or off auto zoom
extents. When the auto zoom extents is on; then
Auto zoom extents the view is zoomed such that all data added to the
view is showed. Also when new data is added to
the view. The auto zoom extents is toggled off
when zoomed in or out manually.
Press this button to toggle on or off the spotlight
function.
Show spotlight
When toggled on; the spotlight window is
displayed in the view. In this window the light
source direction is changed by moving the yellow
dot in the circle.
Press this button to toggle on or off the
visualization of track-lines and the project extents
Show project bounding box.
extents
Press this button to toggle on or off the pan

function. When toggled on it is possible to move
Pan through the data in the view by moving the mouse
and keeping the left mouse button.
Press this button to toggle on or off the measure
function.
Measure
Click on a point in the view and draw a measure
line. The distance and bearing between the two
points is given.
Press this button to toggle on or off the display of
the color table in the view.
Showcolor table
Press this button to open the layer properties
dialog.
Properties

11.3.4 Globe View
The globe view shows all the projects and the Teledyne offices on a
globe.
Hold and move the left mouse button to turn the globe. After a minute of
inactivity the globe will spin automatically.
Figure 11-71 Globe view
The next table lists the used symbols on the globe.
Symbol Description
PDS Project (From the PDS Project tab page list)
Hoover the mouse on the placemark to see the
Green project details.
placemark
Right click on the symbol to select the project.
Teledyne office.
Teledyne flag Hoover the mouse on the symbol to see the office
name.
Right click on the office symbol to see the office
details..
Selected PDS Project.

Red placemark Hoover the mouse on the placemark to see the
project details.
11.3.4.1 Toolbar
Right click on the globe to open the context menu.
Figure 11-72 Toolbar globe view

Hide pane

wheel.
Zoom extents
Press this button to toggle on or off the project
extents. The project extents are indicated with a
Show project purple colored box in the globe.
Extents
Press this button to toggle on or off the MGRS
grid in the globe.
Show MGRS grid
11.3.4.2 MGRS grid (UTM zones)

The MGRS (Military Grid Reference System) grid can be indicated on the
globe. MGRS is derived from the UTM grid.
Press the toolbar button to toggle the MGRS grid on.

Figure 11-73 UTM zones
11.3.4.3 Project Extents

The extents of the projects are indicated as a purple box on the globe.
The extents are determined with the GPS track files of the projects.
Hoover the cursor on a project; the extents of the project will be drawn
thicker.
Press the toolbar button to toggle the project extents on or off.
Figure 11-74 Project extents

11.4 Using the PDS Explorer
This section describes the general procedures to:
 Selecting a project
 Changing the project path
 Adding a file to the project or PDS
 Setting up the project
 Locate and go to data in the project view
 GPS track files
 Create a file set
11.4.1 Selecting a Project

The next table lists the steps to select a project.
Step Action
1 Open the Project List page.
2 The available projects are listed. Only projects in the

selected project path are listed (see the next section to
change the project path).
The current project path is listed in the root node.
3 Click on the radio button to select the project.
4 Alternatively it is also possible to select a project from the

Globe view.
Right click on the project place marker on the globe and
select ‘Select Project’. The place marker is red colored for a
selected project.

Step Action
11.4.2 Changing the Project Path

The next table lists the steps to change the project path.
Step Action
1 Open the Project List page.
2 Right click on the project root folder to open the context

menu.
3 Select from the menu options Select Project Path…
4 The Project path dialog opens (see next figure).

a. Press this button to open the folder selection dialog
and select the PDS project folder.
b. Tick this checkbox when Project common folder is
located in the selected PDS project.
c. Uncheck the ‘Use default’ checkbox [b] and press
this button when the PDS common file folder is
located on a different location as the PDS project
folder. The folder selection dialog opens to locate
the folder.
d. Press this button when the PDS project folder and
the PDS common folder are set.

11.4.3 Adding a File to the Project or PDS
The next table lists the steps to add a data file to the project or PDS.
Step Action
1 The PDS explorer distinguish different tab pages which
includes different branches (nodes) to place files.
The Project tab page contains the settings and data which
apply for the selected project only and are added to the
project layer in the views of the Realtime and Editing
modules.
Be aware project files are located in the project, other and
advanced tab page.
See section tree view for a description of the tab pages and
the applied branches.
2 Open the correct tab page containing the correct branch of
the corresponding file type.
3 Drag and drop a file in the Explorer. The file is placed
automatically in the correct branch.
In the next figure a grid model is dragged into the Project tab
page.
11.4.4 Setting up the Project

When all files are added to the tree view it is easy to setup the project
from the PDS explorer.
All selected files of the Project tab page and chart tab page are displayed
in the project view and added to the project layer of the Acquisition and
Presentation’s 2D and 3D views.
See the next example.
In this example grid models, runlines and background charts are added.
The added data is showed in the project view.

Figure 11-75 Project data showed in project view
The added data is also available in the project layer of the 2D plan view
survey coverage or other 2D and 3D view.

Figure 11-76 Plan view survey coverage and project layer.

11.4.5 Locate or Go To Data in the Project View
The next table lists the steps to locate a data file in the project view.
Step Action
1 Press the toolbar locator button to enable the locator.
2 Select the file.

The locator indicates the selected file in the Project view:
2D:
3 To go to the data in the view immediately:

a. Right click on the file to open the file context menu.
b. Select the menu option Go To.

The Project view zoom extents to the selected file.
(GPS track files must be available for the Go To function)
4 When the PDS project has GPS track lines it is possible to

zoom to the project on the globe. (See the next section to
create GPS track file)

11.4.6 GPS Track Files
It is possible to display GPS track files.
A project with GPS track files has a globe symbol. A project without GPS
track files have a folder symbol (see next figure).
Figure 11-77 Project with and without GPS track files
The menu option Go to from the Project context menu is not available
when the project does not contain GPS track files.
The next table lists the steps to create GPS track files in a project.
Ste Action
p
1 Right click on the project to open the context menu.
2 Select the menu option Recreate file visualization info.

3 GPS track files will be created and the symbol of the project in
the PDS Projects tab page becomes a globe.
4 The GPS tracks are displayed in the 2D and 3D Project view.
a. Green colored lines are the track lines of unselected
PDS log files.
b. Red colored lines are the track lines of selected PDS
log files.

Ste Action
p
It is also possible to do the same as described in above table for all

available projects in the PDS projects tab page. Select:
 Update PDS file visualization info for all projects to update for all
projects GPS track files.
 Recreate PDS file visualization info for all projects to (re)create
GPS track files for all projects.
Figure 11-78 GPS tracks for all projects
When a log file is created in Realtime Acquisition then automatically a

GPS track file is generated for this log file.
11.4.7 Create a File Set

It is possible to create from selected PDS Log data files a file set. By
using the GPS track lines and the Project view (see above section) it is
easy for the user to select the required PDS files for a file set.
The next table lists the steps to create a file set.
Ste Action
p
1 Select from the Log Files tab page the PDS log files. Select
the log files. (Use the Project view and the GPS track files to
select the required files.)

Ste Action
p
2 Right click on the PDS Log Data branch to open the context
menu (see next figure).
Select the menu option Create log Data File Set for selected
files.
3 The Log Data File Sets dialog opens (see next figure).
a. Enter a name for the file set.
b. Press the Save button.
4 The created file set is selectable in the PDS Editor module.

12 Configuration
12.1 Introduction
The Configuration dialog opens when from the menu bar the menu
Acquisition>Configuration is selected or the Configuration toolbar button
is pressed.
Figure 12-1 Configuration dialog
From the configuration dialog box it is possible to:

 Select a new application type,
 Select or Create a new Configuration,
 Add, remove or edit a Vessel Configuration,
 Add, remove or edit Layouts,
 Add, remove or edit Events,
 Add, remove or edit Alarms.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Configuration  301

12.2 Select a New Application Type
A new application type is selected from the drop-down list. By selecting
an application type a corresponding configuration is selected or created.
Figure 12-2 Application type
12.3 Select or Create a New Configuration

Select a new (defined) configuration from the drop-down list.
Figure 12-3 Select configuration
Press the New button to create a new configuration. The configuration

wizard opens (see page 66).
Figure 12-4 New Configuration
12.4 Add, Remove or Edit a Vessel Configuration

To add, remove or edit a vessel configuration:
1. Open the Vessels page.
2. Press the Add or Edit button to add a vessel configuration.
The vessel configuration opens (see page 111).
3. Press from the remote field Add or Edit to add or edit a
remote vessel configuration. A remote vessel configuration is
302  Configuration Teledyne PDS - User Manual

a configuration from a different vessel.
Figure 12-5 Vessel Configuration
12.5 Add, Remove or Edit Layouts

Open the Layouts page to add, remove or edit a layout (see page 82). In
common layouts are edited in Realtime Acquisition.
Figure 12-6 Layouts
12.6 Add, Remove or Edit Events

Open the Events page to add, remove or edit events (see page 183).
Figure 12-7 Events
12.7 Add, Remove or Edit Alarms

Open the Alarms page to add, remove or edit Alarms (see page 83).
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Configuration  303

Figure 12-8 Alarms
304  Configuration Teledyne PDS - User Manual

13 Acquisition
13.1 Introduction
The Acquisition in Teledyne PDS (PDS) takes care of reading the sensor
data, doing the necessary computations, and data logging. The data and
the computations are visible through a number of views, which can be
used to get information over the processes and to control the survey.
Some other views are designed to guide the vessel.
The Acquisition can be started in a simulation mode and in a realtime
mode. The simulation mode can be used to setup in the office the
different layouts for the survey and the realtime mode is the online mode
where the actual survey can be monitored and logged.
13.2 Start Acquisition

When the Acquisition is started the default or last used layout will appear
on the screen.
13.2.1 Simulation
When the equipment is not yet connected to the PDS computer the
Acquisition in simulation mode can be used to setup the different layouts
for the survey. The Acquisition in simulation mode can be opened from
the Control Center of PDS with:
 from the toolbar.
 Acquisition > Start Simulate from the menu bar.
The Acquisition in simulation mode can be stopped by selecting one of
the above mentioned actions again or by closing the Acquisition window.
13.2.2 Realtime
The Acquisition in the realtime mode can be started when the project and
a vessel configuration is created. The Acquisition in the realtime mode
can be opened from the Control Center of PDS with:
 Acquisition > Start Realtime from the menu bar.
The Acquisition can be stopped by selecting one of the above mentioned
actions again or by closing the Acquisition window.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Acquisition  305

13.3 Data Visualization
The Acquisition has a number of views to show the continuation of the
survey. The settings in the dongle and the application type determine
which views are available in the Acquisition and in the Presentation.
To avoid overcrowding the monitor screen, views can be docked (see
page 60). All views have context menus as described on page 61 and
where possible, views have a dedicated toolbar for the most common
functions.
13.3.1 Layout
When the Acquisition is started for the first time, it will have only one view,
the Messages – System Messages view (see page 387).
In the Displays window the necessary views can be added to the layout.
There are several ways to open this window:
 Select View > Displays from the menu bar.
 Click on in the toolbar.
 Select Displays in the context menu.
Figure 13-1 Context menu in the Acquisition
Figure 13-2 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views
Click on and the Add Display dialog will be opened to select a

new view. PDS gives a default name for the view, but the user can give
the view any name he wants. For information about the views see the
chapter Views on page 327.
306  Acquisition Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Figure 13-3 Add Display to add a view
In the Displays window the views can be checked on or off. This means
that the checked views will be displayed on the screen. The views that are
checked off are not removed from the layout file. It only means that these
views are not shown on the screen. A view can be removed from the
layout file by using in the Displays window.
There are also some fast methods to add views to the layout in the
Acquisition.
 Select View > Add Display… from the menu bar.
 Click on in the toolbar.
 Select Add Display in the context menu.
Figure 13-4 Add Display in the context menu
After all the wanted views are selected and placed on the right place in
the Acquisition window, with or without docking, the layout can be stored.
Use File > Save Layout As… from the menu bar to save the new layout.
To open another layout use File > Open Layout… from the menu bar and
select one of the created layouts.
With File > Save Layout As Preset the layout can also be saved as a
preset to one of the four layouts.

13.4 Acquisition Menu Bar and Toolbar
It is possible in the Acquisition window to select several options from the
menu bar or the toolbar. Below the options will be explained and it
depends on the application type and the dongle settings which options
are active.
File:
File > New Layout…
After a new name for the layout is given a new layout can be created.
As default, the Messages view is loaded in the new layout.
File > Open Layout…
An existing layout can be opened in the Acquisition.
File > Save Layout
The active layout can be saved.
File > Save Layout As…
The active layout can be saved under a different name.
File > Save Layout As Preset
The active layout can be saved as one of the 4 layouts presented by
the open layout buttons
File > Print Setup
The properties of the printer and the default printer can be selected.
File > Preview
This option is only active when the Messages – System Messages
view is open and it will give a print preview of all the messages in this
view.
File > Print…
This option is only active when the Messages – System Messages
view is open and it will print all the messages in this view.
File > Print Screen
Will directly print the screen to the default printer.
File > Save Screen…( )
The display of the Acquisition will be saved as a JPG file or BMP file.
File > Record Screen…( )
Start the recording of the display of the Acquisition as a AVI file. Click
on or select File > Stop Record Screen to stop the recording.
The AVI recording works fine for the Windows Themes ‘Windows
Classic’ and ‘Windows 7 Basic’. With the Windows Theme
‘Windows 7’ (Aero Theme) not all the views are supported. This
 results in that for instance the 3D Views and Sonar Views are
empty when the AVI is replayed.
Edit:
Edit > Events ( )
The event page of the configuration will be opened to check or modify
the events (see page 183).
Edit > Alarms ( )
The Alarms window will be opened to add a new alarm for the Status –
Alarms view (see page 480). The alarms in this dialog are related to
the configuration and not to the vessel configuration. These type of
alarms can also be added in the Configuration (see page 83).
Edit > Use Single Thread For All Comps.
If this option is checked each computation in the Acquisition will be run

in a separate thread. If the update in the Acquisition becomes too slow
then uncheck this option.
Edit > Select Active Vessel… ( )
This option is only active when more then one vessel configuration is
created. Only for the active vessel the settings can be changed in the
Acquisition.
Edit > Select Tracking Point… ( )
Select for the active vessel the tracking point that will be used for the
guidance (for example a route or a runline).
Edit > Equipment ( )
For the active vessel the equipment settings of the sensors can be
checked or modified, only when logging is off (see page 119).
Edit > Computations ( )
For the active vessel all the computations can be checked or modified,
only when logging is off (see page 128).
Edit > Data Sources ( )
For the active vessel the data sources can be checked or modified,
Edit > Simulation
The simulation settings can be modified and the simulation options to
steer the vessel are available. This options is only available in the
simulation mode.
Edit > Manual Input
If in the Equipment page (see page 119) a manual input is selected,
then with this option the right sensor can be selected and a manual
input can be given.
Edit > Remote Controls
Select a remote control for the remote towed vehicle. This remote
control starts an external program that has to be located in the PDS
program directory.
View:
View > Displays ( )
The Displays window will be opened. In this window views can be
switched on or off. Also views can be added or removed from the
layout (see page 306).
View > Add Display… ( )
The Add Display dialog will be opened to add a view to the layout (see
page 306).
View > Lock Displays
 The views in the Acquisition will be locked. The views cannot be

deleted with , it is only possible through the Displays window. The
not docked views cannot be moved or resized in the Acquisition.
View > Display Mode ( )
The light conditions of the Acquisition screen can be modified. See
also the display modes of the Control Center on page 201.
View > Alerts
The Alerts view will be opened. It can also be opened with at the
bottom on the right side in the Acquisition window (see page 346).
Open 3D Object Manager ( )
Opens the 3D Object Manager where 3D objects can be added,
modified or deleted. When a 3D object is added it will be visible in the
3D Views.

Figure 13-5 3D Object Manager
Accept Alerts (F10 or )

When alerts are viewed in the Alerts view (see page 346) then with
this option or with key F10 all the alerts in the view will be accepted.
This does not mean that the alerts are solved, they are only accepted.
Guidance:
Guidance > Guidance Settings ( )
For the active vessel the guidance can be checked or modified, only
when logging is off (see page 167).
Guidance > Select Runline… ( )
A runline can be selected as guidance for the survey (see page 314).
Guidance > Next ()
Select the next line in the runlines file as the guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Previous ( )
Select the previous line in the runlines file as the guidance for the
survey.
Guidance > Reverse ( )
Switch the start and the end of the line.
Guidance > Man Over Board ( )
When selected, an active waypoint (called MOB) will be placed on the
location of the vessel. The Plan View – Navigation, the Plan View –
Dredge Instruction and the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning will
display a bull’s eye with the MOB as center.
When deselected, the MOB is not the active waypoint anymore and
the bull’s eye is gone in the above mentioned Plan Views.
Guidance > Select Waypoint… ( )
Select a waypoint as guidance for the survey.
Guidance > New Waypoint ( )
A new waypoint can be created at the location of the tracking point.

Guidance > Update Wayline
Update the wayline from the tracking point on the vessel to the active
waypoint.
Guidance > Select Placement Point…
Select a (vessel) placement point as guidance for the survey. Select
‘None’ if the active placement point has to be cleared.
Guidance > New Placement Point ( )
A new (vessel) placement point can be created at the location of the
tracking point with the heading of the vessel.
Guidance > Select Work Areas…
Select one or more work areas from the active work areas file as
guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Enter Work Area Names
Enter the name of one or more work areas from the active work areas
file as guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Select Dredge Instruction…( )
In the Select Dredge Instruction window the user can search through
the available dredge instructions, view them and select one of the
dredge instructions as the new guidance for the survey.
Logging:
Logging > Logging Settings ( )
For the active vessel the Logging page can be checked or modified,
Logging > Prompt for log file names ( )
If this option is active then for each new log file that is created a dialog
will be opened where the user can specify the log file name. When the
log file is closed the default log file name will be overwritten by the
specified log file name.
Figure 13-6 Dialog for the log file names
Logging > Enable Data Logging (F4) ( )

The data logging can be switched on or off (see page 315).
Switch Log File ( )
When the data logging will continue in a new log file. The existing log
file will be stopped.
Logging > Enable Eventing ( )
The event logging can be switched on or off.
Logging > Enable Message Logging ( )
The message logging can be switched on or off.
Logging > Manual Event ( )
An event will be placed at the active location.

Logging > Manual Event with Comment ( )
An event will be placed at the active location and an event log entry
can be made.
Logging > Event Log Entry ( )
An event log entry ( = a comment) can be created which will be logged
in the acquisition_yyyymmdd.log file.
Tools:
Tools > Tools Settings
The Statistics Report page can be opened. For a (rope) excavator
application the crane configuration pages can be opened (see page
134).
For the trailing suction hopper application the pages for the production
parameters (see page 143), the trip registration (see page 144) and
one or two pipe configurations (see page 141) can be opened.
For the cutter dredge application the pages for the cutter configuration
(see page 136) and the production parameters (see page 143) can be
opened.
Tools > Tools Calibration
The calibration pages for the tools of the (rope) excavator will be
opened. See for more information about the calibration pages the
application manuals of the excavator (Excavator.pdf) and rope
excavator (Rope Excavator.pdf).
Tools > Select Tool
For excavator applications several different tools can be used on the
excavator.
Figure 13-7 Tool Select Dialog
This selection is identical with selecting a different tool in the crane

configuration of the Tools Settings (see above).
Tools > Measure With Dredge Tool.
For excavator applications a distance can be measured by using the
bucket. This tool can be used to measure a distance under water.
Figure 13-8 Measure with dredge tool dialogs

Select the location on the bucket from where the measurement has to
start (for example the middle of the bucket, see above), click on
and in the Measure dialog the information under ‘From’ is entered.
Move the bucket and select the same or a different location on the
bucket, click on and in the Measure dialog the information
under ‘To’ is entered. Now the distance, bearing and elevation
between the two point is calculated.
The measured distance is indicated in the marker layer.
Click on to log the position of the bucket to a logfile (*.csv).

The file contains date, time, X, Y and Z of the bucket position.
The file is stored in the Log Files page of the PDS Explorer.
The time in the file is showed in excel time. Select in Excel the cell
format custom and as type: dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss to display the time
‘readable’ in Excel.
Tools > Start Next Trip
For a trailing suction hopper application the next trip will be started.
Tools > Add Waypoint by Coordinate ( )
The options Add Waypoint A waypoint can added to the plan view with its satellite ellipsoid
by Coordinate and Add coordinates, its local ellipsoid coordinates or its grid coordinates.
Symbol by Coordinate are
only available in the Tools > Add Symbol by Coordinate ( )
‘Boeilog’ application. A symbol can added to the plan view with its satellite ellipsoid
coordinates, its local ellipsoid coordinates or its grid coordinates.
Tools > Pulse Keyboard State Device

Activate the pulse state device that is selected in the Equipment page.
Tools > Calculator
A calculator will be opened where for a route KP, with or without an
offtrack, a position will be calculated in satellite ellipsoid, local ellipsoid
and projection coordinates or vice versa.
Tools > Vessel Backup Settings
A list of the vessel backups will be opened with a possibility to save
the current vessel configuration.
Tools > Import Grid Model Update…
A grid model update package can be imported to update the active
grid model. This update package can be created in the grid model
Tools > Enable Tide Gauge Alarm
If checked the tide gauge alarm is on and in the Alerts window a tide
gauge alarm will be entered. If the option is not checked the alarm is
off.
Tools > Equipment Control
This option is only It will open a dialog where the Output Control view can be selected
available when in the and it will open the output control window for that sensor. These output
Equipment page an output
control is added to the
controls cannot be added to the Acquisition through the Displays
equipment list. window or Add Displays option. See page 423 for more information
about an output control view.
Tools > Customize…( )
The Customize window will be opened. Parts of the toolbar can be
added or removed from the acquisition toolbar, commands can be

added to a toolbar and shortcut keys can be defined. See also page
316.
Help:
Help > Help Topics
The PDS help file will be opened. The help file can also be opened
with the F1.
Help > Helpdesk View
This option will open a new layout with only the Raw Data View. This
can be helpful when the user is in contact with the PDS Helpdesk and
they ask to open the Raw Data View to check the interface with the
sensors.
Select this option again and the layout that was used in the Acquisition
will be visible again.
Shortcuts ( )
Listed the defined keyboard shortcuts.
13.4.1 Selecting Guidance

One of the surveyor’s task is to select runlines or one of the other
guidances. In ‘Next line selection’ on page 168 the automatic methods is
explained. Automatic selections are however not always desirable.
Therefore PDS also has a manual possibility.
In the Acquisition and Presentation, the option Guidance > Select
Runline… from the menu bar or in the toolbar opens a selection
window. In that window the runline files, and when expanded the
individual runlines can be selected. Just select one and click on
to make that line active.
Figure 13-9 Select a runline
In a plan view (see page 426) an other runline can be selected by clicking
on an other line. That line should be one of the lines in the runline file that
is selected in the layer Active Runlines. The button in the plan view
toolbar should be on before it is possible to click on a runline in the plan
view.

13.4.1.1 Making Runlines or Routes Real Time
Sometimes during a survey an anomaly is observed. That can make it
necessary to make an additional runline to guide the vessel over that
anomaly.
Open the context menu of the plan view, select the option ‘Add Runline’
and the cursor shape will change into a cross. Click on the start point of
the line, then on the end point. A right click now adds the line to the
current runline file as ‘User line X.X’ where X is a sequence number. The
new runline is visible in the view and can be selected as any other runline.
In case the line has more than two points, it will automatically become a
route. The line that is added as a route file will be automatically placed in
the route layer of the plan view which makes the line visible for the user.
13.5 Logging
There are five logging methods:
The logging formats and 1. Logging of RAW data in the predefined formats. (off), (on) or
the logging filenames are (conditional logging).
selected in the Logging
page (see page 144). In the Acquisition the data logging can be switched on and off with:
 F4 key on the keyboard.
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Data Logging from the menu bar.
 Click on or on (or ) in the frame indicator in the right
bottom of the Acquisition view to start or stop the data logging.
Switching from log file can be done with:
 Select Logging > Switch Log File from the menu bar.
2. Logging of events in an event log file. (off) or (on).
The event logging can be switched on and off with:
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Eventing from the menu bar.
 Click on or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the event logging.
3. Logging of system messages to text files. (off) or (on).
The message logging can be switched on and off with:
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Message Logging from the menu bar.
 Click on or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the message logging.
4. Logging of Water Column data in the logfile(s). (off) or (on).
(This logging method is only available when a water column data
device is selected in the project equipment list.)
The RAW data logging must be switched on prior the Water Column
data logging can be switch on or off with:

 (Un)check Logging>Enable WCS logging from the menu bar.
 Click or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom
of the Acquisition view to start or stop the water column
logging.
5. Logging of Image data in the logfile(s). (off) (on).
(This logging method is only available when an image data device is
selected in the project equipment list.)
The RAW data logging must be switched on prior the Image data
logging can be switch on or off with:
 (Un)check Logging>Enable IMG logging from the menu bar.
 Click or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the image data logging.
13.5.1 Check the Logging

In PDS several methods are available to check the status of the logging.
 On the right side in the status bar of the Acquisition and of each
Presentation are three fields, resp. LOG, EVT and MSG. The color of
the field shows the log status for logging raw data, events and
messages respectively. Not logging makes the field red, conditional
logging and logging blocked by a condition makes it yellow. Green
means logging is on.
 In the Status – Logging view (see page 482) the logging status can be
used as background. The background of the view will be colored red,
yellow or green depending on the logging status: off, conditional or on.
13.6 Shortcuts
In the Acquisition default keyboard shortcuts are defined. The user can
change or add new shortcuts that can be used in the Acquisition. Select

from the toolbar of the Acquisition to get an overview of the existing
defined keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 13-10 Overview of the default Defined Keyboard Shortcuts
As shown in the overview above PDS has shortcuts under the F-keys on
the keyboard (see below) and shortcuts with a combination of several
keys (see page 325).
The Customize window can be opened with Tools > Customize from the
menu bar or with from the toolbar.
Figure 13-11 Customize window with the toolbars page
Select the option User Toolbar if the user wants to display the F-keys as a
part of the toolbar ( ).

13.6.1 F-Keys
There are two methods to attach an action to a F-key, through the Button
Properties window and through the ‘Attach to Button’ option.
The Button Properties window can be open in the Commands page of the
Customize window.
Figure 13-12 Commands page in the customize window
Select the category User Buttons and the F-keys will be displayed on the
right side in the page. If the selected F-key has already a shortcut it will
be displayed at the bottom under ‘Description’. With the selected F-
key can be modified in the Button Properties window.
Figure 13-13 Default properties for the F-keys
In the Button Properties window two pages are available, the Default and
the Custom page. In the Default page the actions as defined by PDS are

available. These default actions are already assigned to one of the F-
keys. In the Custom page all the actions are available which are added by
the user.
With an action from the list of available actions can be added to the
list of selected actions. It is possible to select more actions for one F-key.
With an action can be removed from the list of selected actions.
If more than one action is added to the list of selected actions, the order
of the actions can be modified by using or . With the list
of selected actions can be removed. For the actions in the list of selected
actions the description and the tool tip for that action can be modified by
the user.
If the actions are selected close the Button Properties window with
to accept the new actions for the F-key.
In the Custom page the user can add a new action to the list of available
actions. Select the right action group and click on . It depends on
the selected action group what the next steps will be.
The actions for the shortcuts are divided in different groups.
Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the
properties of the equipment and the related computations (see page
319).
Handler Actions
These actions are the same as the options in the menu bar or in the
toolbar of the Acquisition. Only available in the Default page and the
user cannot add new handler actions to the list.
Manual Input Actions
These actions are the actions for the manual input devices which are
accessible in the Acquisition (see page 321).
View Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the layer
properties of the views or to one of the attributes in the properties of
the views in the Acquisition (see page 322).
For the attribute actions and the view attribute actions an ‘Attach to
Button’ button becomes available in the properties windows to attach the
selected attribute directly to one of the F-keys.
13.6.2 Attribute Actions

The attribute actions can be attached to a F-key with both methods.
Select in the Button Properties window the ‘Attribute Actions’ in the
Custom page, click on and the Select Attribute window will be

opened to select one of the attributes in the equipment or the related
computations.
Figure 13-14 Select Attribute window to select an equipment attribute
Select the device or the related computation on the left side and the
properties will appear on the right side. Select one of the attributes in the
properties and click on . The selected attribute action can be
attached to the F-key in the Button Properties window as discussed on
page 318.
In the Acquisition are for the ‘Attach to Button’ option two ways possible to
open the properties of the equipment, through the Raw Data view and
through the Select Data window.
Figure 13-15 Attach an attribute through the Raw Data view
In the Raw Data view double click on an item in the tree and the related
properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window the

attribute for the F-key, click on and the Attach to Button window
will be opened (see below).
The Select Data window can be opened with in the toolbar or with Edit
> Equipment in the menu bar of the Acquisition.
Figure 13-16 Select Data window
With double clicking on one of the items in the Select Data window the
related properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window
the attribute for the F-key, click on and the Attach to Button
window will be opened (see below).
13.6.2.1 Attach to Button
Figure 13-17 Attach an attribute to a F-key
In the Attach to Button window the F-key can be selected. If already an

action is attached to this F-key it will be displayed in the window. Click on
to attach the new attribute to the selected F-key and the old
action will be overwritten.
13.6.3 Manual Input Actions

The manual input actions can only be attach through the Button
Properties window. Select the ‘Manual Input Actions’ in the Custom page,

click on and the Select Data window will be opened to select one of
the manual input devices that are added to the equipment list.
Figure 13-18 Select Data window to select a manual input device
Select the attribute of the device data that can be used fore the manual
input. and click on .
Attach this manual input action to a F-key in the Button Properties window
as discussed on page 318.
13.6.4 View Attribute Actions

The view attribute actions can be attached to a F-key with both methods.
Select in the Button Properties window the ‘View Attribute Actions’ in the
Custom page, click on and the Select View window will be opened
to select one of the views in the Acquisition.
Figure 13-19 Select View window to select a view in the Acquisition
Click on and select in the Select Layer window the layer from
which an attribute has to be selected.

Figure 13-20 Select Layer window to select the layer in the view
Click on and select in the Select View Attribute window the

attribute for the F-key.
Figure 13-21 Select View Attribute window to select an attribute in the view
Click on and attach this view attribute action to a F-key in the

Button Properties window as discussed on page 318.
The quick way to attach a view attribute actions to a F-key is with the
‘Attach to Button’ option.

Figure 13-22 Attach an attribute from the layer properties
Add an attribute from the layer properties by opening the Layers window
of the view in the Acquisition through the option Layer Control in the
context menu or with in the toolbar of the view. Select in this window
the layer from which an attribute has to be selected. Open this layer by
double clicking or by clicking on . Select in the Properties window
of the selected layer the attribute for the F-key and click on . The
Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the attribute to the right
F-key (see page 321).
Figure 13-23 Attach an attribute from the view properties
Add an attribute from the view properties by opening the properties of the
view in the Acquisition and select the attribute for the F-key. Click on
and the Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the
attribute to the right F-key (see page 321).

13.6.5 Shortcut Keys
In the shortcut keys page the shortcut with several keys can be defined.
Figure 13-24 Shortcut Keys page of the Customize window
Select one of the macro’s from the list and click on and a window to
enter a new shortcut key will be opened.
Figure 13-25 Assign a shortcut key to the selected macro
Type a shortcut and click on to accept the shortcut for the

selected macro. As short each combination of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and a F-key
is possible.
13.7 Presentations
A Presentation can have the same views as the Acquisition, but it gets the
information from the Acquisition. In other words, a Presentation is
connected to the Acquisition and send requests to the Acquisition to send
data for showing in the views.
That is the reason a Presentation cannot control data logging and further
system settings. The only selections that can be done in a Presentation is
selecting the active runline, selecting the active waypoint, create a new
waypoint and the Man Over Board option.
Multiple presentations can be connected to an Acquisition. Presentations
can run on the same computer as the Acquisition (Local computer) or
over a network on a remote computer. To connect to a remote, see page

16 where the installation and running of a remote presentation is
described.

14 Views
14.1 Introduction
To show all the survey information in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation(s) several views can be used. These views together are
called a layout.
There are two ways to create a layout and to add the views to that layout.
See ‘Data Visualization’ on page 306 to add a view to the layout.
 In the Acquisition or Presentation with File > New Layout… from the
menu bar.
 By changing an existing layout in the Acquisition or Presentation. Save
the changed layout with File > Save Layout As... from the menu bar.
In this chapter all the possible views for the Acquisition and the
Presentation will be discussed in alphabetical order. It will depend on the
application type if a view is available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation.
At the moment following views are available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation:
1. 3D Views (see below)
2. Alerts View (see page 346)
3. Compass View (see page 349)
4. Device Configuration Views (see page 349)
5. Dredge Views (see page 366)
6. Dredge Status View (see page 370)
7. Echosounder Graphical Trace View (see page 371)
8. Helmsman View (see page 379)
9. Icon Image View (see page 381)
10. Interval Logging View (see page 382)
11. Laser Scan Control View (see page 382)
12. Manual Input View (see page 384)
13. Messages Views (see page 385)
14. Multibeam QC Views (see page 387)
15. Numerics View (see page 418)
16. Obstacle Avoidance (see page 423)
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Views  327

17. Output Control View (see page 423)
18. Pipe Lay Views (see page 424)
19. Plan Views (see page 426)
20. Positioning system XY - Manual Input View (see page 448)
21. Profile Views (see page 450)
22. Raw Data View (see page 462)
23. Scatterplot View (see page 464)
24. Sonar Targets View (see page 466)
25. Sonar Views (see page 467)
26. Status Views (see page 480)
27. Tide Manual Input View (see page 482)
28. Time Series View (see page 483)
14.2 3D View
In the Acquisition are two 3D Views available.
 3D View – Online (see below)
 3D View – Online Dredge (see page 329)
 3D View – Online Water Column (see page 331)
The views are nearly identical, the only difference is that the 3D View –
Online Dredge has as default a dredge layer instead of a vessel layer and
the 3D View – Online water Column has next to the vessel layer 2 extra
layers, water column data and sonar wedge.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
62).
14.2.1 3D View – Online

The 3D View – Online can show the multibeam and/or laser scan data in
3D. If in the logging page also a grid model is selected (see page 144),
328  Views Teledyne PDS - User Manual

the multibeam data will be directly logged in the active grid model and will
be shown as a 3D grid model in the view.
Figure 14-1 3D View – Online with multibeam and laser scan data
14.2.2 3D View – Online Dredge

The 3D View – Online Dredge can be used for dredging purposes. It will
show the cutter dredger or trailing suction hopper in 3D with a 3D grid

model. When the cutter dredger or trailing suction hopper is working the
grid model will be updated.
Figure 14-2 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model

Figure 14-3 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model with a dredge differential color table
14.2.3 3D View – Online Water Column

The 3D View – Online Water Column can be used to display the water
column data. It will show the water column data always in the center of
the multibeam data even if the beam sector is somewhere else. Next to
the water column data also the sonar wedge can be displayed. Both have
their own properties and Layer Control, accessible by the Water Column
properties icon .
Refer to Logging on page 315 how to log water column data.
 Log data increases significantly when logging water column data!

Figure 14-4 3D View – Online Water Column with multibeam data and water
column data
In the sonar wedge the complete water column is displayed. So for

instance a school of fish can be seen, while when only the bottom
detection is displayed, this information is ignored.

Figure 14-5 3D View – Online Water Column with multibeam data and a sonar
wedge with a school of fish in the center
Click from the Toolbar at the Water Column button to access the Water
Column properties.
Figure 14-6 Water Colum Properties Icon
A dialog menu will be displayed. In this display the properties are set for:
 Water Column Samples;
 Water Column Projection;
 Sonar Wedge.

Figure 14-7 Water Column Properties dialog menu
Click the apply button to validate changes.

Click the sync button to cancel changes.

14.2.3.1 Water Column Samples
The next table lists the settings of the Water Column Samples properties
as adjustable by the Water Column Properties dialog box.
Visualization
Select the Checkbox to show the Water
Column Samples layer.
Color mode. The created grid could be colored with

values for:
 Depth (According to used color
table);
 Beam quality (According to beam

quality colors);
 Sonar Palette. The used sonar
palette colors are selected in the
sonar palette colors drop down
list (see below).
Sonar palette. Select from the drop-down menu the

required sonar palette colors.
This color setting only applies for the color
mode ‘sonar palette’.
Transparency. The Transparency is adjustable between
0% (no transperancy) and 100% (full
transperancy).

Visualization
Point size and history length. Point size and history length is adjustable.
The minimum history length is 50 pings.
Water Column filters

Intensity amplitude. Use the dual button slider to set the
minimum and maximum intensity
amplitude percentage. With this filter are
noise detections reduced.
Select the checkbox to filter between a set

minimum and maximum depth.
With this setting a window around a certain
depth could be created. Only the data
within the set limits is showed.
Tick the checkbox to filter between a
minimum and maximum range.
With this setting a window around a certain
range could be created.
Exclude Range filter. When this checkbox is ticked, the range
filter is reversed. Instead of filtering inside
the minimum and maximum range it is
filtered outside this range window.
Sector(s). From the drop down menu a sector is
selectable for the Water Column
detections.
This could be desirable when for instance

the slope of the bottom or a higher object
block parts of the object to detect. Select
the sector where the object is located.
For optimum water column data it is best
to sail along the object instead as above.

Samples relative to bottom. Select this checkbox to show the set
number of samples above and below the
bottom detection.
Wide Window:
Small window:
14.2.3.2 Water Column Projection

The next table lists the settings of the Water Column Projections
properties.
Visualization
Tick the checkbox to enable the Water
Column projection layer.
The water column curtain is showed.
Sonar palette. Select from the drop down menu the

sonar palette color.
Contrast and Transparency. Move the slider(s) to change the contrast,

gamma and transparency of the Water
Column Projection.

Visualization
Point size and history length. Set the required point size and history
length. (Minimum history length is 50.)
Sector(s). From the drop down menu a coverage

sector is selectable for the Water Column
projection.
This might desirable when for instance the

slope of the bottom or a higher object,
blocks parts of a lower object to detect.
Select in this case the sector where the
object is located.
For optimum water column data it is best
to sail along the object instead as above.
Right sector selected:
And now left sector selected:
As in the above picture seen, an object is

in the right sector and therefore displayed
when sector ‘right’ or ‘all’ is selected. But
this object will block smaller objects in the
left sector. Therefore it is possible to

Visualization
select as sector ‘left’ in this example to
see this left located objects.
MB display mode. From the drop down menu 3 modes are

selectable:
 Disabled; No bathy detection
points shown in the Water
Column projection.
 Sector Center Beam;

The detections of the center beam are
displayed.
 Selected Sector
Detections of the selected sector will be
displayed in the water column projection
layer.
Sector ‘All’:
Sector ‘Right’:
Sector ‘Left’:

Visualization
The red dots are the detections of a ping

displayed in the Z-axis.
In the picture below there are a lot of
detections close to each other in the Z-
axis. So this means it is a more or less flat
bottom.
But when there is an object you will see

the detections will spread out in the Z-
axis:
Show only valid beams. Tick the checkbox to show only the valid
beams in the water Column projection.

Visualization
Clip to bottom. Tick this checkbox to clip the detections to
the bottom (with a fixed margin
underneath).
In the following picture ‘Clip to bottom’ is
enabled. (No data/noise displayed
underneath the bottom detection.):

disabled: (Data/noise displayed
underneath the bottom detection.)
Show bottom detection line. Tick this checkbox to enable the bottom
detection line. (Note the top of objects will
be detected by this line.)

14.2.3.3 Sonar Wedge
The next table lists the settings of the Sonar Wedge properties adjustable
by the Water Column Properties dialog box.
Visualization
Tick this checkbox to enable the Sonar
Wedge layer.
Sonar palette. Select from the drop down menu the sonar
palette color.
Contrast and Transparency. Move the slider(s) to change the contrast

and transparency of the sonar wedge.

Visualization
Clip to bottom. Tick the checkbox to clip the detections to
the bottom. (With a fixed margin
underneath.)
enabled:

disabled:
14.2.4 3D View – Toolbar and Context Menu

The items in the toolbar and in the context menu are:
Show Toolbar
If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( )
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
mouse wheel can also be
used for the Zoom In and Follow Vessel ( )
Zoom Out. If the option is ‘on’, the vessel will be displayed in the center of the
view.
If the option is ‘off’, the vessel can be anywhere in the view, even
outside the view.

Show Spotlight ( )
If the show spotlight button is selected, the spotlight window is
displayed in the view. In this window the light source direction is
changed by moving the yellow dot in the circle.
Measure ( )
Select the Measure button to measure distance, bearing and elevation
between two points. Click on a point in the view and hold the mouse
button pressed while drawing the measure line to another point.
Release the mouse button and the 3D distance between the two points
is given.
Figure 14-8 Measure window
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a ‘hand’. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option.
Show Grid Layer ( )
When the show grid layer button is selected, the coordinate axis
system is shown in the center of the view.
Color Table Layer ( )
When the color table layer button is selected, the color table is
displayed on the right side in the view. This is only valid when in the
Properties a color table is selected (see page 346).
Save Snapsahot ( )
Select the save snapshot button to save n image of the 3D View as a
JPG or BMP file.
Create Sonar Target ( )
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and this area is
saved as a sonar target.
The symbol for the sonar target is defined in the Active Sonar Targets
Layer which is created when the first sonar target is selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a context menu
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
439.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window of the view will be opened (see below). In this
window only the used layers will be displayed; layers can be added,
modified or removed.
If a grid model is added to the view then the available data types of the
grid model with their color table will be displayed in the Coverage
Settings view. Select the data type and its color table for the display of
the grid model.
The transparency of the grid model can be defined, where 0 is no
transparency and 100 complete transparency.

The resolution of the grid model can be set in 5 steps from Very Low to
Very High. This means that when the grid model is zoomed out and
the resolution is Very High more detail of the grid model is shown than
when the resolution is Very Low. The resolution has no impact when
the view is zoomed on the grid model, because then the resolution is
always high.
Figure 14-9 Coverage Settings view of the 3D View
Clear multibeam layer ( )

Clear the multibeam data of the multibeam layer.
Properties ( )
The Properties window of the view will be opened (see below).
14.2.5 3D View – Layers

In the Layers window of the 3D Views the used layers for the view will be
displayed. Below the most relevant layers for both 3D Views will be
explained.
Vessel Layer
This layer is only opened in the 3D View – Online and will display the
vessel in 3D. It is not possible to show a trailing suction hopper with
suction tubes or a cutter dredger with a ladder, because these objects are
combined shapes and in the vessel layer only one shape can be
displayed.
Multibeam Layer
This layer is also only opened in the 3D View – Online and will display the
multibeam data.
Active Grid Model Layer
In both 3D Views the active grid model layer is opened to show the
selected grid model in 3D. This active grid model will be updated with the
multibeam data or with the dredge activities when the logging is on.

3D Dredge Track Layer
This layer is only opened in the 3D View – Online Dredge and will
displayed the vessel with the suction tube(s) or the cutter ladder in 3D.
14.2.6 3D View – Properties

In the Properties window of the 3D Views some items are identical with
the options in the toolbar and/or context menu. Below the most relevant
items will be explained.
Color Table Name
Select an existing color table that will be used by all the relevant layers
in the view.
Follow Vessel
If the option is Enabled, the vessel will be displayed in the center of the
view.
If the option is Disabled, the vessel can be anywhere in the view, even
outside the view.
Follow Vessel Mode
If the option ‘Follow Vessel’ is Enabled, this mode will define how
the view follows the vessel.
Grid North will show the data with a steady position, although the
user can rotate the data in the view.
Vessel North will show rotating data with a steady vessel heading.
Allow Vessel Angle
If the option ‘Follow Vessel Mode’ is Vessel North, the north
heading can be modified.
If the option is Enabled, a new heading can be set by rotating the
view.
Position Source
Select a position source that can be used as position to follow
when the option ‘Follow Vessel’ is Enabled.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of the
Layer Control are available.
14.3 Alerts View
Figure 14-10 Alerts view with several timeouts

The alarms can also be Alarms and timeouts are displayed in the Acquisition with the Alerts view.
displayed in the Acquisition
and Presentation with the
Status – Alarms view (see
page 480).
In the driver is a time specified ‘TimeOut’. If no data is received within this
time frame then a Timeout alert is shown.
Figure 14-11 Timeout alert
In the next example is in the device driver a timeout specified of 10

seconds.
Figure 14-12 Example of specified Time Out in device driver
When Acquisition is started then there is a delay of 10 seconds before

Time Out alerts are generated.
In the Alerts view all active alarms and active timeouts are displayed with
an indication if they are accepted. There is an option in the view to set the
view as a pop-up view with the option that the view will pop up when an
alarm is created. Click on in the top left side of the view and checked
the option ‘Auto-Show Alerts’ and the view will act as a pop-up view. The
Alerts view will stay on the screen with active alarms or alerts until the
user click on or .
When an open alert is ended then it is marked as Ended in the Alert list.
When all open alerts are ended then the Alerts view closes automatically.

Figure 14-13 Ended alert
With all the active alarms can be accepted at the same time. It is
also possible to accept one alarm at the time with .
When the Alerts view is hidden then with View > Alerts from the menu bar
or by clicking on the alarm indicator (yellow) or (grey) in the status
bar (see examples below) the Alerts view can be made active again.
When the alarms are created in the configuration or in the vessel
configuration there is an option to set the sound (see page 76). When
such an alarm appears in the Alerts view the user can hear the alarm
sound. Click on in the view to stop the alarm sound. The alarm
itself is then not accepted yet.
When the Alerts view is already on the screen and a new alarm becomes
active, it will be added to the list in the view. If the view is not on the
screen and the pop-up option is set then the Alerts view will appear on the
screen. When the pop-up option is not set then in the status bar the alarm
indicator will become .
The alarm indicator in the status bar has several statuses; yellow ( )
when there are active alarms that are not accepted, grey ( ) when the
alarms are accepted but still active and no indicator when there are no
alarms.
Figure 14-14 Alarm indicator in the status bar
14.3.1 Error Messages

In this chapter the not obvious error messages will be explained. This list
will anticipate on questions from our clients.
 Time stamp error: Message time in the future
This message may occur for a few seconds during startup, after that it
should not occur anymore. Time stamp in the future means that PDS
receives a message from a device where the time in the message is
newer then the computer time. In other words PDS receives the result
of a measurement in the future. This problem can occur when there is
a clock synchronization error or when for instance the PosMV is
predicting to hard.

14.4 Compass View
Figure 14-15 Compass view with True Heading, CMG and Waypoint heading
In the Compass view the true heading will be displayed with the CMG
(course made good). It is possible through the properties in the context
menu to display the guidance heading (route or waypoint) as an extra
heading (see below).
14.4.1 Compass – Properties

The only item in the context menu of the Compass view is the properties.
Below the most relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Compass Orientation Mode
With this mode the orientation of the compass rose in the view can be
set. The possibilities are North Up and Heading Up (this is True
Heading Up!).
Compass Guidance Mode
The heading of the active guidance can be displayed as extra heading
in the Compass view. The possibilities are Off, Waypoint or Route.
Off will display no extra heading in the view.
Waypoint will display the heading to the active waypoint, i.e. the
heading of the wayline.
Route will display the heading of the most nearby line segment of the
active route.
14.5 Device Configuration Views

With this type of views the settings of a RESON SeaBat 7K, a RESON
HydroBat, a BlueView sonar or a Kongsberg Maritime GeoSwath sonar
can be controlled.
A Device Configuration view is not a standard view which can be added
through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the context
menu of the Acquisition.
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, a device configuration
 has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page
119).

Select the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu bar of the
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the right output control
in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on to
add the view to the Acquisition. After the Output Control view is added the
window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays
window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
In the Acquisition are four Device Configuration views available:
 Device Configuration – RESON-7K view (see below)
 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view (see page 358)
 Device configuration - BlueView (see page 360)
 Device configuration – Interferometry GeoSwath (see page 361)
14.5.1 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View

The Device Configuration – RESON-7K view is a control view for the
RESON SeaBat 7K series. With this view the settings for the SeaBat 7K
can be modified.
14.5.1.1 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Settings
Figure 14-16 Sonar Settings for the Device Configuration
In this page the Frequency, Range, Power, Max. ping rate, Gain, Pulse
Length, Pulse Type and Gates can be set. It will depend on the RESON
SeaBat 7K type (f.i. 7101, 7125) what the values for each setting will be.
The different sonar settings are:
Frequency
The used frequency for the sonar will be displayed. If more
frequencies are possible for the used sonar then the user can select a
different frequency and the sonar will switch from frequency
automatically.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will ‘see’.

Power
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.
Max ping rate
The number of pings per second (p/s).
The actual number of ping If the maximum rate is set to 0, the system will not ping or receive
per second is also
depending on the range.
data.
If the maximum rate is set higher than the sonar’s actual maximum
ping rate, the sonar will ping at its actual maximum ping rate.
Gain
The amount of receiver gain applied to the returned sonar signal (in
addition to the calculated gain).
Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
 resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Pulse Type
The pulse type can be CW (Continuous Wave) or FM (Frequency
Modulation). It will depend on the type of RESON SeaBat 7K which
option(s) is/are available.
Gates
The gates are:
 Depth
Press the button to switch on/off the Depth gate.
Depth gates are showed in the Wedge view if enabled. Drag the
gates to change the minimum and maximum gate. The gates
are also set in the Sonar gates page (see page 353).
Figure 14-17 Depth gates
 Range
Press the button to switch on/off the Range gate.
Range gates are showed in the Wedge view if enabled. Drag the
gates to change the minimum and maximum gate. The gates

Figure 14-18 Range gate
 Adaptive
Press the button to switch on/off the Adaptive gate.
Adaptive gates are showed in the Wedge view if enabled. Drag
the gates to change the minimum and maximum gate. The gates
Figure 14-19 Adaptive gates

14.5.1.2 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Gates
Figure 14-20 Sonar gates
The next table lists the sonar gates settings.
Depth gate Tick the checkbox to enable the depth
gate.
The depth gate will use the minimum
and maximum depth values as
entered. Only the bottom returns
which are within these depth limits will
be used in the bottom detection
process. Additional a depth gate tilt
value can be set. Use the slider to
rotate the depth gate to match with
the tilt of the seafloor.
Range gate Tick the checkbox to enable the

range gate.
The range gate will use the minimum
and maximum range values as
entered. Only the bottom returns
which are within these limits will be
used in the bottom detection process.
The minimum and maximum gate
values can also manually be moved
in the Wedge screen by dragging
them with the mouse as also the
depth gate.

Adaptive gate Tick the checkbox to enable the
adaptive gate.
The adaptive gate will use the
minimum and maximum nadir depth
values as entered. It will search for
the strongest bottom return from the
nadir beam based on the window
size. When the Follow seafloor
checkbox is ticked and the minimum
or maximum nadir depth values
approach the nadir search limits, the
nadir search gate will automatically
center the nadir search on the
detected seafloor.
The nadir search limits can manually
be moved in the Wedge screen by
dragging them with the mouse.
The window size is used to define the
gate limits around the detected
seafloor. The distance between the
limits and the detected seafloor is the
percentage of the detected bottom
depth value. The percentage is the
value as entered as window size.
Increasing the window size will make
the search area bigger so the chance
of noise increases. Decreasing the
window size with a non-flat seabed
will result in a degraded performance.
The gate lines are showed in the sonar wedge view.
14.5.1.3 RESON SeaBat 7K – Ocean Menu
Figure 14-21 Ocean Menu
In this page the Absorption, Spreading and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.

Spreading
The spreading is the amount of cylindrical and spherical spreading
loss that is expected through the ambient water medium.
This coefficient value is used in conjunction with the absorption loss
value to compute the TVG curve applied to the returned signal.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound. When the
override checkbox is checked, the sound velocity slider allows the
operator to enter a value for the speed of sound in the water.
Sound velocity filter
The sonar used the value from the sound velocity probe to present the
data in the wedge. When there are spikes in the data from the sound
velocity probe the display of the sonar data will be disturbed. The
sound velocity filter will filter these spikes out of the data. From a light
filter to normal and a strong filter.
14.5.1.4 RESON SeaBat 7K – Data Recording
Figure 14-22 Data Recording
With this data recording page the recording in the related 7K Center can
be started and stopped.
It is not necessary to have this view open to get an active synchronization
 with the PDS logging. With the attribute Sync Sonar Data Recording with
PDS in the device driver of the Device Configuration – RESON SeaBat
7K the synchronization can be enabled or disabled.
Recording Control
With and the user can manually start and stop the data
recording (=logging) in the 7K Center.
If the option Synchronize with PDS logging is checked both buttons are
inactive. Now when the logging is started in PDS then automatically the
data recording will start in the 7K Center. If the logging is stopped in PDS
also the data recording in the 7K Center will stop.
When the 7K logging is started with the default log file name will
be used, when the option Synchronize with PDS logging is checked the
log file name will be the default file name with ‘PDS’ added (as shown in
the figure above).

Recording status
Recording mode
When there is no logging the recording mode is set on Stopped.
When the logging is started the recording mode is set on Recording.
Directory name
Directory where the S7K file will be stored. This path has to be set in
the 7K Center.
Filename
When the data recording is started the name of the S7K file will be
displayed.
File size
Size of the S7K file will be displayed.
Free diskspace
Percentage that is free on the hard disk where the 7K Center is
running.
14.5.1.5 RESON SeaBat 7K - Sonar Steering
Figure 14-23 Sonar Steering
In this page the sonar steering settings are set to steer the beams
automatically for an optimal route or pipe sonar coverage.
The following table lists the sonar steering settings:
Enable route Steering Tick the checkbox to enable the route
steering. The beams are now steered
for an optimal route coverage.

Enable pipe steering Tick the checkbox to enable the pipe
steering. The beams will be steered for
an optimal pipe coverage.
This checkbox is only available when
the pipe detection is enabled in the
vessel configuration. See the Pipe
detection manual for full details.
Route Steering
Active route Tick the radio button to use the

project’s active route.
Local route Tick the radio button and select from

the drop down list the required route.
Steering mode
With horizontal steering the swath will be steered. With flex mode the
angle of the center beams of the flex mode will be steered.
Refer to the RESON SUI manual for more details.
Horizontal Tick the radio button for Horizontal

steering.
Flex Tick the radio button for Flex steering.

The flex mode has to be selected in the RESON Seabat 7K, before the
flex steering can work.
Steering difference Drag the scroll bar to adjust the value.
The steering of the beams is changed
only when the difference between the
horizon or angle of the flex steering
and the angle of the detected route or
pipe is more than this steering
difference value.
With this parameter the operator is
able to smooth the beam steering and
subsequently the tracking of the pipe
or route.
Steering delay Drag the scroll bar to adjust the value.
The beam steering will not be changed
during this adjusted time. The delay is
defined as the number of patches of
25 pings. (E.g. steering delay of 5 will
be a delay of 5*25 pings)
With this delay it is prevented operator
changes in the RESON SUI will result
in a immediately response by the PDS
pipe steering.
14.5.2 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat

View
The Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view is a control view for
the RESON HydroBat. With this view the settings for the HydroBat can be
modified.

14.5.2.1 RESON HydroBat – Multibeam Settings
Figure 14-24 Multibeam Settings of the Device Configuration – RESON

HydroBat view
In this page the Range, Gain, Power Level, Pulse Length and
Minimization can be set. When for the first time the Acquisition is opened
the HydroBat will not be pinging.
The different multibeam settings are:
Auto pilot
With the option Auto pilot, default settings depending on the Range
 setting will be used. The value for the Power Level and Pulse Length
are controlled by the auto pilot, the other settings can still be set by the
user.
When the auto pilot is off the Power Level is still depending on Range
 and the Pulse Length. It is not possible to set the Power Level on
maximum when the Range is small and/or the Pulse Length is on
maximum.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will ‘see’.
Gain
The amount of receiver gain applied to the returned sonar signal (in
addition to the calculated gain).
Power Level
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.
Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
 resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Minimization
The minimization will help with the bottom detection and can be set by
the user.

, , and
First click on to do an internal calibration of the HydroBat
 system. This calibration has nothing to do with the standard multibeam
calibration that has to be done to calibrate the complete system (see
for more information the Multibeam Calibration manual).
With the HydroBat will ping one time. Click on to start
the Hydrobat pinging and with the pinging can be stopped.
14.5.2.2 RESON HydroBat – Ocean Menu
Figure 14-25 Ocean Menu of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat

view
In this page the Absorption and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound through
the local water. See also Override sound velocity.
Override sound velocity
The sound velocity will normally be read from the sound velocity
sensor and therefore cannot be set in this page when the option
Override sound velocity is unchecked. Check this option and the slider
for the Sound Velocity becomes available. The user can now manually
set the sound velocity value and will overrule the data from the sensor.
14.5.3 Device Configuration – BlueView View

The Device Configuration – BlueView is a control view for the BlueView
sonars. With this View settings for the BlueView sonar can be modified.

Figure 14-26 Device Configuration – BlueView sonar
Refer to the PDS BlueView manual for a description of this view.
14.5.4 Device Configuration - Interferometry

GeoSwath View
The Device Configuration – Interferometry GeoSwath View is a control
view for the Kongsberg Maritime’s GeoSwath sonar.
In order to select this View from the Tools>Equipment control menu, the
Interferometry –GeoSwath driver must be added to the Vessel
Configuration’s Equipment list.
Click in the Device Configuration – Interferometry GeoSwath view at the
‘Take Control’ button to control the sonar.
Figure 14-27 Take Control
The Sonar Control settings are only available when the communication
with the sonar is established.

Figure 14-28 Device configuration Interferometry – GeoSwath View
The following table lists the available control settings.

In the configuration view, a highlighted button means its associated
function is enabled. An extinguished button means its associated function
is disabled.
Figure 14-29 Highlighted button (enabled)
Figure 14-30 Extinguished button (disabled)
Control setting Description

Logging Start, Pause and Stop logging of the
Geoswath Raw Data Format (RDF)
on the GeoSwath Deck Unit.
The logging is used in conjunction
with a specified or new created line
number. It will create this line on the
Deck Unit named with this specified
or created number. E.g. 1234.rdf
Broadcasting RDF data can be broadcast over an

unconnected socket on port 5001.

Click Enable to start the broadcast
from the Deck Unit.Click Disable to
stop thee Broadcast.
Remote PC The GeoSwath Deck Unit is Shut

down or rebooted by pressing the
associated Shutdown or Reboot
button.
Project Select ‘New’ to create a new project
on the Deck Unit.
The project name is in a date/time
form.
Header Click ‘Send’ to force the Deck Unit

broadcasting a ping header. A ping
header contains information needed
for file interpretation. The GeoSwath
transmits this header once. With the
button it is forced to resend the
header.
The PDS GeoSwath driver
automatically requests a header from
the GeoSwath when started.
Sonar Settings Move the sliders to set the:
 Side Scan gain. This sets
the gain of the sonar.
 Pulse length. This sets the
length of the transmit pulse.
 Power. This sets the
acoustic power of the
transmit pulse.
 Ping length. This sets the
range.
Filters Click the button to enable a filter.

The following filters are selectable::
 Group. This can be seen as
a spike filter operating on
sine values. Samples are
rejected if the sine of the
angle is greater than a
(learning) threshold.
 Bottom tracking. This can be
seen as a very loose bottom
tracking filter starting at far
range. Points are removed if
sine values are wildly away

from the general trend of the
data.
 Water Column. This can be
seen as a depth filter. The
depth (water column height)
can be set in the ‘Water
column height’ box below.
 Water column auto. This is a
depth filter. The filtering is
based on the mean water
depth.
Transducers Select the ‘Port’ and/or ‘Starboard’
button to enable the port, starboard
or both transducers.
Pinging With the ‘Pinging’ button it is

possible to start/stop the acquisition
process.
Transmit With the ‘Transmit’ button it is

possible to turn on/off the transmit
pulse to the transducers.
Test With the ‘Test’ button it is possible to

enable/disable the receiver test
signal to all receivers. An inverted ‘V’
is shown in the depth display if there
are no problems.
14.5.5 Device Configuration – Pan and Tilt

Positioners Control
The Device Configuration – Pan and Tilt Positioners Control is a control
view for the ROS and the SIDUS pan and tilt unit.
In order to select this View from the Tools>Equipment control menu, the
Pan and Tilt – Positioners Control driver must be added to the Vessel
Configuration’s Equipment list.

Figure 14-31 Pan and Tilt ROS Positioners Control view
The next table lists the functions of the Pan and tilt Positioners Control
view.
Tilt and Pan indicators The green spot indicates the

current position of the pan and tilt
position of the pan and tilt unit
(not the sonar).
Tilt slider Use the slider to change the tilt

position manually.
Pan slider Use the pan slider to change the
pan position manually.
Scan control Select the ‘Auto scan on interval’
checkbox to scan automatically
on the set interval, speed and
pan scan limits.
Press the ‘Scan using pan axis’
button to start the auto scan.
Press the ‘STOP scan’ button to
stop the auto scan.
Press the ‘Use current angle’ to
set the left and right scan limit.

14.6 Dredge Views
In the Acquisition, the following Dredge views are available:.
 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view (see below)
 Dredge – Bars Vertical view (see page 367)
 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view (see page 367)
 Dredge – Load and Draught view (see page 369)
 Dredge – SCADA view (see page 370)
14.6.1 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View
Figure 14-32 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view with two attributes
The Dredge – Bars Horizontal view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
‘Source Item’ an attribute from the one of the computations.

14.6.2 Dredge – Bars Vertical View
Figure 14-33 Dredge – Bars Vertical view with two attributes
The Dredge – Bars Vertical view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
‘Source Item’ an attribute from the one of the computations.
14.6.3 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View
Figure 14-34 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view for two suction tubes
The Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view displays the velocity (V)

and the density (C) of the dredge production. With these two values the
production (Q) can be calculated.

The dredge production can be read in the graph. The place where the two
needles cross each other is an indication for the production; the higher
the crossing, the higher the dredge production.
14.6.3.1 Flow/Concentration Meter – Properties

The only item in the context menu of the Dredge – Flow/Concentration
Meter view is the properties. In the Properties window the scales for the
meter can be adjust and for a vessel with one suction tube the second
tube can be disabled.
Below the most relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Flow/Concentration Meter
The display of the meter can be disabled.
Free Name String
This will be name of the meter which is displayed above the meter in
the view.
Data Item
For the ‘Flow’, the ‘Concentration’ and the ‘Production’ the data items
can be changed. This will be only relevant when dredge production of
another vessel is monitored. For the active vessel the data items are
set by default to the right data items.
Range
For the ‘Flow’ and the ‘Concentration’ the range in the meter can be
changed.
The above mentioned items in the properties are available for both the
suction tubes.

14.6.4 Dredge – Load and Draught View
The Dredge – Load and Draught view will give the draught, load and TDS
(Tons Dry Solid) information in a kind of time series view in combination
with a Numerics view.
Figure 14-35 Dredge – Load and Draught view with the Load page
By default are in the time series view the load, the hopper volume, the
TDS and the dredge status selected. In the numerics part of the view are
four pages by default defined; Hopper Sensor, Draught Sensor, Load and
TDS. In the view a context menu is available to setup the view or to add
extra items to the view.
 It will depend on the settings in the dongle which pages are available and
which computations will be computed to display the data in the view.
See the application manual for the Trailing Suction Hopper for more
information about this view.

14.6.5 Dredge – SCADA View
Figure 14-36 Dredge – SCADA view with two suction tubes
The Dredge – SCADA view In the Dredge – SCADA views the dredging processes can be displayed.
is at the moment special The view shows (the position of) the control valves, the pumps and the
made for Boraciet. piping. It is also possible to show the flow directions from the suction head
to the hopper.
When this view is opened the first time it will be empty. In the properties
of the view a filename representing a scada view with the data source has
to be selected (see below).
14.6.5.1 SCADA – Properties

The only item in the context menu of the Dredge – SCADA view is the
properties. In the Properties window the filename of the display and the
data source has to be selected.
Dredge Status Config File Name
Select the right file that represent the scada of the vessel.
SCADA Data Source
The data source should be the ‘Device Data’ of the ‘Dredge Vessel
Info’ of the vessel.
14.7 Dredge Status View
Figure 14-37 Dredge Status view with Sailing full as dredge status
The Dredge Status view is not a standard view which can be added
Acquisition to add the Dredge Status view. Select the view in the Add
Equipment control display(s) window and click on to add the view

to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be closed.
From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it has the
same functionality as all other views.
Before the view can be selected in the Add Equipment control display(s)
 window, the device driver for the dredge status has to be added to the
equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 119).
The number of buttons that are displayed in the view will depend on the
device driver that is selected. When the dredge status is in Automatic
mode the dredge state selection will be based on the status signals as
received from the vessel. With Idle the Automatic mode can be switched
off and the user can select the different statuses manually.
14.8 Echosounder Graphical Trace View
Figure 14-38 Echosounder Graphical Trace view with four channels
An Echosounder Graphical Trace view is not a standard view which can

be added through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the
context menu of the Acquisition.
Acquisition to add the Echosounder Graphical Trace view. Select the view
add the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be
closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it
has to same functionality as all other views.

 The Echosounder Graphical Trace view should always be opened. If
the view is closed NO echo sounder data is logged!!
With this type of view the echo sounder channels with the graphical trace
 will be displayed. From the Navisound firmware version 1.7.0 the
graphical trace is supported, so with firmware before version 1.7.0 no
graphical trace is possible.
With the buttons at the bottom of the view some general settings can be
modified by clicking on one of the buttons and a different setting can be
selected. All these options are also available in one of the settings pages
(see below).
Before this view can be selected, the echo sounder with graphical trace
119).
14.8.1 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Toolbar

The items in the toolbar of the view are:
Connect ( )
If the communication seems to fail a reconnection can be made.
If a NS600 system is connected the RT modules are turned off during
the reconnection.
Properties ( )
The settings for the view and for the echo sounder can be checked
and/or modified. See below for an explanation of the different pages in
the Settings.
Show Terminal ( )
The Navisound Terminal window keeps track of the communication
between the echo sounder or the RT modules and PDS.
Zoom Mode ( )
Opens a magnify window that follows the mouse movements in the
view. Click on the left mouse button to go through the different zoom
options; 2x, 4x and 8x.
Figure 14-39 Magnify window with the zoom option 2x
Save Snapshot ( )
A snapshot of all the data from the start to the present time will be
stored in a temporary file, called ‘snapshot.log’. Click on in the
Information dialog and a Print window will be opened where the data
can be selected that has to be printed.

Figure 14-40 Print window of the snapshot with a start and end marker
Use the slider to scroll through the data and set a start and end marker
in the window to select only a part of the data that has to be printed.
Click on to change to channel 3 & 4 (RT2), and vice versa.
14.8.2 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Settings

The Settings of the Echosounder Graphical Trace view can be opened
with in the toolbar of the view.
From the different pages in the Settings the most relevant items will be
explained. It will depend on the type of Navisound which items are
available in the settings.

14.8.2.1 General Page
Figure 14-41 General page of the Settings
In this page the port settings for Channel 1 &2 (Port 1) and, if applicable,
for channel 3 & 4 (Port 2) can be set.
14.8.2.2 Advanced Page
Figure 14-42 Advanced page of the Settings
Enable Depth Annotate

If the option is checked the horizontal lines and the depth annotation
will be displayed in the view.

Max Screen Rate
The update rate of the data in the view can be set; 35 Hz means an
update rate of 35 times per second.
14.8.2.3 Color Page
Figure 14-43 Color page of the Settings
In this page the graphics colors for the echo trace can be set.
There are 4 user defined possibilities for the color settings and one
default for the gray scale palette.
Graphic Level 1 is the background color; Graphic Level 8 has the highest
voltage level (strongest echo return) and Graphic Level 2 the lowest.
Click on to select for a graphic level a different color from the color
palette.

14.8.2.4 Channels Page
Figure 14-44 Channel page of the Settings
In the page of the settings nearly all the sounding related commands are
available. The most used commands are also available as buttons at the
bottom of the view.
The most important settings are:
Draft
The draft of the echo sounder transducer can be set. The draft is the
depth of the transducer below the water level. The draft is added to the
measured depth to get the total depth.
If the draft is entered here, the draft should also be entered in the
properties of the echosounder device in the equipment.
Frequency
The frequency of the transducer can be set.
Range
The range of the transducer can be set. The value should be more
then the actual depth below the transducer. The bigger the range the
slower the update rate of the data in the view will be.

14.8.2.5 Paper Page
Figure 14-45 Paper page of the Settings
In this page the settings for the paper or screen can be set.
Paper Range
The range (depth) as displayed on the paper or screen can be set.
The size of one pixel of the graphical trace is depending on the paper
range; the range is divided in 200 samples to present the graphical
trace.
 At the moment PDS supports only the 200 samples as the
presentation for the graphical trace.
Paper Offset
An offset on the paper of screen can be set. The offset will shift the
paper range down so the echo sounder data can be displayed more in
the middle of the paper.

14.8.2.6 Various Page
Figure 14-46 Various page of the Settings
In this page all the settings that are not placed in the other pages can be
modified.
14.8.2.7 Communication Page
Figure 14-47 Communication page of the Settings
If a heave sensor is connected to the echo sounder check the option Use
Heave and fill in the port settings for the heave.

14.9 Helmsman View
Figure 14-48 Helmsman view with a runline
A Helmsman needs to know the position of the vessel in relation with the
current line. This can be a runline, a route or a wayline. With the
Helmsman view the offtrack, different headings and different distances
can be displayed.
At the top of the view an offtrack indicator is displayed with a user
selectable scale. The offtrack limit, as specified in the runlines page of the
Guidance (see page 168), will be shown as triangles.
The offtrack lines in green and red are always displayed at an interval of 5
system units (for example 5 meter or 5 feet). The offtrack limit, if
specified, will be displayed as light blue lines.
On the bottom line of the view from left to right: vessel heading, line
heading, current line, heading to steer to next point of the line and
distance to next point on the line. The next point can be the end point of
the line, if it a straight line, or it can be the next tangent point in a route.
On the right side the bar graph (here in black) gives the distance traveled
form the start of the line. The actual value for the distance traveled is
displayed at the bottom next to the bar graph. At the top next to the bar
graph is displayed the distance to go to the end of the line.
14.9.1 Helmsman – Toolbar and Context Menu

Show Toolbar
The + and – key of the If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
In and Zoom Out. Zoom in and out in the view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.

Auto Ranging ( )
If checked or if the button is ‘in’, the view will zoom automatically to the
predefined settings as specified in the properties.
Perspective View ( )
If checked or if the button is ‘in’, the view is a top view but from behind
the vessel (a kind of 3D).
If not checked or if the button is ‘out’, the view will be a top view (2D).
View Reference ( )
The view point can be selected; the vessel or the runline.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view (see below).
14.9.2 Helmsman – Properties

In the properties some items are identical with the options in the context
menu and in the toolbar. For these items several settings can be
specified.
The relevant items in the Properties window will be explained below.
Line Computation Selection
The type of guidance line can be selected; Runline, Route or Wayline.
Track Buffer Length
The length of the history track behind the vessel can be specified.
Show To Go and Traveled
The values for distance traveled and distance to go alongside the bar
graph can be switched on or off.

14.10 Icon Image View
Figure 14-49 Icon Image view with an image of a vessel
The Icon Image view is a view that will be created for each icon image
that is selected in the Plan View. The view shows the image with as extra
an icon image info table.
In the caption of the Icon Image view is visible in which icon images file
the image is stored. In the example above the icon images file is ‘test’ and
it is the first image in the file.
The Icon Image view can be opened from the Plan View – Survey
Coverage or Plan View – Navigation. Double click on an icon and the
image with the info table will be opened.
Only the Description in the icon image info table as displayed below the
view can be modified by the user. The other item are generated when the
icon image is created. Click on the field right of the item Description and
enter some text. After the description is modified click on to save
the modification to the icon images file. The name of the icon images file
can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 78).
To delete an icon from the Plan View and form the icon images file, open
the context menu of the Icon (right mouse click on the icon) and select the
option Delete Icon Image.
All collected icon images will be saved in the selected icon images file,
which is available in the ‘Camera Image Databases Files’ branch of the
 PDS Explorer – Project tab page (see page 239). The corresponding
BMP and/or JPG files are also stored in the Camera Images branch of the
PDS Explorer Advanced tab page (see page 271).

14.11 Interval Logging View
Figure 14-50 Interval Logging view with 2 items with the sampling method
The Interval Logging view displays the items as specified in the Interval
Logging page for a cutter dredge application (see page 138).
14.12 Laser Scan Control View

Not for all the different laser scans a control view is available. There is
only for the MDL laser scan and the Riegl Z Series a control view, which
is specific for each laser scan.
 Laser Scan – MDL View (see below)
 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View (see page 383)
A Laser Scan Control view is not a standard view which can be added
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, the right Laser Scan
 device driver has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 119).
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the Laser Scan device
driver in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to add the view to the Acquisition. After the Laser Scan Control
view is added the window can be closed. From now on the view is
available in the Displays window where it has to same functionality as all
other views.

14.12.1 Laser Scan – MDL View
Figure 14-51 Laser Scan Control View for the MDL laser scan
14.12.2 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View
Figure 14-52 Laser Scan Control View for the Riegl Z Series laser scan
The values in the control view will be populated with values obtained from
the laser scan.

Select for Frame Motion the option Continuous to get a proper working
with PDS.
When the Frame Scan Number is zero there will be no frame movement.
If the background of an edit box becomes red it means that the value in
the edit box is out of range.
14.13 Manual Input View
Figure 14-53 Manual Input – Dredge Status view with all the dredge statuses
and delays
 When the Manual Input – Dredge Status view is opened the first time it
will be empty. In the properties the configuration file for the right vessel
can be selected.
At the moment the order of In the view several dredge statuses can be selected during the dredge
the dredge statuses is operation. Not all the dredge statuses will be displayed at the same time
fixed according the as it is displayed in the example above. Only the dredge statuses that can
instructions of Boraciet. be possible as next status are displayed in the view. If it is necessary,
with the Undo (Ongedaan maken) button it is always possible to go back
several dredge statuses. The OK button is only visible when a trip can be
finished. After the user clicked on the OK button the next trip will be
started.
Next to the dredge statuses several delays (Verlet) types can be switch
on or off. There is no delay when the delay button is white and the delay
is active when the button is red. An active delay can continue over several

dredge statuses and will be finished automatically when the OK button is
selected.
All the steps done in the Manual Input – Dredge Status view will be
reported in an activity report. This report will be generated at the end of
the dredge instruction and will be logged in the ‘Logdata’ directory.
14.14 Messages Views

In the Acquisition three Messages views are available.
 Messages – HydroBat or Messages – SeaBat 7K view (see below)
 Messages – I/O Port view (see page 386)
 Messages – System Messages view (see page 387)
14.14.1 Messages – HydroBat or Messages –

SeaBat 7K View
In the Acquisition this view is available for the RESON HydroBat and for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. For both systems the view is identical
accept that for the RESON SeaBat 7K an extra tab is available.
In this view the information received from the RESON HydroBat or
RESON SeaBat 7K will be displayed. The light in the tabs can be green,
yellow or red. Green means that everything is OK, yellow means that non
critical errors are received and red means critical errors received from the
system.
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, a device messages
119).
14.14.1.1 Main Page
Figure 14-54 Main Page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the main page the available sonar systems are displayed, normally it
will be only one as displayed above. Double click on the sonar name and
for the RESON HydroBat the Event page will be opened and for the
RESON SeaBat 7K the BITE page will be opened.

14.14.1.2 Event Page
Figure 14-55 Event page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the Event page the events (messages) from the sonar system will be
displayed.
14.14.1.3 BITE Page
Figure 14-56 BITE page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the BITE page the BITE messages from the RESON SeaBat 7K
system will be displayed.
This page is not available for the RESON HydroBat.
14.14.2 Messages – I/O Port View
Figure 14-57 Messages – I/O Port view with incoming data
In the Messages – I/O Port view the incoming and/or outgoing data can
be displayed.
Select in the Properties window (available through the context menu) for
the item ‘I/O Port Selection’ an I/O port and in the view the incoming
and/or outgoing data on that port will be displayed.

Also the font and the color for the different types of text can be modified in
the properties.
14.14.3 Messages – System Messages View
Figure 14-58 Messages – System Messages view with information
In the Messages – System Messages view relevant information, errors

and/or status messages can be displayed.
In the context menu two options are available, the messages can be
printed and the properties of the view can be opened. In the Properties
window the font and the colors for the different types of text can be
modified.
14.15 Multibeam QC Views

In the Acquisition six multibeam QC views are available to show the
information of the multibeam system.
 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view (see below)
 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view (see page
392)
 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view (see page 392)
 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view (see
page 395)
 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view (see page 396)
 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view (see page 400)
In most of the views the multibeam filters can be set (see page 404). The
multibeam filters can only be accessed when in the properties the item
 ‘Multibeam Source’ is set to Multibeam xyz computation. The current
presentation of the data is displayed in the title bar of the view, ‘Raw
Device Data’ for the mode Device Data and ‘XYZ Relative Data’ for the
mode Multibeam xyz computation.
The depths in the Multibeam xyz computation mode are corrected for the
Z-offset, heave, pitch, roll, sound velocity profile, sea level computation
and off course the multibeam filters. The depths displayed in the view are
then relative to the sea level.
14.15.1 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View

A number of sways are shown, the same data points of each sway
connected to those of the previous sway. This gives a view as if a 3D
seafloor is visible. New sways are placed in front; old sways disappear

from the view. This results in a sliding view that gives a good sight on the
seafloor.
In the Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view view the multibeam data can be
presented in different ways. Through the context menu the settings can
be changed to get other presentations of the data in the view. In this view
with the option Display Mode ( ) different ways of displaying the
multibeam data are available:
Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with four different colors;
quality good, colinearity not good, brightness not good and colinearity
and brightness not good.
Figure 14-59 Multibeam QC- 3D Seafloor view with the raw data in the
display mode Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Multibeam xyz computation the

multibeam data is displayed in the colors of the multibeam filters.
Figure 14-60 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with the multibeam xyz

computation in the display mode Quality

Detection
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
amplitude, phase or combined.
Figure 14-61 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode

Detection
Depth Dots
The multibeam data is displayed as dots. It is possible to show the
colors as the colors of the selected color table.
Figure 14-62 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth

Dots

Depth Grid
Between each four points of multibeam data a plane is displayed. It is
possible to show the colors as the color of the selected color table.

Grid
Depth Sample Grid

The same as with Depth Grid, only here with a sample of all the
multibeam data. It is possible to show the colors as the color of the
selected color table.

Sample Grid
Slope Grid
The data is displayed on the same way as the Depth Grid only the
coloring is based on the slope angle. It is possible to show the colors

as the color of the selected color table, with the values 0.1 = 10°, 0.2 =
20°, etc.
Figure 14-65 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope

Grid
Slope Sample Grid

The same as with Slope Grid, only here with a sample of all the
multibeam data. It is possible to show the colors as the color of the
selected color table, with the values 0.1 = 10°, 0.2 = 20°, etc.
Figure 14-66 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope

Sample Grid

14.15.2 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal
Strength Profile View
Figure 14-67 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the
multibeam xyz computation and all four the multipings
In the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view the

RESON SeaBat 7K series the backscatter signal strength is logged with
the bathymetric data of the multibeam system.
The backscatter signal strength can be displayed in all the different
multibeam data color modes as used for the other profile views.
14.15.3 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View

The view displays one sway of the multibeam where the ranges of the
multibeam are shown relative to the multibeam system.
In the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view the multibeam data can be
presented in different ways. Through the context menu the settings can
be changed to get other presentations of the data in the view.
With the option ‘Multibeam Data Color Mode’ in the Properties window the
color mode can be changed.
Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with different colors for the

quality is good, the colinearity is not good, the brightness is not good
and the colinearity and brightness are not good.
Figure 14-68 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the raw data in the
color mode Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Multibeam xyz computation the

multibeam data is displayed in the colors of the multibeam filters.
Figure 14-69 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation in the color mode Quality

Detection Process
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
Figure 14-70 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with one ping in the color
mode Detection Process
Sequence number
The RESON SeaBat 7K systems can be setup to output multipings.
This means that there are four different pings after each other and they
can be displayed in four different colors in the view.
When there are no multipings in the multibeam data, the data will be
displayed in black.
Figure 14-71 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with multipings in the color
mode Sequence number

14.15.4 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total
Propagation Errors View
Figure 14-72 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with
the color mode Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPE’s
The Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view is a

combination of the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view (see page 392) and
the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view (see page 396).

The online TPE is always calculated using the CUBE implementation;
horizontal error without the fore-aft beamwidth error of the multibeam.

14.15.5 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors
View
Figure 14-73 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical
and horizontal TPE’s and IHO errors

The online TPE is always calculated using the CUBE implementation;
horizontal error without the fore-aft beamwidth error of the multibeam.
In the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Error view the vertical and

If no IHO error filter is horizontal Total Propagation Errors (TPE) multibeam data are displayed.
selected in the Multibeam
As option it is also possible to show the IHO error filters in the same
Filters window, the IHO
order 1 is displayed. graph. The IHO error filters will be explained with the other multibeam
filters on page 414.
14.15.5.1 Vertical Total Propagation Error

The vertical total propagation error consists of three different issues:
1. The vertical base reduction.
2. The total swath heave error.
3. The total swath depth error.
The vertical base reduction is computed from the standard deviations of
the static draft, the dynamic draft and the loading of the transducer and
from the standard deviations of the tide measurement and tide prediction.
The total swath heave error is based on the measurement of the heave,
roll and pitch data. The error is computed from the standard deviations of
the variable heave, the fixed heave, the VRU offsets, the pitch, the VRU
alignment and the pitch stabilization of the transducer.
The total swath depth error is based on the measurements of the beam
nadir angle, the depth, the range and the sound velocity. The error is
computed from the standard deviations of the pitch, the roll, the VRU
alignment, the pitch stabilization of the transducer and the sound velocity.
The error is also based on the across and along beam width coefficients
of the transducer.

Swath Per beam
Total vertical
Total heave error Range error Angle error Pitch error Beamwidth error
reduction error
Errors for Draft, Measured heave Beam uncertainty Along beamwidth

or computed Total error over Total pitch error
Squat, Load, Tide, error, Induced coefficient over
range error beam range over beam range
GPS Z heave error depth
(sample distance,
pulse length) +
sound velocity
error
Total roll error: Total pitch error:
Base roll error + Pitch sensor error
Angle measured + Alignment error
error + Angle svp + Stabilization
error + Angle error
Surface speed
error
Base roll error:

Roll sensor error +
Alignment errors
IMU + MB
Angle measured
error:
Beam across
width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Figure 14-74 Vertical error diagram
14.15.5.2 Horizontal Total Propagation Error

The horizontal total propagation error consists of four different issues:
1. The total GPS error.
2. The total horizontal transducer error.
3. The horizontal error related to latency.
4. The horizontal error related to the transducer.
5. The total GPS error is identical with the GPS DRMS.
The total horizontal transducer error is based on the measurements of the
beam nadir angle, the depth, the range and the computed range error.
The error is computed from the standard deviations of the sound velocity,
the heading, the pitch, the VRU alignment, the pitch stabilization of the
transducer and the roll.
The horizontal error related to the latency is based on the measurements
of the vessel speed and the pitch. The error is computed from the
standard deviations of the speed over ground, the GPS latency, the VRU
latency, the transducer head latency, the pitch, the VRU alignment, the
pitch stabilization of the transducer and the heading. The error takes also
in account the GPS latency.
The horizontal error related to the transducer is based on the
measurements of the roll and the pitch. The error is computed from the

standard deviations of the VRU offsets, the GPS offsets, the heading, the
roll and the pitch. The error takes also in account the GPS offsets.
Swath Per beam
Total GPS error Range error Heading error Angle error Pitch error Beamwidth error
GPS horizontal
error SV profile error +
Heading sensor Error due to Along
Range Angle error over Total pitch error
error over beam beamwidth over
measurement beam range over depth
range beam range
error
Total Latency
error
Range Angle measured Total pitch error:

measurement error + Angle svp Pitch sensor error
Vessel speed error: error + Angle + Alignment error
error, Heading Beam uncertainty surface speed + Stabilization
error, Pitch error or computed error error
range error
(sample distance,
pulse length)
Total Tx relative Angle measured
error error: Beam
across width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Offset
measurement
error + related
heading, roll, pitch
errors
Figure 14-75 Horizontal error diagram
14.15.5.3 List of Standard Deviations of the TPE’s

In the overview all the standard deviations which are used in PDS to
calculate the TPE’s are given per device.
Positioning:
Parameter Default Description
GPS latency error 0.00 s With or without the use of PPS the
value is always 0.00 s.
GPS X,Y,Z offset 0.02 m A tape measurement gives a value
measurement of 0.02 m and a theodolite
measurement gives a value of 0.005
m. The user has to fill in the right
value.
Speed-over ground 0.00 m/s For RTK the value is 0.05 m/s and
error for DGPS 1.7 m/s. This right value is
automatically used by PDS.
GPS error 0.00 m When available from the GPS
system and supported by the PDS
driver, the real-time accuracy
information will be used.
When not available PDS uses
default values for X, Y and Z:
RTK is 0.5 m, DGPS is 1 m and
GPS is 5 m.

VRU:
Roll and pitch 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
alignment (C-O) should always be 0.01 °.
Heading alignment 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
(C-O) should always be 0.01 °.
Latency error 0.00 s This value should always be 0.00 s.
X,Y,Z offset 0.02 m A tape measurement gives a value
measurement of 0.02 m and a theodolite
measurement gives a value of 0.005
m. The user has to fill in the right
value.
Roll error 0.05 ° This value is as per manufacturer.
Pitch error 0.05 ° This value is as per manufacturer.
Pitch stabilization 0.00 °
Fixed heave 0.01 m This is the fixed component of the
heave measurement error. With RTK
height this value should be 0.01 m.
For other situations the value is as
per manufacturer.
Percentage of heave 5% This is the variable component of the
variable error heave measurement as percentage
of the heave value. For other
situations the value is as per
manufacturer.
Multibeam:
Latency error 0.00 s The transducer head latency error.
Roll alignment (C-O) 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
should always be 0.01 °.
Pitch alignment (C-O) 0.05 ° If a calibration is performed the value
should always be 0.05 °.
Heading alignment 0.05 ° If a calibration is performed the value
(C-O) should always be 0.05 °.
Range error 0.05 m Value is as per manufacturer.
SVP profile 0.25 m/s Value is as per manufacturer.
SVP at the head 0.25 m/s Value is as per manufacturer.
Water level 0.00 m The SDEV of the tide measurement.
Only a value when a tide station is
used and the value is as per
manufacturer.
Compass:
Compass ??? ° The default is per latitude and the
value is as per manufacturer.
Depth sensor:

Loading 0.00 m The SDEV of the measurement of
the draft changes (known loading as
e.g. fuel use). With RTK the value
should be 0.00 m. In other situation it
will depend on the selected device.
Dynamic draft 0.00 m With RTK the value should be 0.00
m. In other situation it will depend on
the vessel.
Tide gauge:
Tide gauge 0.02 m The SDEV of the tide gauge
readings. With RTK the value should
be 0.00 m. In other situations the
Tide prediction error 0.02 m The tide error due to spatial/temporal
variation. With RTK the value should
be 0.00 m. In other situations the
14.15.6 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View
Figure 14-76 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view with the multibeam data
item Quality
In the Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view each sway is a horizontal

line, each new sway is printed on top of the view and will drop the
previous sways downwards.
With the option Ping Annotation Mode in the properties of the view (see
page 403) the ping numbers or the track distance can be shown on the
left side in view. The track distance is only useful when a route is selected
as guidance.

With the option Multibeam Data Item ( ) different ways of displaying
the multibeam data is available. The display options are similar to the
A message is displayed display modes in the Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view; Quality,
when the data cannot be Detection Process, Depth, Slope and Intensity. The intensity can only be
shown because it is not displayed if this value is available in the multibeam data. Also the TPE
available. Vertical Error and TPE Horizontal Error can be displayed (see above).
This is only possible if for the ‘Multibeam Source’ in the Properties
Multibeam xyz computation is selected.
14.15.7 Multibeam QC – Toolbar and Context

Menu
The items in the toolbars and in the context menus are:
The + and – key of the Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view. The zoom functions are only working
also be used for the Zoom when the ‘X Axis Range Mode’ is not Automatic. In both views with
In and Zoom Out. TPE’s it also works with the ‘Y Axis Range Mode’ is not Automatic.
Zoom Window, Zoom Extents ( , )
Zoom window is a zoom in by drawing a window around the are that
has to be zoomed in.
Zoom extents will display all the data in the profile view.
Only Show Valid Beams ( )
Toggles between showing all the data and only the valid data.
Layer Control ( )
The grid layer, the multibeam legend layer and the color table layer
can be edited. The color table layer is not available in the Multibeam
QC – Raw Profile view and in the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal
Strength Profile view.
Color Table Layer
The layer contains the color table as selected in the properties and will
be displayed on the right hand side in the view.
Multibeam Legend Layer
The layer contains the text on the left side of the view. The text can be
the legend for the Quality, the Detection Process, the TPE Horizontal
Error or the TPE Vertical Error.
Grid Layer
The layer contains the horizontal and vertical lines in the view.
X Axis Range Mode
All Fixed. The minimum and maximum value is fixed.
Span Fixed. The span, the distance between the minimum and
maximum value, is fixed.
Automatic. The minimum, the maximum and the span are set
automatically.
Y Axis Range Mode
Same as for X Axis Range Mode.
Multibeam Data Color Mode
Only available in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view and in the
Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view. Select
between the color mode Quality, Detection Process, Sequence
number or Detection order.
Quality gives the colors of the filters as set in the multibeam filters.
Detection Process gives the colors for the detection method,

Sequence number gives the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K
systems.
Detection order gives the colors for the multiple detections in each
beam for the multidetection. See also section multidetection on page
525.
Ping selection ( )
The selection of the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K systems; All
pings or one of the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K systems in
color will be displayed.
Display Mode ( )
Seven different ways of displaying the multibeam data in the
Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view (see page 387).
Multibeam Data Item ( )
Different ways of displaying the multibeam data in the Multibeam QC –
Vertical Waterfall view (see page 400).
Automatic Cell Colors
The data in the view will be colored automatically and are not related
to a color table. This option only works for a display mode with a
depth.
Draw Connection Lines
Draw lines between the adjacent points of a sway.
Draw Beam Pattern
Draw lines from the multibeam head to the points of the sway.
Draw Reduced Profile
A red line is drawn through the valid points of the sway. In the right top
corner the percentage that is used for the XYZ log data file is
displayed. All the data will still be logged.
Show History
When checked, the sway before will also be displayed.
Multibeam Filter Settings
The Multibeam Filters view will be opened (see page 404 for a detailed
explanation).
Show TPE Error Ellipses
An ellipse will be shown in the raw profile data of the Multibeam QC –
Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view. The ellipse is created
with the vertical and horizontal total propagation error.
Properties ( )
The Properties window of the view will be opened, where most of the
options are identical with the items in the context menu.
Only Show TPE Error
Show only the TPE in the graph.
Only Show IHO Error
Show only the IHO error in the graph. If no IHO error filter is selected
in the Multibeam Filters view on page 404, then the IHO order 1 will be
shown.
Show Both TPE and IHO Errors
Show the TPE and the IHO error in the same graph.
Show Error As Bar
Show the values of the TPE or the IHO error as bars. Can show only
one type of error, it is not possible to show both at the same time.

14.15.8 Multibeam QC – Properties
Some items in the properties of the Multibeam QC views are only
accessible through the properties. The relevant items will be explained
below.
Multibeam Source
There are two modes available to show the multibeam data, one to
show the raw multibeam data (Device Data) and one to show
corrected multibeam data (Multibeam xyz computation).
When the view is in the mode Multibeam xyz computation the
multibeam filters are accessible (see below).
Automatic Cell Colors
Disable this option when a color table is used to show the depth colors
(not in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view).
Color Table Name
A color table can be selected (not in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile
view and in the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile
view). The color of the color table will be used to display the multibeam
data, only in one of the Depth modes.
X Axis Range / Y Axis Range
The minimum, the maximum and/or the span width can be set for the
X axis and Y axis.
Ping Annotation Mode
Only for the Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view a ping annotation
is displayed on the left side in the view. There are two options to show
the ping annotation, Ping Numbers and Track Distance.
Ping Annotation Interval
The interval between two ping annotations can be selected.
Beam Interval between TPE Ellipses
This is the number of beams between two TPE ellipses in the
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view.

14.15.9 Multibeam Filters View
Figure 14-77 Multibeam Filters view
The Multibeam Filters view can be opened through:

 The context menu of the Multibeam QC views
The Multibeam Source properties of of the Multibeam QC View
must be set to Multibeam xyz computation to open the Multibeam
filters view. Filters apply to this selected computation.
 By the Acquisition’s Multibeam Filters and Sound Velocity icon.
Figure 14-78 Multibeam filters and Sound Velocity icon
The filter settings apply to the selected multibeam device in top of

the Multibeam filter view.
Figure 14-79 Select Multibeam device

 By the Acquisition’s Edit>Multibeam Filters / sound velocity menu.
The filter settings apply to the selected multibeam device in top of
the Multibeam filter view.
Figure 14-80 Select multibeam device
The filters are active when the filters are displayed in the window and the
checkmark ( ) is set. With , a not displayed filter can be added to
the list. Uncheck a displayed filter and it will be not active anymore.
Click on to see if the filter settings work accordingly. Click on
to accept the filter settings and to close the window. When the
window is closed the unchecked filters will be removed from the list of
active filters. When the Multibeam Filters view is opened again the
unchecked filters will not be displayed anymore and can be added again
with . When a filter is added again it will remember the last used
settings.
All the available filters for the Multibeam Filters view are:
 Beam reject filter
The selected beams will be rejected.
The beam numbers are separated with commas.

 Beam quality filter
Reject the beams that don’t meet the quality.
The quality settings are the same for all the RESON multibeam
systems.
Quality 1 = Poor colinearity and Good brightness.
Quality 2 = Good colinearity and Poor brightness.
Quality 3 = Good colinearity and Good brightness.
Shallowest (first) = Only first (multi detect) detection data.
For multi-detect data the option Shallowest (first) is added. With

shallowest(first) set all data except the first detections is rejected.
 Range filter
Reject the beams outside the given range limits.
It is possible to define the range relative to the sonar head or to the

nadir depth.
Uncheck the % of Nadir checkbox to set the range filter with reference
to the sonar head. Beams are rejected outside the entered Min and
Max range. (E.g. a max value of 70 means all beams with a range
higher as 70 meter with respect to the head are rejected) . See Figure
14-85 on page 410.
Select the % of Nadir checkbox to set the range filter with reference to

the measured nadir depth. Beams are rejected outside the entered Min
and max percentage. (E.g. a percentage of 180 means all beams with
a range higher as 1.8 X the nadir depth are rejected.)
 Depth filter
Reject the beams outside the given depth limits.
The minimum and maximum depth relative to sea level. See Figure
14-85 on page 410.
 Angle Nadir filter
Reject the beams outside the nadir angles.
The port and starboard angle from the nadir. See Figure 14-88 on
page 411.
The angle can be defined as the angle to the detection point or as the
angle as received at the transducer (see Figure 14-89 and Figure
14-90 on page 412).
 Distance Nadir filter
Reject the beams where the distance from the nadir exceeds the given
distance limits.
The port and starboard distance from the nadir. See Figure 14-91 on
page 412.
 Slope filter
Reject the beams where the slope angle exceeds the given slope
angle.
The maximum acceptable slope angle. See Figure 14-86 on page 410.
 Intersect filter
Reject the beams where the intersection angle is smaller then the
given intersection angle.
The minimum acceptable intersection angle. See Figure 14-86 on

page 410.
 Statistic filter
Reject the beams where the statistic computation exceeds the given
settings.
The window size options are 3x3, 5x5 and 7x7 beams. See Figure
14-92 on page 413.
The strictness is from 1 (low) to 9 (high), where a setting of 1 has less
influence then a strictness of 9.
 Smart filter
Reject the beams that are outside the filter band created with the
smart filter settings. It only available when an interferometry device is
used.

A combination of the different parameters gives a band where the data
should be in. See Smart Filter on page 414 for a detailed explanation.
 Flying object filter
Reject the beams that are too high in relation to the sea bottom.
The size + border are the number of beams that will be used for the
filter. See Figure 14-87 on page 411.
 IHO error filter
Reject the beams with higher IHO errors then the selected IHO error
filter.
The IHO orders are the special order, the order 1 to 3 and NL Norm A.
See for an explanation on page 414.
 Custom error filter
Reject the beams with a higher vertical TPE as specified.
The user can enter a maximum vertical total propagation error. See for
an explanation on page 396.
 Amplitude Detection Filter
Reject amplitude detections after a specified number of phase
detections in a ping. See page 418 for more details.
 MD Sub Bottom
The MD sub bottom filter only applies for multi detect data. Data is
rejected below the primary detection.
See the next pictures.

Sub bottom filter disabled: Sub bottom filter enabled:
Figure 14-81 Sub bottom filter disabled and enabled
 MD Intensity
The MD intensity filter only applies for multi-detect data. Data with the
intensity below a specific threshold is rejected. The initial threshold is
set by the Multibeam Area editing – intensity level slider of the Multi
Detect Visualization page.
See the next picture.

Intensity filter disabled: Intensity filter enabled
Figure 14-82 Intensity filter disabled and enabled
With the option Swath reject a full sway will be rejected when the
percentage of rejected beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
multibeam computation; No SV Profile, SV Profile File and SVP Sensor.
The option No SV Profile means no sound velocity profile will be used.
When the option SV Profile File is selected, a sound velocity profile can
be selected. The profile will be used in the multibeam computation.
When the option SVP Sensor is selected, the data from the sound velocity
profile sensor that is selected in the Equipment will be used in the
multibeam computation.
Click ‘New’ to create or import a new sound velocity profile. The new
profile will get the current date and time as filename (e.g. 20141217-
155921) It becomes the active sound velocity profile as used by the
The sonar requires a speed of sound near the head for beamforming. A
speed of sound sensor near the head is the best solution. The used
surface speed of sound is always known (setting in multibeam system).
When in PDS sound velocity profile data is used, the option ‘Use surface
speed of sound as firtst entry in the table’ becomes available.
Figure 14-83 ‘Use surface speed of sound as first entry in table’ option
A deviation may be present between the surface sound velocity profile

and the provided sound velocity profile. When the ‘Use surface speed of
sound as first entry of table’ option is selected the sound velocity value as
applied by the sonar head will be used together with the selected sound
velocity profile.
Select this option:
 When there is no speed of sound sensor connected to the sonar
or when the speed of sound sensor output wrong values.

 When the surface speed of sound changes and the remainder of
the profile remains the same.
Figure 14-84 Two profiles with a different surface speed of sound but remainder
of the profile remains the same.
With the now available surface speed of sound as first entry in the table
the refraction correction will be done correctly.
Do not select the ‘Use surface speed of sound as first entry of table’
option when the total profile changes with the surface speed of sound.
In other words it depends on the environment if the option needs to be
enables or not.
‘Rejected’ means ‘marked as rejected’. The rejected beams are always
 logged in the raw data file and not in cleaned data files. Changing the
filter settings in the Editing (see page 562) can bring back some of the
rejected beams.

14.15.9.1 Depth and Range Filter
Waterline
Min.Depth
filter
Max. Depth
filter
Range
Filters Nadir
Depth
Filters
Figure 14-85 Depth and Range filters
For the depth filter the points outside the depth limits will be rejected. The
depth filter limits are set relative to the waterline.
For the range filter the points outside the range limits will be rejected. The
range filter limits are set relative to the sonar head.
14.15.9.2 Intersection and Slope Filter
Intersection
Angle Nadir
Slope Angle
Figure 14-86 Intersection and Slope filters
The intersection filter checks the enclosed angle of 3 data points against
the given minimum angle. A smaller angle then the intersection angle will
reject the middle data point of the 3 data points.
The slope filter checks the angle between two adjacent points and the
plane against the given maximum angle. When the angle is larger than
the maximum angle, the beam will be rejected.

14.15.9.3 Flying Object Filter
1 2 3 S 5 6 7 C
X
Figure 14-87 Flying Object Filter
The flying object filter will reject each beam that is too high in relation to
the sea bottom.
In the figure above the size is 4 and the border is 3. This means 4 beams
from point A to the center (point C) gives point S and then 3 beams to
both sides. This will give 7 beams to check against point A. The flying
object filter will reject point A if one of the 7 beams is further away in X
direction from the center beam (point C) then point A. In this example is
point 1 and 2 further away than point A, so point A will be rejected.
14.15.9.4 Nadir Filter
Port Starboard
Angle Nadir Angle
Figure 14-88 Port and Starboard Angle Nadir filter
The angle nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or starboard
angle and the nadir. Points outside the angle will be rejected.

Incidence Angle
Figure 14-89 Incidence angle
Angle to
detection point
Figure 14-90 Angle to the detection point
The incidence angle is the angle between the nadir and the received
angle at the transducer head. This is the angle on which the data is
received in the transducer head.
The angle to detection point is the angle between the nadir and the line
between the detection point on the seafloor and the transducer head. The
detection point is the point where the beam with ray-bending will hit the
seafloor.
Nadir
Port Starboard
Distance Distance
Figure 14-91 Port and Starboard Distance Nadir filter

The distance nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or
starboard distance and the nadir. Points further away from the nadir then
the limits will be rejected.
14.15.9.5 Statistic Filter

3x3 statistic window
sway n+1
sway n
sway n-1
point under test
depth
9 sorted depth values

quartile 0.75
median value
quartile 0.25
Figure 14-92 Statistic filter with 3x3 beams
A statistic filter checks each data point in a multibeam sway against its
surrounding data points.
Each point is surrounded by a window of points, depending on the
selection either 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 points. The window will give 9, 25 or 49
observed depths. These values will be sorted and from the sorted points
the median value is taken. This median is used as a robust estimate for
the point under test. In case the point under test differs more than 3%
from the median value than the point is rejected immediately.
The point that passed the first test will be tested further. From the sorted
depths two quartile values are taken, at .25 and .75 from the number of
observations. The difference of those two points will be used in an
integration routine together with 9 previous (approved) differences. (10%
of each depth is taken). The result of this routine is a variation value.
The difference of the found median value and the absolute value of the
point under test are compared with a value set by the variation value and
a user definable ‘Strictness’. A strictness of 1 takes the variation value
times 10, and a strictness of 9 takes the variation value times 2. This
means that a strictness of 1 (low) has less influence than a strictness of 9
(high).
A point will be rejected when the difference between median value and
the absolute value is more than (variation value x [11 – strictness]).
The statistic filter is an acceptation filter that adjusts itself to the
 roughness of the seafloor, because of the fluctuations in the variation
values.

14.15.9.6 IHO Error Filter
Since 1957, the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) issued the
standards of hydrographic surveys. The main issue in the standard is the
survey measurement error which should be based on the understanding
of 95% confidence levels specified for position and depth accuracies. The
new S-44 standards proposed a classification scheme for hydrographic
surveys based on the area’s importance for the safety of surface
navigation. This classification is called ‘Orders’. The orders for the IHO
error filter in PDS are:
Special Order
This order is for a hydrographic survey that covers areas where ships
may need to navigate with minimum under keel clearance and where the
bottom characteristics are potentially hazardous to vessels such as
boulders or rock outcropping.
Order 1
This order is intended for surveys for harbors and general intercoastal
inland navigation channels including those approaching harbors where
vessel drafts have a greater clearance above the seafloor or where the
bottom characteristics are less hazardous (e.g silt or sand) then for a
Special Order survey area.
Order 2
This order is applicable for surveys with water depths less than 200
meters which are not covered by the criteria for the Special Order or
Order 1.
Order 3
This order is applicable for surveys with water depths greater than 200
meters.
NL Norm A
Special order made by RWS for in The Netherlands.
This order is for a hydrographic survey of harbors and fairways where
ships may need to navigate with minimum under keel clearance and
where the bottom characteristics are potentially hazardous to vessels
such as boulders or rock outcropping.
14.15.9.7 Smart Filter

The smart filter is only available as multibeam filter when an
 interferometry device is used. When a multibeam system is used the
smart filter will not be available.
 It is advisable to use next to the smart filter a statistic filter (see page 413)
to remove the major spikes.
Figure 14-93 Parameters for the smart filter
The most common settings for the smart filter parameters are:
 Reliable sector - between 8° and 40° from the nadir.
Used to calculate the mean depth.
 Depth to width ratio – between 4 and 6.
Maximum used width based on the mean depth.

 Number of averaging clips – between 10 and 50.
For specific types of seabed different values are advised.
For a sandy-flat area between 10 and 15.
For a seabed with a slope between 15 and 35.
For a seabed with ripples between 20 and 50.
 Nadir area – use the default value of 10%.
Defines the unreliable nadir area.
 Vertical tolerance inside reliable – between 0.03 and 0.10m.
 Vertical tolerance outside reliable – between 0.05 and 0.15m.
Figure 14-94 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with interferometry data
 The item Reliable sector is the reliable angle sector which is the sector
between the nadir and the reliable angle. All beams inside this sector
should be used to determine the average sway depth (ASD). In the
example above with a reliable angle sector of 30° ASD is about
10.25m.
 With the ASD and the item depth to width ratio the maximum sway
width (MSW) can be calculated. In the example the maximum sway
width will be ‘depth to width ratio’ x ASD = 4 x 10.25 = 41m.
 Starting from the nadir beam, all the beams farther away than the
MSW should be excluded from the computation. So all the beams in
the Outer area will be excluded.
 The area that is left (this is the MSW) can be divided in three other
areas; Nadir area, Reliable area and Unreliable area. A very common
distribution for the MSW is 10% for the Nadir area, 60% for the
Reliable area and 30% for the Unreliable area. The Nadir area is a
parameter of the smart filter. At the moment the distribution as
mentioned above will be used in the smart filter.

Figure 14-95 Interferometry data with the four areas
The four areas can be explained as:

 Nadir area
This area is very nasty and quite often leads to a sort of ‘railway’ effect
when combined/interpolated with data from the other transducer.
 Reliable area
All beams in this area are quite consistent and give a good result.
 Unreliable area
All beams in this area are affected by a sort of cloud effect.
 Outer area
All beams in this area are totally unreliable and mostly due to bad
reflections on the seabed. These beams should be rejected totally.
After the areas are defined, with the item Number of averaging clips (N)
the maximum sway width (MSW) can be divided in small sections
(averaging clip) with MSW / N. In the example the number of averaging
clips is set on 10, so this will give 10 averaging clips of 4.1m.
For each averaging clip an average depth will be calculated. This value
should be placed in the midpoint of each averaging clip. For the Nadir
area and the edge with the Outer area a different depth will be used.
For the averaging clips in the Nadir area the average depth can be
affected by typical interferometer nadir problems. It is then preferable to
use the average depth from the first averaging clip in the Reliable area.
For the nadir point the same average depth as for the first averaging clip
of the Reliable area will be used. For the end of the Unreliable area (the
edge with the Outer area) the depth of the last averaging clip can be
used.

Figure 14-96 Interferometry data with the averaging clips and the average
depths
Around the average depths a vertical tolerance can be defined. For the
Reliable area the tolerance can be set with the item Vertical tolerance
inside reliable and for the Unreliable area with the item Vertical tolerance
outside reliable.
With these two tolerances an offset from the average depths can be set.
The area between the two tolerances (above and below the average
depth) is the valid area. All the beams outside the tolerance areas will be
rejected by the smart filter.
Figure 14-97 Interferometry data with the tolerance areas

14.15.9.8 Amplitude Detection Filter
Figure 14-98 Amplitude detection filter
Some types of sonars do amplitude detection in the nadir sector and

phase detection in the outer sector. However in the outer beams sector
still sometimes amplitude detection occur which could disturb the data
quality for some sonars. With the Amplitude Detection Filter these
detections could be rejected. The amplitude detections will be rejected
after a specified (by the user) number of phase detections from off the
nadir. In the below example, the red colored fields are amplitude
detections, and the blue colored fields are phase detections schematically
drawn in a ping. When as number of phase detections 4 is selected this
will result in this example by rejecting two amplitude detections. The other
2 amplitude detections are within the number of counted phase detections
and will therefore not be rejected by the filter.
Figure 14-99 Amplitude and Phase detections
14.16 Numerics View

In the Acquisition two different numeric views are available:
 Numerics – Standard View (see below)
 Numerics – Sonar Targets View (see page 422)

14.16.1 Numerics – Standard View
Figure 14-100 Example of a Numerics – Standard view
A Numerics – Standard view can be filled with the information that the
user wants to see. Each view can have several pages and each page can
have a descriptive name. On the left hand side of the view are the names
of the pages and on the right hand side the items belonging to the
selected page. Both parts have their own context menu.
The first time this view is opened the user has to create a Numerics view.
Select the option New from the context menu of the left pane and create a
name for the view. In the new view, pages can be added by using the
option Add New Page from the context menu.
Each page can have several items on the right hand side. Select in the
context menu of the right pane the option Edit Page to add items to this
page. It will open a separate window where the page configuration can be
defined.
 The page can also be filled by using the ‘Drag & Drop’ method from the
Raw Data view (see page 464).
Figure 14-101 Configuration window for the Numerics – Standard view shown
above

Select a device or a computation in the tree and click on
to add this device or computation to the page layout. With
the selected device or computation can be inserted above the selected
item in the page layout.
With a separation can be inserted above the selected item
in the page layout, while with a separation can be added
below the last item in the page layout.
Select a separation and click on to add text to the separation.
With this option headers can be made between the selected items.
With an item or separation can be removed.
With the buttons and the selected element can be moved up or
down in the list.
In the Numerics – Standard view the font, the background, etc. can be
changed by selecting the option Properties in the context menu. Double
clicking on an item in the page gives also the possibility to change the
color and the font of that item.
14.16.1.1 Primary Data Source Name in the Numeric View

It could be useful to display the primary data source name in the numeric
view. For instance when there are more depth sensor devices available to
calculate the sealevel of the vessel, it could be helpful to see in this case
the primary (used) device for quick indication.
The following table lists the steps to setup a primary data source name in
the numeric view.
Step Action
1 It is assumed in this example more depth sensor devices are
available and added in the vessel configuration with the
correct offsets.
Refer to section ‘Equipment’ on page 119 how to add and

configure devices.
2 It is recommended to use Aliases for a clear indication in the
numeric view.
In this example : ‘Depth manual’ and ‘Depth from sensor’.
Refer to section ‘Aliases’ on page 160.

Step Action
3 Add a new numerical view or edit an existing numerical view

in Realtime.
4 Refer to section ‘Numeric Views’ on page 418.
It is not possible to add the name of the primary device to the

numerical view by the ‘drag and drop’ method.
Therefore in the numeric page configuration:
a. Click at ‘Datasources’ on the Primary
Sealevel.
b. Click ‘Appended Selected Element’
5 Now the name of the primary device is displayed in the

numerical view.

Step Action
It automatically changes when the other sensor becomes the
primary data source.
14.16.1.2 Numerics Alarm

Through the context menu of the Numerics view an alarm can be defined
on the item in the view. Right click in the field of the item that needs an
alarm to open the context menu with the options for the alarm specific for
that item. When for the item in the Numerics view never an alarm is set
the option Define alarm can be used to set the alarm.
Figure 14-102 Alarm Definition dialog for an item in the Numerics view
Set the alarm and select which actions should be taken when an alarm
occurs. The action Blink Numerics item will start flickering the field of the
item in the Numerics view.
When the alarm is set it can be disabled again with the context menu
option Edit alarm. The same dialog as above will open and just uncheck
the option Enable Alarm.
After the alarm is disabled it can be removed with the context menu
option Remove alarm. It is also possible to leave the alarm linked to the
item and with Edit alarm the alarm can be edited and enabled again.
When this alarm is set and the same item is set in the Numerics Layer of
the plan view, the item in the plan view will start flickering when the alarm
occurs.
14.16.2 Numerics – Sonar Targets View
Figure 14-103 Numerics – Sonar Targets view
The Numerics – Sonar Targets view is a view with a table where the
information about the created sonar targets is displayed.

The displayed sonar targets are stored in the sonar targets file as created
or selected in the Project Configuration (see page 77). The sonar targets
file name is displayed in the caption of the view; ‘Sonar Targets 4’ in the
example above.
Double click on a sonar target will open the Sonar Targets View with the
GeoTIFF image and the information which can be modified (see page
466).
The user can select in the Properties which columns have to be displayed
in the view. The Properties can be opened through the context menu.
In the context menu next to the Properties two other options are available;
delete the selected sonar target or delete all sonar targets. The delete
implement that the sonar target(s) will be deleted in the views and from
the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar target(s) the
corresponding GeoTIFF file(s) of the image of the sonar target(s) will be
deleted.
For more information about the sonar targets see the ‘Sonar Targets /
Contacts’ manual.
14.17 Output Control View
Figure 14-104 Output Control view for the RESON SeaBat 8125
An Output Control view is not a standard view which can be added

menu of the Acquisition. With this type of views the settings of a RESON
SeaBat can be controlled.
For the RESON SeaBat 8101, 8111er, 8125, 8160 and 6012 an Output
Control view is available.
 Before one of these views can be selected, the output control has to be
added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 119).
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the right output control

add the view to the Acquisition. After the Output Control view is added the
window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays
window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Every change of one of the slides is send directly to the control unit of the
multibeam system. Use for the range and depth filter to send the
filter settings to the control unit. With all the
settings will be send to the control unit to setup the multibeam system.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for an Output
Control view.
14.18 Pipe Lay Views

These views are only available with a dedicated dongle and in
combination with one of the applications Pipe Position Monitor or Pipe
Position Monitor J-Lay.
There are three different types of Pipe Lay views available in the
Acquisition.
 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view (see below)
 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view (see page 425)
 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view (see page 426)
14.18.1 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View

The Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view is only useful for the application Pipe
Position Monitor J-Lay. It will show the J-Lay tower with the pipe and the
criteria and the view is always perpendicular to the pipe.
Figure 14-105 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and
the pipe.

14.18.2 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View
The Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view for the application ‘Pipe Position
Monitor’ shows graphically the stinger, the rollers, the used beams and
the computed pipe.
Figure 14-106 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor application
The view for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ is completely
different. The view shows a plan view of the vessel with the J-Lay tower,
the overbend and sagbend criteria, the used beams and the computed
pipe.
Figure 14-107 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application

14.18.3 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View
The Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view is a view where the screen of one of the
RESON SeaBat system is shown with the computed pipe position as an
overlay.
Figure 14-108 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe
Position Monitor application
The view will be different for both application types, for the application
‘Pipe Position Monitor’ the display is from a RESON SeaBat 6012, while
for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ the display is from the
RESON SeaBat 8125.
14.19 Plan Views

A plan view is the most used view in the Acquisition. In this view a variety
of items can be shown:
 Vessel contour (in scale).
 Track of the vessel.
 Routes, runlines and waypoints.
 Coverage generated during the survey, e.g. a multibeam coverage.
 Grid model with a color table showing the depth data.
 Projection and/or geographical grid.
In the Acquisition a maximum of seven different plan views are available
and they will be explained in alphabetical order. It will depend on the
application type and dongle which plan views are available for the user.
 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars (see below)
 Plan View – Dredge Instruction (see page 428)
 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning (see page 429)
 Plan View – General Dredge Operation (see page 430)
 Plan View – Navigation (see page 431)
 Plan View – Production (see page 432)
 Plan View – Survey Coverage (see page 433)

14.19.1 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars
Figure 14-109 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars
In this view a plan view with 3 panes (bars) are displayed. The panes can
be used to display values that are useful for the survey, like the distance
to a waypoint or the offtrack.
Use the context menu in the panes to open the Layer Control to select in
the Up Down Indicator Layer the Source Item that have to be displayed.
In the pane any value available can be monitored. Default only one item is
 displayed. It is possible to have more than one item displayed, just add for
each extra item an extra up-down indicator layer to the pane.

14.19.2 Plan View – Dredge Instruction
Figure 14-110 Plan View – Dredge Instruction with a dredge instruction
In this view the grid model, the 3D model, the dredge polygon, the
At the moment the dredge
disposal area and the historical tracks from the dredge instruction will be
instruction as a guidance is displayed.
only available for Boraciet, The Plan View – Dredge Instruction shows the location where the dredge
so also this Plan View can activity has to take place. In this view nothing has to be added, because
only be used for Boraciet.
all the relevant information is already loaded and displayed through the
dredge instruction.
When the vessel received a dredge instruction it can be selected in the
guidance as the new dredge instruction. Select from the menu bar in the
Acquisition the option Guidance > Guidance Settings or select from
the toolbar to open the Guidance window to select a new dredge
instruction.
A quick way to select a new dredge instruction is with the option
Guidance > Select Dredge Instruction… from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Acquisition. A preview window will be opened
where all the available dredge instructions can be viewed and the new
dredge instruction can be selected.

14.19.3 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning
Figure 14-111 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning with a bull’s eye and a waypoint
The Plan View – Dynamic Positioning can be used to navigate to a

specific location that is specified as a waypoint. The bull’s eye rings are
automatically drawn around the waypoint.
At the bottom of the view useful information for the navigation will be
shown. The colors and the font size can be modified through the Dynamic
Positioning Information Layer in the Layer Control.

14.19.4 Plan View – General Dredge Operation
Figure 14-112 Plan View – General Dredge Operation with an updated grid
model
The Plan View – General Dredge Operation can be used for general
dredge operations where the active grid model will be updated
immediately after the bottom is dredged.
This view can be used in the Acquisition in conjunction with one or two
Profile – Realtime Design views (see page 453) to get a complete
monitoring of the dredge activity.

14.19.5 Plan View – Navigation
Figure 14-113 Plan View – Navigation with a C-Map layer
The Plan View – Navigation can be used for the navigation of the vessel.
For the background several options like S57 charts,C-Map or a DXF chart
can be used. All the options to navigate the vessel, like the different
guidance options, are available in this plan view. It is possible to show
survey data (e.g. Grid model) in this plan view as a background layer.
With the view can be used as a Plan View – Dynamic Positioning (see
page 429).
The information from the C-Map background is available with the two
extra buttons ( and ). This option makes this plan view very useful
for a buoy laying vessel.
In the Plan View – Navigation an image layer of the wedge of a forward
looking sonar can be added. In this wedge sonar targets can be selected.

14.19.6 Plan View – Production
Figure 14-114 Plan View – Production with a production grid model
The Plan View - Production can be used to show the production with a
production grid model. This production grid model is the grid model that is
selected in the Logging page of the vessel configuration with the file
format ‘Production Format’ (see page 144).
The display and the options of the view are similar to the Plan View –
Survey Coverage (see below).

14.19.7 Plan View – Survey Coverage
Figure 14-115 Plan View – Survey Coverage with an active grid model
The Plan View – Survey Coverage can be used to show the update of the
grid model. This grid model is the grid model that is selected in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration for the file format ‘PDS Grid
Model’ (see page 144).
In this plan view the coverage of the survey can be shown, not only for a
multibeam survey but also for a single beam survey.
 The Plan View – Survey Coverage can be used to display the sonar
targets as created in this view or in the Sonar Views.

14.19.8 Plan View – Survey Coverage and Edit
Figure 14-116 Plan View Survey coverage and Edit
The Plan View – Survey Coverage and Edit shows the update of the Grid
model as also in the Plan View – Survey Coverage, but now also this grid
model could be edited at the same time.
The left pane of the view contains the created grid model name as
selected in logging page, an Info, an Edit and a Filter tab.
Figure 14-117 Top of left pane with grid model name and tabs
The tabs contain the same functionality as applicable in the Grid Model
Editor. Refer to the Grid Model Editor on page 627 for a description of
these tabs.
14.19.9 Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the buttons in the toolbars are for all the plan views identical.
Some are only for one or two views available. The context menus of the

plan views have similarity, but some options are only available in one or
two views.
Below all the options that appear in one of the context menus or toolbars
will be discussed.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( , , , )
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
mouse wheel can also be window option works only when Follow Vessel is off. The Zoom
used for the Zoom In and
Zoom Out.
Extents is only available in the Plan View – Dredge Instruction.
Pan ( )
button.
Redraw
Redraw the plan view.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessel’s tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Figure 14-118 Measure window in the plan views
Click on to change the presentation from grid to latitude and

longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 76).
Click on to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Relative Vessel ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing from the vessel to a selected
point in the plan view.
Figure 14-119 Measure Relative Vessel window

Measure Line Relative
To measure a distance to the start and end of a line and the offtrack to
that line. Draw a line by selecting a start and end point of the line with
the left mouse button. The measure window shows start and end
coordinates and the coordinates of the current location of the cursor.
Also the distance from the cursor to the start and end point of the line
and the offtrack is given.

Figure 14-120 Measure Relative window

Click on or to change the distance unit.
Save Snapshot
The picture of the plan view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Save as GeoTiff
The picture of the plan view will be saved as a GeoTIFF file (geo-
referenced TIFF file). The file is compressed with the compression
LZW.
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and the area will
be saved as a sonar target.
The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
selected.
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
439.
This option is available in the Plan View – Survey Coverage, Plan
View – Survey coverage and Edit and Plan View – Navigation. In the
Plan View – Survey Coverage and Plan View – Survey Coverage and
Edit the active grid model is used to detect the sonar targets.
In the Plan View – survey coverage and the Plan view Survey
coverage and Edit it is possible to create besides the sonar target:
 A polygon target.
A polygon target is the same as a sonar target but now the
area is defined by a drawn polygon and a GeoTIFF is created
of only the area within the polygon
 A pipeline target.
A pipeline target is the same as a polygon target but now a
route is created. For the defined coverage width is a GeoTIFF
created along the route. The coverage width is set in the
Project configuration – sonar Target / Contacts settings.
Create Sonar Target Contact ( )
Click with the cursor in the plan view to create a sonar target contact.
A sonar target contact has the same options as a sonar target but
instead of an area it is now a point.
See also ‘Sonar Target options in Plan Views’ on page 439.
Delete All Sonar Targets
All the sonar targets from the active sonar targets file will be deleted in
the views and from the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar
targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images of the sonar
targets will be deleted.

This option is only available in the Plan View – Survey Coverage and
Plan View – Navigation.
Add Icon Image
This option is only The cursor will change to a cross and the user has to select a position
available in the Plan View in the Plan View where an icon will be placed. When the position is
– Survey Coverage and selected the user has to select an image (BMP or JPG) that will be
Plan View – Navigation. linked to that position. The icon image will be stored in the active icon
image file that is selected in the Project Configuration (see page 78).
Add Waypoint
Click with the mouse on the location where a waypoint has to be
added, give a name for the waypoint and automatically a wayline is
drawn from the vessel to the new waypoint.
Add Waypoint Line Relative
Click with the mouse on the location where the waypoint has to be
added, give a name for the waypoint and automatically a wayline is
drawn from the vessel to the new waypoint.
Add Runline
Draw a new runline in the plan view and the new runline becomes the
active runline.
Add Symbol
A C-Map object can be added to the plan view, only possible when a
C-Map layer is added in the Layer Control.
Select an object and its attributes from the list. Select with the cross-
shaped cursor the location for the new object.
A right mouse click stops the select location option.
Find Symbol
Search for a C-Map object in the plan view.
Figure 14-121 Find C-Map object in the plan view
If the C-Map object is found, an information window will be opened.

Draw Route
Draw with the mouse a route in the plan view. A right mouse click will
stop the drawing of the route.
Draw Polygon
Draw with the mouse a polygon in the plan view. A right mouse click
will close the polygon.
Draw Profile
Draw with the mouse a route in the plan view. A right mouse click will
stop the drawing the route and a Profile – Grid Model view will be
opened with a profile over the drawn route (see page 450).
Follow Vessel ( )
If checked, the vessel will be always in the center of the plan view (in
‘Follow Vessel’ mode). If unchecked, the vessel can be anywhere in
the plan view, even outside the plan view.

The type of ‘Follow Vessel’ mode can be set in the properties of the
plan view (see page 444).
Select Symbol ( )
The cursor is changes in the question mark. Select a C-Map object
and the C-MAP Object Information window will be opened. In this
window information about the selected object is available.
Figure 14-122 C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point
Set Waypoint on Symbol ( )

The cursor will change in a cross with a small circle in the middle.
Select a C-Map symbol with the circle of the cross. The symbol
becomes the active waypoint and a wayline from the vessel location to
the symbol is drawn.
DP Mode ( )
The DP mode is available in the Plan View – Navigation and in the
Plan View – Dredge Instruction. With this option the view will be
changed to the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning.
The option becomes available when a waypoint is selected as
guidance.
Auto Ranging ( )
If active, the view is in ‘True Motion’ with the waypoint in the center. It
will depend on the ‘Minimum Auto Ranging Distance’ in the properties
of the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning how far the view will zoom in.
This option is also available in the DP mode of the Plan View –
Navigation and Plan View – Dredge Instruction nog(see above).
The option becomes available when a waypoint is selected as
guidance.
Orientation Mode ( )
The orientation mode of the plan view. Three options are available:
North Up, Heading Up and Fixed Skew.
With North Up the plan view is always north up and the vessel will
rotate in the plan view.
With Heading Up the heading of the vessel is always up, is pointing to
the top of the view. All the data will rotate accept the vessel.
With Fixed Skew the plan view has a fixed orientation. The fixed skew
value can be set so that the vessel is always looking up with a
fluctuation to the left and right. The orientation of the data in the plan
view is steady and the vessel will rotate.

Set Fixed Skew From Heading ( )
Click on this item in the context menu or on the button in the toolbar
and the actual heading of the vessel will become the orientation of the
plan view. To activate this orientation select as orientation mode Fixed
Skew and the just selected orientation is fixed.
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the plan view with the
mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
If checked, it is possible to modify the routes and clipping polygons
and to add or edit the user maps objects. See below for a detailed
explanation of the user maps and the edit option.
Undo ( )
Will reverse the last action done in the edit mode.
Redo ( )
Only active after an Undo and will reverse the last undo action of the
edit mode.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode ( )
In the view different grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
The settings of the grid model in the plan view (see page 446).
Edit Alarm ( )
For the items as set in the Numerics Layer of the Plan View an alarm
can be defined or edit. First a Numerics Layer has to be created with
the item selected.
This option will open a dialog in which an alarm can be added, edited
or removed.
See for information about the alarms also the Numerics view on page
422.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
plan view (see page 442).
Properties ( )
The properties of the plan view with some extra settings for the ‘Follow
Vessel’ option (see page 444).
14.19.9.1 Sonar Target Options in Plan Views

When a sonar target is created the symbol gets a context menu with
several options specific for that sonar target. With a right mouse click in or
on the symbol the options becomes available.
Classification
The classification list can The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
be modified in the Project are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
Configuration (see page classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 466).
77). Symbol
Select a symbol that will be placed on the location of the sonar target.

Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.
Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 466).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
Send contact to target output device
Select this option to output the sonar target position from a output
device added in the equipment list of the Vessel Configuration.
The output string follows the NMEA TLL format.
If ‘logged to file’ is enable in the output device then the target position
is also logged to a file. This file is accessible from the PDS Explorer
Project tab page.
14.19.9.2 User Maps

In all the plan views the user maps objects, routes and clipping polygons
can be edited. Select the Edit Mode ( ) and the routes and clipping
polygons can be edit.
Figure 14-123 Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps
Click on the active route or clipping polygon and the route or clipping
polygon can be edited. The way of editing the route or clipping polygon
will be identical as editing an object of the user maps (see below).
Before the user maps object can be viewed, added and/or edited, the
User Map Layer has to be added in the Layers window. If a file with user
maps objects exists, it can be selected in the properties of the layer.
Figure 14-124 Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options
After one of the user maps options is selected the cursor will change in a
cross. With the cross the location(s) for the user map object can be set in
the view. The way the different objects can be drawn will be explained
below.
Line
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the line. Click on
the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the line.
Rectangle
A rectangle can be drawn by selecting two opposite corners of the
rectangle with the left mouse button.

Polygon
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the polygon. Click
on the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the
polygon.
Circle
The circle can be drawn by selecting the center point and a point on
the circle with the left mouse button.
Text
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the text has to
be located and enter in the Name dialog the text.
Symbol
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the symbol has
to be placed and select a symbol from the list in the Select User
Symbol window.
For each selected symbol a symbol text can be entered. For the
symbol ‘Obstruction’ also the least depth can be entered. The text will
be displayed next to the symbol and the least depth in the symbol.
Figure 14-125 Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol
window
The user maps objects, the routes or the clipping polygons can be edited
by double clicking with the left mouse button on the object. The object
becomes active and the cursor change in .
The active object can be moved by selecting the object and keep the left
mouse button down. Move the object to the new location and release the
left mouse button.
This option is not possible The other option with the edit mode is modifying the objects by moving
for the user maps objects one or more points. Select one of the points of the object and keep the left
Text and Symbol. mouse button down. Move the point to the new location and release the
left mouse button. After editing the object the context menu gives the
following options.

Figure 14-126 Context menu after editing or selecting an object
Redo
Only available after an Undo and this option will reverse the last undo
action.
Undo
Reverse the last action.
Insert Point
Insert on the cursor location a point to the object. This is only available
for the Line and Polygon and also for the active route and the active
clipping polygon.
Delete Point
The point that is selected with the cursor will be deleted from the
object. This is only available for the Line and Polygon and also for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Delete
The edit mode for the active user map object will be closed and the
active user map object will be deleted. This is not possible for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Save
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will be saved.
Cancel
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will not be saved.
14.19.10 Plan View – Layer Control

In the Layers Control of the plan views all the necessary information can
be added to the view. In the Layers window are two groups of layers,
background and foreground layers. Only the layers that are used in the
plan view are shown in the Layers window.
Figure 14-127 Layers window for one of the plan views

With new layers from the Add Layer window can be added to the
list of used layers in the plan view.
The layers are the items that are shown in the plan view, e.g. Run Lines,
Grid Model and Color Table. In the window the layers can be switched on
or off by checking or unchecking the specific entry of the layer.
Click on or double click on the selected entry to open the
properties of the selected entry. The properties are different for each layer
and the attributes in the properties can be for example file selections, line
styles, colors and computation selection.
The layer order can be changed by using and . The layer on top of
the layer window will be drawn first. The layers lower in the list will be
drawn on top of the layers that are above it in the list. If some information
in a layer is important and have to be shown in the plan view, move that
layer as far down as possible with the down arrow.
The entries in the ‘Active’ layers cannot be removed by the user. Most of
these active layers are linked to the selection in the Logging page (see
page 144) or the Guidance page (see page 167) of the vessel
configuration. For example, the layer Active Route Layer gives the route
that is selected in the Guidance page.
14.19.10.1 AIS Layer

A special layer in the Layer Control is the AIS Layer. This layer will only
be available when in the Equipment a device driver from the group
Automatic Identification System is added to the equipment list. The
Automatic Identification System (AIS) is a short range coastal tracking
system used on ships and by Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) for identifying
and locating vessels by electronically exchanging data with other nearby
ships and VTS stations. Information such as unique identification,
position, course, and speed can be displayed in the plan view. It is
possible to attach the AIS layer to another vessel than the tracking vessel
of the view (See Figure 14-128). The AIS manager has a MMSI,
shipsname cache memory for fast display of the vessel names as soon
they have been received earlier. Only the information of the vessels within
the defined active object distance will be displayed.

Figure 14-128 Layer position source
14.19.11 Plan View – Properties
Figure 14-129 Properties window for most of the plan views
In the Properties window the ‘Follow Vessel’ mode and the Off-Center
option can be defined. These options are not available in the Plan View –
Dynamic Positioning view.
It is also possible to enter manually a fixed skew value for the orientation
of the plan view.

Below the relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Follow Vessel
The ‘Follow Vessel’ mode can be switched on and off.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
‘tracking point’ on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
Follow Mode
The follow mode is by default Relative Motion; the vessel is always
displayed in the center of the view. Another option for the follow
mode is True Motion; the vessel will not stay in the center but the
view will update when the vessel is nearly leaving the view.
Vessel Radius
Vessel radius is the minimum distance from the vessel to the
edge of the view.
When the vessel comes in the minimum distance from the edge
of the view and with the follow mode on True Motion, the view
will be updated and the vessel will be placed in the center of the
view.
The vessel radius can also be used in combination with the off-
center (see below).
Off-Center
When the follow mode is set on Relative Motion the vessel can be
displayed out of the center of the view.
This option can be used when the user wants to look forwards for
more than a half view. Enter a negative percentage and the vessel
will be moved backwards in the view (the data moves with the
vessel).
When for instance the user wants to see more multibeam data
behind the vessel enter then a positive percentage.
With the vessel radius the distance from the edge of the view can
be defined. With a vessel radius of 0 and -100% or +100% for the
off-center the vessel is placed on the edge of the view.
Figure 14-130 Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100%
(right) with a vessel radius of 10
Orientation Mode
One of the three modes can be selected; North Up, Heading Up or
Fixed Skew (see page 438).
Fixed Skew value
A skew for the plan view can be entered. This is only valid when
the orientation mode is set on Fixed Skew.

14.19.12 Coverage Settings
Click on in the toolbar or select Coverage Settings in the context
menu of most of the plan views to open the Coverage Settings window.
Figure 14-131 Coverage settings window for the plan views
The following table lists the parameters of the coverage settings dialog
box.
Grid model Tick the ‘grid model’ radio button to
display the active grid model and select
the required color table for the z values,
hit count and/or Z standard deviation.
(When the data type is available in the
grid model.)
PDS will automatically generate a color
table when the data type is selected
through the grid model color mode (
). But it is also possible to select a
different color table from the drop down
list.

Sun illumination The sun illumination parameters are
adjustable. This will work only for the
active grid model and not for the grid
model difference.
The sun illumination for a 2D grid
model works similar as the spotlight
option in the 3D views. Move the yellow
dot in the circle to set the azimuth and
the elevation. With the contrast bar the
contrast is adjustable. It is also possible
to set all three items manually. Check
the checkbox Enabled to make the sun
illumination active.
Note: The sun illumination will not work
directly when the yellow dot is moved.
Click on or to start the
calculation of the sun illumination. It
can take some seconds before the sun
illumination is updated. This depends
on the size of the grid model and the
computer CPU speed.
The logging of the data in the grid
model is always relative to Chart
Datum, but when the option Relative
Sea Level is selected the data of the
grid model shown in the Plan View is
relative to sea level. It is pure a
visualization, it will not be logged. The
information for relative sea level will be
extracted from the tidal information or,
when RTK is used, from the computed
tide. When computed tide is used the
sea level offset has to be defined in the
Geometry page (see page 113
Tick the ‘Difference radio’ button (a) if
an active grid model difference as
reference (b) is available in the plan
view and instead of the active grid
model an active grid model difference
has to be shown. Select the right color
table (c) to present the differences.
The grid model difference is computed

with the data type that is selected for
the grid model.
Dredge tolerance is almost similar as
grid model difference but now the -
design model guidance settings-
‘underdredge’ and ‘overdredge’ limit
(see page 170) are used for the
creation of a color table. This color
table consists of three sections. A color
section above the underdredge limit, a
section below the overdredge limit and
a section in between these two limits.

For example:
It is now very easy to change the color

table depending of the difference to
show by changing the limits in the
design model guidance settings,
without a need to change the color
table with the color table generator.
The offset and z-shift for the reference

model are also set in the design model
guidance settings.
Tick the checkbox to display the grid
model with the selected color at places
where there is no design. (When using
a difference or dredge tolerance model)
If multibeam data is available, check
the option Show multibeam profiles to
show the data of the multibeam
system. This is only valid for the Plan
View – Survey Coverage view and the
Plan View – Production view
14.20 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View

A Positioning System XY – Manual Input view is not a standard view
which can be added through the Displays window or the Add Display
option in the context menu of the Acquisition. With this view a manual
input for the position in Easting and Northing can be given.
This view is different from the standard manual input. In this view the
primary data source for the position can be selected and an average of
the primary position can be used as position. When the vessel or crane is
not moving while the position in PDS is moving due to an unstable

positioning system then the vessel or crane can be fixed in the view by
using the manual position or an average of the primary position.
When the position height is unstable next to the height of the position
source, a depth sensor or the height of the grid model can be used.
For the position of the tool a position can be entered or selected with the
mouse or as a waypoint.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the positioning
 system (XY) has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 119).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Positioning System XY – Manual Input view. Select the
right device control in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and
click on to add the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added
the window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the
Displays window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Figure 14-132 Positioning System XY – Manual Input view
Position Selection
Next to the manual input a standard positioning system should be
selected in the Equipment list. The standard positioning system should
be the primary positioning system and the manual input the secondary.
Positioning system Geogs(1)
As positioning system the primary positioning system will be used.
Average Positioning system
To make the unstable primary position more stable an average of
the primary position can be used.
Enter the period over which the average has to be calculated.
Manual Position
As positioning system the manual position as given in this view will
be used. Before the manual input can be used, a manual position
has to be set.
Height Selection
Next to the height from the position system a depth sensor on the tool
or the height of the grid model can be used.
Manual Position Reference Point
There are two different ways to set a manual position.
The first method is that for the Easting, Northing and Height manually
a value can be entered.
For the second method the position selection should be set on
Positioning system Geogs(1). Click on the button Set from Position to
set the actual primary position as manual position.
Manual Position From Tool
Select which position on the tool should be used by selecting one of
the location on the tool.
The position can be set entered manually with the button Enter
Position or can be selected.

Click on and select in a Plan View or 3D View a location
that will be used as the position of the tool.
Click on and select one of the existing waypoints as the
new position of the tool.
Click on and the position will be saved as a waypoint.
14.21 Profile Views

In the Acquisition ten different profile views are available and they will be
explained in alphabetical order.
 Profile – Grid Model view (see below)
 Profile – Multibeam view (see page 451)
 Profile – Projected Runline view (see page 451)
 Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 453)
 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view (see page 454)
 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view (see page 455)
 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view (see page 456)
 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view (see page 457)
 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view (see page 458)
 Profile – Sound Velocity view (see page 459)
14.21.1 Profile – Grid Model View
Figure 14-133 Profile – Grid Model view derived from the ‘Draw Profile’ option in
the plan view
The Profile – Grid Model view shows a profile over a route or runline. The
profile can be from a grid model or from a design model.
The profile view is not an active view; the data will not be updated.
Therefore it will only be used in combination with the option Draw Profile
from the context menu of the Plan View – Survey Coverage, the Plan
View – Production or the Plan View – General Dredge Operation (see
page 437).
If the view is closed it will disappear from the list in the Displays window.

If the Profile – Grid Model view is added to the Acquisition through the
 Displays window or with Add Display in the context menu, it will stay
empty.
14.21.2 Profile – Multibeam View
Figure 14-134 Profile – Multibeam view with an active grid model profile
The Profile – Multibeam view can be used to compare the multibeam data
or the scanning profiler data online with a (active) 3D design model profile
or a (active) grid model profile.
When this profile view is created the active grid model profile layer and
active design model profile layer are already set. The active grid model
profile can be compared with the (active) design model profile if the
quality of the multibeam data is not so good.
14.21.3 Profile – Projected Runline View
Figure 14-135 Profile – Projected Runline view with a profile
The Profile – Projected Runline view gives information on the currently

measured depth from a multibeam or a single beam echo sounder over a
runline. As reference a profile from a grid model and/or a design model
can be added to the view.
If a single beam echo sounder is selected in the profile view an extra
 option, Singlebeam Filter Settings, is added to the context menu. This
option allows changing the settings of the echo sounder filters.
Select the option Singlebeam Filter Settings in the context menu, select
as data the ‘Reduced depths’ of the echo sounder and a dialog window
will be opened to set the filters.

 Depth filter
PDS rejects the depths outside the set minimum and maximum
depth. PDS looks for this at the measured depth.
Figure 14-136Depth filter
 Spike filter
The spike filter checks:
o the enclosed angle of 3 consecutive depth readings
against the given minimum angle
o the depth difference between the middle depth reading
and the other two depth readings against the given
minimum spike height.
PDS rejects the middle depth reading if the depth difference is
bigger than the set spike height and the intersection angle is
smaller than the set angle.
Figure 14-137Spike filter
 Gate filter
PDS rejects the depth reading if it deviates more than the gate
value from the previous depth reading.
Figure 14-138Gate filter
The depths rejected by the filters will have a different color in the profile
view. The rejected depths are always logged in the raw data files, but not
in the cleaned data files.

14.21.4 Profile – Realtime Design View
Figure 14-139 Profile – Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction
hopper and the design difference as up/down indicator
The Profile – Realtime Design view can be used for a dredge application
to show the vessel with a drag head and the grid model and/or design
model. The view can be from the left, the right, the front or the back side
of the vessel.
The profile view can also be used in the (rope) excavator application to
show the (rope) excavator with grab or bucket and the grid model and/or
design model.
In the up/down indicator pane any value available can be monitored.
 Default only one item is displayed. It is possible to have more than one
item displayed, just add for each extra item an extra up-down indicator
layer to the up/down indicator pane.
Figure 14-140 Profile – Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an
excavator

14.21.5 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View
Figure 14-141 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model
The Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view can be used if more than one
indicator is needed in the profile view. In this example the left and right
indicator display the height of the left and right side of the structure above
the design model. The bottom indicator displays the difference between
the two other indicators.
If in a Profile – Realtime Design view two indicators are necessary, for
instance the absolute depth and the height above the design model, then
this profile view can be used. The bottom indicator can be slide away from
the view if necessary.

14.21.6 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen
View
Figure 14-142 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an
active design model, dredge limits and level contacts
The Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view is almost identical with the
Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 453). The toolbar, the
properties and the layers in this profile view are identical; the only
difference is that this profile view has an option to show the two level
contacts from the engine control.
By default the level contacts will be displayed with a default color. In the
The level contacts and the properties of the Active Design Model Profile Layer the level contacts can
tab Control are special
be switched on/off and the color can be changed. The values for the level
made and therefore only
available for one specific
contacts have to be set in the Tools Settings. Select Tools > Tools
client. Settings in the menu bar of the Acquisition and add in the tab Control
values for the level contact 1 and 2.

14.21.7 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View
Figure 14-143 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a
design model
The Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view is a specialized version of the

Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 453) and can be used for the
cutter dredger. The line of the profile is in this view an arc with the spud
position as center and the horizontal distance from spud to cutter head as
a radius.

14.21.8 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View
Figure 14-144 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of
the trailing suction hopper with a drag head
The Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view can be used for a trailing suction
hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top and in a
side view.
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design view (see
page 453).

14.21.9 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical
View
Figure 14-145 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view with a top and side
view of the trailing suction hopper with a drag head
The Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view can be used for a trailing
suction hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top
and in a side view and is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design Pipe
view (see above).
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design view (see
page 453).

14.21.10 Profile – Sound Velocity View
Figure 14-146 Profile – Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile
The Profile – Sound Velocity view is not an active view; it will not update
the sound velocity profile in the Acquisition. It shows the selected sound
velocity profile that is used to correct the depth readings of the multibeam.
14.21.11 Profile – Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the buttons in the toolbars are identical for all of the profile views,
except the projected runline. Some buttons are only available in one or
two profile views.
The context menus of the profile views are nearly identical. Below all the
options in the context menus will be discussed.
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
also be used for the Zoom window will only work when Follow Vessel is off.
In and Zoom Out.
Horizontal Zoom In, Horizontal Zoom Out ( , )
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the horizontal direction
of the view. These two options are only available when in the
properties of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed
Vertically or on Scale Freely (see page 460).
Vertical Zoom In, Vertical Zoom Out ( , )
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the vertical direction of
the view. These two options are only available when in the properties
of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed Horizontally
or on Scale Freely (see page 460).
Pan ( )

button.
Redraw
Redraw the profile view.
Vertical Auto Ranging ( )
If checked, a vertical zoom extents is active. This option is only
available in the Realtime Design Profile views.
Follow vessel ( )
If checked, the attach point selected in the properties of the Realtime
Design Profile views will always be located in the center of the view.
In the Profile – Multibeam view the nadir depth will be displayed in the
center of the view if the option is checked.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile – Multibeam view can be saved as a JPG or
BMP file.
Print Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile – Multibeam view can be printed.
Singlebeam Filter Settings
This option is only available in the Profile – Projected Runline view
when a single beam data channel is selected.
Through this option three filter settings can be set.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
profile view. New layers can be added to the used list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the profile view. In most Properties windows the
‘Scale Mode’ can be set (see below).
14.21.12 Profile – Properties
Figure 14-147 Properties for the Profile – Realtime Design view

The three of the four Profile – Realtime Design views have the same
Properties window, only the Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view has
less items. Some of the items are available for the Profile – Grid Model
view, Profile – Multibeam view and Profile – Sound Velocity view. The
Profile – Projected Runline view has different properties to define the
graph display.
The most relevant items in the Properties window of the profile views will
be explained below.
Follow Vessel
If Enabled, the selected attach point will always be in the center of the
view. For the Profile – Multibeam view the center beam will be in the
center.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
‘tracking point’ on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
For the Profile – Realtime Design view, the Profile – Realtime Design 3
 Bars view and the Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view the
position source has to be Drag-head Absolute Position.
For the Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view the position source has
to be Cutter Absolute Position Computation.
For the Profile – Multibeam view the position source has to be
Multibeam xyz computation.
Attach To
The position source can be attached to the Dredge Point or the Sensor
Reference Point.
Vertical Auto Ranging
If Enabled, a vertical zoom extents will be active.
Scale Mode
The display of the profile view has different scaling options; Fixed
Aspect Ratio, Fixed Vertically, Fixed Horizontally and Scale Freely.
Aspect Ratio
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical scale used in the profile
view.

14.22 Raw Data View
Figure 14-148 Raw Data view of the Multibeam xyz computation
The Raw Data view has in the left pane the tree with all the sensors, the
computations and the data sources. In the right pane the data of the
selected item as it is received from the sensor or is calculated in the
computation.
The status of the data items is indicated by a symbol. The following table
lists the used symbols:
Symbol Description
If there are no problems with the data all the items have
Data ok the sign . If the connection is lost the last data will still
be shown in the view, but the sign before ‘Data Buffer’ will
change to . Also the Alerts view (see page 346) will
appear on the screen with the alarm messages
If some of the data items have the sign then that data
No data is not received or cannot be calculated.
If the received data is corrupted the sign for items

Invalid becomes .. The sign for the ‘Data Buffer’ becomes .
data
When an item is in state alarm the sign becomes .

Alarm

Symbol Description
When an item is in state suspicious the sign becomes

Data . An item becomes suspicions when the value exceeds a
suspicious hard coded value. (Min. = -1.6E308; Max = 1.6E308)
Only possible when the Double click on a data item on the left hand side will open the Properties
logging is switched off window of that data item. This Properties window is the same window as
in the Equipment page or Computation page of the vessel configuration.
14.22.1 Statistics
When right clicked at the right hand side a context menu with the options
Properties and Statistics will appear.
With the option Statistics the user can collect data over a self-defined
period and it will calculate the mean, the standard deviation, the minimum
and the maximum of that collected data.
Figure 14-150 Statistics
Click to start collecting data. Click to stop collecting data.

With the limit of taken samples can be defined.
Click to create a pdf report representing the results. The pdf report
could be viewed in the PDS Explorer’s Report menu.
Figure 14-151 PDF report file

14.22.2 Drag & Drop
The data items from a Raw Data view can be moved with the ‘Drag &
Drop’ method to a Numerics – Standard view (see page 419) or to a Time
Series view (see page 483). Select a data item and if the font of the text
becomes italic it is possible to drag this data item to the Numerics view or
to the Time Series view.
Figure 14-152 Data item ‘GPS mode’ can be moved with the ‘Drag & Drop’
method
14.23 Scatterplot View
Figure 14-153 Scatterplot view
The Scatterplot view can be used for position comparison between a

reference position and a computed position, which can be a position
device or a position computation. On the right top of the Scatterplot view a
bull’s eye display presents the x and y values and on the right bottom the
z value is displayed on the vertical axis.
Click on to open the Reference Point window to enter or select the
reference position.

Figure 14-154 Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position
There will be three ways to enter a reference point for the Scatterplot
view:
1. The reference point can be entered manually in the fields ‘Ref. x’, ‘Ref.
y’ and ‘Ref. z’.
2. Click on to select the current position as the reference point.
3. With a double click on one of the available waypoints in the list the
selected waypoint becomes the reference point.
With ‘Tolerance 1’ and Tolerance 2’ tolerance circles will be drawn around
the reference point. They become visible as red circles in the bull’s eye
display.
The left side of the Scatterplot view has the following fields:
Reference x, y, z
The entered reference position.
Current x, y, z
The currently computed position.
Diff x, y
The difference between the reference position and the current position.
Average x, y, z
The average of the computed position.
DRMS
The Distance Root Mean Square value of the computed position. This
value is the radius of a circle into which the position will fall with a 68%
probability. Only useful for a stationary position.
Average diff x, y, z
The average of the difference between the reference position and the
computed position.
Sample no.
The number of current samples. If the option Limit is checked and a
value is entered the number of samples will stop when this limit value
is reached.
Bull’s eye
If checked, the bull’s eye circle will be displayed in the right top
display. The interval and number of circles depends on the scale in the
display.
Tolerance circles
If checked, the tolerance circles in red will be displayed in the right top
display.
DRMS circle
If checked, the DRMS circle as a dashed line will be displayed in the
right top display.

One item in the properties ( ) can be useful for the display of the
computed position, Track Buffer Length. The computed positions are
shown as crosses in the display and the option Track Buffer Length sets
the number of crosses that will be displayed in both displays.
14.24 Sonar Targets View

The Sonar Targets view is a view that will be created for each sonar
target that is created. The view is a type of plan view with as extra a sonar
target info table.
In the caption of the Sonar Targets view is visible in which view (Sonar
View – Snippets, Sonar View – Sidescan or Plan View – Survey
Coverage) the sonar target is created.
See for more information the manual ‘Sonar Targets and Contacts’.
Figure 14-155 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
14.25 Sonar Contact view

The Sonar Contact view opens if a sonar contact is created.
The Sonar Contact view is the same as the Sonar Target view but without
a GeoTIFF.
See for more information the manual ‘Sonar Targets and Contacts’.

14.26 Sonar Views
In the Acquisition are three different Sonar views available:
Sonar - Wedge(see below)
 Sonar – Sidescan view (see page 475)
 Sonar – Snippets view (see page 476)
14.26.1 Sonar – Wedge View

When a correct driver is installed for a sonar The Sonar – Wedge view
can be displayed in the Acquisition by selecting the Sonar – Wedge as
display. On the moment of writing the view becomes available when in the
equipment list a RESON SeaBat 7K Imgage, RESON HydroBat Image, or
one of the BlueView devices is selected.
The Sonar - Wedge view can display sonar bathy data or forward looker
sonar data. It depends of the used sonar type which data type is
displayed. Depending of the data type a different toolbar, context menu
and layers are used in the view.
Refer to Logging on page 315 how to log image data. Logging of image
data increases significantly the logged data size.
14.26.1.1 Sonar Bathy

In the Sonar - Wedge view sonar bathy data can be displayed.
Figure 14-156 Sonar – wedge view with bathy data
When in the RESON SeaBat 7K a gate is set, a steering angle or a

coverage angle then it will be visible in the view (see below). The limits
can be modified from this view by selection one of the lines and drag it up
or down or by moving the sliders. (The ‘Action layer’ in the Layer Control
should be enabled for this function.)

Figure 14-157 Sonar – Wedge view with depth gate and beam selected
When zoomed in, press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside
 the view and the cursor will change to a small hand. With the left mouse
button still pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Sonar – Wedge view is opened and the user zooms in on
the data then the outlines of this view will be visible in the first Sonar –
Wedge view.

Figure 14-158 Zoomed in the first Sonar - Wedge view indicated by an outline in
the other Sonar Wedge view
Sonar settings are displayed in the top left side of the view when the Info
Layer is enabled and the Sonar Configuration device is added in the
equipment list.

Figure 14-159 In the top left the info layer is showed containing the sonar
settings.
14.26.1.2 Sonar Wedge - Sonar Bathy Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar - Wedge
view with Bathy data are:
numerics keyboard and the With this options it is possible to zoom in and zoom out in the view.
used for the Zoom In and Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom Out. With zoom extents the complete sonar wedge will be displayed in the
view. When the Range is changed, automatically the view will be
adjusted so the complete wedge is displayed.
The option can be switched off by using the zoom in or zoom out
option.
Increase / Decrease Contrast ( )
The contrast of the view can be increased or decreased.
Connect Beams With Lines ( )
The detected bottom will be displayed as a line. Color of the line can
be modified in the Layer Control (see below).
Increase / Decrease Point Size ( , )
When the detected bottom is displayed as points, the size of the points
can be increased or decreased. The color of the points can be
modified in the Layer Control (see below).
Toggles between showing all the data and only the valid data.
The only filter for this view is the quality; all data or only good data.
Beam Selection ( )
Click in the wedge and the beam number with the beam coverage will
be displayed.
Click on beam number and keep the mouse button pressed. Scroll with
the mouse wheel and a beam sector will be highlighted (as shown
above). This beam sector will be used as selection to display the water
column data in the 3D View – Online Water Column (see page 331).

Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view.
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location
and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Sonar – Bathy view can be saved as a JPG or a
BMP file.
Stop Update ( )
Toggles between updating and stop updating the data in the view.
Layer Control ( )
This will open the Layer Control of the Sonar -Wedge view. Layers can
be added or removed. In the Layer Control are six layers available.
The wedge layer displays the wedge.
The Info Layer displays the sonar configuration parameters on the left
side in the view.
In the Sonar Data Layer the color for the bottom detection can be
defined.
With the gates layer the user can set the gates by dragging the
associated lines up or down. (e.g. Depth, range and adaptive)
The grid layer displays the grid.
With the action layer the user can control by the sliders the steering
and coverage angle(s). (Depends of the sonar type)
With ‘Edit’ layer properties can be set.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Sonar - Wedge view.
The most important options in the Properties are:
Sonar Palette; the palette for the sonar data in the view can be
modified.
Grid Color; the color for the vertical axis and the line around the edge
of the wedge can be modified.
14.26.1.3 Obstacle Avoidance – Forward looking data

Besides bathy data the Sonar Wedge view also Obstacle Avoidance –
Forward looking data can be displayed.

Figure 14-160 Sonar - Wedge view with Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking
data
This view is only available when in the Equipment list the right sonar
image device is selected.
The view is available for the forward looking RESON SeaBat 7K systems
and BlueView systems.
Press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside the view and the
 cursor will change to a small hand. When the left mouse button is still
pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Sonar - Wedge view is opened and the user zooms in on
the data then the outlines of this view will be visible in the first Sonar -
Wedge view.

Figure 14-161 Zoomed in Sonar Wedge view indicated by outline in second
Sonar Wedge view
Sonar settings are displayed in the top left side of the view when the Info
Layer is enabled and the Sonar Configuration device is added in the
equipment list.
14.26.1.4 Sonar Wedge - Obstacle Avoidance Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar - Wedge
view with Obstacle Avoidance Forward looking data are:
numerics keyboard and the With this options it is possible to zoom in and zoom out in the view.
used for the Zoom In and Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom Out. With zoom extents the complete sonar wedge will be displayed in the
view. When the Range is changed, automatically the view will be
adjusted so the complete wedge is displayed.
The option can be switched off by using the zoom in or zoom out
option.

Increase / Decrease Contrast ( )
The contrast of the view can be increased or decreased.
Beam Selection ( )
Click in the wedge and the beam number with the beam coverage will
be displayed.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view.
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location
and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Sonar Wedge view can be saved as a JPG or a
BMP file.
Stop Update ( )
Toggles between updating and stop updating the data in the view.
Layer Control ( )
This will open the Layer Control of the Sonar -Wedge view. Layers can
be added or removed. Four layers are available.
With the Action layer the user can set the sonar steering and coverage
angles (depending of the used sonar) by dragging the siders.
The Grid layer displays the grid.
The Info layer displays the sonar configuration at the top left of the
view.
The Wedge layer displays the sonar wedge.
With ‘Edit’ layer properties can be set.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Sonar Wedge view.

14.26.2 Sonar – Sidescan View
Figure 14-162 Sonar – Sidescan view
The Sonar - Sidescan view has a side pane with two tab pages. Set the
properties for the color palette, auto contrast, auto brightness, range
mode and select the sonar data source for the sidescan computation in
the Properties page. In the Bottom Detection page the bottom detection
parameters are set. PDS has its own sidescan sonar bottom detection
algorithm. Select sonar data or set a fixed attitude for the slant range
correction. Press to hide or show the side pane.
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar –
Sidescan view see Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu on page 476.
The image resolution is set automatically depending on the view size.

14.26.3 Sonar – Snippets View
Figure 14-163 Sonar – Snippets view
The Sonar - Snippets view has a side pane to set the properties for the
color palette, auto contrast, auto brightness, range mode and to select the
data source of the snippets computation. Press to hide or show the
side pane.
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar –
Snippets view see below Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu.
The image resolution is set automatically depending on the view size.
14.26.4 Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu

These are the items in the toolbars and in the context menus of the Sonar
– Sidescan view and the Sonar – Snippets view:
Hide pane
hide or show the side pane.
numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view.
also be used for the Zoom
In and Zoom Out. Brightness ( , )
Increase (lighter) and Decrease (darker) the Threshold.
Contrast ( , )
Increase and Decrease the Gain.
TVG ( , )
Increase and Decrease the TVG (see page 478).
Select Fixed Range ( )
Set the range mode to Fixed Range. The range is set in the pane (see
page 478).

Auto Scaling ( )
Toggles between Auto Scaling Off (Out) and On (In) (see page 478).
Lambert’s Law Corrected ( )
Toggles between a Lambert’s Law correction Off (Out) and On (In)
(see page 478).
Ping Selection ( )
Select one of the four pings or all the pings to be displayed in the view.
Lines/Dots ( )
Toggles between Dot view (Out) and Line view (In).
Speed Correction ( )
Toggles between Speed Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see page
478).
Invert Colors ( )
Toggles between a black background (Out) and a white background
(In).
Slant Range Correction ( )
Toggles between Slant Range Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see
page 478).
Save Snapshot ( )
Save the display as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw a box around an area in the view that has to be saved as a sonar
target.
selected.
becomes available for that sonar target. With a right mouse click on or
in the symbol gives some extra options. See ‘Sonar Targets Options in
Sonar Views’ on page 479.
See the Sonar Targets view on page 466 for more information.
Create Sonar Contact ( )
Click in the view to create for that location a sonar contact. The sonar
contacts are stored in the same branch and files as the sonar targets.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the foreground layers in the sonar views. By default
the Active Sonar Targets Layer is present and at the moment the only
layer(s) that can be added are the Sonar Targets Layer.
Properties ( )
The above-mentioned settings in the view.
The color palette can be set to rust or gray.
 If the colors are inverted with

and are also inverted.
, the functions of the buttons ,

14.26.4.1 TVG
The Time Varied Gain applies a variable gain to the sonar data. The TVG
can make the color difference smaller or bigger between the data near to
the sonar and the data further away.
For example: If is out, increasing the TVG makes the data further
away lighter than the data near the sonar.
14.26.4.2 Auto Scaling

The auto scaling calculates the best settings for the contrast, the
brightness and the TVG for displaying the sonar data. The auto scaling
refresh rate is the period after which a new calculation of the settings take
place. This auto scaling refresh rate can be set in the properties.
14.26.4.3 Speed Correction

A speed correction to the display is necessary to compensate for changes
in the vessel speed over the bottom. This results in a display with a
constant scale of the bottom. The faster the vessel goes the bigger the
gaps are between two sweeps of the sonar.
14.26.4.4 Slant Range Correction

The fact that the side scan sonar is above the bottom and is viewing the
seabed at an angle gives a slant range distortion. This distortion has to be
corrected, the slant range correction. This means that equal increments of
time correspond to equal increments of slant range, and not to equal
increments of distance along the sea floor. For a flat bottom this slant
range is always greater than the true horizontal range.
14.26.4.5 Lambert’s Law Correction

The intensity of the reflection will decrease further away from the centre
because of the smaller angle with the surface, the reflection will be
diffused. With the Lambert’s Law correction the intensity of the reflection
will be corrected. The correction is a multiplication factor which is related
to the angle with the surface. How smaller the angle how bigger the
multiplication factor.
14.26.4.6 Range mode

The range mode is set to ‘Fixed’ from the tool bar Range Mode button or
to ‘Automatic’ or ‘Follow’ mode from the view’s left pane.
From the toolbar ’Fixed Range’ button it is only possible to set the range
to Fixed mode.

Figure 14-164 Range mode
There are three range modes:

 Fixed Range
The range is set in the pane’s ‘Fixed Range value’ box .
Figure 14-165 Fixed range value
 Follow Range
The range follows the range as set in the Sonar UI.
 Automatic
In this mode the range is automatically adjusted depended of
the depth. In the view always the maximum possible range is
showed.
14.26.4.7 Sonar Target Options in Sonar Views

When a sonar target is created the symbol gets a context menu with
several options specific for that sonar target. With a right mouse click in or
on the symbol the options becomes available.
The classification list can Classification
be modified in the Project The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
Configuration (see page are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
77). classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 466).
Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.

Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 466).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
14.27 Status Views

In the Acquisition are four different Status views available.
 Status – Alarms view (see below)
 Status – Computations view (see page 481)
 Status – Equipment view (see page 481)
 Status – Logging view (see page 482)
 Status – Remote connections view (see page 482)
14.27.1 Status – Alarms View
Figure 14-166 Status – Alarms view
The Status – Alarms view will show the alarms which are set by the user
in the configuration (see page 83) and/or in the vessel configuration (see
page 161). All the conditions in the alarm files are shown and the alarm
can be on ( / ), off ( ) or disabled ( ).
The Alarms dialog can be opened with Edit > Alarms from the menu bar
or with from the toolbar. Through this way only the existing alarms in
the configuration can be changed or new ones can be added to the
configuration.
With a double click on one of the alarms in the view directly the
Conditions window can be opened. Through this way also the alarms in
the vessel configuration are accessible.
The Alarms dialog and the Condition window are identical with the dialog
and window as explained in the Vessel Alarms on page 161.

14.27.2 Status – Computations View
Figure 14-167 Status – Computations view with not working computations
The Status – Computations view displays the status of all computations.

The view will be red when at least one of the computations has no data
input ( or ). The reason will be displayed in the ‘Status’ column,
‘Timeout’ or ‘---’ (no data). If all the computations receive data and have
in front of the computations, the view will be green.
By default the use of the status colors is switched off in the context menu.
The reason for this is that it is possible that there are computations
available in the project that are is not relevant for the survey. It is up to the
user if he wants the status colors or not.
14.27.3 Status – Equipment View
Figure 14-168 Status – Equipment view with no data for some equipment
The Status – Equipment view displays the status of all sensors or outputs
created in the Equipment page of the vessel configuration. The view will
be red when at least one of the sensors has no data input ( or ). The
reason will be displayed in the ‘Input’ or ‘Output’ column, ‘Timeout’ or ‘---’
(no data). If all the sensors are working properly, all the data is received in
the system and have in front of the sensors, the view will be green.
This is only when the user has set the status color in the context menu.

14.27.4 Status – Logging View
Figure 14-169 Status – Logging view with the logging on
The Status – Logging view displays the information about the data logging
such as file name, file size and logging rate. The view will be green when
logging is on and it will be red when the logging is switch off. If logging is
on and conditions are checked in the Logging page (see page 158) the
view becomes yellow if the condition is not true and the logging will be
suspended. This is only when the user has set the status color in the
context menu.
If the view is green it is obvious which file is logged and in which directory.
14.27.5 Status – Remote Connections View
Figure 14-170 Status – Remote Connections view
The Status – Remote Connections view displays the remote

connection(s) with the remote PC(’s). The user can now see with
computer are connected to the PDS computer.
14.28 Tide Manual Input View
Figure 14-171 Tide Manual Input view

A Tide Manual Input view is not a standard view which can be added
menu of the Acquisition. With this view a manual input for the tidal
information can be given.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the tide gauge
119).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Tide Manual Input view. Select the right device control in
the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on to add
the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be
closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it
has to same functionality as all other views.
If the option Force Manual Tide is checked the manual input becomes the
primary data group in the data sources for the tide computation (see page
130). A modified tide value in the view will be directly used in the tide
computation.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for the Tide
Manual Input view.
14.29 Time Series View

The Time Series view contains one or more graphs where sensor data or
computed data will be shown in time. This makes it easier to compare
data from different sensors at the same time.
Figure 14-172 Time Series view with two graphs stacked
On the right side in the view the actual value of the data channel is
displayed with below the value the text ‘1/div’. This means that the
distance between two horizontal lines in the graph is 1 unit of the data
item. On the bottom the total length of the X-axis is displayed in hours,
minutes and seconds.

When this view is selected for the first time in the Acquisition by default
one channel is already added to the view.
If more than one graph is displayed as in the example above, the graph
where the text is underlined is the active graph. To make a graph active
just click with the mouse in that graph.
14.29.1 Time Series – Toolbar and Context Menu

Add Channel ( )
With this option it is possible to add a data channel with its default
settings.
Vertical Zoom In, Vertical Zoom Out ( , )
The + and – key of the
numerics keyboard can Zoom In and Out on the Y-axis of the active graph.
also be used for the Horizontal Zoom In, Horizontal Zoom Out ( , )
standard Zoom In and
Zoom Out.
Zoom In and Out on the X-axis. This is for all the graphs displayed in
the view.
Layer Control ( )
In the Layers window data channels can be added to the view and all
the settings for that data channel can be set.
Properties ( )
Settings for the view can be modified. It is also possible to show all the
data in one graph (overlayed) or in separate graphs (stacked).
 A data channel can also be added by using the ‘Drag & Drop’ method
from the Raw Data view( see page 464).

15 Replay
15.1 Introduction
Data recorded in the PDS logging format can be replayed in this module.
By changing the vessel configuration before a replay is started, the data
will be recomputed with the new vessel configuration settings. Replayed
data can be recorded again into new log data files. To distinguish
replayed log data from the original files, the replayed file gets an ‘R’ and
the date and time of the replay in the file name.
To start the replay from the Control Center :
 Select Acquisition > Start Replay from the menu bar.
 Or, click on the Replay button in the toolbar.
15.1.1 Controlling the Replayer

When the Replayer is opened it will be empty. Click on to open the
File Set Editor (see also page 493) to select or create a file set for the
Replayer. It is also possible to select in the file set selection ( )
one of the existing file sets.
Figure 15-1 Replayer toolbar with a file set bar
It is also possible to change the file set selection, if the Replayer is open.
For a project with more vessels, instead of a File Set bar, a Vessel bar
can be displayed. Select from the menu bar the option View > Vessel Bar
to get the vessel bar in the toolbar. With the option View > File Set Bar the
above displayed toolbar comes back.
An error message is shown, if a file set is opened that contains a file that
cannot be opened.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Replay  485

Figure 15-2 Failed to open files of the file set
In this example, access is denied to open a file and a file is not found.
The message ‘Access denied’ is because this particular PDS file was
read only. PDS log files must always be editable.
The user can select to permanent remove the file(s) or to remove it
temporary from the file set
 When a logdata files are loaded in the Replayer, automatically the layout
used in the first logdata file will be opened.
Figure 15-3 Replayer toolbar with a vessel bar
Select Prev/Next File ( , )

Select the previous ( ) or next ( ) file from the file set.
Stop ( )
Stops the current replay and clears the client area.
One Step ( )
Each time this button is pressed the next record is read.
Play ( )
Starts the replay.
Pause ( )
Temporarily stops the current replay.
Slow/Fast Play ( )
Slow play is the normal survey speed and when the bar moved to the
right the replay speed goes faster and faster.
486  Replay Teledyne PDS - User Manual

15.1.2 External Replay Settings
The Replayer uses the vessel configuration and the layout as stored in
the log data files from the selected file set. That means that the layout can
change during the replay. To avoid these changes during the replay it is
possible to select an external vessel configuration and an external layout
before the replay of the file set is started.
Select from the menu bar the option Replay > Options… to select the
external vessel configuration and the external layout.
Figure 15-4 Select the external files for the replay
When no external layout is used, the option Keep same layout when
playing files should be checked to use only one layout during the replay of
the log data files.
15.1.3 Saving Layout and Vessel Configuration

Because it is possible to replay the log data files on a different computer,
it can be useful to save the used vessel configuration and the used layout
from the survey on the computer. It is possible to extract both from the
selected log data file.
Be sure that there are no views open in the Replayer and that the
Replayer is not running. Click on to stop the replay and all the views
will disappear.
Select then from the menu bar the option Tools > Save Logged Layout
As… or Tools > Save Logged Vessel As… to save the layout or the
vessel configuration from the selected log data file.
15.1.4 Recomputation and Saving Results

To do a recomputation in the Replayer, the configuration has to be
changed by modifying the existing vessel configuration or by using an
external vessel configuration (see page 487).
Select the file that needs to be modified, click one time on and the
vessel configuration of the file will be read. Use the buttons in the toolbar
or the options in the Edit menu to modify the vessel configuration.
Equipment ( )
Modify the properties of the computations in the Equipment page. See
page 119.
Computations ( )
Modify the computations. See page 128.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Replay  487

Data Sources ( )
Modify the data sources, this is only possible when the logging is off.
See page 130.
Logging ( )
Modify the logging formats or logging settings in the logging page, this
is only possible when the logging is off. See page 144.
After the configuration is modified, click first on to start the logging and
click then on to start the replay. If the replay is finished a new log file
is created.
488  Replay Teledyne PDS - User Manual

16 Processing
16.1 Introduction
The goal of a survey usually is a presentation of the results in the form of
tables, charts and files. Before the presentation is finalized the data is
normally checked for anomalies, outliers and measuring faults.
Sometimes it is also necessary to correct a survey for influences that
could not be measured in real time, e.g. tides.
16.2 Validating and Presenting Survey Results

Teledyne PDS (PDS) has dedicated modules for all the tasks as
mentioned above.
Editing ( )
All PDS recorded data can be checked and edited (see page 491).
Calibration
Start the new multibeam calibration application of PDS.
See for a detailed explanation of the multibeam calibration the manual
Multibeam Calibration (the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf in the folder
‘manuals).
USBL Calibration
The misalignment of the USBL transceiver and the USBL transponder
position can be calculated. See for a detailed explanation of the USBL
calibration in the USBL manual (the file USBL.pdf in the folder
‘manuals’).
Create Model ( )
Use various data files to make a grid or a TIN model (see page 619).
Backscatter Processing ( )
A backscatter mosaic and/or a bottom classification can be created
from the snippets data. See for a detailed explanation the Backscatter
Processing manual (the file Bottom Classification.pdf in the folder
‘manuals’).
Grid Model Editor ( )
Control grid models, apply calculations and export a model (see page
628).
TIN Model Viewer
Shows and manipulates TIN models (see page 671).
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Processing  489

Plot ( )
Make geo-related charts and profiles with an easy to use layout (see
page 689).
End Area Volumes ( )
Compute line based volumes using the modified area method. Make
reports from the results (see page 679).
Export ( )
Export PDS data to various foreign formats (see page 779).
490  Processing Teledyne PDS - User Manual

17 Editing
17.1 Introduction
In the Editing, the user can check the data for outliers, anomalies and
measuring faults. If necessary, it is possible to remove or correct the data.
Each view is an editor and each editor takes its data from the PDS data
files. The data can be edited in the data files (see page 515 for an
explanation) and the corrected data is directly available after editing.
In contrast with other programs, a separate processed data file or
database is not been made. Indexing and caching takes place in the PDS
data files. That means that the file size increases significantly. The
advantage lies primarily in having both original (raw) and processed data
in one file. This allows the user to revert to original data when needed.
Please note that only the data from PDS data files can be edited with
these editors.
Select Processing > Editing from the menu bar or click on in the
toolbar of the Control Center to start the Editing.
17.1.1 Available Editors

At this moment, the following different types of editors/viewers are
available:
1. 3D Box (see page 517)
2. 3D View (see page 521)
3. Data Source Switching (see page 528)
4. Dekdienst (see page 532)
5. Line-Based Editing (see page 533)
6. Messages (see page 537)
7. Multibeam Area Editing (see page 538)
8. Numerics (see page 595)
9. Ping (see page 595)
10. Position Editing (see page 600)
11. Profile (see page 603)
12. Sonar (see page 607)
13. Sonar Targets (see page 610)
14. Tide Station (see page 612)
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Editing  491

15. Time-Based Editing (see page 613)
It depends on the The editors can be used simultaneously and multiple times. Each editor
application type and the uses the same data file, but only one editor is active, that is the one
permissions in the dongle currently used for editing. The cursor location in each editor is the location
which editors are available. of the record in the current data file. This is called ‘Synchronous
Processing’. Stepping through the file will update all open editors.
Open all the editors necessary to give a good ‘view’ on the data. For
example, a multibeam editor together with a position editor tells the
physical location of the multibeam soundings.
It is not necessary to save the data files after editing because all the data
files are saved automatically.
17.2 Open Editing

When the Editing is opened for the first time after an installation, it will
show only the menu bar, the toolbar and an empty client area. If the
editing is used before, the last used layout appears in the client area.
Figure 17-1 Editing with two editors
492  Editing Teledyne PDS - User Manual

17.2.1 Selecting a File Set
Before the user can start editing the data, a file set has to be selected or
created. When the Editing is opened, automatically the File Set Editor will
be opened. If a different file set has to be loaded click on the to open
the File Set Editor again or use next to the button to select
an existing file set.
Figure 17-2 File Set Editor to select or create a file set.
Click on to make a new file set and click on to modify an

existing file set. In both cases, the same dialog with all available PDS log
data files (in the current project) will be opened.
Figure 17-3 Selected files for a file set

Check the files to edit and click on . If the files are opened for the
first time, an index and cache will be created. This may take some time;
progress will be shown in the Progress dialog.
17.2.2 Select the Editors

In the Displays window the necessary editors or viewers can be added to
the layout. There are two ways to open this window:
 Select View > Displays from the menu bar.
 Select Displays in the context menu.
Figure 17-4 Context menu in the Editing
Figure 17-5 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views in the
Editing
Click on and the Add Display window will be opened to select a

new editor (or viewer). PDS gives a default name for the editor, but the
user can give the editor any name he wants.
Figure 17-6 Add Display window to add an editor

In the Displays window, the editors can be checked on or off. This means
that only the checked editors will be displayed on the screen. The editors
that are checked off are not removed; it only means that these editors are
not shown on the screen. An editor can be removed by using in
the Displays window.
There are also fast methods to add editors to the layout in the Editing.
 Select View > Add Display… from the menu bar and the Add Display
window will be opened (see above).
 Select Add Display in the context menu.
Figure 17-7 Add Display in the context menu of the Editing
After all the wanted editors are selected and moved to the right location in
the Editing the layout can be stored. Select File > Save Layout As… from
the menu bar to save the new layout. To open another layout use File >
Open Layout… from the menu bar and select one of the created layouts.
17.2.2.1 Active Editor

Only one of the visible editors is active, all the others will follow, and only
in the active editor editing of the data can take place. The user can make
an editor active by selecting the editor in Window from the menu bar or by
just clicking on the editor window in the client area.
When there is data selected in the active editor the data bar will show the
related records in the file set as blue stripes; when they are close
together, it looks like the entire data bar is blue.
Place the indicator in the data bar on a record and the cursor in the active
editor will move to the corresponding position.
17.2.3 Selecting Points

Click on a data point to select a single point. To select multiple points
drag the mouse over the data points.
In the Position Editing, the Time-Based Editing and the Line-Based
Editing multiple points can be selected in combination with the Shift or Ctrl
key. After one point is selected the last point of the multiple points can be
selected in combination with the Shift key and all intermediate points are
also selected. In combination with the Ctrl key more single points can be
selected.

17.2.4 Editing Toolbar
Besides that most of the editors have their own toolbar, the Editing has a
toolbar that is available for all the editors.
17.2.4.1 Jumping
Click on or and the red indicator (red stripe) in the data bar will
jump to the previous or next file in the file set. A click in the data bar
brings the red indicator to a specific record in the file. Cursors or locators
in all open editors will go exactly to that point.
17.2.4.2 Play Options

With the play options ( ) it is possible to go through the
selected file set step by step. Click on or to start the forwards or
backwards playing of the data. Click on or again to stop the
playing. Also the space bar of the keyboard can be used to start and stop
playing forwards and the keys shift + space bar to start and stop playing
backwards.
The step size of the forwards or backwards playing can be set with
. All open editors follow the playing. To go one step
(record) forwards or backwards click on or respectively. Also the
keys F10 and F9 can be used for one step forwards and backwards.
17.2.4.3 Undo – Redo

The undo-redo buttons ( ) do not work in all the editors. In the
editors where the buttons work the buttons become active (black)
depending if there are editing steps done (for the undo) or undone (for the
redo). This is only valid in one editor at the time. When switching for the
first time to another editor the buttons become inactive because there are
no editing steps (un)done in that editor.
17.2.4.4 Edit Mode

In most of the editors, one or more points can be selected. It will depend
on the edit mode what the action will be. The pressed button tells which
Also at the right bottom in
the Editing is the edit mode edit mode is active and the default edit mode is ‘Normal’ .
displayed; , or
After a point or points are selected in the ‘Normal’ mode, a right mouse
.
click on the selection gives a context menu with edit options. The edit
options are Delete, Undelete, Interpolate, Smooth, Move…, Edit and
Info…. When the ‘Delete’ mode is active, selecting one or more points
in the editor will directly remove the point(s). Select the deleted point(s) in
the ‘Undelete’ mode and the deleted point(s) will come back in the
editor.
17.2.4.5 Auto Recache

Auto Recache ( ) generates automatically a recache when it is
necessary. When the data is edited and PDS do a recache after each
step then it is advisable to switch the Auto Recache off. A warning sign (
) will appear next to the Auto Recache button when the data is modified
and a recache is necessary. It is then up to the user when he decides to
do a recache. The recache can be done by switching the Auto Recache
on again.

The Auto Recache will do a recache on all the data that is modified, while
the Force Recache (see page 513) only recache the data for the active
view in the Editing.
17.2.4.6 Find Exceptional Data
Figure 17-8 Find window
The Find window can also The Find window ( ) has, depending on the active editor, a maximum of
be opened with Edit > Find three find detectors; high value, low value and spike. In the Position
from the menu bar.
Editing and in the Line-Based Editing the spike detector checks the angle
and the amplitude. In the Time-Based Editing, the spike detector checks
the deviation and the deviation per second.
Click on to add the values for the selected detector. The detector
can be activated by checking the checkbox before the detector. All the
detectors will be active in the current data file or in the entire file set. Click
on or to search for the exceptional data points.
When an anomaly is found, one of the two actions, Delete or Interpolate,
is possible. Click on to activate the selected action.
17.2.5 Tools Options

Next to the standard editing options extra options are available under the
menu item Tools.
 Edit Vessel Configuration (see below)
 Select Vessel Configuration (see page 498)
 Compare Vessel Configurations For Fileset (see page 499)
 Transponder Position Update (see page 500)
 Print File Status (see page 501)
 Apply Tide (see page 501)
 Edit Tide Station Data (see page 501)
 Data Source Switching (see page 502)
 Cable Route Generation (see page 504)
 Multibeam Statistics Report (see page 505)
 Import POSPac (see page 505)
 Import TerraPos (see page 507)
 Quick Calibration (see page 510)
 Generate TPE results file (see page 510)
 Validate All Caches (see page 512)
 Force Recache Selected Item (see page 513)
 Revert To Original (see page 513)

 Repair File (see page 514)
 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps (see page 514)
 Force Recache GPS Positions (see page 514)
17.2.5.1 Modify Vessel Configuration

To make the editing of the data possible, the vessel configuration is
recorded in each PDS data file. As the vessel configuration is available, it
is also possible to modify it and thereafter automatically recache the file.
Modifying a configuration is the same as doing a recomputation with all
sensor data.
Not all items of a configuration can be modified. It is limited to vessel
geometry, sensor settings and linked, standard and advanced
computations.
Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Edit Vessel to modify the
vessel configuration. This option is only possible when a file set is
selected.
When the modifications in the vessel configuration are finished then
automatically a dialog will be opened.
Figure 17-9 Apply the modified vessel configuration
Click on if the modifications have to be applied to all the files of

the file set. Click on if the modifications have to be applied only
to the active logdata file. The recache can take some time and the
progress is shown in the Progress dialog.
17.2.5.2 Select Vessel Configuration

Each time when the vessel configuration of a logdata file is changed by
for instance changing an offset or applying tide, a new vessel
configuration is stored in the logdata file.
Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Select Vessel to select a
vessel configuration. This option is only possible when a file set is
selected and is working on the active logdata file.
The user can go back to a specific setting by selecting a different vessel
configuration in the Vessel Selection Dialog.

Figure 17-10 Vessel Selection Dialog to select a different vessel configuration
The last Vessel in the list is the active vessel configuration. Select a
different vessel configuration and click on to accept. Then this
selected vessel configuration becomes the last one in the list. The data of
the logdata file will be recached to match the setting as in the selected
When the Vessel Selection Dialog is opened there is a possibility that the
active vessel configuration is invalid.
Figure 17-11 Vessel Selection Dialog with an invalid active vessel configuration
The method to fix this problem is to use the Repair File option (see page
514).
17.2.5.3 Compare Vessel Configurations

When a File Set is manipulate quite often the user can lose track of
whether the changes have been applied to all files.
With this option the vessel configuration of all files in the File Set are
compared and it is possible when there is a difference to synchronize all
files in the File Set with the vessel configuration of the active file.

Figure 17-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other
vessel configurations
In the list above it is possible that not all files from the File Set are
displayed. The settings of the missing files are identical with the leading
(active) vessel configuration.
Click on to apply the settings of the leading (active) vessel
configuration to the listed vessel configurations in the File Set.
When all the vessel are equal the following message will appear.
Figure 17-13 Dialog when there is no difference in the vessel configurations
17.2.5.4 Transponder Position Update

With this option, the USBL transponder position of the slave vessel can
be updated from the logdata files of the master vessel. The master vessel
is the vessel with the USBL transceiver and the logdata files should be
selected as file set.
Select Tools > Transponder Position Update for the menu bar to open a
dialog where the slave vessel can be selected.
Figure 17-14 Transponder position update for the slave vessel

17.2.5.5 Print File Status
In each logdata file the most important modifications like changing offsets
or changing multibeam filters are logged in the file.
With this option the modifications of the active logdata file will be
displayed in the Messages – System Messages view in the Editing (see
page 537).
Select Tools > Print File Status from the menu bar and the information will
be displayed in the Messages – System Messages view.
17.2.5.6 Apply Tide Data

Before the tide data is applied to the file or file set the tide data can be
edited or checked with Tools > Edit Tide Station Data from the menu bar.
The Tide Station – Viewer will be opened (see page 612).
Select Tools > Apply Tide… from the menu bar to apply the tide data to
the logdata files. This is only possible when a file set is selected.
Figure 17-15 Apply tide
Select a computation mode and one or more tide stations. For multiple
tide stations along a route select at ‘Selected route’ the appropriate route.
Click on and the tide data is applied to the logdata files in the file
set. If there are problems with applying the tide data, a data error window
appears. This window shows the cause of the data error(s) and to which
data files no tide data is applied.
There are several methods to check if the tide data is applied correctly to
the file set.
 Check the height method used in the reference point computation.
Select Tools > Edit Vessel from the editing menu. On the tab
Equipment select under the positioning system the computation ‘
Reference Point Computation’ and click on to open this
computation. The item ‘Height Source’ should show Tide and the item
‘Tidal Data Source’ should point to the tide computation.
 Open in the Time-Based Editing – Standard view (see page 614) from
‘ Reduced depths’ the data channels ‘Depth ref. Sealevel’ and
‘Depth ref. Chart Datum’. Overlay the two graphs in the editor and the
difference between the two data channels should be the applied tide.
It is also possible to view the applied tide data in the editor. Select
from the ‘ Reference Point Computation’ the data channel ‘Applied
Tide’.

 Open the Tide Station – Viewer (see page 612). This viewer shows the
applied tide data for the selected file set.
17.2.5.7 Data Source Switch

If for a data source more than one device is selected it is possible to
change the order of the data source in the Editing.
Select Tools > Data Source Switching… from the menu bar to open the
welcome page of the Data Source Switch Wizard. Click on to
continue with the wizard.
Figure 17-16 Data source selection page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data source selection page the data source that have to be
switched. Below the list of data sources one of the two options have to be
selected.
Select option Set for whole file when the data source switch has to be
applied to the active logdata file. Click on to select the order in the
data groups.

Figure 17-17 Data groups page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data groups page the order of the computations. Click on
to apply the first computation from the list as the primary data
source to the active logdata file.
When in the data source selection page the option Advanced editing is
selected, it is possible for the user to set his own data source switches on
any location in the active logdata file. When this option is selected and the
user clicks on the data elements page will be opened.
Figure 17-18 Data elements page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data elements page the item that has to be opened in the
Data Source Switching view. In the view a channel is created for each
data group of the selected data source. Next to these channels, also an
extra channel is created with the data source switch. At the bottom of the

view the primary data is displayed; this is the data from the primary parts
of the different data groups. See for an explanation of the Data Source
Switching view on page 528.
17.2.5.8 Cable Route Generation

If a plough buried a cable, the positions of the knife are logged in the PDS
logdata files. From these positions, a cable route can be generated.
Select Tools > Cable Route Generation from the menu bar to open the
Cable Route Dialog where the settings for the cable route generation can
be set.
Figure 17-19 Cable Route Dialog to generate a cable route
As-Planned cable route

Select the cable route that is used as guidance for trenching the cable.
As Laid cable route
Select the cable route that becomes the cable after the trenching. A
new cable route name can be generated with the option below.
Click on this button to create a new empty cable route; the as laid
cable route. This file will be automatically selected as the as laid cable
route in the above option.
Cable diameter
The cable diameter will be used to calculate the depth of the cable.
Sample interval
The interval along the cable route where the cable will be generated.
Average length
Over the average length on the sample interval location one position
and depth will be calculated and added to the as laid cable route.
Cable burial method
This is the method that is used or will be used to detect the burial
depth of the cable. In the ‘ Dredge Absolute Plough Knife’ of the
Dredge Positioning System the depth can be calculated from the
Position or from a Model.
Realtime selected is the method (Position or Model) that is selected
during the Acquisition.

Reject detection exceeding offtrack to a planned route
Check this option when the detection has to be rejected if the offtrack
to the planned route is more than the entered Maximum offtrack.
Click on this button if only from the selected file the cable has to be
generated.
Click on this button if from all the files in the selected file set the cable
has to be generated.
17.2.5.9 Multibeam Statistics Report

This option will generate a statistics report from the multibeam data in the
logdata files in the file set.
Select Tools > Multibeam Statistics Report from the menu bar to open the
start dialog for the multibeam statistics report.
Figure 17-20 Dialog for the multibeam statistics report
Report Style
At the moment only one report style for the statistics report is
available.
Show Report
If this option is checked then the report will be displayed in the PDS
Reporter.
The multibeam statistics report is generated and opened in the PDS

When the report is opened in Reporter if the option ‘Show report’ is checked. If not checked then the
the PDS Reporter the file can report will be saved as PDF file in the ‘Reports’ folder of the project.
be saved with File > Save The default filename will be:
as….
MB Statistics report <file set name> yyyymmdd-hhmm[Editing].pdf
Where <file set name> is the name of the active file set in the Editing.
One report is generated with a list of the statistics for the file set and for
each logdata file in the file set.
17.2.5.10 Import Post-Processed GPS Data

PDS is able to import the following post-processed GPS data:
 POSPAC data;
 TerraPOS data;
 A user defined ASCII format.
 A user defined ASCII height correction format.
 Import POSPac
A POS MV can be used together with PDS to acquire position,
heading, roll, pitch, and heave data. This device can also log its

own raw output data, which contains more information like
velocity, acceleration, and angular rate.
The POSPac software can process the raw data to improve the
POS MV data. The output files are called SBET (Smoothed Best
Estimate of Trajectory) files. It will be possible to import the
POSPac SBET files in PDS, and replace the position, attitude
and/or heading device data in the PDS logdata files with the
improved data.
The SBET file is (in general) used with an associated post-
processed solution accuracy file (SMRMSG file). This file
contains error RMS values for all solution components.
 It is very important that the SBET files contain UTC time (not
GPS time). The SBET and SMRMSG files have to be named in
a special way. The file names must contain the same start date
of the data in the following format:
sbet_YYYYMMDDxxx.out
smrmsg_YYYYMMDDxxx.out
For example sbet_20120525.out and smrmsg_20120525.out
Both files must be in the same folder.
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > POSPac…
from the menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the SBET
file(s) for the import. This dialog will only open when PDS logdata
files are loaded in the Editing. It is possible to select one or more
SBET files in the dialog. PDS imports the selected SBET file(s).
After this is done PDS looks for the SMRMSG file(s) and imports
them automatically.
After the POSPac file(s) are opened, the user has to select which
POS MV data will be used.
Figure 17-21 POSPac selection dialog
The position is the latitude, longitude and the altitude of the

position device. The attitude is the roll, pitch and heave of the
VRU device. The heading is the heading of the compass device.
Before the import is started, PDS will check if for the position in
the PDS logdata files a POS MV device driver is used. If this is
not the case, the import will not be done.
The import is done to a separate created (update) device and
computation.

Figure 17-22 Created ‘update’ devices after import.
The data source is the imported data.

All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It
is always possible to revert to the original data by using the
Revert to Original option ( ).
 Import TerraPos
TerraPos data is high precision processed position data, which is
processed outside PDS.
It is possible to import the TerraPos PTS files in PDS, and
replace the position device data in the PDS logdata files with the
processed position data.
From the following data string the underscored items will be used
by PDS to replace the original GPS observation:
Year, Month, Day, Sec, lat, lon, height, Slat, Slon, Sh, Rlatlon,
Rlath, Rlonh, NSVs, HDOP, VDOP, RelHor, RelVert, Qh, Qv,
Flag
 It is very important that the PTS files contain UTC time (not
GPS time).
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > TerraPos…
from the menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the PTS
file(s) for the import. This dialog will only open when PDS
logdata files are loaded in the Editing. It is possible to select
one or more PTS files in the dialog.
All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It
is always possible to revert to the original data by using the
Revert to Original option ( ).
 Import user defined GPS ASCII format

A user defined GPS ASCII data format can be imported. When
is selected the ASCII import wizard starts.
There are required field and optional fields.
The required fields are:
 Date
 Time
 Latitude degrees

 Longitude degrees
 Height
 The time in the import file(s) must be in UTC time.
In the ASCII wizard Date/time page, the user specifies the used
time and date format and the used separator. Check if the time is
correctly decoded.
Figure 17-23 ASCII Import Wizzart Date/Time
The degrees may be degrees with a fractional part or only a

integer part but in this case minutes must be provided.
The optional fields are:
 Latitude minutes
 Latitude seconds
 Longitude minutes
 Longitude seconds
 Longitude standard deviation
 Height standard deviation
Only one ASCII file at the time can be imported.
computation. The primary data source is the imported data.
Figure 17-24 Created Update device and computations

 Import user defined ASCII height correction
A user defined height ASCII data format can be imported. When
is selected the ASCII import wizard
starts.
The required fields are:
 Date
 Time
 Height
 The time in the import file(s) must be in UTC time.
In the ASCII wizard Date/time page, the user specifies the used
time and date format and the used separator. Check if the time is
correctly decoded.
Figure 17-25 ASCII Import Wizzart Date/Time
Only one ASCII file at the time can be imported.

computation. The primary data source is the imported data.
Figure 17-26 Created Update device and computations

17.2.5.11 Quick Calibration
This option will start the dialog to do a quick multibeam calibration. This
tool can be used to check very quickly if the values for the multibeam
calibration are still valid. It is possible to do a quick calibration but it is
advisable to use the multibeam calibration in the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view (see page 580).
Figure 17-27 Quick Calibration
To see the impact of the changes in the dialog it is advisable to have the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view open.
Device
Select for which multibeam or laser scan device the calibration values
have to be displayed.
Click on this button to get for the roll, pitch and yaw the original values,
as stored in the files.
Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Move the sliders to change the values. The changes will be directly
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view.
With these changes, the user can see if the actual values are valid for
the data set.
Calibration setting
When the values for the roll, pitch and yaw are set then it is possible to
apply these to a data set; to log data files, to a file set or to the vessel
configuration. For each option, a dialog will be opened to select the
right data set or vessel configuration.
Click on to close the quick calibration dialog.
17.2.5.12 Generate TPE Results File

This option gives a detailed analysis of the TPE computation for the
selected ping. The results can be exported to a ASCII text file which
contains the standard deviations used for the TPE computation and the
Horizontal and Vertical errors split out to the individual error contributions.

PDS provides an Excel sheet that is capable to load the TPE text file and
to visualize the TPE results as tables and graphs.
Select a ping in one of the views in the Editing and select the option. A
dialog opens:
Figure 17-28 Generate TPE Results File
If more than one multibeam is available in the view select the multibeam
for which the TPE results has to be computed.
For the error model two options are available:
 CUBE implementation; horizontal error without the fore-aft
beamwidth error
 CHS implementation; horizontal error with the fore-aft beamwidth
error
Check the option Use Multibeam Uncertainty when the real-time
uncertainty values have to be used. Uncheck the option when the range
error has to be computed.
Click on to generate the TPE text file. The text file is saved
in the project folder and can be found as text (TXT) file in the Explorer. In
the filename is composed from the ping number, date and time of
generation.
The text file can be opened with the special created Excel sheet that is
available in the PDS folder and is called ‘TPEview.xslm’. When the sheet
is opened click on the button, select the right text file and the table and
graph are automatically generated. Below an example of a table and
graph.
Figure 17-29 Part of the depth errors table

Figure 17-30 Example of a depth error graph
17.2.5.13 Validate All Caches

Validate all caches means that all the data in a file or file set will be re-
computed. This will not only recache the data related to the active view
(see Force Recache Selected Item below), but all the data will be
recached.
After editing in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view most of the
time a ‘Validate all caches’ don’t recache the data. The reason for this is
that before showing the data in the view the data have to be recached, so
each modification in this view is already recomputed.
Figure 17-31 Dialog for Validate ALL Caches
Click on to recache all the data files of the file set or click on
to recache only the selected data file. Click on if it is
not necessary to recache the data file(s).

17.2.5.14 Force Recache Selected Item
Recache is re-computing the data that is related to the active view. If the
Auto Recache is on (see page 496) it still has to be done manually if one
of the following data items is modified:
 Sound velocity.
 Tide data (only necessary if the tide data was already applied in the
editing).
 Coordinate system.
It is only necessary if there is a relation between the data in the active
editor and one of the data items mentioned above. For example, if the tide
data is modified and the echo sounder data is loaded in the active view
then recaching is necessary to update the data in the active view.
Select the menu option Tools > Force Recache… to recache the data file
and a dialog will be opened.
Figure 17-32 Dialog for recaching
Click on to recache only the selected data file or click on

to recache all the data files in the file set for the given data
item. Click on if it is not necessary to recache the data file(s).
17.2.5.15 Revert To Original

The menu option Tools > Revert To Original will bring the data of the
active editor back to the status as in the original logged data files. This
means that all the editing on the data in the active editor will be undone,
except modifications made in the Multibeam Filter (see page 562).
Figure 17-33 Dialog for revert to original data
Click on to revert to the original data only for the selected data
file or click on to revert to original data for all the data files in the
file set. Click on if it is not necessary to revert to the original
data.

17.2.5.16 Repair File
It is possible that the logdata file that is opened in the Editing shows that
the data is corrupt or that data is missing. Replacement data was not
properly written to the file or the data blocks where flagged wrong.
The Repair File method does:
 Re-indexes the file and checks the index and data blocks.
 When a data block was replaced by an edit and the edit block is not
found the method will revert to the original data.
 Due to a side effect of the check of the data block table the repair
always reverts to the first vessel configuration in the file.
 All the re-caches are recached and will be removed from the file.
Select the option Tools > Repair File(s) from the menu bar and a dialog
will be opened where can be chosen to repair all the logdata files in the
file set or only the selected logdata file.
Figure 17-34 Repair the logdata file(s)
Click on if the repair has to be done only for the active logdata
file or click on if the repair has to be done for all the files of the
file set. Click on if no repair has to be done.
17.2.5.17 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps

When there are problems with the timing in the log data files due to an
incorrect clock synchronization (for instance time in the future) then this
option can be used to repair the timing.
The restriction is that all relevant devices have set the Timestamp Mode
on ‘Time in Message’. PDS will use the time set in the data blocks to
repair the ‘Time in Message’.
Figure 17-35 Dialog to fix the time stamp ‘Time in Message’
17.2.5.18 Force Recache GPS Positions

In case the user is not sure anymore if all the GPS positions are up to
date, he can run a quick recache of only the position data in the active file
or all files in the File Set.

Figure 17-36 Dialog to do a force recache of the GPS positions
17.3 Editing Data

In the Editing the data can be edit, deleted, moved, etc. The method to
modify these data points is different for the 3D views and the other views
in which data can be edited.
17.3.1 Editing Multibeam Data in a 3D View

In all the 3D Views in the Editing, except the 3D View – Standard, the
multibeam data can be edited. The editing works in conjunction with the
editing system of the Editing. From the Editing the following buttons can
be used for editing the multibeam data: undo ( ) / redo ( ), normal
mode ( ), delete mode ( ) and undelete mode ( ). Furthermore it
could be defined to edit all points’, Amplitude points only or phase points
only ( ). Amplitude and phase points are points which are

There is no limit to the detected by the multibeam by amplitude or by phase.
number of undo and redo
steps in the editing.
To switch quickly between functions during editing, the following functions
do also have a keyboard shortcut:
Keyboard shortcut Function

F9 Step backward
F10 Step forward
SPACE Play
SHIFT+SPACE Play back
BACKSPCACE Undo
CTRL+Y Redo
CTRL+M Move
CTRL+A Select all
CTRL+Z Undo
CTRL+F Find
SHIFT+DELETE Undelete
SHIFT+CTRL+C Recache
N Normal
D Delete
U Undelete
A All points editing
M Amplitude points editing
P Phase points editing
The editing of the data works as follows:

 Only the high-resolution data can be edited. Set the radius of the ‘Edit
Circle’ ( or ), so that there will be enough multibeam data to edit.
 Use ‘Only Show Valid Beams’ ( ) to show only the valid beams or
also the deleted and rejected beams.
 Select to edit all points, amplitude points only or phase amplitude
points only.( )
 Set the Editing in delete mode ( ) and the deleting of the multibeam
data can be started. The cursor in the multibeam editor will change to
.
 There are several ways to delete one or more points in the multibeam
editor.
Delete one point by clicking on the beam with the cursor in
combination with the Ctrl key.
Delete more points by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
the left mouse button pressed in combination with the Ctrl key and
move the cursor over the multibeam data. It looks like erasing the
data.
A different method to delete more points is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is visible in
the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a polygon with line
segments or it can be a free drawn polygon.
 With the undelete mode ( ) the data that should not be deleted can
be undeleted. Draw a polygon around the area where the points have
to be undeleted.

A different option is to use the undo ( ) when too much or the wrong
points are deleted.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
62).
17.3.2 Editing Data Points

In the Line-Based Editor (see page 533), Time-Based Editor (see page
613) and Position Editor (see page 600) the editing of the data points is
possible.
There is no difference in selecting a single point or a block of points.
Selected points are indicated with a square. The points can be selected
by clicking on one point or by dragging the mouse over multiple points.
Keep the Ctrl-key pressed when multiple points have to be selected at
separate locations.
In the Position Editor the selection of data points is done by drawing a
 lasso around the points that need to be edited. In both other editors the
selection of the points is done by drawing a rectangle around the points.
When the edit mode is ‘Normal’ ( ) then a right click on the selected
When the edit mode is point(s) gives a context menu with edit possibilities:
‘Delete’ ( ), selected
Delete: Delete the selected points.
points are deleted Undelete: Undelete the deleted points in the selected area.
immediately. If the mode is Interpolate Cubic: Between the start and end point of the selection an
interpolation with a curve is done.
‘Undelete’ ( ) the
selected deleted points Interpolate Linear: Between the start and end point of the selection a
come back. linear interpolation is done, so a straight line will be result.
Fill Gap: When there is a gap in the position data (for instance surveyed
under a bridge), the gap will be linear interpolated using a constant
heading and speed.
Smooth: The selected points will be smoothed.
Move: The selected points can be shifted; a dialog gives the possibility to
enter a shift in X and Y direction.
Edit: The selected points will have a new position; a dialog gives the
possibility to enter a new position for the first point in the selection, the
other points will be relocated with the difference as before.
Info: Give the data block info view. Double clicking on a single point will
immediately give the data block info.
The points can be moved by dragging them. Points once edit get a
different shape, a dot instead of a small cross. This is to indicate that edit
actions have taken place on that point.
The data points from the inactive layers, which are related to the data of
 the active layer, are automatically updated when the data points are
edited.
17.4 3D Box View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a profile with a width (a
box) can be drawn over the data with Create Box View in the option
Create Detail View… ( ). When this box is drawn, a 3D Box view
opens with the profile in 3D. The different types of data (multibeam, grid

model and/or CUBE model) that are displayed in the Multibeam Area
Editing view will also be displayed in the 3D Box view.
It possible to have several 3D Box views opened at the same time. The
 drawn box from the active 3D Box view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see page 585).
Figure 17-37 3D Box view with a grid model and multibeam data
The editing of the multibeam data in the 3D Box view is similar as the
editing in the other 3D views (see page 515).
 The data in the 3D Box view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the 3D Box view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
anymore as a view in the Displays window (see page 494).
17.4.1 3D Box Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the items from the toolbar are also available in the context menu
of the 3D Box view.
Define Profile ( )
A new profile box can be drawn in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view. The existing profile box will be deleted.
2D View ( )
Toggles between the 3D Box view (Out) and the Profile view (In).See
for a detail explanation of the profile view on page 603.

Zoom Functions ( , , )
The + and – key of the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Auto Zoom Extents.
numerics keyboard can The Auto Zoom Extents is a switch on/off button. When on and the
also be used for the Zoom profile is changed/moved in the Multibeam Area Editing all the data will
In and Zoom Out. be shown in the 3D Box view. Will automatically switch off when zoom
in or zoom out (also with mouse wheel) is used.
The scale factor can also Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
be changed with the Ctrl Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
key + mouse wheel or Ctrl
+ ‘numerical + or -‘ keys. Pan ( )
Keep the left mouse button pressed to pan through the data in the
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key ‘o’.
The light intension does
not work on the multibeam
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
data. in the viewer can be modified.
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off.
on/on/off. It will toggle between both color tables present in the view
and no color table. The two color tables are CUBE color mode / Grid
model color mode (depends on the active mode) and Multibeam color
mode.
Grid Model Layer ( )
The selected grid model in the grid model layer can be switched on/off.
In the view different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
CUBE Layer ( )
The CUBE layer can be switched on/off. That means if the button is

‘in’, the CUBE layer is on and the CUBE model will be displayed in the
view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
586 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.
CUBE Surface ( )
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 589 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Previous/Next CUBE Surface ( )
The previous/next available hypothesis will be displayed. These
options are only available when as CUBE surface ( ) the option
Hypothesis is selected.
Show Combined with Main Surface ( )
The main surface can be displayed in combination with one of the
hypotheses. This option is only available when as CUBE surface ( )
the option Hypothesis is selected.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics and Multiping sequence. The different color
modes help to analyze the multibeam data. See page 525 for more
information about the beam color mode.
Laserscan Color Mode ( )
The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes. See the
chapter Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu on page
590 for pictures of the different color modes.
Toggles between only beams and beams connected with lines.
Increase/Decrease Point Size ( , )
The size of the beam points can be increased and decreased.
Toggles between showing only the valid data and showing all the data.
Show Filtered Data ( )
The multibeam data that is rejected by one or more of the checked
This option is only active
when the option Only
multibeam filters in the list will be displayed in the view. Therefore, it
will be possible to see what the impact is of one or more multibeam
Show Valid Beams ( ) is
filters on the data.
off.
It is also possible with the item Show Filtered Data in the Properties (
) of the view to (un)check more filters at one time.
Ignore Filters ( )
Multibeam data that is filtered out by one of the filters can be validated

again without unfiltering the data.
This option will make all selected data valid again, except the manual
rejected data. Draw a polygon around the data that have to be valid
again and all the data becomes valid. The data can be recognized by
its own filter color (Ignore Filters).
Clear Ignore Filters ( )
The ignore filters setting will be undone. Select the data by drawing a

polygon, which have to be bigger than the ignore filters area, and all
the selected data gets their own filter setting back.
Multibeam – Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
The XYZ of the multibeam data as displayed in the view will be
exported to a file with extension ASC.
Layer Control ( )
Opens the Layers window where layers can be added, edited or
removed. Only the used layers will be shown in the Layers window.
Properties ( )
Opens the Properties window of the view where next to for instance
the color table and the scale factor several option from the toolbar
and/or context menu are accessible.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of
the Layer Control are available.
17.5 3D View
The 3D View – Standard is only a viewer, it is not an editor. Next to the
multibeam data from the file set, it can show a grid model or a 3D design
model in 3D with some extra information.
 The 3D View – Standard will by default always display multibeam(1) when

it is opened for the first time. This is the first multibeam system in the
Equipment list. When multiple multibeam systems are selected in the
 equipment list and the first multibeam is uncheck then no multibeam data
will be displayed in the view. Open with the Layers window, add a
Multibeam Layer and select in the properties of the layer for the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ the ‘Multibeam xyz computation’ of
the active multibeam system.
If no color table is available or selected, PDS automatically generates a
color table based on the depth values in the data.
The multibeam areas that are covered by the edit circle will be displayed
in high-resolution, all other data is shown in low-resolution with the right
colors.

Figure 17-38 3D View – Standard with the cross and high-resolution data
17.5.1 3D View – Standard Toolbar and Context

Menu
of the 3D View – Standard. Also extra items are available in the context
menu.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( , , )
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
In and Zoom Out. Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
The light intension does Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
not work on the multibeam the key ‘o’.
data. With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 17-39 Spotlight window

Measure ( )
Esc-key.
Figure 17-40 3D View – Standard with a measure window with a distance,

bearing and a elevation between two points
Save Snapshot
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on/off.
Multibeam Layer ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes to help to
analyze the data. See page 525 for more information about the beam
color mode.

Show Color Table for Color Mode
This gives the user the possibility to view (and modify) the generated
color table.
This option is only available when the beam color mode is set on
Depth or Statistics.
Generate Color Table for Color Mode
The user can (re)generate a color table for this color mode Depth or
Statistic. The color table files that are generated are called respectively
default or statistics - x, where x is the type of statistics that is shown.
This option is only available when the beam color mode is set on
Depth or Statistics.
Show Edit Circle
Toggles the edit circle on/off.
Only Show Edit Circle Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the multibeam areas that are covered
by the edit circle or showing all the data.
Increase/Decrease Edit Circle Size ( , )
The radius of the edit circle can be increased and decreased.
off.
Layer Control ( )
removed (see page 527). Only the used layers will be shown in the
Layers window. It is also possible to open the Layers window with key
‘2’.
Properties ( )
and/or context menu are accessible (see page 526).
It is also possible to open the Properties window with key ‘a’.

17.5.1.1 Beam Color Mode
The data in the 3D View – Standard and in other 3D views can be shown
in several color modes. Click on the arrow in and select one of the
color modes.
File Set
This mode will use a different color for each data file in the file set. The
view will generate a temporary color table that will disappear when the
view is closed. The areas (whether shown low or high-resolution) will
have the color of their data file. The same color is used for the data
files in the toolbar of the Editing.
This mode can be helpful for identifying or finding data.
Depth
This mode will show the multibeam data in the colors of the selected
color table.
Filter
This mode will show the high-resolution multibeam data in the colors
which are used by the multibeam filters (see page 562). So the
multibeam data shows which filter affects which data. Low-resolution
data is always shown in the color of non-filtered data (normally white).
Statistics
This mode will show the data in colors which represent a level of a
 statistic value. The statistic values are valid for an area, not separate
sways or soundings. Therefore, both low and high-resolution areas are
colored as a whole. Possible values are:
 Standard deviation.
 Minimum value.
 Maximum value.
 The percentage of the beams that is affected by the selected
multibeam filter.
 The percentage of the beams that is affected by all the
multibeam filters.
The different type of statistic modes can be selected in the properties
of the Multibeam Layer.
When the color mode is set to Depth or Statistics, the context menu of
the view is extended with two options; Generate Color Table for Color
Mode and Show Color Table for Color Mode (see page 524).
Multiping Sequence
This mode will show the single ping or the multipings in different
colors.
Sonar Head
This mode will show the multibeam data for each sonar head in a
different color.
Detection
This mode will show the multibeam data in the detection colors;
amplitude, phase or both.
Multidetection
This mode will show multi-detect data in detection range order colors.
Additionally also the primary detections, as determined by the sonar
multi-detect algorithm, are in full color (bright), non-primary are in
dimmed colors. Refer to section Multi-detect Mode on page 571 Select

(show valid beams) to toggle between showing all the data or the
valid data.
17.5.2 3D View – Standard Properties

The Properties window of the view can be opened with , with key ‘a’ on
the keyboard or through the context menu.
Figure 17-41 Properties of the 3D View – Standard
Background Color
The background color of the view.
Color Table Name
Select a color table and all the relevant layers in the view will use it.
Follow Vessel
If the follow vessel mode is Enabled the view will follow the others
editors in the Editing.
Scale Factor
The scale factor of the Z-axis. Scale factor > 1 will enlarge the data in
the Z direction.
All other options in the Properties are similar with the options in the
toolbar and in the context menu (see page 522).
After the properties, the selected layers in the Layer Control are available
in the Properties window. It is not necessary to open the Layer Control to
modify something in one of the layers.

17.5.3 3D View – Standard Layers
The Layers window of the view can be opened with , with key ‘2’ on the
keyboard or through the context menu.
Figure 17-42 Layers of the 3D View – Standard
Color Table Layer

This layer is always there to show the color table in the view. The
name of the color table can be changed in the Properties window (see
above).
Grid Layer
The grid layer will show a cross in the center of the view. The cross is
displayed with a distance annotation, which can be used to measure
distances in the data. In addition, a compass rose with north, south,
east and west positions can be added to the cross, which can be used
as an orientation.
Multibeam Layer
 This layer has to be added to the Layers window before the multibeam
data can be shown in the view. Before any data can be displayed, the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ has to be selected.
In the Layers window only the used layers will be shown, any new layer
has to be added to the list in the window. The layers that can be added to
the layer control are:
Figure 17-43 Layers which can be added to the 3D View – Standard
3D Design Model Layer

There are three different ways to display the 3D design model in the
view, Solid, Wireframe or Vertex. The color(s) for the model can be the
same as in the color table for the view or the 3D design model can be

shown with one solid color.
It is also possible to make the 3D design model transparent. The
higher the value the more transparent the model will be.
Draping Layer
A GeoTIFF file can be displayed in the view. Select in the properties of
the layer a grid model that will be used as base to drape the GeoTIFF
file over it.
The grid model is drawn in Grid Model Layer
such a way that objects In addition, the grid model can be made transparent. The higher the
further away are with less value for the transparency the more transparent the grid model will be.
resolution (detail) then The grid model can be drawn with different levels of detail (resolution).
objects close by. The level can be set in five steps from very low to very high.
Route, Runline and Waypoint Layer
In the view routes, runlines and/or waypoints can be shown.
Sea Level Layer
This layer will show a sea at the correct sea level.
The sea level has to be transparent to show the model below the sea
level. The higher the value for the transparency the more transparent
the sea level will be. It is also possible to show the sea level as a plane
with a solid color or as a ‘sea like’ texture.
17.6 Data Source Switching

The Data Source Switching editor is an editor in which the primary data
source for a selected data source can be changed.
 This editor cannot be created through the standard editor selection in the
Editing (see page 494). This editor can only be opened with the option
Tools > Data Source Switching… from the menu bar of the Editing. After it
is created, it will be available in the Displays of the Editing. See the
chapter Data Source Switch on page 502 how to setup the Data Source
Switching editor.

Figure 17-44 Data Source Switching editor
When the Data Source Switching editor is opened automatically the

channels for the different data groups, the channel for the data source
switching and a channel for the primary data source are added to the
editor. In the editor, the data source switches can be edited only for the
active logdata file.
17.6.1 Edit Data Source Switches

In the editor the edit mode as explained on page 496 applies to all the
channels in the editor except for the data source switching channel. For
this channel, a separate edit mode is created to add or delete data source
switches.
17.6.1.1 Insert a Data Source Switch

To switch from data source a data source switch has to be inserted in the
data source switching channel. Select a point in the channel and click on
the right mouse button. The only option will be Insert…. Select the option
and when there are more than two devices available in the Data Source
then the Data Source Switch Editor will be opened.
If there are only two devices available in the Data Source then the switch
will be made by the editor.

Figure 17-45 Data Source Switch Editor
Select the data group that has to become the primary data source and
use to move the selected data group to the top. Click on and
the data source switch will be inserted on the selected location. If the data
of the different data groups is different than in the lowest channel the data
will be changed from the selected location onwards.
On the location where a data source switch is inserted a cross will be
visible in the data. The size of the cross can be modified in the channel
properties of the data source switching channels by changing the value
for the dot size.
17.6.1.2 Modify a Data Source Switch

When one or more data source switches are inserted and the user is not
happy with the switches, it is possible to delete or modify the switch. Click
with the right mouse button on the start of a data source switch (this is the
cross). The two options that become available are Delete and Switch….
With Delete the data source switch will be deleted. The data source that is
active before the selected location will be active until the next data source
switch in the logdata file.
With Switch… the data source switch can be switched to one of the other
available data source switches. When this option is selected, the Data
Source Switch Editor will be opened (see above) and a different data
group can be selected as primary. When for the selected item only two
data groups are available, the switch will be done automatically.
In the data source switching channel it is also possible to move a data
source switch. Select with the left mouse button the start of a data source
switch (this is the cross) and a square is drawn around that point. Keep
the left mouse pressed and move the start point to the left or right.
17.6.2 Data Source Switching Toolbar and

Context Menu
The + and – key of the Zoom In / Out Horizontally ( )
numerics keyboard can Horizontal zoom in and out in all the channels of the editor.
also be used for the
standard Zoom In and Zoom In / Out Vertically ( )
Zoom Out. Vertical zoom in and out only in the active channel of the editor.

Zoom Window ( )
With dragging a window in the active channel a part of the channel can
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Show all the data for all the channels.
Selector ( )
Channel Partition ( )
If more than one line with data is displayed it is possible to display all
the data in one view (Overlayed) or each data line in a separate view
(Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For the view in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Scale dialog the high and low values for the y-axis.
Channel Y Scaling Mode
For the y-axis of the view three different scaling modes are possible.
Free; all the channel data have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the channel data have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the channel
data.
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side of the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager window to add, remove or edit one of the
channels.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select a new channel with default
settings.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel which can be edited if the
data is editable.
Channel Properties
The properties of the active channel.
The size of the crosses can be modified by changing the dot size.
Properties
The properties of the editor.

17.7 Dekdienst
This view displays the dredge production information from one or two
suction tubes on a hopper. It is special made for one of our clients and is
therefore only with special dongles available in the Editing.
Figure 17-46 Dekdienst view
The data shown in this view is limited to the items that are defined in the
Dekdienst Channel Manager ( ). With the user can decide to
show the selected data item only in the graph (grafiek), only in the text
(tekst) at the bottom or in both.
Figure 17-47 Dekdienst Channel Manager with the items for the Dekdienst view

17.8 Line-Based Editing
The Line-Based Editing view shows channel data in relation with a
runline. Therefore the uppermost editor window shows always the survey
vessel position relative to a runline, called the off track position. The
added channel data should have a relation with that runline, for example
depth measurements from a single beam echo sounder.
There are two different Line-Based Editing views available:
 Line-Based Editing – Standard view (see page 534)
 Line-Based Editing – Multiline view (see page 535)
The multiline editor can edit data of multiple data files from the same file
set. The only restriction is that these data files have to be surveyed over
the same runline. The standard editor can edit only the data of one data
file.
17.8.1 Select Data for the Line-Based Editing

When the Line-Based Editing view is started for the first time, there will be
no channel data in the view.
In the Line-Based Editing – Standard view are two methods to add data to
the view. A quick way is to click on (Add Channel), where the
available channel data can be selected with default settings. Another way
to select data is with (Channel Manager). It opens the Channel
Manager with the options to add, edit and/or remove channel data. The
properties of a channel are accessible during adding new channel data or
by selecting . Click on ‘Graph Y Item’ in the properties to select
the channel data for the editor.
In the Line-Based Editing – Multiline is only one method available to add
the data channel to the view. With (Select Data) only one data
channel can be added or replaced with default settings.
It is possible to add an unlimited number of channel data to the Line-
Based Editing – Standard, but only one channel is active. A channel
becomes active by clicking on the data or in the channel control of the
editor. The red frame around the value in the channel control visualizes
the active channel.
Editing is only possible in the active channel, but not all channel data is
editable. If the channel data is based on other channel data, like the nadir
depth in the corrected profile computation, it cannot be edited and ‘Not
editable’ is written on the right side in the data. See the Position Editor for
more information about the editing (see page 517).

17.8.2 Line-Based Editing – Standard View
Figure 17-48 Line-Based Editing – Standard, with two stacked data channels
The Line-Based Editing – Standard view can also show data from a
second file set with the restriction that the data was surveyed over the
same runline. This data is only for comparison and cannot be edited.
Select the ‘Properties’ in the context menu and give a name for the
second file set.
To show this data select the ‘Channel Properties’ in the context menu and
enabled the option Enable under the name ‘BkgndLineDL’. This has to be
done for the each view (= channel) in the editor.
Figure 17-49 Properties (left) and Channel Properties (right) to select and
enable a second file set
In the Line-Based Editing – Standard, a profile can be shown in the

channel data. Off course, this is only relevant if the channel data is of the
same data type as the profile. To show a profile select the ‘Channel
Properties’ of the data channel, select a design model type (Profile

Design Model, 3D Design Model or Grid Model), enter the name of the
model and enabled the option Enable.
Figure 17-50 Channel Properties of the channel data to select a design model
type
Figure 17-51 Line-Based Editing – Standard; with second file set and a profile
of a grid model
17.8.3 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View

The multiline editor supports editing of only one channel. The selection of
the channel is therefore different. With ‘Select Data’ in the context menu

or with in the toolbar the channel data can be selected. The new
channel data will replace the existing channel data in the view.
Figure 17-52 Line-Based Editing – Multiline, with three surveys over the same
runline
In the Line-Based Editing – Multiline view, like in the Line-Base Editing –

Standard view, a second file set and a profile can be added to the data
(see above).
17.8.4 Line-Based Editing Toolbar and Context

Menu
of both the Line-Based Editing views. Sometimes extra items are
available in the context menu.
Zoom Window ( )
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Selector ( )
Channel Partition
If more then one line with offtrack data or selected data is displayed it
is possible to display all the related data lines in one view (Overlayed)
or each data line in a separate view (Stacked).

Set Y Scale
For both views in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Free; all the data lines have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the data lines have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the data lines.
Distance in Line Origin
The x-axis in both views is related to the runline that is used in the
editor. The origin of the x-axis can be defined on three places on the
runline.
Centerline; the origin is in the middle of the runline.
Start of Line; the origin is at the start of the runline.
End of Line; the origin is at the end of the runline, which will result in
negative values for the x-axis.
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side in the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens Channel Manager to add, remove or edit one of the channels;
only in the Line-Based Editor – Standard.
Add Channel ( )
Opens Select Data to select a new channel with default settings; only
in the Line-Based Editing – Standard view.
Select Data ( )
Opens Select Data to select the channel for the Line-Based Editing –
Multiline view.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel. The data can be edited
by selecting one of the values in the list.
Channel Properties
The properties of the data that is selected in the view. Each view in the
editor has its own channel properties.
Properties
The properties of the selected view. Each view in the editor has its
own properties.
17.9 Messages
There is only one Messages view in the Editing, a Messages – System
Messages view. This view is similar to the one in the Acquisition and the
Presentation (see page 387).
Figure 17-53 Messages – System Messages view with information for the
Editing

17.10 Multibeam Area Editing
There are two Multibeam Area Editing views:
 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see next section)
 Multibeam Area Editing – Ping view
The Multibeam Area Editing – Ping view is identical with the Ping view
(see page 595) which can be selected in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view with . The only difference is the default color table.
When the Ping view is created, it will use the same color table as the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view and when the Multibeam Area
Editing – Ping view is created the color table will be the default color
table.
17.10.1 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View
Figure 17-54 Multibeam Area Editing - Standard
The Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view is a 3D view in which it is

possible to edit the multibeam data, create and modify a CUBE model
and grid model, modify the multibeam filters or to do a multibeam
calibration. Both the grid model and the CUBE model can be used to filter
the multibeam data in the view.
 The Multiple Area Editing – Standard view will by default always display
multibeam(1) when it is opened for the first time. This is the first
multibeam system in the Equipment list. When multiple multibeam
systems are selected in the equipment list and the first multibeam is
unchecked then no multibeam data will be displayed in the view. For the
CUBE and Grid Model control open with the Layers window, add a
Multibeam Layer and select in the properties of the layer for the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ the ‘Multibeam xyz computation’ of
the active multibeam system. For the Multibeam Filter and Multibeam
Calibration a different multibeam system can be selected.

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view are the following modes
available:
 CUBE Model mode (see below)
 Grid Model mode (see page 547)
 Multibeam Filter mode (see page 562)
 Multi-Detect(see page 571).
 Multibeam Calibration mode (see page 580)
 Pipe Detection mode (see page 581)
 Water Column Samples (see page 581)
 Sound Velocity mode (see page 582)
Select a mode by pressing from the left pane the corresponding button.
Figure 17-55 Modes
The multi detect mode is only available when the dataset consists of a file
including multi detect data.
17.10.2 CUBE Model Mode

Click on the CUBE Model Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
select the CUBE mode for the view. In the CUBE mode a CUBE model
can be generated and modified. The CUBE model can be used to filter
the multibeam data.
Select a file set before a CUBE model can be generated from the
multibeam data. If a CUBE model already exists in the project and no file
set is selected, the last used model will be displayed in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view.
The CUBE model name is always the name of the selected file set. When
a new Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view is opened by default no
 CUBE model will be opened. When the file set is identical with a CUBE
model that is generated before no new CUBE model has to be generated.
Just click on in the toolbar of the view and the existing CUBE model
will be displayed.

Figure 17-56 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a CUBE model and
multibeam data both in depth color mode
17.10.2.1 CUBE
In the traditional multibeam echo sounders processing method all
measured data points are treated with the same accuracy. However, in
reality each data point has a different accuracy. The question is then how
can the different accuracies of the data points be determined, how can
the possible errors be measured, what is the impact of the errors on the
measured depths and what is then the true depth of the measured data
points.
CUBE (© 2003 University The CUBE technology (© 2003 University of New Hampshire) will give an
of New Hampshire) stands answer to these questions. The CUBE method use statistical redundancy
for Combined Uncertainty to compute the most likely measured depths (a hypothesis) from the
and Bathymetry Estimator. multibeam data with the use of all the information that is available.
The first step in the CUBE algorithm is to compute the vertical and
horizontal errors of all the soundings in the measurement by the forward
error propagation method. These errors are already calculated during the
survey and can be displayed in the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation
Errors view in the Acquisition (see page 396).
The second step is to estimate the best surface. Each sounding has a
depth estimation and the CUBE algorithm will keep all previous depth
estimations. If for a new sounding the depth estimation is within the
limitation, the previous depth of the node (cell) is not going to be changed.
The previous depth will be kept as one of the depth hypotheses and the
new depth will be treated as a new hypothesis. At the end, some nodes
will have several estimated depths (hypotheses). The algorithm will
choose the best hypothesis as the selected hypothesis and the other

hypotheses are called the alternative hypotheses. The estimate surface
will be constructed with the selected hypotheses.
The CUBE algorithm will produce two products, the CUBE surface and
the CUBE node hypotheses. For each node, the CUBE surface contains
the following data elements:
Selected hypothesis
The best-estimated surface from the CUBE algorithm.
Number of hypotheses
The total number of hypotheses on the node.
Uncertainty of the hypothesis
The posterior variance of the estimation for the selected hypothesis.
The value of uncertainty reflects the estimation confidence. Large
values means less certainty in the hypothesis.
Strength of the hypothesis
Indicates the confidence of the algorithm that the best hypothesis is
chosen as selected hypothesis, when multi hypotheses are available
for the node.
Number of soundings
The number of soundings that is used for the calculation of the
selected hypothesis for the node.
The CUBE node hypotheses will record for each node all alternatives
hypotheses with the hypothesis uncertainty and the number of soundings.
17.10.2.2 Create a CUBE Model
Figure 17-57 Create page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view

In the Create page for the CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view the cell size for the CUBE model can be defined and areas
likes wrecks or along a route can be excluded from the creation of the
model.
Cell size
Default an automatic setting of 10% of the depth of the multibeam data
is used as the cell size. It is also possible to enter a cell size, where
the user has to realize that the smaller the cell size the longer it will
take to generate the CUBE model.

If the density of the multibeam data is high, a small cell size can be
entered. However if the cell size is too small, gaps in the CUBE model
will appear.

If the cell size is too big, it is possible that the CUBE model is not
presenting the right model. This is due to the relation between the IHO
order and the cell size to determine what the best surface is for the
CUBE model.
IHO Order
The IHO order will be used to filter the data that is used for the
creation of the CUBE model. If the vertical and horizontal total
propagation error of a beam is bigger than the IHO error then the
beam will not be used for the CUBE model. See for an explanation of
the IHO order on page 414, for the vertical TPE on page 396 and for
the horizontal TPE on page 397.
Excluded areas
Areas can be excluded from the CUBE model. A file with the excluded
areas has to be selected before the CUBE model is created.
Select a file or create a new file with .
Click on to add an existing clipping polygon to the list of
It is also possible to create excluded areas. If the polygon does not exist yet, click on to
or modify an excluded area draw a new clipping polygon. This new created polygon will be added
file in the Explorer (see to the list automatically.
page 274). Click on to add an existing route to the list. To make the route
an excluded area, enter a route width and click on to add the
route width to the route.
If an area has to be removed from the list, select the polygon or route
from the list and click on to remove it from the excluded area
file.
Click on to create a new CUBE model with the settings of this
page.

17.10.2.3 Information of the CUBE Model
Figure 17-58 Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view the information of the CUBE model and one selected cell
of the model are presented.
Model
The cell size and the number of hypotheses of the CUBE model is
given.
Current surface
The current surface as presented in the view will be displayed, in the
example above the surface of most hits of the CUBE model is
displayed.
Cell
With a double click on a cell in the CUBE model the information in the
main surface of that cell will be displayed.
Strength
The strength is an indication about the quality of the depth in that
cell. Strength of 0 means that the cell contains good data. How
higher the strength (with a maximum of 5) the worse the quality of
that cell. If the cell is edited the strength becomes ‘Manual’ (=-1).
Estimated Z
The Z-value of the selected cell as from the main surface, this is
best hypothesis for this cell.
Standard deviation
The standard deviation of the selected cell.

The table will display all the hypotheses that are available for the
selected cell. The selected hypothesis for that cell is highlighted, in
the example above hypothesis 2. A combination of the hitcount and
the uncertainty will give the best estimation for the selected cell.
The best estimation does not have to be the hypothesis with the
highest hitcount and the smallest uncertainty. Here the hitcount is
not only the number of pings in the cell but also the hitcount from
the surrounding pings are used to come to the specific hypothesis.
17.10.2.4 Editing the CUBE Model
Figure 17-59 Edit page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view with one of the edit modes selected
In the Edit page cells can be removed from the main surface or data from
It is always possible to other hypotheses can be select for the main surface.
rotate and shift the view
The cells can be selected by drawing a polygon around the cells or by
using the mouse wheel as
a button. selecting one cell with the Ctrl key and a mouse click.
When one of the edit modes is selected, the Edit tab will have a red box
to indicate that one of the edit options is active (as shown in the example
above). Even when the user switches to a different page in the editor it is
still clear that one of the edit modes is active.
None
No edit mode is active.
Remove
The cursor will change to . Draw a polygon around cells or select
one cell that has to be deleted. Directly the selected data is removed
from the view.
Override
The cursor will change to . Select the hypothesis from which the
cells have to be selected by using or . The cells become green,
red or grey (see Figure 17-107 on page 589), so it is easy to see which
cells per hypothesis are not in the main surface. Draw a polygon
around the cells or select one cell that has to be moved to the main
surface. Directly the selected data will be moved to the main surface.
Golden sounding
The cursor will change to and the multibeam data will become

visible if it is not switch on. Select a beam or the line that connects the
beam and the depth value will be moved the value in the main surface.

The edit mode can be switched off by selecting the edit mode None or
click with the right mouse button in the view.
17.10.2.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with a CUBE Model
Figure 17-60 Filter page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data with
 the CUBE model. The filters only work on the CUBE model that is
displayed in the view. The main criterion is the vertical distance between
the multibeam data and the CUBE model.
Filter
Select one or more of the following options to reject points.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds the standard deviation
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the standard
deviation of the CUBE model cell multiplied with 1.0, 2.0 or 3.0.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds uncertainty
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the uncertainty of
the CUBE model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.

Don’t filter problem areas
The beams which are related to a CUBE model cell with a strength
> 0 will not be filtered.
Click on to start the filtering of the multibeam data.
Unfilter
Click on to add all the beams, which were rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
17.10.2.6 Export the CUBE Model
Figure 17-61 Export page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The displayed surface of the CUBE model can be exported to a grid

model. Check the option Show in Grid Model Editor to display the grid
model in the grid model editor after the export of the CUBE model. Click
on to start the export.
The mean beam Z deviation of all the beams relative to the main surface
can be exported to a CSV file. For each beam the mean beam Z deviation
for the four multipings (if available), the single ping and the beam angle
will be exported. Click on to start the export.
17.10.2.7 Sync the CUBE Model
Figure 17-62 Sync page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view

The CUBE synchronization will update the CUBE model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.
When the option Auto sync CUBE model is checked, the CUBE model is
 automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view.
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option is unchecked then the button
becomes active. Also in the tab of the Sync page, a red box
will appear to show that the multibeam data is modified (see above). Now
the CUBE model can be synchronized with the multibeam data by clicking
on . The red box stays in the Sync tab until the CUBE model is
synchronized, even when the user switch over to a different page.
If the option Auto sync CUBE model is unchecked and the Multibeam
 Area Editing – Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set
is opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to
update (synchronize) the CUBE model with the modified multibeam data.
17.10.3 Grid Model Mode

Click on the Grid Model Mode ( ) at the left pane of the view to select
the Grid Model mode. In the Grid Model mode a grid model can be
generated and modified. The grid model can be used to filter the
multibeam data.
Select a file set before a grid model can be generated from the multibeam
data. If a grid model already exists in the project, select the grid model
above the tabs in the left pane. This selected grid model is then the
editable grid model.

Figure 17-63 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a grid model in
depth color mode
17.10.3.1 Create a Grid Model

Click on to create a new grid model and the Create tab will be
opened. The Create tab can only be opened with the button.
Figure 17-64 Create page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view

In the Create page, a grid model can be created from the multibeam data
that is loaded with the file set.
Create
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model. When the option 10% of depth is
checked the cell size will be calculated and will be around 10% of
the average depth of the multibeam data.
Cell data
Select which data/information from the multibeam data has to be
stored in the grid model. The Hit Count is always stored in the grid
model.
When the cell size is set and the cell data is selected click on
to create the grid model from the multibeam data as loaded
in the view.
When the grid model is created, the name of the grid model will be
displayed above the tabs in the left pane.

17.10.3.2 Information of the Grid Model
Figure 17-65 Info page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the info page the information of the grid model and of the selected cell
is displayed. Also a report of the grid model can be generated.
Grid model
The cell size and the available statistical information of the grid model
will be displayed.
Cell size
The size of the cells in the grid model.
Used cells
The total number of cells used in the grid model.
Used area
The total used area, i.e. the number of used cells multiplied by the
cell size.

Empty area
The area of cells without data, i.e. the number empty cells
multiplied by the cell size. This are the empty cells in a grid model
rectangular that is drawn around the grid model data.
Z min (deepest)
The deepest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z max (highest)
The highest value found of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z average
The sum of all the values of the data types ‘Z Average’ divided by
the number of filled cells. The empty cells are not part of the
computation.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when ‘Z Average’
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = √ (∑(all cells std²) /number of cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all the values of the data type ‘Hit count’. This is the number
of multibeam data points used for the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type ‘Time’. This is only when
the data type ‘Time’ exists in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click on to get in a separate
window the cell information for the selected area. If no clipping polygon
is selected the cell information is of the complete grid model.
Figure 17-66 Cell info window for the selected area
Edit cell
The cell information of a selected grid model cell. The cell can be
selected by double clicking on the cell. When the cell is selected it is
possible to edit the values.
Click on to clear all the values in the selected cell.
Select a data type and the value can be modified, click on to
set the new value.

Grid model report
Two different report styles are available; GridModelReport and
SurveyLine.
GridModelReport generates a report that gives all the information
about the selected grid model.
SurveyLine generates a report that only gives the survey lines that are
used with the grid model.
Click on to view the report in the PDS Reporter. With File >
Save as… in the PDS Reporter the report can be saved as a PDF file.
17.10.3.3 Editing the Grid Model
Figure 17-67 Edit page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Edit page the data of the grid model can be edited. Cells can be
deleted and interpolated if necessary.
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
1. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
2. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
3. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.

Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is
valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.
Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be

interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
17.10.3.4 Remove Spikes in the Grid Model
Figure 17-68 Filter page to remove spikes in the grid model in the mUltibeam
Area Editing – Standard view
In the Filter page the settings can be set to find and remove spikes in the
grid model and the removed cells will be interpolated with a circular
interpolation.
Ignore Area Options
Select clipping polygons which cover areas of the gird model that
ignored when PDS is searching for spikes. This can be used to ignore
wrecks from the spike detection.

Preview Options
Check the option Show Preview when the found spikes will be shown
in the grid model. If unchecked the found spikes will immediately be
removed so no visual check can be done.
There are two options to show the detected spikes in the grid model;
Red on Green and User color.
Red on Green shows the spikes in red and the rest of the grid model in
green.
User color shows the spikes in the color as defined in the Properties
(Show Preview Color in the Grid Model Edit Layer) and the rest of the
grid model in the colors of the active color table.
Figure 17-69 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model’. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The ‘Find Spikes’ button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The ‘Find & Remove Spikes’ button is only available when the option
Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is

possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).
17.10.3.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with Grid Model
Figure 17-70 Beam Filter page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Beam Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data
with a grid model. The main criterion is the vertical distance between the
multibeam data and the grid model.
Filter
Distance from grid model exceeds standard deviation
the beam and the grid model is larger than the standard deviation
of the grid model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.
Distance from grid surface exceeds
the beam and the grid model surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.

Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.
Both conditions are met
A beam will be rejected when it is rejected in both the above-
mentioned filters, ‘Distance from grid model exceeds standard
deviation’ and ‘Distance from grid surface exceeds’.
Reject when no grid surface
When checked, the multibeam data outside the selected grid model
will be rejected.
Click on to start the filtering of the multibeam data.
 The filtered data will be visible in the view with the color of the
CUBE/grid model filter, if the Beam Color Mode is set on Filter.
Unfilter
Click on to add all the beams, which are rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
17.10.3.6 Export the Grid Model
Figure 17-71 Export page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The mean beam Z deviation of all the beams relative to the grid model
can be exported to a CSV file. For each beam the mean beam Z deviation
for the four multipings (if available), the single ping and the beam angle
will be exported. Click on to start the export.

17.10.3.7 Create IHO statistics Report
Figure 17-72 Report page
To create an IHO statistic report:

1. Select a fileset with the .pds files for which the IHO statistic report is
created.
Figure 17-73 Fileset
2. Select the reference grid model.
Figure 17-74 Reference grid model

3. Select the ‘Report’ tab page.
Figure 17-75 Report tab
4. Select the multibeam to report.
Figure 17-76 Multibeam selection
5. Select the IHO standards (orders).
Figure 17-77 IHO standards (orders)
Refer to the S44 IHO standards for hydrographic surveys and the S57
IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
IHO S44 Description
standard
S44 Special This is the most rigorous of the orders and its use
Order is intended only for those areas where under-keel
clearance is critical.
S44 Order 1a This order is intended for those areas where the
sea is sufficiently shallow to allow natural or man-
made features on the seabed to be a concern to
the type of surface shipping expected to transit
the area but where the under-keel clearance is
less critical than for Special Order above.
S44 Order 1b This order is intended for areas shallower than
100 metres where a general depiction of the
seabed is considered adequate for the type of
surface shipping expected to transit the area.
S44 Order 2 This is the least stringent order and is intended
for those areas where the depth of water is such
that a general depiction of the seabed is
considered adequate.
S44 User Def. S44 order defined by the user.

In digital charts the data quality is specified in Zones of Confidence
(ZOC). The ZOC describes the quality of the bathymetry in the area.
ZOC Description
S57 A1 Depth accuracy of bathymetry 0.5m+1%d
Full area search undertaken. Significant seafloor
features detected and depths measured.
S57 A2 Depth accuracy of 1m+2%d
Full area search undertaken. Significant seafloor
features detected4 and depths measured.
S57 B Depth accuracy of 1m+2%d
Full seafloor coverage not achieved; uncharted
features, hazardous to surface navigation are not
expected but may exist.
S57 C Depth accuracy of 2m+5%d
Full seafloor coverage not achieved, depth
anomalies may be expected.
S57 User Def. Depth accuracy specified by user.
Press the ‘Add’ button to add the selected IHO standard for
the report. Up to four standards may be added.
If a user defined standard is selected, the user must enter parameters
a and b.
a = Represents that portion of the uncertainty that does not vary with
depth.
b = Coefficient which represents that portion of the uncertainty that
varies with depth.
6. Select the beam grouping mode and the range of the selected
grouping mode.
Figure 17-78 Grouping mode
There are three data grouping methods:

 Angle
The soundings are grouped according to the beam angle
from nadir.
Set the minimum and maximum angle and the step size for
each angle incremental. This determines the number of rows
of the IHO report.
 Beam number
The soundings are grouped according to the across track
distance from nadir.

Set the minimum and maximum beam number and the step
size for each beam number incremental. This determines the
number of rows of the IHO report.
 Distance
The soundings are grouped according to the across track
distance from nadir.
Set the minimum and maximum distance and the step size for
each distance incremental. This determines the number of
rows of the IHO report.
Press the ‘Add’ button.

The defined range is listed in the box.
Figure 17-79 Grouping mode range
7. Select the report style.
Figure 17-80 Report style
Currently only the English report is available.

8. Press the ‘Report’ button.
The data is calculated and the report is created.

The report opens.
Figure 17-81 Report

The next table lists the fields included in the report.
Field Description
Range group The selected range group:
 Angle
 Beam number
 Distance
Count The Total number of depths
Max Maximum distance of depths above the
reference surface
Min Minimum distance of depths above the
reference surface
Mean The mean difference of depths to the
reference surface
Std Dev Standard deviation of mean
differences.
Selected IHO standard(s) Percentage of depths that fall within
the selected IHO standard (order).
The reports includes a graph showing for each selected IHO order the
percentage of depths falling within the IHO order against the selected range
group.
Figure 17-82 Graph(s)

17.10.3.8 Sync the Grid Model
Figure 17-83 Sync page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The grid model synchronization will update the grid model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.
When the option Auto sync grid model is checked, the grid model is
 automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option Auto sync grid model is
unchecked then the button becomes active. Also in the tab of
the Sync page, a red box will appear to show that the multibeam data is
modified (see above). Now the grid model can be synchronized with the
multibeam data by clicking on . The red box stays in the Sync
tab until the grid model is synchronized, even when the user switch over
to a different page.
If the option Auto sync grid model is unchecked and the Multibeam Area
 Editing – Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set is

opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to update
(synchronize) the grid model with the modified multibeam data.
17.10.4 Multibeam Filter Mode

Click on the Multibeam Filter Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
select the filters mode for the view. In this mode the multibeam filters for
each file of the file set can be set or modified.
The filters used or modified in the Acquisition will be shown in the data
bar of the Editing as small triangles. Each triangle shows a location in the
data file where a filter was added or modified.
The filter mode consists of three pages (From of PDS v4.x):
 Filter
 Area Filter
 Show Filtered

Figure 17-84 Filter mode control pages
17.10.4.1 Filter
The Filter page shows the filter settings for the current location of the data
file. See page 404 for the working and actions of the multibeam filters.

Figure 17-85 Filter page for the multibeam filters in the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view
The Filter page consists of the following functions:

Multibeam
Before the multibeam filters can be added or modified, select the right
multibeam at the top of the page. If more than one multibeam is
available in the Equipment list then one of these multibeam systems
can be selected. By default always the first system in the Equipment
list is selected.

Filter Positions
These are locations of the filter(s) as set in the file(s) of the selected
file set. The location is also visible as small triangles in the data bar of
the Editing.
It is possible to select It is possible to add a filter position in any location in the data file.
multiple filter positions Ensure the data locator is on the location the user wants a new
before modifying the filters. multibeam filter and click on to insert a new filter position. Set
Use the Ctrl key or Shift the different filter values to the requirements and click on to
key to select multiple filter
activate the new filter position. If the filter position is activated, a
positions. Then it is
possible to add/remove recache takes place to update the data from the current (new) filter
filters for all the selected position to the next filter position or to the end of the data file.
filter positions at the same To modify a filter select the right filter position from the list of filter
time. positions and change the required filter settings. Click on
to update the location in the other views to the filter position location.
Click on to activate the modifications.
In case a filter position must remove from the file, then select it in the
list of filter positions and click on in the editor.
Filters
The active filters are displayed for the selected filter location in the
Filter positions.
With a different filter is added to the list. The new added filter
will be placed in the order as defined in the selection list, this means
that most of the time the new filters is not added at the end of the
display list. Modify the setting for the new filter and click on to
add the new filter to the selected filter position.
When a filter is not necessary anymore, it is possible to remove it from
the display list. Uncheck the filter and click on to update the
list. The removed filter can be added again and the last filter settings
for that filter will be used.
Attributes
A complete swath will be rejected when the percentage of rejected
beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
- no sound velocity profile will be used.
- a sound velocity profile can be selected; select the sound
velocity profile that has to be used in the multibeam computation.
- data from the sound velocity profile sensor that is selected
in the Equipment will be used in the multibeam computation.
When a sound velocity profile is used, it is possible to use the surface
sound velocity, detected by the multibeam system, as extra entry in
the sound velocity profile. Check the option Use surface SV as first
entry in table to do so.
Filter changes
When a filter position is added or deleted, or when a filter is added or
unchecked or when the attributes settings are modified then both
buttons becomes active. Click on to apply the modification(s)
or click on to set the settings back to the settings before the
modification(s).
17.10.4.2 Area Filter

An area filter is one or more multibeam filter that only filters the multibeam
data falling inside a selected area (clipping polygon).
It is possible to create multiple area filters. An area filter set is the
container for a group of area filters and will be stored in a file on disk.
It is possible to create multiple area filter sets.

See the next picture. There are three areas (clipping polygons in the
survey area), each with its own filters defined. A filter set is created from
different areas. In this picture filter set 1 consists of area 1 and area 2.
Filter set 2 consists of area 2 and area 3.
Filter set 1
Area 1
Intensity Filter
Data quality Filter
Filter set 2
Area 2
Data quality Filter

Intensity Filter
Sub bottom filter
Area 3
Intensity Filter
Figure 17-86 Area filter
The area filters are generally used for multibeam multi detect data.

Figure 17-87 Area filter page.
Three multibeam filters are selectable for an area filter:

 Detection quality filter
 Sub bottom (multi-detect)
 Intensity(multi-detect)
When applying a detection quality area filter on detections which are
already rejected by a time based detection quality filter or another area
filter, but is valid data for the detection quality area filter being applied,
those detections will be validated and marked as ‘Area ignore filters’
(visible when color mode ‘filter’ is selected in the view).
The next table lists the functions of the Area Filter page.
Area Filter set Select from the drop down list an area
filter set or press the New button to
create a new one.
Area filters Tick or untick the checkbox to select

or deselect an area filter from the area
filter set.
Press the New button to create a new
area filter.
Press the Delete button to delete an
area filter.

Edit selected area filter Select from the drop down list a
clipping polygon. This is the area.
Select none to select the entire data
set.
Press the Draw polygon button to

draw a polygon in the 3D view. Right
click in the 3D view to save the drawn
polygon.
Press the Add Filter button to add a
filter for the selected area.
Apply / remove area filters. Press the Apply selected area filters
to apply the added filters of the area
filtering.
Press the Remove selected area
filtering button to undo the filtering.
The next table lists the steps to apply an area filter.
Step Action
1 Press New to create a new area filter set.
Enter a name and press the Save button.

Step Action
2 Press New from the Area filters box and enter a new for the area
filter.
3 Select a polygon from the drop down list or press the Draw
polygon button to draw a polygon in the 3D view. Right click in
the 3D view to save the drawn polygon.

Step Action
4 Press the Add Filter button to add a filter for the selected polygon.
5 Repeat step 4 to apply more filters.

6 Repeat Step 2-5 to add an additional area filter in area filter set.
7 Press the Apply selected area filters to apply the filters to the
multibeam data.
17.10.4.3 Show Filtered

From the show filtered page, it is possible to enable or disable the display
of filtered multibeam data. On this way, it is possible to analyze the impact
of selected filters on the multibeam data.

Figure 17-88 Show filtered page
17.10.5 Multi Detect Mode

Multi Detect is an optional feature for Teledyne RESON sonars that
provides multiple detections within each beam. It allows the surveyor to
capture enhance detail over complex features, or ensure that full detail is
captured of any object in the water column. The next picture is an
example of Multi Detect data with the Multi Detection beam color mode
enabled. Up to five detections may occur anywhere within each beam.

Figure 17-89 Multi-detect (all data)
Multi detection is a useful feature for surveying challenging multi-path

environments as for example a corner between the seafloor and a quay
wall.

Figure 17-90 Top model: Standard bottom detection. Bottom model :multi
detect detection.
The Multi Detect mode is available when at least one file of the file set
that is loaded in the Editor contains multi detect data. Otherwise, the Multi
Detect mode button in the left pane is disabled.
Figure 17-91 Multi-detect mode button
When the multi detect mode is selected automatically the color mode in
the 3D multibeam edit view is changed to the multi detect color mode.
Two different detection orders are created by the RESON sonar’s multi
detect algorithm:
 Detections by (intensity) priority order.
(Primary and non-primary detections) The primary detection is not
necessary the first detection it could also be the second up to the
fifth detection.
 Detections by range order (range of the detection).
The first, second, up to the fifth detection.
Up to five (or less) detections are available.
(See Figure 17-93.)
 The multi detect data coloring is showed in the corresponding
detection range order. The used colors of the detection range
order are showed in the 3D view from the legend layer.

Figure 17-92 Color legend
 The priority (primary or non-primary) of the multi detect data is

showed with dimmed colors for non-primary detections and full
(bright) colors for the primary (highest intensity) detection.
Figure 17-93 Multi-detect data coloring
From the multi detect pane the multi detect data and visualization is
controlled.
The Multi Detect pane has one page:
 Visualization

Figure 17-94 Multi Detect visualization page

17.10.5.1 Visualization page
The next table lists the functions of the visualization page.
Show detections The multi detect visualization is set from four buttons
(Data of file remains unchanged.):
 Only valid detections
Press this button to show all valid
detections. Filtered detections are hidden.
(Disable any applied filters from the filter tab
to see all data.)
 Primary detections
Press this button to show only valid and
filtered primary detections.
See the next picture; in the right picture, the
non-primary detections (light blue colored)
are now hidden.
 Shallowest (first) detections

Press this button to show only valid and
filtered shallowest (first) detections. See the
next picture; in the right picture, the second
(orange colored) detections are hidden and
first (blue colored) detections are now
shown.
 Other detections
Press this button to show all other valid and
filtered detections that are not primary or
first.
See the right picture all detections except
the primary and the first are now shown.

Intensity filter level With the Intensity slider, it is possible to control the
visibility of non-primary detections by their intensity
level. Besides the primary detections the non-
primary detections with an intensity value above the
set threshold are visible. The range of the slider is
the maximum intensity of the data in the current file
set. See the next figure. Non-primary detections
under the set threshold will not be displayed.
Sub bottom Tick the Hide sub bottom detection checkbox to hide
the detections below (in range) the primary
detection.
See the next figure. Sub bottom detections are
hidden when the checkbox is ticked.
Add visualization filters to Press the ‘Add/Update selected filters’ button to add
filter page. the created filters of the Visualization page to the
Filter page of the multibeam area editing view.
The added filters to the filter page are only applied
to the dataset when the ‘Apply’ button on the filter
page is pressed.
In the next figure the Sub bottom and Intensity filter
as used in the Visualization page are added to the
Filter page.

17.10.5.2 Multi Detect Filters

Three filters specially apply for Multi Detect data:
 Intensity
 Sub Bottom
 Detection quality [Shallowest (first)]
Refer to chapter Multibeam Filters View on page 404 for a detailed
description of the filters.
It is possible to add the applied visualization page filters to the filter page.
From the filter page it is possible to add the filters to the fileset.
1. Press from the visualization page the Add/update selected filters
button.
Figure 17-95 Add/Update selected filters button
2. Open the Filter page.
Figure 17-96 Filter page
3. The filters are listed. Press the Apply button to apply the filters to file
set.

Figure 17-97 Apply
17.10.5.3 Multi Detect Considerations

 Area Filter.
Use Area Filter(s) to filter specific areas with unique filter settings.
(See page 565.)
 Multi Detect mode.
A File set must contain files on which the first ping contains multi
detect data. Otherwise the multi detect mode is not available in
PDS. (Start logging PDS data after the multi detect mode is
enabled in the sonar.)
 Grid Model and Cube model of Multi detect Data.
In the grid model mode and CUBE model mode, it is possible to
create a model of all valid (unfiltered) data. Grid model filtering
and CUBE filtering will process all detections and not only the
primary ones.
 Box view.
The data content of a created box view is the data when the box
was drawn. When afterwards a filter is enabled the data of the
box view is not updated. Draw a new box.

17.10.6 Multibeam Calibration Mode
Click on the Multibeam Calibration Mode ( ) above the left pane of the
view to select the calibration mode for the view. In this mode a multibeam
calibration with a file set can be done.
Figure 17-98 Calibration mode with a Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
and the three Profile views
See for a detailed explanation of the multibeam calibration the manual

Multibeam Calibration (the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf in the folder
‘manuals).

17.10.7 Pipe Detection Mode
Click on the Pipe Detection Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
open the pipe detection mode for the view. In this mode, an as-laid pipe
route can be generated from the multibeam data.
Figure 17-99 Pipe Detection mode in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view with a detected pipe and a Profile view
See for a detailed explanation of the pipe detection the manual Pipe
Detection (the file Pipe Detection.pdf in the folder ‘manuals) .
17.10.8 Water Column Samples Mode

Click on the Water Column Samples Mode button ( ) above the left
pane of the view to open the Water Column Sample mode editor.

Figure 17-100 Water Column Sample Mode
Refer to the chapter 3D View - Online Water Column on page 331 for a
description of the properties menus.
17.10.9 Sound Velocity Editor Mode

Click on the Sound Velocity Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
open the sound velocity editor. The editor is part of the Svp Edit Profile
view which shows the current sound velocity profile with a profile of a
selected area. Modify the sound velocity profile and the impact of the
modification is visible in the profile view next to the sound velocity profile.
To know where the profile is drawn the 3D view from the Multibeam Area
Editing is still open.

Figure 17-101 Svp Edit Profile view with a sound velocity profile view on the left
and a profile view on the right with above the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view
When the view is opened, in the data of the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view a profile is drawn on the current record location. In the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view the profile can be modified if
needed. A new profile can be drawn with from the toolbar of the Svp
Edit Profile view.
Next to the current sound velocity profile, a second sound velocity profile
can be selected with the option that it can be edited. Both sound velocity
profiles will be displayed on the left side in the view. In the sound velocity
profile view on the left side, the small boxes can be selected and dragged
around in the view to modify the sound velocity profile.
In the left pane in the view some actions/options can be selected.
Edit file name
Select a sound velocity profile that has to be edited. This can be the
same sound velocity profile as the current sound velocity profile or it
can be a different sound velocity profile.
The selected sound velocity profile is displayed in red with small boxes
which can be moved.
The selected sound velocity profile will be directly assigned to the data
shown in the profile. The user can see immediately what the influence
is of the sound velocity profile on the multibeam data.
Use Surface Sv
Select this option when the surface sound velocity has to be used in
the editable sound velocity profile.
The location of the surface sound velocity is displayed as a white dot
in the sound velocity profile.

Preview Mode
Each modification of the sound velocity profile will update the
multibeam profile in the right view.
Single File; select this option when a modification has to update only
the data of the active log data file.
Multi File; select this option when a modification has to update the data
of all log data files. Even the log data files that use a different sound
velocity profile get then (only as preview) the modified sound velocity
profile.
The Multi File option can be used to modify the sound velocity profile
for a file set that use the same sound velocity profile. If the data of the
file set is not matching due to the sound velocity profile then with some
small modifications of the sound velocity profile the data can be
adjusted.
Filter Update
In the Multibeam Filter Mode of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view the sound velocity profile can be selected as attribute (see page
565). When a different sound velocity profile is selected a new filter
position will be added at the location of the current record (see page
565).
The editable sound velocity profile can be saved and a new filter
position will be added with the new sound velocity profile.
The editable sound velocity profile can be saved and the current
filter position will be updated with the new sound velocity profile.
17.10.10 Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and

Context Menu
of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view. Also extra items are
available in the context menu.
Hide Pane ( )
Toggles the left pane of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
The + and – key of the on/off.
numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom Zoom Functions ( , , )
In and Zoom Out. Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
The scale factor can also Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
be changed with the Ctrl Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
key + mouse wheel or Ctrl
+ ‘numerical + or -‘ keys. Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
the key ‘o’.
Pan ( )
view.

Measure ( )
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot
Draw Polygon
Draw a clipping polygon in the view.
Create Detail View… ( )
Click on the arrow to select the type of view that has to be created;
Box view, Profile view or Ping view.
Create Box View
Click on a location in the view and draw a line to create a box. The
Moved the cursor in the
box width can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
Multibeam Area Editing
over the box, the box will grippers. A 3D Box view will be opened with a profile of the
be highlighted and the selected area (see page 517).
cursor will change to a Create Profile View
hand. Keep the left mouse Click on a location in the view and draw a line. The width of the
button pressed and the box
profile box can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
can be moved.
grippers. A Profile view will be opened with the profile of the
selected area (see page 603).
Create Ping View
Click on a location in the view and a Ping view will be opened with
the ping from the selected location (see page 595).
 If a Box or Profile view already exists and a Box or Profile view is

selected again, the new data will be opened in a new view.
The drawn box of the active Box or Profile view will be displayed in the
 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view. Click on the box and the box
is highlighted and the (side) grippers can be used to resize/move the
box.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
mode.

CUBE Layer ( )
view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed.
Number of Hypotheses
The CUBE model is displayed with colors, which will present the
number of hypotheses, with green for 1 hypothesis to red for the
maximum number of hypotheses available in the CUBE model.
Figure 17-102 CUBE model with the number of hypotheses as color

mode
Main Surface Strength

The CUBE model is displayed with colors which will present the
strength of each cell in the CUBE model, with green for a strength =

0 to red for a strength = 5 and grey for manually edit with a strength
of -1. Strength of 0 is good and a strength of 5 is bad.
Figure 17-103 CUBE model with the main surface strength as color mode
Depth
The main surface of the CUBE model will be displayed in the colors
of the active color table.
Figure 17-104 CUBE model with the depth as color mode
Hit Count
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors that will present the

number of hit counts per cell, with green for a hit count of 1 to red
for the maximum number of hit counts in the CUBE model.
Figure 17-105 CUBE model with the hit count as color mode
Uncertainty
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors which will present the
uncertainty (= a kind of standard deviation) per cell, with green for
the smallest uncertainty to red for the biggest uncertainty in the
CUBE model.
Figure 17-106 CUBE model with the uncertainty as color mode
Selected in Main Surface

The main surface of the CUBE model will be displayed in grey
colors. In a hypothesis surface, the data will be displayed in green

when it is selected in the main surface and in red when it is not
selected.
Figure 17-107 Hypothesis 1 surface of the CUBE model with the selected
data in main surface as color mode
CUBE Surface ( )
Different surfaces can be selected:
Main
The best surface as calculated in the CUBE model.
Hypothesis
The surface with one of the hypotheses of the CUBE model. Use
and to go through all the available hypotheses.
Lowest
The surface with the lowest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Highest
The surface with the highest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Most Hits
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis with the most hits
in the CUBE model.
Closest to Average
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis that is closest to
the average of all the hypotheses in the CUBE model.

Multibeam Layer from file ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics, Multiping sequence, Sonar head and
Detection. The different color modes help to analyze the multibeam
data. See page 525 for more information about the beam color mode.
The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes:
Laser Color
The laser scan data is shown with a brown/grey color.
Figure 17-108 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color
Laser Intensity
In the laser scan data the intensity of the laser scan data is logged.
This intensity can be used as color mode to display the laser scan
data in a grey scale.
With the items Start Brightness Ramp (SBR) and Brightness Ramp
Range (BRR) in the Properties of the view the brightness of the
intensity can be defined.
 From 0 – SBR:
The data is displayed with the intensity as received from the
laser scan.
 From SBR – (BRR+SBR):
laser scan plus an extra intensity value started at SBR with 0
and ends at BRR+SBR with 1. Between SBR and BRR+SBR it
will be linear interpolated. This means that the data further away
gets an extra intensity to make that data more clear in the view.

 From BRR onwards:
laser scan plus the extra intensity value 1.
Below two picture with different brightness settings are displayed.
The first has SBR=50 and BRR=50, while the second has 20 and
80. This means that in the second the extra brightness starts at
20m so more laser scan data get extra intensity what can be seen
that the data in the front is brighter.
Figure 17-109 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=50 and BRR=50

Figure 17-110 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=20 and BRR=80
Laser Color + Intensity
Figure 17-111 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color +
Intensity

Beam Color Mode
The laser scan data is shown with the color mode as selected in
the beam color mode.
Figure 17-112 Laser scan data with the Beam Color Mode Depth
Show Edit Circle ( )

Toggles the edit circle on/off.
Only Show Edit Circle Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the multibeam areas that are covered
by the edit circle or showing all the data.
Increase/Decrease Edit Circle Size ( , )
The radius of the edit circle can be increased and decreased.
The areas covered by the edit circle will be displayed in high
resolution.
When the Editing runs out of memory it tries to reduce the size of the
edit circle. When the edit circle reaches the minimal size it starts
rendering all areas in low resolution.
To increase the memory to solve this problem see the chapter Memory
Improvement on page 4.

This option is only active The multibeam data that is rejected by one or more of the checked
when the option Only multibeam filters in the list will be displayed in the view. Therefore, it
Show Valid Beams ( ) is will be possible to see what the impact is of one or more multibeam
off. filters on the data.
It is possible that a data point is rejected by several filters. The data
 point gets the color of the first filter in the list that rejects the point.
When this filter is unchecked the data point gets the color of the next
filter that rejects the point.
Ignore Filters ( )

polygon, which have to be bigger then the ignore filters area, and all
When there are sonar targets Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
available, they will be sonar target.
displayed in the editor. To add The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
sonar targets a grid model has Targets Layer, which will be created when the first sonar target is
to be added to the view. selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the editor, a context menu
Plan Views’ on page 439.
the editor, in other views and from the active sonar targets file. Along
with the sonar targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images
of the sonar targets will be deleted.
Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )

17.11 Numerics View
At the moment only one Numerics view is available in the Editing.
17.11.1 Numerics – Sonar Targets View
Figure 17-113 Numerics – Sonar Targets view
The Numerics – Sonar Targets view is the same view as is available in

the Acquisition. It is a view with a table where the information about the
created sonar targets is displayed.
The displayed sonar targets are stored in the sonar targets file as created
or selected in the Project Configuration (see page 77). The sonar targets
file name is displayed in the caption of the view; ‘Sonar Targets 4’ in the
example above.
Double click on a sonar target will open the Sonar Targets View with the
GeoTIFF image and the information which can be modified (see page
610).
The user can select in the Properties which columns have to be displayed
in the view. The Properties can be opened through the context menu.
In the context menu next to the Properties two other options are available;
delete the selected sonar target or delete all sonar targets. The delete
implement that the sonar target(s) will be deleted in the views and from
the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar target(s) the
corresponding GeoTIFF file(s) of the image of the sonar target(s) will be
deleted.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets View
on page 610.
17.12 Ping View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a ping profile can be
drawn with Create Ping View in the option Create Detail View… ( ).
The ping will be drawn in a separate Ping view.
 The ping as displayed in the Ping view is only motion compensated and
not geo-referenced.

Figure 17-114 Ping view with one ping
The ping that is displayed in the Ping view will be highlighted in the
Figure 17-115 Ping view with 5 pings
With the option 2D Side Front ( ) the standard 2D Ping view (Front
view) as shown above can be changed to a 2D Side view.

Figure 17-116 Side Ping view with 100 pings
When more pings are selected in the Ping view, then also more pings will
be highlighted in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see below).
Figure 17-117 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with 250 highlighted
pings which are displayed in the Ping view
The editing in the Ping view is similar as the editing in the other 3D views
(see page 515).

When the Ping view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
17.12.1 Ping Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Ping view.
2D View ( )
Toggles between a 3D view (Out) and the Ping view (In).
2D Side Front ( )
Toggles between a front view (Out) and a side view (In). This option is
only available in the 2D Ping view.
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Auto Zoom Extents.
The mouse wheel or the + and – key of the numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom In and Zoom Out.
Zoom Horizontal Functions ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the horizontal direction.
Use the Shift-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the horizontal direction.
Zoom Vertical Functions ( , )
Zoom In and Zoom Out in the vertical direction.
Use the Ctrl-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the vertical direction.
Pan ( ).
view.
Measure ( )
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
on/off.
Beam Color Mode ( )
color mode.

Number of Pings ( )
The number of pings in the view can be selected. The extra added
pings are the next pings in time from the selected ping.
off.
Ignore Filters ( )

Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
exported to a file with extension ASC .
Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )

17.13 Position Editing
The Position Editing – Standard view can show the selected position
computation graphically.
Figure 17-118 Position Editing – Standard
In the Position Editor by default the grid model as selected in the

Multibeam Area Editing view will be displayed in the grid model layer.
17.13.1 Position Editing – Standard Toolbar and

Context Menu
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
In and Zoom Out. Pan ( )
button.
Select All
Select all the data points of the active data layer.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the position editor.

Redraw
Redraw the data in the editor.
Measure ( )
Measure the distance between two selected points in the editor.
Save Snapshot
Save the data of the Position Editing – Standard view as a JPG or
BMP file.
When there are sonar Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
targets available they will sonar target.
be displayed in the editor. The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
To add or delete sonar Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
targets a grid model can be selected.
added to the Layer Control When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the editor a context menu
to make the area visible. becomes available for that sonar target. With a right mouse click on or
Plan Views’ on page 439.
the editor, in other views and from the active sonar targets file. Along
with the sonar targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images
of the sonar targets will be deleted.
Data Layer Control ( )
Opens the Data Layer Control window where only position data can be
added or modified.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window where very quickly position data can
be added with default settings.
Track Color Mode ( )
The tracks in the position editor can be presented in different colors:
By Layer
The tracks are colored as defined in the position data layers. See
Figure 17-118 above.
Gps Status
The tracks are colored with the color of their GPS status as is
displayed in the editor.

Figure 17-119 Position Editing – Standard with the tracks colored with
their GPS status
File Color
The tracks are colored with the color as is given in the databar.
on/on/off.
The settings of the grid model in the editor (see page 446).
Layer Control ( )
Overview of all used background and foreground layers. Also new
layers can be added to the list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the editor.
17.13.2 Selecting Position Data for Editing

When the Position Editing – Standard view is selected for the first time,
the primary position data source is already selected. A quick way to add

data is to click on , where a different position computation can be
selected with default settings.
Another way to select data is with . It opens the Data Layer Control
window with the options to add, edit and/or remove position data layers.
The properties of a data layer are accessible during adding a new data
layer or by selecting .
Multiple position data layers can be added to the editor, but only one layer
is active. A data layer becomes active by clicking on the data layer in the
info panel at the bottom of the editor. The red frame around the colored
square visualizes that the layer is active.
17.13.3 Dead Reckoning

During a survey it is possible that the position is lost due to bridges or
other obstacles. In the Acquisition in the position system the kalman
filtering can be used to predict the positions when the position is lost.
 A better method to fill the gaps in the position is by using the edit option
Fill Gap from the context menu in the Position Editor as is explained on
page 517.
17.14 Profile View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a profile can be drawn with
Create Profile View in the option Create Detail View… ( ). This profile
will be drawn in a separate Profile view. The different types of data
(multibeam, grid model and/or CUBE model) that are displayed in the
Multibeam Area Editing view will also be displayed in the Profile view.
It possible to have several Profile views opened at the same time. The
 drawn box from the active Profile view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see page 585).
Figure 17-120 Profile view with multibeam data and a grid model

The editing in the Profile view is similar as the editing in the other 3D
views (see page 515).
 The data in the Profile view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the Profile view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
17.14.1 Profile Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Profile view.
Define Profile ( )
A new profile box can be drawn in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view. The existing profile box will be deleted.
2D View ( )
Toggles between the 3D Box view (Out) and the Profile view (In). See
for a detailed explanation of the 3D Box view on page 517.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Auto Zoom Extents.
The mouse wheel or the + and – key of the numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom In and Zoom Out.
The Auto Zoom Extents is a switch on/off button. When on and the
profile is changed/moved in the Multibeam Area Editing all the data will
be shown in the 3D Box view. Will automatically switch off when zoom
in or zoom out (also with mouse wheel) is used.
Zoom Horizontal Functions ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the horizontal direction.
Use the Shift-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the horizontal direction.
Zoom Vertical Functions ( , )
Zoom In and Zoom Out in the vertical direction.
Use the Ctrl-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the vertical direction.
Pan ( ).
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
the key ‘o’. Only available in the 3D mode.
Measure ( )
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the

Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
mode.
CUBE Layer ( )
view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
586 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.
CUBE Surface ( )
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 589 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Multibeam Layer ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
color mode.

Increase/Decrease Point Size
off.
Ignore Filters ( )

Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
exported to a file with extension ASC.
Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )

17.15 Sonar
At the moment the Sonar is not an editor it is only a viewer for side scan
sonar data or for snippets data. For both types of data, a separate viewer
is available; the Sonar – Sidescan view and the Sonar – Snippets view.
Figure 17-121 Sonar – Sidescan view

Figure 17-122 Sonar – Snippets view
In both viewers, the data is moved to the left or right with the left or right
arrow key on the keyboard. Next to the zoom buttons ( and ) the
keys ‘+’ and ‘-’ on the numerics keyboard can be used to zoom in and out
in the view.
Alternatively, scroll Up and Down in the View with the mouse wheel. Hold
the ‘Shift’ key and use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out.
17.15.1 Sonar View Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Sonar views.
Auto-Recache ( )
Toggles the Automatic Recache on/off.
Automatic recaching of the snippets or side scan sonar data will be
done on attribute changes and on editing dependent data (like
 positioning data). There will be no re-caching when the multibeam data
is edited.
Pending Updates ( )
This button becomes active when the Auto-Recache is off and an
attribute change or editing of the data took place. Now the user can
 decide when the recache of the side scan sonar or snippets data is
started. Click on to start the recache.

numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view.
In and Zoom Out. Brightness ( , )
Increase (lighter) and Decrease (darker) the Threshold.
Contrast ( , )
Increase and Decrease the Gain.
TVG ( , )
Increase and Decrease the TVG (see page 478).
Auto Scaling ( )
Toggles between Auto Scaling Off (Out) and On (In) (see page 478).
Click on to activate the Lambert’s Law Corrected ( )
changes caused by the Toggles between a Lambert’s Law correction Off (Out) and On (In)
Lambert’s Law correction (see page 478).
on/off.
Ping Selection ( )
Select one of the four pings or all the pings to be displayed in the view.
Lines/Dots ( )
Toggles between Dot view (Out) and Line view (In).
Speed Correction ( )
Toggles between Speed Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see page
478).
Invert Colors ( )
Toggles between a black background (Out) and a white background
(In).
Click on to activate the Slant Range Correction ( )
changes caused by the Toggles between Slant Range Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see
slant range correction page 478).
on/off.
Save Snapshot ( )
Save the display as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
sonar target.
selected.
Sonar Views’ on page 479.
See the Sonar Targets view below for more information.
Layer Control ( )
removed. At the moment only the Active Sonar Targets Layer is
available in the Layers window.

Properties ( )
The above-mentioned settings in the view.
The color palette can be set on rust or gray.
 If the colors are inverted with

and are also inverted.
, the functions of the buttons ,
17.16 Sonar Targets View

The Sonar Targets view is a view that will be created for each sonar
target that is created or selected. The view is a type of plan view with as
extra a sonar target info table.
In the caption of the Sonar Targets view is visible in which view (Sonar –
Snippets view, Sonar – Sidescan view or Position Editor) the sonar target
is created or selected.
Figure 17-123 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
When in the Sonar – Snippets view or Sonar – Sidescan view a box is

drawn around a target (see page 609), a picture of that target will be
created as a GeoTIFF. Because this GeoTIFF is geo-referenced the
picture will have a different shape and orientation than the original box
drawn in the view.
When in the Position Editor a box a drawn (see page 601), a part of the
grid model around the drawn box will be used to generate the GeoTIFF of
the grid model. This picture is always north up filled with grid model data.
The Sonar target info displayed below the view can be modified by the
user. The items Name, Classification, Length, Width, Height and
Description can be set, the other items are fixed or are calculated when
the target is created.

Click on the field right of one of these items and enter the text or value.
For the Length, Width and Height the button ( ) in the toolbar of the
view can be used to do an exact measurement (see above). The
Classification can also be defined in the context menu of the sonar target;
see for more information the sonar targets options on page 479.
When the Editing is closed, After items are modified click on to save the modifications to the
a dialog pops up to ask to sonar target file as mentioned as first item in the table. The name of the
save the changes when sonar target file can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 77).
this is not done yet.
Click on to delete the sonar target from the sonar target file. A
sonar target can also be deleted with the option in the context menu of
the sonar target.
All collected sonar targets will be saved in the selected sonar targets file,
 which is available in the Sonar Targets Database of the Explorer (see

page 250). The corresponding GeoTIFF files are also stored in the Sonar
Targets Database of the Explorer.
At the moment a set of sonar targets consist of one or more sonar targets
 files and all the corresponding GeoTIFF files. Don’t forget to copy the
GeoTIFF files when a copy is made of the sonar targets. When no
GeoTIFF files are available no picture is available anymore.
17.16.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar Targets
view are:
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
used for the Zoom In and Pan ( )
Zoom Out. Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessel’s tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Figure 17-124 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view

Measure Object LWH ( )
This option is to measure the Length, Width and Height of the object in

the sonar target GeoTIFF as displayed in the view.
By default the option is set on Disabled, so no measurement can be
done. Select one of the options Length, Width or Height and the cursor
will change to a cross. With a mouse click the measurement can be
started, click again to stop the measurement. The measured distance
is entered in the table below the view. With a right mouse click the
options can be stopped (or use the option Disabled).
Layer Control ( )
The raster layer and grid layer are available in the Layer Control.
Properties ( )
In the Properties the background color can be modified.
17.17 Tide Station

In the Editing a Tide Station – Viewer and a Tide Station – Editor are
available. The editor is the same editor as discussed in the chapter
Editors on page 204. This editor has no relation with the selected file set
and no buttons in the Editing are valid for this editor.
17.17.1 Tide Station – Viewer
Figure 17-125 Tide Station – Viewer with two tide stations
The Tide Station – Viewer shows only the tide data that is used for the
data in the selected file set. If there is no tide data applied to the data in
the Editing this viewer will be empty.
It is possible to modify the tide data in the viewer, but the tide data will not
 be treated as PDS log data like all the other data in the Editing. Any
modification made in the viewer will modify the tide values files in the
Explorer (see page 275), but not the data in the other editors. If tide data
 is modified in the viewer or in the editor, use the option Tools > Apply Tide
to update the other data in the Editing.

17.18 Time-Based Editing
The Time-Based Editing can show any data from the data files against a
time scale.
In the Editing are three Time-Based Editing views available, the Time-
Based Editing – Standard view, the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view
and the Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph view.
17.18.1 Select Data for the Time-Based Editing

When the Time-Based Editing is started for the first time, there will be no
channel data in the editor.
A quick way to add data is to click on (Add Channel), where the
available channel data can be selected with default settings. Another way
to select data is with (Channel Manager). It opens the Channel
Manager with the options to add, edit and/or remove channel data. The
properties of a channel are accessible during adding new channel data or
by selecting . Click on item ‘Graph Y Item’ in the properties to
select the channel data for the editor.
The properties of the editor are accessible through the context menu. The
option Channel Partition allows the user to choose between overlaid or
stacked channels.
It is possible to add an unlimited number of channel data to the Time-
Based Editing, but only one channel is active. A channel becomes active
by clicking on the data or in the channel control of the editor. The red
frame around the value in the channel control visualizes the active
channel.
Editing is only possible in the active channel, but not all channel data is
editable. In case channel data is based on other channel data, then it
cannot be edited and ‘Not editable’ is written on the right side in the data.
See the Position Editor for more information about the editing (see page
517).

17.18.2 Time-Based Editing – Standard View
Figure 17-126 Time-Based Editing – Standard
Various sensor values are relevant against a time scale. For example,
data from a VRU shown in time shows where the VRU went wrong. When
at the same time a Position Editing – Standard view is viewed, it can be
shown where the wrong VRU data is located. This may help analyzing
data from the viewed sensors.
All data is logged in a time sequence. However, it is not always useful to
show logged data in time; for example, a shallow depth recording when
viewed in time indicates there was a shallow depth at some time during
the survey but not where the shoal is located.

17.18.3 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View
Figure 17-127 Time-Based Editing – Echogram view with 2 echo sounder

channels with graphical trace information
In this view, the echo sounder channel data with its graphical trace
information can be displayed.
When no color table is available for the graphical trace a default color
table will be generated when the channel data is loaded in the view. In the
Channel Properties in the context menu of the view a different color table
can be selected if necessary.
With the Add Echogram ( ) option only the echo sounder channels can
be selected and added to the Time-Based Editing.
The echo sounder data can be edited with a special option in the toolbar,
called digitizing ( ). See page 617 for an explanation of the digitizing.
17.18.4 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph

View
This Time-Based Editing view is specially made for one client. It will show,
next to the selected data (for this client the load information),
automatically the dredge statuses and the delays. These dredge statuses

and delays are selected in the Acquisition in the Manual Input – Dredge
Status view (see page 384).
Figure 17-128 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph
17.18.5 Time-Based Editing Toolbar and Context

Menu
Zoom Window ( )
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Selector ( )
Channel Partition ( )
If more than one line with data is displayed it is possible to display all
the data in one view (Overlayed) or each data line in a separate view
(Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For the view in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Free; all the channel data have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the channel data have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the channel
data.

Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side of the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager window to add, remove or edit one of the
channels.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select a new channel with default
settings.
Add Echogram ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select one of the echo sounder
channels with default settings for the view. This is only available in the
Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel which can be edited if the
data is editable.
Digitizing ( )
The cursor is changed to a cross to edit the echo sounder data. Next
to the standard edit mode (see page 496), two new methods are
available to move the data in the view when this option is active.
A line can be drawn by keeping the left mouse button in. When the left
The graphical trace data
cannot be moved in the mouse button is released, the echo sounder data will be moved to the
echogram. drawn line.
A different method is drawing a line by clicking with the left mouse
button on locations where the new data points should be. With the
right mouse button, the drawing will be stopped and the echo sounder
data will be moved.
This is only available in the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file. This is only available in
the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Generate Report ( )
A report with file information and the graph is generated. This is only in
the Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph view. When the option View
report is checked, the report is opened in the PDS Reporter. If not
checked the report is saved as PDF file in the Reports folder of the
project.

18 Create Model
18.1 Introduction
Create Model can be used to make a grid model or a TIN model from
different types of data files.
Figure 18-1 Create Model with a preview of a model
The Create Model can be started with Processing > Create Model from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar of the Control Center.
After reading the data files with an optional preview function the data can
be shown in a view. All the data or data inside a clipping polygon can be
converted into a grid model or a TIN model.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Create Model  619

18.1.1 Create Model Toolbar and Context Menu
Most of the functions in the context menu are the same as in the toolbar.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Measure ( )
Measure a distance between a selected point and the cursor.
Save Snapshot
An image of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw Polygon
Click with the left mouse button to draw a clipping polygon in the view.
Click with the right mouse button to close the polygon.
Save as Defaults
The settings of the Create Model window can be saved so the next
time this window is opened it will use the same settings.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window with the used background and foreground layers.
New layers can be added, existing layers can be removed or modified.
The Coverage Settings window will be opened where for the average
or hit count a color table can be selected which can be shown in the
view.
Also the sun illumination can be set for the model in plan view.
It is the same window as explained in the Plan Views (see page 446).
Properties ( )
The properties of the view; at the moment only the background color of
the view can be modified.
18.1.2 Model Preview Layer Properties

The model preview layer is one of the layers in the Layers window that is
always present. In the Model Preview Layer Properties window the
properties of the preview model shown in the view can be changed. The
properties can be opened with in the Layers Control window.
After changes are made and the user wants to use these properties
620  Create Model Teledyne PDS - User Manual

settings for all the preview models, select Save as Defaults from the
context menu in the Create Model to save the settings.
Figure 18-2 Model Preview Layer Properties window
Color Table Name

Select a color table for the data in the view.
Use Sun Illumination
When enabled it will use a sun illumination on the selected grid model
data. With Sun Azimuth and the Sun Elevation the location of the ‘sun’
can be defined and with Contrast the contrast in the grid model data
can be modified.
It is easier to use the option in the Coverage Settings ( ) to set the
sun illumination (see page 446).
Annotation Data Type
Select the data type that has to be annotated. With Font Name, Font
Size, Font Italic and Font Bold the font for the annotation can be
defined.
Show Data Boundaries
When Enabled, it will show a grid around all available data blocks.
PDS uses blocks of cells to build up a grid model.

18.2 Importing Data
Through the wizard different types of data files can be imported in the
Create Model. Click on to start the selection and the import of
the data files.
18.2.1 Selecting Data Files
Figure 18-3 Select the types of data files
Any combination of the supported data files is possible. Click on

and all the selected data files will be loaded, starting at the top of the list.
The following data files are supported:
ASCII Data
ASCII text files that contains XYZ data. The data items in the file
should be separated by a comma, a space or a tab. It is not allowed to
have a header or in between lines.
Binary Data
The supported binary files are ’64 bits double’ formatted files according
IEEE 754 or ‘IBM little Andian’ and should contain only XYZ data.
Caris HDCS Data
If the Caris HDCS program is installed on the local computer, PDS will
find automatically all the usable files. It is not possible to import data
without the Caris HDCS program installed, a Caris HDCS license
should be running on the local computer.
Grid Model
The PDS Grid Models.
TIN Model
The PDS TIN Models.
USGS Dem Data
The USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data files which are digital
representations of cartographic information in a raster form. DEMs
consist of a sampled array of elevations for a number of ground
positions at regularly spaced intervals. These digital data files are

produced by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) as part of the
National Mapping Program.
ESRI Grid Data
The ESRI format is a defined rectangle parallel to the X and Y grid.
Each cell in the rectangle will give a Z-value and for the empty cells a
‘No data value’ is specified.
PDS Log Data
Data from the PDS log data files.
For most of the data files the selection is in a standard file selection
window. Only for the PDS log data files and the Caris HDCS data files a
different window is used. The PDS log data files use the standard PDS
File Set Editor as import dialog (see page 493).
For selection of the Caris HDCS data a special window is opened to
select the lines to import. First select a project, from the project select a
vessel, a day and one or more (run)lines.
Figure 18-4 Select Caris HDCS data
18.2.2 Data File Parameters

If the data files are loaded, the next page in the Import XYZ Data window
is opened. On the left side are all the selected data files and the right side
can be different for each selected data file. Some additional parameters
or information can be or have to be defined. Click on each data file and
see if additional parameters have to be defined.
Figure 18-5 Additional information for data files
Additional parameters
If necessary a scale factor for the Z-value can be entered.

Coordinate type
Select the coordinate type used in the ASCII file.
Coordinate transformation
If the coordinate type is ‘Geographic’ a coordinate datum
transformation has to be selected. Only the datum transformation
which are compatible with the project coordinate system will be
displayed. This means that the local ellipsoid should be the same as in
the project coordinate system.
The geographical coordinates will be recalculated with the selected
datum transformation to grid coordinates.
The additional parameters dialog for the Grid Model and PDS log data are
different from the other data files (see below).
18.2.2.1 Grid Model
Figure 18-6 Grid model data type selection for the Grid Model
Select one of the available data types in the selected Grid Model for the
import of the grid model data.
18.2.2.2 PDS Log Data
Figure 18-7 Computation selection for PDS log files
Only from the first valid Select the sensor computation of the sensor that has to be imported.
logfile in the file set the Multiple selections can be made with the Ctrl-key.
computations will be
extracted and displayed as If the multibeam xyz computation of a RESON SeaBat 7K is selected two
option!! extra options will appears at the bottom of the data selection. From the
bathymetry data the Bathymetric data or the Backscatter data can be
used to create the model.
18.2.3 Preview
When all the data files are selected and the additional information for
each data file is entered the wizard can be closed by clicking on .
All the selected data will be loaded into the computer memory.
When Show preview is checked the loaded data will be shown in the
view. A coarse grid model is used as default to show the data.

18.3 Create Grid or TIN Model
Before the user creates a grid model or a TIN model a clipping polygon
can be selected to convert only the data inside the polygon. If the right
clipping polygon does not exist, it can be drawn in the view with the option
Draw Polygon from the context menu.
Select as type Grid model or TIN model and click on to start the
creation of the model. This may take some time, depending on the size of
the model.
18.3.1 Grid Model

For USGS Dem data the When a grid model is selected, PDS asks for a filename and the data
cell size will be calculated. types and the cell size for the grid model have to be set. When the
The cell size will depend conversion is finished the user has the option to view the grid model in the
on the density of the USGS grid model editor. For more detail about the grid model editor see chapter
Dem data.
‘Grid Model’ on page 627.
18.3.2 TIN Model

When a TIN model is selected, PDS asks for a filename and a Data
Reduction window is opened. This data reduction is called Dynamic
Gridding.
With dynamic gridding first a grid model is made with variable cell sizes.
The selected criteria are checked for the contents of each cell. For each
cell a mean XYZ is computed and these XYZ points will be used to build
the TIN model. This method gives a great reduction on the number of
triangles in a TIN model.
Figure 18-8 Data Reduction - dynamic gridding for a TIN model
Maximum depth difference per cell

Each dynamically made grid cell gets a maximum value for the
difference in highest/lowest values. When the different values are
above the given parameter, more cells are made.
Maximum cell area
The maximum size of each single cell. When the distances between
data points are larger than this area size, more cells are made.

Maximum standard deviation for the depth per cell
A check is done on the standard deviation of all depths in a cell. Is the
standard deviation larger than given, more cells are made.
More then one option can be selected. When no options are selected
dynamic gridding is not applied.
When the conversion is finished the user has the option to view the TIN
model in the TIN model viewer. For more information about the TIN model
viewer see chapter ‘TIN Model Viewer’ on page 671.

19 Grid Model
19.1 Introduction
A grid model is a digital representation of the earth’s surface. These kinds
of models are also called DTM’s or Digital Terrain Models. These models
are usually created with survey data; however other 3D data can also be
used. A model consists of a number of cells where each cell can contain
one or more data types. The cells of a grid model are always a square
with the sides parallel to the projection grid.
Teledyne PDS (PDS) uses grid models on various locations. In the
Acquisition a covered area is shown through a grid model. Off-line a
number of operations with a grid model are possible. Some of these
possibilities are listed below.
 In the Acquisition and Presentation, coverage charts for various
sensors.
 Quality control for sensor values.
 Interpolation of measured values over non reachable areas.
 Volume computations.
 Expand or update existing models with new survey data.
 Import and export of ASCII files.
 Correcting measurements.
 Visualization of measurements, in colors.
 Comparing grid models and creating differential models.
 Extracting profiles.
In the grid model editor next to the standard grid model a geoid model
grid model can be generated. This geoid model can be used in the
coordinate system to correct the satellite ellipsoid heights to the correct
 local heights (see page 95). Two different geoid model grid models can
be generated, one with the satellite ellipsoid coordinates and one with the
grid projection coordinates. See the Import page on page 648 to create a
geoid model grid model.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Grid Model  627

 From PDS version 3.6.0.7 onwards the grid model contains also an X and
Y offset for the Z Minimum and Z Maximum. This offset is from the center
of the cell. From now on it is possible to plot the Z Minimum and Z
 Maximum on the right location and not in the center of the cell. When
contours are generated with the Z Minimum or Z Maximum also the right
location is used and not the center of the cell. These locations are not
 visible for the user and are only used internally in the grid model.
Grid models from PDS version 3.6.0.6 or earlier can still be used but the Z
Minimum and Z Maximum will have no offset.
 The new grid models can be used in earlier versions but the offset for the
Z Minimum and Z maximum will not work.
19.2 Grid Model Editor
Figure 19-1 3D grid model in the Grid Model Editor
The grid model editor can be started with Processing > Grid Model Editor
from the menu bar or with from the toolbar of the Control Center.
With the grid model editor grid models can be created and edited. A
number of actions are available for model computations and editing.
Multiple models can be open in the editor simultaneously, but only one
model is active and editable. The models are managed in a Displays
window which can be opened with View > Displays. Close a model by
closing the window or with File > Close. It will only remove it from the
display, but the model is still available in the Displays window with its own
628  Grid Model Teledyne PDS - User Manual

settings. Is a model removed permanently from the Displays window, and
called back via File > Open, then all settings are back to the defaults.
It is advisable to make the list of grid models in the Displays window not
 too big. Each time when with from the toolbar in the Control Center
the grid model editor is opened all the grid models in the Displays window
will be opened. This can result in the fact that the grid model editor cannot
When the grid model editor
is opened from the
open or opens very slow. So remove the not used grid models from the
Explorer only the selected list in the Displays window. Better is to use the combo box in the top left
grid model will be opened. of the grid model editor to open one of the other available grid models.
With (2D) and (3D) in the toolbar of the grid model editor the view
of the active model can be set in 2D or 3D. In the 3D View the standard
3D view navigation can be used (see page 62).
There are different ways to create a grid model; during on-line logging,
with the option ‘Create Model’ (see chapter ‘Create Model’ on page 619
for more information) or with the create or import option in the grid model
editor.
19.2.1 Grid Model View Toolbar and Context

Menu
This is list with the options in the toolbar of the 2D or 3D view. Most of the
functions in the context menu are the same as shown in the toolbar.
Hide Pane ( )
The left pane of the grid model editor can be switched on\off.
Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the 2D or 3D view.
Zoom Window ( )
Zoom Window in the 2D view; draw a rectangle to zoom in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Show all the data in the 2D or 3D view.
Zoom Previous ( )
Show the data from the previous zoom situation in the 2D view.
Show Spotlight ( )
The light intension does Toggles the spotlight window on/off in the 3D view. It is also possible
not work on the multibeam to toggle with the keys ‘Shift O’.
data. With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 19-2 Spotlight window
Pan ( )

Measure ( )
Measure a distance between a selected point and the cursor.
Save Snapshot ( )
An image of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw a box around an area in the view that has to be saved as a sonar
target. The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active
Sonar Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target
is selected. When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a
context menu becomes available for that sonar target. With a right
mouse click on or in the symbol gives some extra options. See the
Sonar Targets view on page 466 for more information.
Create Sonar Contact ( )
Click in the view to create for that location a sonar contact. The sonar
contacts are stored in the same branch and files as the sonar targets.
Save as GeoTIFF
An image of the view can be saved as a geo-referenced TIFF file, only
in the 2D view. The file is compressed with the LZW compression. The
sun illumination setting will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the 2D view with the mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
In the 2D view a route or clipping polygon can be edited. See for an
explanation of the edit mode the chapter about the user maps on page
440.
Draw Profile
Draw a track guidance route in the 2D view. From this route a profile
will be extracted and shown in a separate view.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the 2D view.
Draw Polygon
A clipping polygon can be drawn in the 2D or 3D view.
It is possible to draw more clipping polygons. If an existing name is
used the existing polygon will be removed by the new one.
Save as Defaults
Save the settings of the 2D view. The next time the grid model editor is
opened the same settings will be used.
Create Detail View ( )
Select in the 3D view the type of view that has to be created; a Box
view or a Profile view.
Create Box View
Click on a location in the view and draw a line to create a box. The
Click in the view and move
box width can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
the cursor in the view over
the box, the box will be grippers. A 3D Box view will be opened with a 3D view of the
highlighted and the cursor selected area (see 517).
will change to a hand. Create Profile View
Keep the left mouse button Click on a location in the view and draw a line. The width of the
pressed and the box can
profile box can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
be moved.
grippers. A Profile view will be opened with the profile of the
selected area (see 603).
Grid Axis Layer ( )

The color table for the Hit Show Color Table ( )
Count and Z Standard Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
Deviation will always be a on/off.
default color table
generated by PDS. For the Grid Model Color Mode ( )
Z values the color table In the view the different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
can be selected in the if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Coverage Settings. Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
In the 2D view the Coverage Settings window will be opened where a
color table can be selected for the Z values as shown in the view.
There is an option to show the grid model or the difference with
another grid model.
Also the sun illumination can be set for the grid model, not for the
difference model.
It is the same window as explained in the Plan View (see page 446),
except there is no Color Z Values options. For a grid model the Z value
can only be relative to Chart Datum.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window with all the background and foreground layers that
are selected for the grid model editor. New layers can be added,
existing layers can be removed or modified.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view.
19.3 Actions
The different actions on the grid model data are grouped and located
under one of the tabs in the left pane.
 Create (see below)
 Info (see page 636)
 Edit (see page 637)
 Filter (see page 641)
 Update (see page 643)
 Export (see page 644)
 Import (see page 647)
 Operations (see page 649)
 Interpolate (see page 659)
19.3.1 Create Page

Click on above the tabs in the left pane of the grid model editor to
open the Create tab. Also with the menu option File > New in the grid
model editor the Create tab can be opened to create a new grid model.
 By selecting an existing grid model in the combo box above the Create
tab the other tabs become available again.

Figure 19-3 Create page to create a grid model
In the Create page data can be selected to create a grid model.

Data selection
To create a grid model as formats PDS log data or other formats can
be used.
PDS log data
Select this option when a grid model has to be created from only
PDS log data.
PDS file set
Select a file set with PDS log data file(s).
Click on to open the File Set Editor (see page 493) to select
or create a file set or open the combo box next to it to select one
of the existing file sets.
PDS data type
PDS will check in the selected file set which data types are
available to create a grid model.
Click on the combo box and select one of the available data
types for the creation of the grid model.

Computation selection
In a tree the computation(s) of the selected data type is/are
displayed.
When only one computation is available in the file set then PDS
will automatically select this computation and the tree will be
grayed out.
When more than one computation is available then the tree is
accessible and the user has to select which computation has to
be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter ‘Create Model’ on page 622. Run through
this dialog and the data will be selected for the grid model.
No Data
Select to create an empty model.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model
select a clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the
context menu. Only the selected data inside the clipping polygon will
be used to create a grid model. When no clipping polygon is selected
all the selected data in the files or from the data selection will be used.
Model definition
Before the grid model can be created the grid model has to be defined.
Grid model type
In the combo box the available grid model types will be available. If
it is only one type then the box is grayed out.
The types that are available depend on the selected data; f.i.
Multibeam data gives as grid model type <Generic> and
Backscatter Grid Model while Sidescan data gives only Backscatter
Grid Model.
Cell size
Specify the cell size used for the new grid model.
Check the option 10% of depth for PDS to calculate the cell size.
This cell size will depend on the average water depth in the data.
Cell data
Check which cell data types have to be created in the grid model.
The cell data types that are grayed out are the minimum
requirement for creating a grid model.
It is possible to select the following cell data:
 Hit count
Number of hits.
 Z average
∑ (Z values) / hit count.
 Z standard deviation
The standard deviation of the Z cell values.
 Z Minimum (Deepest)
The minimum Z (deepest) of the cell z values.
 Z Maximum (Highest)
The maximum Z (highest) of the cell Z values.
 Time
Time of observations.

 Total Vert. Uncertainty Average
The uncertainty as determined by the TPE (Total
Propagation Error) of the Z. See next note.
 Total Hor. Uncertainty Average
The uncertainty as determined by the TPE (Total
Propagation Error) of the X,Y See next note.
 Backscatter
Backscatter (intensity) data.
Click on to create the grid model, give a new name for the grid
model and the data will be imported.
NOTE: The Total Vert Uncertainty (TVU) average and Total Hor
Uncertainty (THU) average are identical to the online computed TPE
vertical and TPE Horizontal. These values are displayed online in the
‘Multibeam QC – Raw profile+Total Propagation Error’ view, or offline
from the TPE report generated from the Processing Tools>Generate TPE
Results file. The grid model shows the average TVU and THU per cell.
The online TPU is always calculated using the CUBE implementation;
horizontal error without the fore-aft beamwidth error of the multibeam. The
grid model shows the online TPU.
In the next example one beam of a ping is displayed in a TVU average
cell. The values are identical with the TPE report and the online value.
See Figure 19-4.

Figure 19-4 TPE Online – Offline – Grid model

19.3.2 Info Page
In the Info page the general information of the grid model is available.
After a double click on a cell in the grid model the information about that
selected cell is available.
A report can be generated with all the available information of the grid
model.
Figure 19-5 Info page with information of the grid model
Grid model
It shows the cell size and the statistical information of the grid model.
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model.
Used cells
Total number of cells in use.
Used area
Number of used cells multiplies by the surface of a cell gives the
total used area.
Empty area
Area of cells without data. This are the empty cells in the grid
model rectangular around the data.
Z min (deepest)
Deepest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z max (highest)
Highest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.

Z average
It is ∑ (Hit count x Z average) / Total hit count.
Hit count and Z average are per cell. This means that for each data
point in a cell the Z average of that cell is added to the total.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when ‘Z Average’
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = √ (∑(all cells std²) / Number of used
cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all values of the data type ‘Hit count’. This is the number of
data points used in the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type ‘Time’. Only when the data
type ‘Time’ exist in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click to get the cell info only for
the data inside the clipping polygon.
Grid model report
Two different types of reports of the grid model are available. Select
one of the reports and click to generate and view the report
in the PDS Reporter. Select in the PDS Reporter the File > Save as…
to save the report as a PDF file.
GridModelReport(dom)
A grid model report that gives all the information about the grid
model in the grid model editor.
SurveyLine(dom)
A grid model – survey lines relationship report that gives only the
survey lines used with the grid model in the grid model editor.
19.3.3 Edit Page
 In the Edit page, options are available to delete and interpolate one or
more cells in the grid model.
In Edit mode in the 3D mode for editing the left mouse button has to be
 used and for moving around in the view the mouse wheel can be used.
See also the navigation in 3D views on page 62.

Figure 19-6 Edit page to edit the grid model data
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
4. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
5. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
6. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.
Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is

valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.
Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be

interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated with a circular interpolation.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
Cell
Click on a cell in the view to display a pop-up dialog with the
information of the cell. Only the data types that are present in the grid
model will be displayed.
Figure 19-7 Edit Cell dialog
Click on a data value field to edit the value. Click to set the
new value. Click to clear/delete the data in the cell.
Make Empty
By selecting a grid model filter all data types in a cell can be made
empty.
With a new grid model filter can be made. The grid model
filter editor will be opened (see below). With the selected grid
model filter can be modified in the grid model filter editor.
In the grid model filter editor two criteria can be defined for the grid
model filter. Both criteria must be valid to clear a cell. Select None for
a criterion to make it ‘not used’.
Figure 19-8 Grid model filter
Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon, and set the condition to either Inside or
Outside.
The criterion that a grid cell is inside or outside the clipping
polygon is when the center point of the grid cell is inside or
outside.

Data type
Select the data type, a condition operand and a comparing
value. The operand can be > (bigger) or <= (smaller or equal).
After the filter is defined check the option Display to see which cells
meets the criteria of the filter. In the 2D view a red diagonal line is
drawn in each cell that meets the criteria and in the 3D view the
cells that meets the criteria are red and all the other cells are green.
Show Preview.
Tick the checkbox to see which grid model cells will be made
empty with the selected grid model filter.
 Click on to make the cells empty which match with the criteria in
the filter. When the user confirm the process, it is not reversible!!
With the undo and redo functions ( and ) above the left pane of the
grid model editor the deleted data can be undone and redone if
necessary.
When one of the edit options is selected the Edit tab gets a red box as

identification ( ) that the editor is in edit mode. When switch
over to a different tab the edit mode is not active anymore, but the edit
status is stored. Switch back to the edit tab the red box is displayed again
and the edit status is recovered.
Switch the edit mode off by clicking with the right mouse button in the
view, the cursor will change back to an arrow. Off course the edit mode
can also be switched off in the 3D Edit page by selecting None.

19.3.4 Filter Page
In the Filter page spikes can be removed from the grid model and the
removed cells will be interpolated using the cells around the spikes.
Figure 19-9 Filter page to remove spikes
Ignore Area Options

Select clipping polygons which cover areas of the gird model that
ignored when PDS is searching for spikes. This can be used to ignore
wrecks from the spike detection.
Preview Options
Check the option Show Preview when the found spikes will be shown
in the grid model. If unchecked the found spikes will immediately be
removed so no visual check can be done.
There are two options to show the detected spikes in the grid model;
Red on Green and User color.
Red on Green shows the spikes in red and the rest of the grid model in
green.
User color shows the spikes in the color as defined in the Properties
(Show Preview Color in the Grid Model Edit Layer) and the rest of the
grid model in the colors of the active color table.

Figure 19-10 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model’. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The ‘Find Spikes’ button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected, or when in a selected area the threshold is
changed.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The ‘Find & Remove Spikes’ button is only available when the option
Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is

possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).

19.3.5 Update Page
In the Update page different actions are possible to update the grid
model.
The different update actions in this page are:
 Update with Grid Model (see below)
 Update with 3D Model (see page 644)
Both actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
clipping polygon selection.
Figure 19-11 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation
Clipping polygon
A clipping polygon is not required. If a clipping polygon is not available
it should be made first, this can be done with the option Draw Polygon
in the context menu.
19.3.5.1 Update with Grid Model
Figure 19-12 Update with a different grid model
The grid model will be updated with new data from a different grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place inside the
polygon. The result of the update depends on the method:
Replace
The old data will be replaced with new data. This is only in the cells
where new data is available.
Combine
The values of the data types are combined. A new ‘Z Average’ is
computed with the updated ‘Hit Count’, which is the sum of the old and
new hit count. The data type ‘Time’ will be the latest time.
Minimum Z average
The existing ‘Z Average’ is replaced with the deepest ‘Z Average’ of
the two grid models.
Maximum Z average
The existing ‘Z Average’ is replaced with the highest ‘Z Average’ of the
two grid models.

Add Z
The ‘Z Average’ is added to the existing ‘Z Average’.
Subtract Z
The ‘Z Average’ is subtracted from the existing ‘Z Average’.
Click on to start the update of the grid model.
19.3.5.2 Update with 3D Model
Figure 19-13 Update with a 3D model
The data in the grid model will be replaced with the data from the 3D
model. This update is only in the cells where data from the 3D model is
available. If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place only
inside the polygon.
19.3.6 Export Page

In the Export page different actions are available to export the grid model
data.
The different export actions in this page are:
 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid (see page 645)
 Export to OpenGIS (see page 645)
 Export to GeoTIFF (see page 646)
 Generate Update Package (see page 646)
All these actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
data type and the clipping polygon selection.
Figure 19-14 Data type and clipping polygon selection in the Export page
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the export.
Clipping polygon

19.3.6.1 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid
Figure 19-15 Export to ASCII ESRI grid
This function exports the grid model data to an ESRI text file. The ESRI
format needs a rectangle parallel to the X and Y grid. If no clipping
polygon is selected PDS will generate a rectangle around the data. If a
clipping polygon is selected PDS will generate a rectangle around the
polygon.
Each cell in the rectangle will give a Z-value, where for the filled cells the
selected data type will be used and for the empty cells a ‘No data value’
can be specified. The cells outside a selected clipping polygon will be
treated as empty cells. The number of decimals for every Z-value can be
specified.
Click on to start the export of the grid model data.
19.3.6.2 Export to OpenGIS
Figure 19-16 Export to OpenGIS
This function exports the grid model data to a KML or a KMZ file. Both
these files can be opened in an OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth (see
also page 247 in the ‘Project’ branch in the ‘Other’ tab page of the
Explorer).
The KML file contains the X and Y which are converted to WGS’84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS’84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The Z
value is the value of the selected data type. The KML file gives a point
cloud with Z values.
The KMZ file contains a compressed GeoTIFF file of the grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the export is only from the data inside the
polygon.
Click on to export the X,Y and Z to a KML file and click on
to export the image of the grid model to a KMZ file.

19.3.6.3 Export to GeoTIFF
Figure 19-17 Export to GeoTIFF
The data from a standard grid model, a side scan model or a snippets
model can be exported to a compressed GeoTIFF file. The GeoTIFF file
is compressed with the LZW compression. The sun illumination setting
will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
This file can be draped over a grid model in the 3D views of PDS by
adding a 3D Draping Layer to that view.
Check the option View in 3D, select a grid model that will be used for the
draping and after the grid model is exported the 3D grid model editor will
open with the selected grid model and the GeoTIFF file draped over it.
Select one of the available data types from the grid model. This data type
will be displayed in the GeoTIFF file.
Click on to start the export of the grid model data.
19.3.6.4 Generate Update Package
Figure 19-18 Update package
An ASCII file will be generated containing the cells of the grid model
which are different from the cells of the selected original grid model. If
only a part of the grid model has to be generated a clipping polygon can
be used.
The ASCII file will contain XYZ data of the following cells.
 Cells with data that is not present in the original grid model.
 Cells with a different value than the value in the original grid model.
 Empty cells which have a value in the original grid model. Instead of a
Z value a code is generated.
This update package can be imported in the Acquisition to update the
active grid model. This can be done with Tools > Import Grid Model
Update… (see 313).

19.3.7 Import Page
Figure 19-19 Import page to import data in a grid model
In the import page data can be selected to import in an existing grid

model.
Data selection
The formats to import data in a grid model are PDS log data or other
formats.
PDS log data
Select this option when PDS log data has to be imported.
PDS file set
Select a file set with PDS log data file(s).
Click on to open the File Set Editor (see page 493) to select
or create a file set or open the combo box next to it to select one
of the existing file sets.
PDS data type
PDS will check in the selected file set which data types are
available and compare this with the data types in the grid model.
If one of the available data types are present in the grid model
then this will be entered in the combo box. When only one data
type is present then PDS will automatically select this data type.
When more data types are possible then the user has to select
the right one in the combo box.
Computation selection
In a tree the computation(s) from the selected data type is/are
displayed.
When only one computation of the selected data type is
available in the file set then PDS will automatically select this
computation and the tree will be grayed out.
When more than one computation is available then the tree is
accessible and the user has to select which computation has to

be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter ‘Create model’ See ‘Create Model’ on
page 622. For more information about the other data formats.
Run through the dialog and the data will be selected for the import.
Add ASCII Data
Press the Add ASCII Data… button to import an ASCII data file.
If the ASCII file is selected a dialog opens.
Figure 19-20 ASCII Import wizard button
Set the Z scale factor when applicable and select the coordinate
type. Press the ASCII Import button to import the ASCII file using
the ASCII import wizard. Refer to the ‘ASCII import Configuration
branchh’ of the PDS Explorer’s ‘Advanced’ tab page’s ‘Project
Common’ branch on page 276; for a description of the ASCII import
wizard.
Geoide Grid Model
If the grid model in the editor is a geoid model grid model, geoidal
data can be imported through an ASCII file. The import data in the
geoid model grid model should be an ASCII file with longitude,
latitude and geoidal separation (satellite coordinates) or with
easting, northing and geoidal separation (grid coordinates).
Geoid model grid model (satellite coordinates):
For the geoid model grid model (satellite coordinates) the ASCII file
If the geoid model grid should contain for the X and Y the longitude and latitude in WGS’84
model (satellite coordinates) coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation.
is created, the cell size The longitude and latitude are in degrees and decimal degrees.
should be defined in The X and Y in the grid model are in degrees and not in meters.
degrees (for example 0.01 Press the ASCII Import wizard button to retrieve the data from the
or 0.001). file. It is possible to define the data separators and column names
with the ASCII import wizard. (See page 276.)
Geoid model grid model (grid coordinates):

For the geoid model grid model (grid coordinates) the ASCII file
should contain for the X and Y the easting and northing in
projection coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation. The
easting and northing are in meters. Press the ASCII Import wizard
button (See Figure 19-20) to retrieve the data from the file. It is
possible to define the data separators and column names with the
ASCII import wizard. (See page 276.)
The geoid model grid model should be completely filled between all
 the imported points. So between the points the empty cells has to
be interpolated.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model select a
clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the context menu. Only
the selected data inside the clipping polygon will be used to create a grid model.
When no clipping polygon is selected all the selected data in the files or from the
data selection will be used.
Click on to add the selected data to the grid model.
19.3.8 Operations Page

In the Operations page all miscellaneous actions that cannot be placed in
one of the other pages are available.
The different actions in this page are:
 Generate Color Table (see below)
 Apply Z Corrections (see page 651)
 Set/Clear Value (see page 651)
 Create Resampled Model (see page 652)
 Create Difference Model (see page 652)
 Compute Volumes (see page 654)
 Extract Profiles (see page 657)
Click on to select one of the actions.

19.3.8.1 Generate Color Table
Figure 19-21 Generate a color table for the grid model
 This method regenerates an existing color table where the maximum and
minimum values are taken from the grid model.
Generate color table

Select an existing color table that has to be regenerated.
With the selected color table can be edited in the standard

color table generator. See page 268 for more information on the
color table generator.
Data Type
Select one of the existing data types in the grid model. The maximum
and minimum values of the selected data type will be used as
maximum and minimum in the color table.
Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon if the color table has to be regenerated from
the maximum and minimum value inside the clipping polygon.
Colors
Enter the number of colors that have to be used in the color table.
Selecting a larger number of colors makes the color transition
smoother.
Range
The table can be made in colors with Hues or in shades of grey with
Greys.
Reversed order
The color for the maximum value is always red and for the minimum
blue. Check Reversed order to interchange the colors of the maximum
and minimum values.
Click on to regenerate the color table.

19.3.8.2 Apply Z Corrections
Figure 19-22 Apply Z corrections to the grid model
Apply a correction to a grid model means that the existing data types (‘Z
Average’, ‘Z Minimum’ and ‘Z Maximum’) are corrected following the
equation:
New value data type = (Old value data type) x (Factor) + (Offset)
Change the depths to heights or vice versa by setting the factor to ‘-1’ and
the offset to ‘0’.
Click on to apply the Z correction to the grid model.
19.3.8.3 Set/Clear Value
Figure 19-23 Set/Clear values of the grid model
For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be set to the value as entered.
For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be deleted.

19.3.8.4 Create Resampled Model
Figure 19-24 Create a resampled model
This option is to create a grid model with a difference cell size from the
active grid model by resampling the data in the grid model.
The resampling will be done for all the data types available in the active
grid model. Select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model
a new grid model with a different cell size has to be created.
Click on , select an existing grid model or give a new name for
the resampled grid model and the model will be created.
19.3.8.5 Create Difference Model
Figure 19-25 Create a difference model
This option is to create a difference model from the active model and a
reference model by the following equation:
Difference model= (Active model) – (Fixed level)

or
Difference model= (Active model) – [(Reference model) + (Offset)]
Select the data type for which a difference model has to be calculated and
select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model a difference
model has to be created.
Reference
As the reference level two options are possible.
Fixed level
This option generates a temporary grid model with a depth/height
as is entered. The grid model will be generated around the active
model.
Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset to the reference
model can be entered.
For a good comparison the Report type
reference model needs to Select the option IHO PDF Report when a report has to be generated
be a reliable grid model of in which both the grid models are compared according the IHO orders.
the seabed and not a fixed In this report for each IHO order the numbers of points above and
level or 3D design model.
below the IHO error limits are calculated and displayed.
The report will be opened in the PDS Reporter. Select in the PDS
Reporter the File > Save as… to save the report as a PDF file in the
‘Reports’ folder.
Select the option None if no report has to be generated.
Click on , select an existing grid model or give a new name for

the difference model and the difference model will be created.

19.3.8.6 Compute Volumes
The following equation is used to compute a volume:

Volume of one cell = (cell size)² x [(data type value) – (reference value)]
Multiple clipping polygons can be selected and for each polygon the
volumes will be computed. If a clipping polygon goes through a cell only
the area of the cell inside the polygon will be used to calculate the
volume. If no clipping polygon is selected a volume for the complete grid
model will be computed.
Keep the Ctrl key pressed to select multiple lines or use the Shift key to
select a block of lines. Select for this multiple selections the name of the
polygon and at the end of the selection check one of the checkboxes to
select all the selected polygons.
Check the checkbox on top of the tree to select all clipping polygons.
Reference
As the first reference level two options are possible.
Fixed level
This option generates a temporary grid model with a depth/height

as is entered. The grid model will be generated around the active
model.
Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset can be entered to the
reference model.
Second reference
Next to the first reference level a second one can be selected. Select
one of the options how to combine both reference levels or not.
None
No second reference level is used.
Highest
For each grid model cell the highest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
Lowest
For each grid model cell the lowest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
When Highest or Lowest is selected, select the model type and the
filename for the grid model or 3D model.
Report type
After the volume computation a report can be generated.
None
No report will be generated, only a volume computation results window
will be opened (see below).
PDF report
One report will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon a
separate result. The report will be opened in the PDS Reporter. Select
in the PDS Reporter the File > Save as… to save the report as a PDF
file.
CSV report
A CSV file will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon
the computed volumes.
Click on to start the computation. If a PDF or CSV report is
selected first the Create Report dialog will be opened.
Figure 19-26 Create Report dialog (left for the PDF report and right for the CSV
report)

Report
Enter a name that will be used in the header of the report.
View report
If checked, the PDF report opens in the PDS Reporter after the
The report will be saved as volume computation is finished. With File > Save as… in the PDS
a PDF file in the folder
Reporter the report can be saved.
‘Reports’ in the Projects
folder. If checked, the CSV report will be opened in for instance Microsoft
Excel.
If Unchecked, the report will be saved with a default filename.
Images
For the PDF report images of the result and the model can be added
to the report.
Create images
Check the option if in the PDF report images of the result and the
model has to be displayed.
The width and height of the images can be defined in number of
pixels.
Difference color table
Select a color table to display an image of the difference model with
the selected color table.
Click on to start the computation. After the computation is
finished the volume computation results window will be opened. It will only
be opened when no report is created. If a report is created and the option
View report is checked the report will be opened.
Figure 19-27 Volume Computation Results
The parameters in the volume computation results are:

Clipping polygon
The clipping polygon used for the volume computation; only displayed
when a clipping polygon is selected.
Clipping polygon area
The area covered by the selected clipping polygon, only displayed
when a clipping polygon is selected.
Volume above
The total volume above the reference level(s).
Volume below
The total volume below the reference level(s).
Volume difference
The volume above minus the volume below.

Area above
The area above the reference level(s).
Area below
The area below the reference level(s).
Area without data
The area where reference data is available but in the grid model no
data of the selected data type is present.
Area without ref
The area where no reference data is available.
Average layer thickness
The thickness of the volume difference over the area above and area
below together.
19.3.8.7 Extract Profiles
Figure 19-28 Extract profiles
Profiles will be extracted from the grid model over the selected runlines.
Data type
Select the data type of the grid model that will be used for the for the
profiles.
Keep Ctrl pressed to select Runlines
multiple lines or use Shift Select the runline file for the profile calculations. Select the lines of the
to select a block of lines. runline over which the profiles have to be extracted.
Use section
Check this option when a profile have to be extracted over a part of

the runline. Enter the start and end point on the runline between
where the profile has to be extracted.
Average profile
If the option Adjacent lines is checked then for each point in the profile
an average is calculated using the points with the same distance on
the adjacent line(s). The user has to specify how much adjacent lines
on both sides are used to calculate the average value for a point in the
profile. This only works if the runline has adjacent lines.
Step size
If the option User defined is not checked then the profiles are
calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the runline. If
the option is checked then the user has to specify a step size and for
each point on the line a weighted mean is calculated using the four
nearby grid cells.
Click on and a window will be opened where the destination has
to be specified.
Figure 19-29 Destination for the extracted profiles
Multiple displays
Each selected runline gets its own profile view with in the title bar the
name of the runline.
Single display
All the profiles of the selected runlines appear in one profile view, each
one with a different color.
PDS Log Data file
For each runline a PDS log data file will be create in the log data
directory.
ASCII file
All the profiles of the selected runlines are saved in one text file. For
each profile the first line has the name of the runline followed by XYZ
data and the distance along the runline.
At the bottom some extra information can be added to the file; the
Mean, the Minimum, the Maximum and/or Standard deviation of the Z-
value.
Another way to extract a profile from a grid model is with the option Draw
Profile in the context menu of the 2D view or the toolbar option Create
Detail View > Create Profile View ( ) in the 3D view.

19.3.9 Interpolate Page
In the Interpolate page the different types of interpolation, which are
possible with the grid model data, are available.
The different interpolation actions in this page are:
 Clean Interpolated (see below)
 Interpolate Circular (see page 659)
 Interpolate Triangular (see page 660)
 Interpolate Directional (see page 659)
 Interpolate Singlebeam (see page 661)
All these actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
data type and the clipping polygon selection.
Figure 19-30 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the interpolation.
Clipping polygon
19.3.9.1 Clean Interpolated

All the interpolated data will be removed from the grid model. This will be
done for the selected data type and inside a clipping polygon (clipping
polygon is not required).
The value of the hit count in an interpolated cell is zero. So by searching
for hit count is zero, the interpolated cells can be distinguished from
original cells. This way it is possible to clean (= make empty) interpolated
cells and revert to the original data.
Click on to start the cleaning of the interpolated cells.
19.3.9.2 Interpolate Circular
Figure 19-31 Interpolate circular
The circular interpolation is usually used for small gaps in the data. These
small gaps can be caused for example by the outer beams of a multibeam
survey.
Max. gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid.

The interpolation routine search for every empty cell in the clipping
polygon area or in the complete grid model. It will check if original data is
available within a ‘Max gap’ distance, and if so, it fills the empty cell with a
weighted mean of the original data.
Depending on the size of the interpolation area and the power of the
 computer, this method can take considerable time. The best way to use
this option is when the gaps are small and there are lots of filled cells, like
multibeam data.
Click on to start the circular interpolation.
19.3.9.3 Interpolate Triangular
Figure 19-32 Interpolate triangular
The triangular interpolation is usually used for medium gaps in the data.
Max.gap
The interpolation routine takes three steps:
1. Find the extents of the data.
2. Create a TIN model.
3. Interpolate in the triangles of the TIN model.
Click on to start the triangular interpolation.
19.3.9.4 Interpolate Directional
Figure 19-33 Interpolate directional
The directional interpolation is usually used for big gaps in the data.
These big gaps can be caused for example by sailing along runlines with
a single beam echo sounder.
Max.gap
Route
A route has to be selected or made. A quick way to make a route is
with the option Draw Route in the context menu of the 2D view.
Interpolation takes place in the direction of the route. Bends in the
route are allowed.
Perpendicular
Check this option to set the interpolation direction to across the
route.
Click on to start the directional interpolation.

19.3.9.5 Interpolate Singlebeam
Figure 19-34 Interpolate singlebeam
The singlebeam interpolation is special made for the interpolation of the

single beam data. It will interpolate in the along and across direction of
the runlines both with a different maximum gap interval.
Max.gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid. The
along gap is along the selected route and across is across the
selected route.
Route
A route has to be selected or made. A quick way to make a route is
with the option Draw Route in the context menu of the 2D view. For the
best result the route must be longitudinal with the runlines. Bends in
the route are allowed.
Click on to start the singlebeam interpolation.
19.3.10 Port Export

With a correct dongle license installed the Port Export becomes available
in the grid model editor. The Port Export is initially developed for the PDS
Port Entrance Management Application
Port Export will provide the means to distribute survey data to users.

Figure 19-35 Port Export
See Figure 19-35 there are six ‘options’ tabs defined. By default these
tabs are named as:
 PES Options
 Exp1 Options
 Exp 2 Options
 Gis Options
 Brabo Options
 Dredge Options
All these tabs have the same functionality. The default names are as
shown above since the port export function was developed for the PDS
Port Entrance Simulation application as currently used by the port of
Antwerp. However the names of these six ‘Options’ tabs could be
defined/changed by the user.
As there are six tabs it also means six different export definitions could be
made. See section ‘options tabs’ on page 664 for a description of the
‘Options’ tabs.
Besides the ‘Options’ tabs there is also a ‘Main Grid Model’ tab. A main
grid model which could be different as the current grid model could be
selected in this tab. See section ‘Main Grid Model tab’ below for a
description.
Every options tab has an indication led which will be green if a data
selection type is made in the associated tab. The LED is red colored if no
selection is made to export files or the export is not enabled.

Figure 19-36 Red indication led of ‘Dredge Options’ tab.
Press the ‘Start Export’ button to export the selected survey

data to the destination folders as defined in the tabs. (See the following
sections)
19.3.10.1 Main Grid Model tab

Click at ‘Main Grid Model’ to have the context displayed.
Figure 19-37 Main Grid Model tab
The following table summarizes the options to setup the Main Grid Model.
Click at and browse to the source folder of
the Main grid model and select the required
main DTM file.
When the checkbox is ticked the above
selected Main Grid Model will be
updated/merged first with a selected survey
grid model before export. This grid model is
selectable in the grid model editor.

Enter an email address to which the results of
the export will be sent. Port Export will report
if the Export is OK or Failed. An attached
Port_Export.log file will contain a detailed
reporting about any failures.
Click at and browse to the source folder
where an E-mail batch file is saved and ‘open’
this file. This batch file (.bat) is a file PDS
needed to send a mail to the mail address as
defined in the above ‘E-mail results to’ field.
As this depends by the mail server the
customer needs to define this bat file in order
to send the mail. As an example the ‘blat’ file
could be used. Blat is a small efficient SMTP
command line mailer for windows. Download
the file from the internet and install it.
With this blat file installed in a specified folder
the e-mail batch file looks like for example
“C:\Program Files\blat311\full\blat.exe” –
server exchange server –f mail@mail.com –
t0 %1 –subject %2 –body %3 –attacht %4
Contact your IT department for details.

Press ‘Start Export’ to export the Grid Model
19.3.10.2 Options tabs

Click at one of the options tabs to have the context displayed.
As the EXP 1 options and Exp 2 options tabs are currently not used by
the PDS ‘Port Entrance Simulation’ application the ‘Enable export’
checkbox must selected when used.
Figure 19-38 Options tab
The following table summarizes the settings of the options tabs.

The tab name can be changed. In this
example ‘Dredge options’ is the name.
(Click at one of the other settings/fields

in the tab to get the tab name changed
as set.)
The destination grid model cell size can
be entered to create a resampled grid
model with a different cell size than the
original one.
A source selection can be made to
export the current grid model or the main
grid model.
The main grid model is selected in the
‘main grid model tab’ see section ‘main
grid model tab’. The current grid model is
selected in the grid model editor.
Select to export the data as ASCII or as

a PDS grid model.
When ticked a corresponding grid model

XML file will be exported. The XML file
contains historical data about the source
file, the grid model is created from and
all the operations performed on the grid
model.
Click to browse to the destination file
location in the network to export the
survey data to.
This destination file must be shared.
(Right click at the local folder to share in
windows)
PDS will check the selection of the
destination file location to prevent that it
is the same as the current PDS project
folder.
Comments can be typed here.

19.3.11 ASCII Export
Figure 19-39 ASCII Export
This function exports the grid model data to an ASCII text file. For each
cell an X,Y,Z position is generated. X and Y are the center of the cell and
Z is the selected data type. A comma is used as separator. When time is
exported then the time is displayed in ANSI time. See ‘Time’ on page 783.
If a clipping polygon is selected the export only applies for data inside the
polygon. Select the checkbox(es) of the required exported data type(s).
Click or to change the sequence order of the data types in the
generated ASCII file. The Data type in top of the data type list is the first
value after the X,Y position in the ASCII file. See Figure 19-40 the
standard deviation is the value after the X,Y position.
Figure 19-40 Created ASCII file with selected data types
Check the option Add precise MIN/MAX Position to add the precise
position for the Z minimum and Z maximum.
Check the option Export as depth when the Z value(s) have to be treated
as depth instead of heights. For the Z Average, Z Minimum and Z
Maximum the values will be multiplied with ‘-1’.
Click to start the export of the grid model data.

19.3.12 Contour
Figure 19-41 Contour
With this function a contour is created from the grid model data.
Data type
Select data type.
Clipping Polygon
Select a clipping polygon. The contour is created within the selected
polygon. A clipping polygon is not required. A polygon could be made by
selection of the option Draw Polygon in the context menu of the view.
Contour Definition
Select a Contour Definition.
Click to create a new Contour definition. Click to edit
an existing Contour definition. Refer to the Contour definitions on page
273 for contour definition details.
Suppress contours shorter than

Suppress contours shorter as the specified value.
Smoothing window
Smooth generated contour from no smoothing to maximum smoothing
with 7 steps in between
Label parameters
This are label associated parameters.
Be aware to tick the ‘show labels’ checkbox in the contour properties to
display the contour values.

Figure 19-42 ‘show labels’ checkbox ticked in Contour properties.
Contour label spacing

This defines the spacing between two labels on a contour line.
Label orientation
Defines how the labels in the contours will be plotted. The option Use
Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the orientation of the
plan panel or key map panel to plot the labels. The options Slope
Upwards and Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the
slope, upwards up or downwards up.
Precision
Number of decimals of the label
Presentation
It is possible to select a different type of label presentation:
 Decimal:
 Subscript
 Superscript
 Subscript and superscript with dot:

Check the check boxes for the options of underlining drying heights
and/or plot whole numbers without a decimal zero.
Figure 19-43 Checkboxes
It is possible to change the Font, style and size of the label with the
associated drop-down menus.
Figure 19-44 Font, style and size drop-down menus

Press to create a contour DXF file and to display
the contours at the grid model data.
Figure 19-45 Contours

20 TIN Model Viewer
20.1 General
With the TIN model viewer TIN models can be created and visualized.
The viewer allows data to be presented in a 3D view. This 3D view is
intended to be only for visualization of the data. There are no functions to
modify the data in the TIN model viewer.
The TIN model viewer can be started with Processing > TIN Model Viewer
from the menu bar of the Control Center.
Figure 20–1 TIN Model Viewer with a TIN model
Teledyne PDS - User Manual TIN Model Viewer  671

20.1.1 Drag & Drop
The drag & drop functionality is supported by the TIN model viewer. From
the explorer, files can be dragged and dropped in the client area of the
viewer or directly in a blank view.
The file formats that can be dropped in the client area are:
 TIN (*.TIN) files only from the project folder.
 ASCII (*.ASC) and XYZ (*.XYZ) files from any folder.
The file formats that can be dropped directly in a (blank) view are:
 TIN (*.TIN) files only from the project folder. If the TIN file is dropped in
a view with a TIN model the existing model is replaced.
 Color table (*.COL) files only from the project folder.
20.2 TIN Model Viewer Menu Bar

In the menu bar the most functions are standard windows functions. Only
the not standard functions in the menus will be discussed below.
20.2.1 File
The menu File has the functions to create, open, save, export and print
views and show the properties of the view. Most of these functions are
standard functions, except the export and the properties.
File > New
Under this option a number of sources are available to create a new
TIN model or to create a new color table.
Blank Model
A blank model will be generated, which can be used in combination
with the drag & drop function to add data.
From ASCII File
All the existing ASCII files in the project folder are available. From
this ASCII file a TIN model can be created.
From XYZ Point File
All the existing XYZ files in the project folder are available. These
XYZ files are the ‘Cleaned XYZ Log Data’ files, which is one of the
available logging formats. See page 150 for more information about
cleaned XYZ log data.
Color Table
Create a new color table with the standard PDS color table
generator (see page 268).
File > Export to ASCII File
The current file will be saved in ASCII format, with the extension ASC.
The format is X, Y, Z.
672  TIN Model Viewer Teledyne PDS - User Manual

File > Properties
The properties of the current TIN model will be shown.
Figure 20–2 TIN model properties
General
The number of triangles and the number of XYZ points in the
model.
Bounding Box
The coordinates (in projection grid) of the lower left hand corner
and the upper right hand corner of the box that surrounds the
model.
20.2.2 Edit
The menu Edit has only the function Empty Cache. In case the operation
seems to become slow or the computer is running low in memory, the
data cache can be deleted. No data will be lost, all the data can be
reloaded from the database.
Figure 20–3 Empty cache
20.2.3 Tools
The Tools menu has the following functions:
20.2.3.1 Decimate Model

Decimating a model is a method to reduce the number of data points. The
structure of the model will not be changed by decimating. To decimate a
TIN model select Tools > Decimate Model from the menu bar.
For a valid reduction the next steps should be considered.
 The decimated model must be a good geometric approximation of the
source model.
 The topology must be maintained. After decimating, the model is still a
TIN model and does not contain polygons of more than three points.

Figure 20–4 Decimation parameters
Maximum Feature angle

To classify a data point in the model, also called vertex, the feature
angle has to be determined. The feature angle is the angle between
the lines which are perpendicular to the plane of two adjacent
triangles.
Feature Angle
Figure 20–5 Feature angle
When the feature angle is greater than the maximum feature angle,
the shared edge (the thick red line) is called a feature edge. This
feature edge is used to classify the vertex.
Maximum error
A simple vertex is a data point that is completely surrounded by
triangles.
Simple Vertex
Figure 20–6 Simple vertex
From the surrounded data points a mean Z-value is calculated. The

simple vertex is removed if the difference between the Z-value of the
simple vertex and the mean Z-value is smaller than the maximum
error.

An interior edge vertex is a simple vertex where from the shared edges
two edges are feature edges, the thick red lines.
3D Distance
Interior Edge Vertex
Figure 20–7 Interior edge vertex
The 3D distance is the distance from the interior edge vertex to the 3D
line formed by the endpoints of the two feature edges. The interior
edge vertex is removed if the 3D distance is smaller than the
maximum error.
If the option Remove boundary points is checked then also the
boundary vertex go through the decimation. A boundary vertex is a
vertex that is not completely surrounded by triangles.
3D Distance
Boundary Vertex
Figure 20–8 Boundary vertex
The 3D distance is the distance from the boundary vertex to the 3D

line formed by the endpoints of the two boundary neighbors. The
boundary vertex is removed if the 3D distance is smaller than the
maximum error.
By removing data points in the decimation of the TIN model, ‘holes’
appear in the model. These ‘holes’ are triangulated again.
When the decimation algorithm is started a progress indicator appears on
the screen. The process of the decimation can take a long time for
models with many points. At the end of the process a decimation status is
given.

20.2.3.2 Filter Triangles
A maximum edge length has to be specified to filter the triangles.
Triangles with a side longer than the maximum edge length are removed.
This filter usually removes the triangles on the boundaries of the model.
To start the filter triangles option select Tools > Filter Triangles from the
menu bar.
This filter is reversible because no data points are removed from the
model. Give a high value for the maximum edge length and the model
shown in the viewer is reverted to the situation before the filtering.
20.2.3.3 Generate Contours

Contours can be generated for viewing and printing purposes. When the
dialogue window is opened for the first time the depth extensions of the
model are placed in the fields. Start the option with Tools > Generate
Contours form the menu bar.
Figure 20–9 Contour interval parameters
The start and end depth and a contour interval have to be set to start the
generation of the contours.
20.3 TIN Model Viewer Toolbar

With the options in the toolbar the model can be moved and rotated in the
view. For the zoom, move and rotation buttons shortcuts with the mouse
and the click location are available.
Function Shortcut Click Location
Zoom In F5 or Top side of the view
Ctrl + Left mouse button
Zoom Out Ctrl + Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
Move Left Shift + Left mouse button Left side of the view
Move Right Shift + Left mouse button Right side of the view
Move Up Shift + Left mouse button Top side of the view
Move Down Shift + Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
Rotate Left Left mouse button Left side of the view
Rotate Right Left mouse button Right side of the view
Rotate Up Left mouse button Top side of the view
Rotate Down Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
As long as the mouse button is kept down the mouse operation is a
continuous operation while a button operation performs only one step.
The place of the mouse pointer in the view is not relative to the model.
The model can be moved or rotated to any place in the view and the
mouse actions are still related to the position of the mouse pointer in the
view.

20.4 TIN Model Viewer Context Menu
The context menu can be opened by right clicking in the view. The
standard function will be discussed below.
Model Type
In the viewer the model can be shown as a TIN Model or as a Grid
Model.
When the TIN model is rotated the TIN model viewer automatically
switches to Grid model and return to the TIN model when the rotation
stops.
Model Display Mode
There are three display modes available:
Solid; the normal view mode.
Wireframe; shows the outline of the triangles of the TIN or Grid model.
Vertex; shows only the vertex points, the points that build the TIN
model.
Show Contours
Toggle between showing and hiding the contours (when available) in
the view.
Show Clip
Toggle between showing and hiding a clip in the view. A clip is a small
overall top view placed in the lower left corner of the view.
Show Coordinate Axis
Toggle between showing and hiding the coordinate axis in the view.
The origin can be set with the next function.
Coordinate Axis Origin
Select one of the places for the origin of the coordinate axis: Center,
Front Center, Front Left, Front Right, After Center, After Left and After
Right.
Rotate Light Source
Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse around. The
new location of the light source becomes the location when the button
is released.
Save Snapshot
The current view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Edit Color Table
This function opens the standard PDS color table generator (see page
268).
Properties
Shows the properties and attributes of the current view.
The only item that is not discussed before is the Vertical
exaggeration. This is a multiplication factor for the vertical or Z-axis of
the model.

21 End Area Volumes
21.1 Introduction
In Teledyne PDS (PDS) two methods for volume computation are
available.
1. In the grid model editor with the operations ‘Compute Volumes’. See
for more details the chapter ‘Grid Model’ on page 654.
2. In End Area Volumes. This option will be described below.
21.1.1 Operation Method

The ‘End Area’ method uses runlines as base for the computations. Each
logged data point (XYZ point) is projected on the runline. For each point a
computation is made to the previous- and next runline and to the next
point to obtain a horizontal area.
line n+1
c
line n
a b
line n-1
Runline
Vessel Track
Half line distance
Data point
Projected data point
a+b
Horizontal area = c
2 *
Figure 21-1 Horizontal area
Next, between two adjacent points, the data is checked against a

reference profile or level. This gives a ‘Delta Z’. Multiplying the horizontal
area with the ‘Delta Z’ gives a volume.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual End Area Volumes  679

e
f
e+f
Delta Z =
2
Reference profile
Figure 21-2 Delta Z
21.2 Volume Computation

The End Area Volumes can be started with Processing > End Area
Volumes from the menu bar or with from the toolbar in the Control
Center.
If the option is used before, the last used volume computation will appear
on the screen. If it is the first time the window will be empty. A new
volume computation can be created with File > New… from the menu bar
and automatically a volume computation wizard is started (see below).
An existing volume computation can be opened with File > Open… from
the menu bar.
The Displays window can be opened with View > Displays from the menu
bar or with Displays form the context menu in the End Area Volumes
window. It can be used to open, close or remove volume computations.
21.2.1 Volume Computation Wizard

The wizard is started automatically when a new volume computation is
created. To make changes in an existing volume computation, the wizard
can be started on the page Setup (see page 683).
Figure 21-3 Volume Computation Wizard – Runlines
680  End Area Volumes Teledyne PDS - User Manual

On the first page of the wizard the runlines, which have to be used for the
volume computation, can be selected. If only a part of the area, that is
covered by the runlines, has to be used for the volume computation select
an existing clipping polygon.
In the next page a reference level has to be selected.
Figure 21-4 Volume Computation Wizard – Reference
Choose reference
Choose the reference level from the following file types and select the
file name. Some of the file types have extra options that have to be
set.
Profile Design Model
No extra options to set.
3D Model
No extra options to set.
Grid Model
Select which data type of the grid model has to be used as the
reference level; the Average, Minimum or Maximum of the Z-value.
Log Data File Set
Select a data item from the log data file set as reference level. For
this item the maximum gap and maximum offtrack can be set.
The maximum gap is the maximum distance between two adjacent
data points on the same runline. In case the distance exceeds the
maximum gap, no volume computation will be done on that
location.
The maximum offtrack is the maximum distance between a data
point and the runline. In case the distance exceeds the maximum
offtrack, no volume computation will be done. A practical value is a
half line spacing.
Tolerances
The tolerances are two extra reference levels, one above and one
below the main reference level. If the tolerances are set, four different
volumes will be calculated; above the above tolerance, between the
above tolerance and the main reference level, between the main
reference level and the below tolerance and below the below
tolerance.
The tolerances are a vertical shift from the main reference level.

The next page of the wizard gives a possibility to combine two reference
types.
Figure 21-5 Volume Computation Wizard – Combine
It is possible to combine two reference types to one main reference level.

None
No combination of two reference types, the already selected reference
type becomes the main reference level.
Follow highest
At each data point the highest of the two reference types is always
selected as the main reference level.
Follow lowest
At each data point the lowest of the two reference types is always
selected as the main reference level.
If Follow highest or Follow lowest is selected, the next page will give a
selection for the second reference level, which is identical with the
selection of the first reference level (see Figure 21-4).
On the last page of the wizard the data have to be selected. Also this
page is identical with the selection of the reference level.
Click on to close the last page of the wizard and the volume
computation will start automatically. The plan view and the profile view will
be updated with the results of the volume computation.

21.2.2 Setup
On the page Setup the volume computation wizard can be started and the
colors for the four areas in the volume computation can be defined.
Figure 21-6 End Area Volumes with the Setup page
21.2.2.1 Views in the End Area Volumes

There are two views that show the volume computation results
graphically: a plan view and a profile view. The different volumes / areas
above and below the main reference level are displayed in different
colors. Both windows have the usual options with the toolbar and the
context menu.
Click with the mouse on one of the runlines in the plan view and this line
becomes the active runline. The profile view will be updated and will show
the profile of the selected runline.

21.2.3 Volumes
On the Volumes page the volumes as displayed in the plan view of the
End Area Volumes are presented in a table.
Figure 21-7 End Area Volumes with the Volumes page
21.2.3.1 The Table of the Volumes

The presented table can be read as follows:
Total
The cumulative total of all volumes.
- river
The total volumes of the runline file ‘river’.
- parallel
The total volumes of the runline block ‘parallel’.
+ 1, etc
The volumes per runline. When a profile design model is
used as main reference level, the volumes are divided into
sections. Each section is the part between two offset points
on the template of the profile design model which are shown
as vertical white lines in the profile view.
The headers in the table are:
AT
The calculated volume above the above tolerance level.

AwT
The calculated volume between the above tolerance level and the
main reference level.
BwT
The calculated volume between the main reference level and the
below tolerance level.
BT
The calculated volume below the below tolerance level.
%
The percentage of data points that covers the main reference level on
the runline. The percentage should be 100% for a valid computation
over the selected area.
21.2.4 Vertical Areas

On the Vertical Areas page the areas as displayed in the profile view of
the End Area Volumes are presented in a table. The table is similar to the
table for the Volumes as explained above, only the volumes are now the
vertical areas.
Figure 21-8 End Area Volumes with the Vertical Areas page

21.2.5 Report
On the Report page a report with the results of the volume computation
can be generated.
Figure 21-9 End Area Volumes with the Report page
In the Report page two different report can be generated, a comma

separated report and a standard report. Whereby for the standard report
several combinations are possible.
21.2.5.1 Comma Separated Report

The report is in the form of an ASCII file with commas as separators
(*.CSV file). The information presented in the file is:
 The name of the runline file.
 The name of runline block.
 The sections of the template (if profile design model is used as main
reference level).
 For each section the four volumes from the Volumes page.
 For each section the four areas from the Vertical Areas page.
If the option Show sections is checked for each section the information as
mentioned above will be presented. Is the option unchecked then only the
information of the blocks will be presented in the file.

If the option View report is checked then the report will be opened in
Microsoft Excel after it is created. Click on and specify a
filename to save the report.
21.2.5.2 Standard Report

Two different standard reports can be generated. The report can or will be
saved as a PDF file in the ‘Reports’ folder of the Projects folder.
Report style
Two different layouts (report styles) are available to create the report.
LineImages[vol]
The report generates for each line a table as in the Volumes and
Vertical Areas pages with optional the related profile view.
ResultsTable[vol]
The report generate one table with the values from the tables in the
Volumes and Vertical Areas pages.
Show coverage
If checked, the coverage column will be added to the tables in the
report.
Show sections
If checked, for each line the sections from the profile design model will
be added to the table.
If not checked, only the total volumes / areas for each line are
displayed in the table.
Line Images
For the report style LineImages[vol] images of the profile views for
each line can be added to the report. Check the option Create images
when the profile views have to be added.
Because the size, horizontal and/or vertical, of each profile is different,
check the option Zoom to extents to show all the data of each profile.
Set the width and height of the image, the values are the number of
pixels.
User text
Extra information can be added to the header of the report.
If the option View report is checked then the report will be opened after it
is created. Click on to create the report. The ResultTable[vol]
report will automatically be saved as PDF file in the ‘Reports’ folder, the
LineImages[vol] report has to be saved with File > Save as… in the PDS
Reporter to a PDF file.

22 Plot
22.1 Getting Started

Charts can be created in Teledyne PDS (PDS) with the use of the PDS
data files, images and DXF drawings. These charts can contain plan
views, profiles, legends, images, etc. and can be printed or exported to
DXF.
Plot can be started with Processing > Plot from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar of the Control Center.
The following steps are necessary to make a plot for the first time:
1. Create a plot project.
2. Add data files to the overview.
3. Place a plan view in the overview.
4. Create a plot.
5. Place panels in the plot.
6. Add layers to the panel.
7. Print or export the plot.
22.1.1 Create a Plot Project

When a plot project is created, a folder for this project will be created.
Each plot project can contain several plots (charts).
The first step after starting the plot module is to create a new project with
File > New > Project… from the menu bar. A wizard is started and on the
first page a name for the project and a location to create the project folder
has to be selected or created. By default the folder of the current PDS
project is used for the location.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Plot  689

Figure 22-1 Plot project wizard
On the next page in the wizard the main project has to be selected. If
other PDS projects are available with the same geodetic settings, the data
can be selected from those projects as well. Data from projects with
different geodetic settings cannot be combined.
Click on and PDS will create the plot project and close the
wizard.
Figure 22-2 Plot overview window
The project tree contains everything that is part of the project. Next to the
project tree is the overview window, which consists of two sections. The
left section shows the overview tree, while the overview plot is shown in
the right section. The overview plot also has a toolbar.
22.1.2 Add Data Files

With the context menu from either the overview tree or the overview plot,
data files can be added to the overview. Use the right mouse button to
690  Plot Teledyne PDS - User Manual

open the context menu, and select from the option Add Data one of the
data types.
Figure 22-3 Context menu of the overview tree and overview plot
Any data that is added will show up in the tree and in the plot of the
overview window.
Figure 22-4 Data added to the overview
22.1.3 Place a Plan View

After adding one or more data files to the overview window it is possible
to create a plan view. A plan view defines a rectangular area in the world,
 and is used to position plan panels in a plot. It is not necessary to define a
plan view when only profiles have to be plotted.
Select Place Plan View from the context menu and the shape of the
cursor changes to a cross. Draw a rectangle in the overview plot to create
a plan view. Click and hold the left mouse button to start drawing the

rectangle, and release the mouse button to finalize the rectangle. The
plan view properties will appear and the exact properties can be modified.
Figure 22-5 Plan View Properties in the overview
The new plan view is added to the project tree and displayed in the
overview plot. It is usually a good idea to give the plan view a more
descriptive name than the default one. The name can be changed in the
properties of the context menu of the plan view.
Figure 22-6 Overview with a plan view
Cancel any visual Move a plan view by selecting it with the mouse, and then dragging it
operation by pressing the around the plot. Change the size of the plan view by selecting one of the
‘Esc’ key on the keyboard. handles and dragging it with the mouse.
Click on from the toolbar or select View > Rotate from the menu bar to
rotate a plan view. The handles of the selected plan view will change. By
dragging one of the handles with the mouse the plan view can be rotated
around its center point. Click on or select View > Rotate again to
finish the rotation of the plan view.
Edit the plan view properties by double-clicking the plan view in either the
project tree or in the overview plot. The properties can also be displayed
through the context menu of a plan view.

Plan views can also be added directly to the project from the project tree,
without using the overview window. With a right mouse click on ‘Plan
Views’ in the project tree a plan view can be added. In that case the
position, size and rotation must be entered manually.
22.1.4 Create a Plot

To create a new plot, choose File > New > Plot… from the menu bar. It is
also possible to use the context menu of the Plots item in the project tree
to add a plot.
Figure 22-7 Create a new plot
In case a plot is already available in the current project, the choice is

given to copy an existing plot. This plot will then be used as a starting
point, or template, for the new project.
When creating a blank plot, click on to change the properties of
the new plot. Otherwise the defaults will be used.
Figure 22-8 Plot Properties window
The Plot Properties window contains several tab pages:

Size
The size of the plot. Before printing, please make sure that the plot fits
on the printer paper. If the plot does not fit, it will be tiled into several
sheets of paper. For example, to print an A0 sized plot an oversized
A0 paper is necessary.
Grid
The grid is a raster of vertical and horizontal guide lines. It can be
helpful for placing panels on the plot.
Show grid; to show the guide lines with the entered grid interval.
Snap to grid; the panels will snap to the grid lines when positioning or
resizing them.

Printer Output
How the plot will be printed.
Print to fill page; will scale the plot so that it fits on the printer paper.
Print exact; will print the plot to the exact scale.
DXF Export
Select the type of DXF export, with 256 colors or with true colors.
The true colors are only supported from AutoCAD 2004 onwards.
Options
Display Z coordinates as depths; change the sign of the height values
in the survey data to depth values.
Optimum text angle; the preferred viewing angle for text. It prevents
text annotations from being upside down when looking at the plot in
the preferred direction.
Keywords
A keyword is a piece of text between ‘%’ characters that gets replaced
by user-defined text. Add or remove any keyword label and its user
text here. Keywords that are common to all plots in a project can be
entered in the project options. See also Keywords on page 699.
When finished with the properties click on to create the new plot
and add it to the project.
Figure 22-9 New blank plot

22.1.5 Place Panels
Panels can be placed in the plot by using the context menu. Use the right
mouse button to click on the plot tree or on the plot itself.
Figure 22-10 Context menu of the plot tree and the plot view
From the context menu select Place Panel and then select the type of
panel to add. For example select Plan to place a plan panel. See on page
699 for an explanation of the available panels.
The cursor will change to a cross and a rectangle can be drawn in the plot
where the panel should come. After releasing the mouse button the new
panel will be added to the plot. A window will appear with the panel’s
properties.
Figure 22-11 Plan panel properties
The panels are displayed in the plot and in the plot tree. The properties of
a panel can be opened with a double click on the panel in the plot, in the
plot tree or through the context menu of the panel.
Select the panel with the mouse and by dragging the mouse the panel
Hold the Shift key down to
can be moved around in the plot. Resize a panel by first selecting it, and
disable ‘snap to grid’.
then grabbing one of the handles.

22.1.6 Add Layers
In some panels, such as plan panels and profile panels, layers can be
added to the panel. A layer always covers the whole panel and uses the
coordinate mapping set from the panel.
Select Add Layer from the context menu of the panel and select the
desired layer type. After a layer is added to the panel, its properties will be
displayed in a dialog.
To change the properties of an existing layer, double-click on the layer in
the plot tree. It is also possible to select Properties in the context menu of
the layer.
Layers can be added for five different panels; Plan Panel, Profile Panel,
Profile Series Panel, Profile Cross Series Panel and Key Map Panel.
See for more information about the different layers the chapter Available
Layers on page 712.
After some panels and some layers are added to the plot, it can look like
this:
Figure 22-12 Plot with panels and layers
Layers that are not visible are indicated in the plot tree by a dark light
bulb. Panels that are locked against accidental movement are indicated
with a small pad lock.
22.1.7 Print or Export a Plot

When finished with the plot it is possible to print the result on paper or to
export it to a DXF file and continue working on it in an external CAD
application.
Use from the menu bar the option File > Print Setup to setup the printer,
the option File > Print Preview to view the plot before it is printed and the
option File > Print… to print the plot.

There are two possibilities to export a plot to DXF:
1. The whole plot can be exported to a DXF file by selecting File > Export
Plot to DXF… from the menu bar. The coordinates will be in mm (=
paper space).
2. A plan panel can be exported to a DXF file by selecting Export to
World DXF… from the context menu of the plan panel. The
coordinates will be the Easting’s and Northing’s as used in the panel.
22.2 How Plotting Works
22.2.1 Regeneration
Plots are generated from PDS data files such as routes and grid models.
The data is rendered to the plot and will be presented as points, lines,
arcs, and text. When something is changed, the plot needs to be
regenerated. Regeneration will occur when:
 The properties of a panel or layer are changed.
 A data file is modified externally since it was last rendered.
 The user will force the regeneration. Select the option Force
Regenerate from the context menu of one of the panels.
 When the Toggle Auto Regenerate ( ) is on, the plot will automatically
be regenerated if necessary. When the Toggle Auto Regenerate is off and
the plot needs a regeneration the button Regenerate ( ) becomes
 active and the text ‘Plot needs to be regenerated!’ will appear above the
plot.
Figure 22-13 Regenerating a plot
Click on to cancel the regeneration process. It may take a while

before regeneration actually stops. When cancelled, the plot may be in a
partly generated state. For example, only half of a grid model may have
been rendered.
Any errors that occurred during regeneration will be displayed afterwards.
Figure 22-14 Regeneration errors

Display the regeneration The window displays the errors of all plots in the current project. Errors
errors at any time with the will automatically disappear when the problems are solved. If the user
option View > does not want to see the errors, clear one or all the errors. If the errors
Regeneration Errors from are not solved and the window is closed the text ‘Plot needs to be
the menu bar. generated!’ will stay above the plot.
22.2.2 Panel and Layer Order

All panels and layers of a plot are drawn in a specific order. Normally this
is the order in which they were added. This order is visible in the plot tree.
Panels or layers that are listed first are also drawn first.
To change the order, use the context menu of a panel or a layer and
select Bring to Front or Send to Back.
Selecting Send to Back will make a panel the first panel of a plot, or a
layer the first layer of a panel. Selecting Bring to Front will make it the last
one.
The order of the layers within a panel can also be changed by selecting
the option Layer Order from the context menu of a panel. Select a layer
and click on one of the arrow buttons to move up or down the layer in the
order.
22.2.3 Overwrite Suppression

Overwrite suppression is a feature that prevents text from overwriting
other text in the plot and it works on a panel-by-panel basis.
The option can be found in the Properties of the panels and layers.
Figure 22-15 Overwrite suppression in action; behind the easting text are no
depth values plotted
When overwrite suppression is enabled for just one layer then no text of
that layer will overwrite other text of the layer. When enabled for several
layers, the text of those layers will not overwrite each other as well.

If text cannot be placed because it would overwrite other text, then:
1. The text is simply left out.
2. The text will be moved to somewhere where there is no text yet.
Overwrite suppression of
one layer may influence What happens exactly depends on the implementation of the specific
other layers of the same layer.
panel. Because of this, all
layers that uses overwrite
The layer order has an effect on the overwrite suppression. Layers are
suppression have to be regenerated in reversed order to the drawing order. A layer at the front
regenerated when one of won't be affected by any suppression, while layers at the back will be
the layers is changed. This affected the most. If a layer is missing some text because of overwrite
may take a while. suppression, bring it to the front.
22.2.4 Templates
Plot templates are the same as regular plots. They are only separated
from normal plots by their file name extension, which is ‘.[tpl].plt’ instead
of just ‘.plt’. The project tree displays the templates separate.
Templates can be used when creating a new plot. Check the option Copy
existing plot, and then choose the desired plot template from the file
dialog. To show only template files in the file dialog, set the ‘Files of type’
field to ‘Template Files’.
22.2.5 Keywords
Keywords are special tokens that get replaced by user-defined text. A
keyword is a piece of text between ‘%’ characters that can be present in
text boxes or in the text of DXF files.
Select Edit > Project Options from the menu bar to add or modify the 'user
text’ for the keywords. The keywords set in the ‘Project Options’ are
project wide keywords. Several keywords are already added to the
keywords list and cannot be modified. These keywords are: project
number, project name, coordinate system, current time, current date and
plot project.
Plot specific keywords can be added or modified in the ‘Plot Properties’ of
the plot. By default the plot name is added and cannot be modified.
The best way to insert keywords is, by a right mouse click in a text box.
On this way project-specific and/or plot-specific keywords can easily be
chosen from a quite extended list (specially the plot-specific possibilities).
22.3 Available Panels

The available panels in Plot are:
 Plan Panel (see below)
 North Arrow Panel (see page 701)
 Profile Panel (see page 702)
 Profile Volume (see page 703)
 Profile Series Panel (see page 706)
 Profile Cross Series Panel (see page 707)
 Profile Info Panel (see page 708)
 Text Block Panel and Text Box (see page 709)
 DXF Panel (see page 710)

 Color Mapping Panel (see page 710)
 Image Panel (see page 711)
 Key Map Panel (see page 711)
 Scale Bar Panel (see page 712)
22.3.1 Plan Panel
Figure 22-16 Example of a plan panel
A plan panel displays a top view of a rectangle in the world. It needs a

plan view to define how the coordinates are mapped. All the layers that
display data in the plan panel use this coordinate mapping.
Figure 22-17 Mapping page of the plan panel properties
The Mapping page of the plan panel properties requires a plan view.
When the option Auto fit to log data is checked a plan view will be
generated that fits the log data that is added as layer.

If plan views are generated in the overview (see page 691) then instead
off the auto fit option an existing plan view can be selected. The center
point and rotation of the plan view will be used directly, and are displayed
on the page.
The scale may be entered manually, for example 1:1000. An indication is
given whether the selected plan view fits inside the panel or not. If the
scale factor is larger than is necessary for the panel, it will show a larger
area than defined by the plan view, but based on the center point and
rotation.
Click on to calculate a suitable scale factor that will result
in the whole plan view fitting inside the panel.
Click on will resize the panel to fit exactly in the selected
plan view with the entered scale. The new size for the panel is shown
next to the button. It is possible that the panel will become too large to fit
on the paper. In that case PDS will ask if the plot size should be enlarged
to fit the panel.
Labels can be plotted from data in grid models, TIN models or logdata
files. The labels are plotted on their own location as specified in the data
files. For instance in the grid model the Z Average is plotted in the center
 of the cell, while the Z Minimum and Z Maximum are plotted at the actual
location per cell. Also for the contouring the actual position of the data is
used. The labels can be defined in the Label Mode page and Label Font
page of the plan panel properties.
In the Color Table page the color table can be selected that will be used
to plot depth data in color.
22.3.2 North Arrow Panel
Figure 22-18 Sample of a north arrow
A north arrow is a separate panel that is based on a plan panel. It can be

drawn anywhere in the plot, but it is usually placed inside a plan panel.
Figure 22-19 North Arrow page of the north arrow panel properties

With the North Arrow page of the properties it is possible to select the
type of north arrow. The direction of the arrow is taken from the selected
plan panel. When a north arrow is attached to the panel, its position will
be relative to the bottom left hand corner of the plan panel.
It is possible to design your own north arrow with a CAD application.
Export the arrow to a DXF file, and place it in the ‘NorthArrows’ folder of
the ‘General’ folder of the PDS installation (see page 9).
22.3.3 Profile Panel
Figure 22-20 Sample of a profile panel
A profile panel displays a cross section along a predefined line. The

layers that are added to this panel will show their data along this line.
Figure 22-21 Horizontal and Vertical pages of the profile panel properties
The profile panel properties have separate mapping pages for the
horizontal and vertical axis. The horizontal and vertical options that are
available depend on the selection made in the Mode option.
Scale to Fit
Everything is calculated automatically to fit the extents of the profile.
Fixed Start and End Value
Enter a start and end value. The scale is calculated automatically.

Fixed Scale
Enter a scale and a start value. The end value is calculated
automatically.
Projected
This option is only available for horizontal mapping. The horizontal axis
will be mapped to a specified plan panel.
On the Horizontal page the option Coordinate origin defines where zero
 on the X-axis starts. Note that ‘Route intersection’ only works with
runlines of the type ‘Route Crosslines’.
22.3.4 Profile Volume
Figure 22-22 Sample of a profile volume panel
The profile volume panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.
Figure 22-23 A box with one profile volume

Figure 22-24 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile volume
panel properties
The mapping of the profile boxes is controlled by the Distance Scale and
Depth Scale pages of the profile volume panel properties. The pages
work slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile
panel (see above).
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
In all the profile boxes the value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
same vertical axis maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
definition will be used. four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be
changed by the user.
In the profile volume properties are 3 different pages available to define
the design model and the design line with its colors and select the survey
data.

Figure 22-25 Design model page of the profile volume properties
The profile volume is In the design model page the first and second reference level for the
nearly identical with the volume computation can be selected. As type of reference a profile
End Area Volumes design model, grid model and 3D model can be selected. Also a under-
and overdredge limit (tolerances in the End Area Volumes) can be
entered.
Figure 22-26 Design line and colors page of the profile volume properties
In this page the design line with its under- and overdredge line can be
defined. For the 4 areas the colors can be selected, by default the colors
are identical with the colors in the End Area Volumes.

Figure 22-27 Survey data and colors page of the profile volume properties
In this page as data a grid model or a file set with log data files can be
selected.
22.3.5 Profile Series Panel
Figure 22-28 Sample of a profile series panel
The profile series panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.

Figure 22-29 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel
properties
Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel properties. The pages work
slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile panel
(see above).
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
In all the profile boxes the value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
same vertical axis maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
definition will be used. four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be
22.3.6 Profile Cross Series Panel
Figure 22-30 Sample of profile cross series panel
The profile cross series panel displays multiple cross profile boxes in a
single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is put into a
separate cross profile box.

Figure 22-31 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series
panel properties
Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series panel properties. The pages
work the same as the Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages in the
profile series panel (see above).
Only here are three parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value,
end value and scale. The box width in the Distance Scale page is defined
In all the cross profile by the height of the panel as defined in the Position page. Four
boxes the same vertical parameters are to set for the Depth scale: minimum, maximum, box
axis definition will be used. height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the three or four
parameters is automatically calculated, the other two or three can be
22.3.7 Profile Info Panel
Figure 22-32 Sample of a profile info panel
The profile info panel displays the information of a profile panel, profile
series panel or a profile cross series panel.
The information consists of the X and Y scaling mode used, and a legend
of all profile layers used in the panel. Each layer is listed with its line color
and data file name.

Figure 22-33 Profile Info page of the profile info panel properties
Select in the Profile Info page for which profile panel the profile info panel
has to be generated.
22.3.8 Text Block Panel and Text Box
Figure 22-34 Sample of a text block panel with two text boxes
A Text Block is the parent panel for one or more Text Boxes. It is used to
group several Text Boxes together so that they can be moved
simultaneously.
To add some text to the plot, first place a Text Block. Inside this panel,
place one or more Text Boxes that will contain the actual text.
In the Text Block panel with the context menu item Place Text Box a Text
Box is placed in the Text Block. The Text Box can only be placed
somewhere inside the parent Text Block.
Figure 22-35 Text page of the text box properties
In the Text page of the text box properties replace the default text ‘Enter
label’ with the desired text.
The position of a text box is always relative to the lower left hand corner
of its parent text block.

22.3.9 DXF Panel
A DXF panel displays a drawing in DXF format in a separate panel
without any coordinate mapping. For example a logo can be placed in the
plot.
Figure 22-36 DXF page of the DXF panel properties
Select in the DXF page the DXF file that has to be plotted. Use the
offsets, rotation and/or scale to place the data on the right location in the
panel.
22.3.10 Color Mapping Panel
Figure 22-37 Sample of a color mapping panel
The color mapping panel displays the color table of a plan panel. When
attached, the panel will automatically be placed next to the plan panel and
receive the same height. The order of the table can be reversed.

Figure 22-38 Color Table page of the color mapping panel properties
22.3.11 Image Panel

An image panel can display an image and is usually used to plot logos.
Figure 22-39 Image page of the image panel properties
Select in the Image page the image file. The plot support several image
file formats, like BMP, JPG, TIFF, etc.
22.3.12 Key Map Panel
Figure 22-40 Sample of a key map panel with the current plot highlighted
The key map is a panel that can display an overview of the defined plan
view rectangles of the current plot project. A plan panel of the current plot
is highlighted in the key map.

A key map panel uses the same mapping method as a plan panel. Define
an extra plan view to cover all other plan views just for the mapping of the
key map.
After creating the panel, the first thing to do is to add the Plan Views
layer. This layer will display the available plan views. Add other layers if
needed.
22.3.13 Scale Bar Panel
Figure 22-41 Sample of a scale bar panel
The scale bar is a panel that displays the scale of a plan panel in the form
of a bar.
Figure 22-42 Scale Bar page of the scale bar panel properties
Select in the Scale Bar page the type of the scale bar and which plan
panel will be used as reference.
22.4 Available Layers

For each layer available in the different panels a short explanation will be
given in this chapter.
The available layers are:
Profile Volume
Profile Series
Profile Cross
Key Map
Profile
Series
Plan
x x Clipping Polygon (see below)

x x CMap (see page 714)
x Dredge Track (see page 715)
x x DXF (see page 715)
x Events (see page 716)
x x x x Event Markers (see page 716)
x x Geographic Grid (see page 716)

Profile Volume
Profile Series
Profile Cross
Key Map
Profile
Series
Plan
x x x x GLW Grid (see page 717)
x x Grid Model (see page 718)
x x Grid Model Contour (see page 719)
x x Grid Model Difference (see page 720)
x x x x Grid Model Profile (see page 721)
x x x x Grid Model Profile Statistics (see page 721)
x x x KP Grid (see page 723)
x Log Data (see page 723)
x x x x Log Data Profile (see page 724)
x x PDS1000 Electronic Chart (see page 724)
x x x x Pipe Profile (see page 725)
x Plan Views (see page 725)
x Raster (see page 726)
x x Route (see page 726)
x x Runlines (see page 727)
x x Satellite Geographic Grid (see page 727)
x Sonar Targets (see page 728)
x x x x Streak Lines (see page 729)
x x x x x x Text (see page 729)
x x x x Theoretical Model (see page 730)
x TIN Model (see page 730)
x TIN Model Contour (see page 731)
x User Maps (see page 732)
x Waypoints (see page 733)
x x Work Areas (see page 733)
x x x x x x XY Grid (see page 734)

22.4.1 Clipping Polygon Layer
This layer plots the clipping polygon that is selected in the Polygon page
of the clipping polygon properties.
Figure 22-43 Polygon page of the clipping polygon properties
The clipping polygon can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
22.4.2 CMap Layer

This layer plots C-Map charts according the settings as set in the CMap
settings page of the CMap properties.
Figure 22-44 CMap settings page of the CMap properties
The C-map charts can only be plotted in the plan panel.

When S-57 charts are converted to C-Map charts it is possible that the
scale in the plot don’t match the scale of the S-57 charts. When this
 happened no charts are plotted. Check the option Show chart boundary
when no data for selected scale level to see the boundaries of the charts
to be sure that the charts covers the plan panel.

22.4.3 Dredge Track Layer
This layer plots one or all the dredge statuses as selected in the Data
page of the dredge track properties.
Figure 22-45 Data page of the dredge track properties
When the option Use only dredge status is checked, then select in the
combo box which dredge status has to be plotted.
When all the dredge statuses are plotted a dredge state color table can
be selected to show each dredge status in a different color. Check the
option Use color table to make this option active.
The dredge status information can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.4 DXF Layer

This layer plots the data from a DXF file as selected in the DXF page of
the DXF properties.
Figure 22-46 Text Size page of the DXF properties
The text size of the text from the DXF file will varies with the scale as
selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text Size page the
option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is then plotted with
the entered scale.

Figure 22-47 Line Style page of the DXF properties
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the DXF file or select a user
defined color.
The DXF file can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.
22.4.5 Events Layer

This layer plots data from the PDS log data on the location where an
event is logged. The data can be selected in the Log Data page of the
events properties.
The data from the event location can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.6 Event Markers Layer

This layer plots a marker on the location where an event is logged. The
data can be selected in the Log Data page of the event markers
properties.
The event markers can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
panel and in the profile cross series panel.
22.4.7 Geographic Grid Layer

This layer plots a grid with latitude and longitude coordinates as defined in
the Grid page of the geographic grid properties.
Figure 22-48 Grid page of the geographic grid properties

Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.
Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees (°) minutes (‘) and seconds (“) symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel and in
the key map panel.
22.4.8 GLW Grid Layer

This layer plots a GLW grid based on the data in the selected 3D Model in
the GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties.
Figure 22-49 GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties
The GLW grid can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series

22.4.9 Grid Model Layer
This layer plots the grid model data with the data type as selected in the
Grid Model and Data Type page of the grid model properties.
Figure 22-50 Cells page of the grid model properties
In the Cells page is defined how the grid model data is presented in the
plot.
Use limits
If checked, only the grid model cells with a depth between the
minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If not checked, all the cells will be plotted.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 700), the key map panel has no
color table. The option Points will plot a colored point in the center of
each cell and the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
Use sun illumination
If checked, the sun illumination settings will be used to change the look
of the grid model. This is only working when for Show Cells the option
Solid is selected.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the grid model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel or key map
panel.
In the Depth Biasing page the biasing can be set. With No biasing the
label will be plotted according the label spacing as specified in the Cells
page.
With Shoal biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
With Valley biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.
The grid model data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.

22.4.10 Grid Model Contour Layer
This layer plots the contours based on grid model data type and the
contour definition file as specified in the Grid Model and Data Type page
and Contour Levels page of the grid model contour properties.
Figure 22-51 Contouring page of the grid model contour properties
In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel or key map panel.
Label orientation
plan panel or key map panel to plot the labels. The options Slope
Upwards and Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the
slope, upwards up or downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour
 definition file for the each contour the option Show labels is
checked.
Figure 22-52 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked

In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The grid model contour data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.
22.4.11 Grid Model Difference Layer

This layer plots the differences between a grid model and a design model
as selected in the Grid Model and Data Type page and in the Design
Model page.
Figure 22-53 Design Model page of the grid model difference properties
In the Design Model page 2 different model types can be selected; Grid
Models and 3D Models.
The Grid Model and Data Type page, the Cells page and the Depth
Biasing page are identical with the pages for the grid model layer (see
page 718).
The Contouring page and Contour Levels page are identical with the
pages for the grid model contour layer (see above).
The grid model difference data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.

22.4.12 Grid Model Profile Layer
This layer plots grid model data as a profile over the active runline from
the profile panel. The grid model and data type can be selected in the
Grid Model and Data Type page of the grid model profile properties.
Figure 22-54 Options page of the grid model profile properties
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
The grid model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile
series panel and in the profile cross series panel.
22.4.13 Grid Model Profile Statistics Layer

This layer in combination with a text layer and a text box plots the mean,
minimum, maximum and standard deviation of the grid model profile over

a selected runline. The settings for this information are defined in the
Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties.
Figure 22-55 Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
Statistics
Define with how much decimals the mean, minimum, maximum and
standard deviation is plotted in the text box. Check the option Draw
Profile when the profile has to be plotted in the panel.
Next to this layer a text layer (see page 729) has to be added to the
The four keywords have to profile panel. After the text layer is added a text box can be added. In the
be added before as Text page of the text box the keywords ‘mean’, ‘min’, ‘max’ and ‘std’ can
keywords (see page 693) be added. The values of the keywords will be plotted in the text box.
The grid model profile statistics can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.

22.4.14 KP Grid Layer
This layer plots the KP grid with the KP value of a route as horizontal axis.
The grid settings can be defined in the Grid page of the KP grid
properties. The route can be selected in the Route page.
Figure 22-56 Grid page of the KP grid properties
Set for the X and Y grid the interval and the style. The X grid will present
the KP along the selected route. The value of the KP will be plotted and
with the prefix and/or postfix extra text can be added to the label.
The KP grid data can be plotted in the profile panel and in the profile
series panel.
22.4.15 Log Data Layer

This layer plots the selected data from the PDS log data file. The data can
be selected in the Log Data page of the log data properties.
Figure 22-57 Options page of the log data properties
In the Options page the method how the data is presented can be
defined.
Show lines
The data is presented as a line, where a line a drawn between the
data points.
Show line labels
When the option Show lines is checked this option becomes available.
The name of the line will be plotted next to the line.
Show soundings
The data is presented as dots. It is not necessary that the data is a
sounding; all types of data from the log data can be plotted.

Show soundings labels
Next to each data point a label is plotted. With Label spacing the
distance between two labels can be defined. The label spacing is
related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel.
The log data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.16 Log Data Profile Layer

This layer plots the selected data from the PDS log data file as a profile
over a runline, route or log data track. The data can be selected in the
Log Data page of the log data profile properties.
Figure 22-58 Options page of the log data profile properties
In the Options page the smoothing of the profile can be defined. This
smoothing can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
The log data profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
22.4.17 PDS1000 Electronic Chart Layer

This layer plots the PDS1000 electronic chart in the plan panel or in the
key map panel. The file can be selected in the Chart page of the
PDS1000 electronic chart properties.

22.4.18 Pipe Profile Layer
This layer plots the pipe route z as a profile. The pipe route can be
selected in the Pipe Route page of the pipe profile properties.
Figure 22-59 Options page of the pipe route properties
The pipe profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
22.4.19 Plan Views Layer

This layer plots the plan view as defined in the overview (see page 691).
The plan view can be selected in the Plan Views page of the plan views
properties.
Figure 22-60 Plan Views page of the plan views properties
Show plan view names

Check this option when the name of the plan view (plan panel) has to
be plotted next to the plan view.
Highlight plan panel
Select the plan view (plan panel) that has to be plotted.
Highlight mode
Select how the plan view has to be plotted; Hatched, Double Line or
Thick Line. For Thick Line the thickness of the line can be defined.

The plan view can only be plotted in the key map panel.
22.4.20 Raster Layer

This layer plots the GeoTIFF file as selected in the GeoTIFF Image file
page of the raster properties.
The GeoTIFF file can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.21 Route Layer

This layer plots the route as selected in the Route page of the route
properties.
Figure 22-61 Labels page of the route properties
In the Labels page can be set if the KP labels and route label can be
plotted.
Show KP labels
Check the option when KP labels (KP flags) has to be plotted along
the route. Set the Interval between the KP labels and the Offset for the
length of the KP flag.
Show route label
Check the option when the name of the route has to be plotted next to
the line.
The route data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.

22.4.22 Runlines Layer
This layer plots the runlines as selected in the Runlines page of the
runlines properties.
Figure 22-62 Runlines page of the runlines properties
Select in the Runlines page which runlines from the runlines file have to
be plotted.
The runlines data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
22.4.23 Satellite Geographic Grid Layer

This layer plots a grid with the satellite latitude and longitude coordinates
as defined in the Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties.
Figure 22-63 Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties
Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.

Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees (°) minutes (‘) and seconds (“) symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The satellite geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel
and in the key map panel.
22.4.24 Sonar Targets

This layer plots the sonar targets from the selected sonar targets file in
the Sonar Targets page of the sonar targets properties.
Figure 22-64 Options page of the sonar targets properties
In the Options page the presentation of the sonar targets can be defined.
Select as symbol for the sonar targets a Circle or a Cross. With the Size
the size of the symbol can be defined. The line style and color for the
circles can be defined in the Line Style page, the color of the cross is
always black.
The sonar targets can only be plotted in the plan panel.

22.4.25 Streak Lines Layer
This layer plots the streak lines as defined with the runlines. The runlines
are selected in the Line page of the profile panel.
Figure 22-65 Marker options page of the streak lines properties
In the Markers options page is defined how the markers of the streak lines
and fairway lines are plotted.
Marker top offset
The offset from the top of the profile panel where the markers will start.
Marker bottom offset
The offset from the bottom of the profile panel where the markers will
stop.
Show offset value
Check this option to plot the offset of the streak or fairway line above
the marker.
Marker names
Check the option Show names when the names of each line has to be
plotted next to the markers. For each line a name can be specified in
the table, this name will be plotted next to the marker at the bottom of
the marker.
The streak lines can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
22.4.26 Text Layer

This layer is needed to add text boxes in the plan panel, in the profile
panel, in the profile series panel, in the profile cross series panel and in
the key map panel.
Before text can be added with a text box, the text layer has to be added to
define the font for the text boxes.

22.4.27 Theoretical Model Layer
This layer plots a profile of the selected profile design model, grid model
or 3D model over the line selected in one of the profile panels. The model
can be selected in the Model page of the theoretical model properties.
Figure 22-66 Options page of the theoretical model properties
The theoretical model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.
22.4.28 TIN Model Layer

This layer plots the data of a TIN model which can be selected in the TIN
Model page of the TIN model properties.
Figure 22-67 Cells page of the TIN model properties

In the Cells page is defined how the TIN model data is presented in the
plot. The options Use limits and Use sun illumination are not valid for a
TIN model.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 700). The option Points will plot
a colored point in the center of each cell and the option Solid will fill the
cell with one color.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the TIN model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel.
The TIN model data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.29 TIN Model Contour Layer

This layer plots the contours based on the TIN model and the contour
definition file as specified in the TIN Model page and Contour Levels page
of the TIN model contour properties.
Figure 22-68 Contouring page of the TIN model contour properties
In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel.
Label orientation
plan panel to plot the labels. The options Slope Upwards and Slope
Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards up or
downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
 The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour definition
file for the each contour the option Show labels is checked.

Figure 22-69 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked
In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The TIN model contour data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.30 User Map Layer

This layer plots the data from a user map file as selected in the User Map
page of the user map properties.
Figure 22-70 Text Size page of the user map properties
The text size of the text from the user map file (is a DXF file) will varies
with the scale as selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text
Size page the option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is
then plotted with the entered scale.
Figure 22-71 Line Style page of the user map properties
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the user map file or select a
user defined color.

The user map file can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.31 Waypoints Layer

This layer plots the waypoints from the waypoints file as selected in the
Waypoints page of the waypoints properties.
Figure 22-72 Options page of the waypoints properties
In the Options page the presentation of the waypoints can be defined.

Select as symbol for the waypoints a Circle or a Cross. With the Size the
size of the symbol can be defined. Check the option Show tolerance
circles when both tolerance circles has to be plotted. The line style and
color for the circles can be defined in the Line Style page, the color of the
cross is always black.
The waypoints can only be plotted in the plan panel.
22.4.32 Work Areas Layer

This layer plots the work areas as selected in the Work Areas page and in
the Options page of the work areas properties.
Figure 22-73 Options page of the work areas properties
In the Options page the work areas from the selected work areas file in
the Work Areas page can be selected.

Select the option Show all areas when all the work areas in the work
areas file have to be plotted in the panel. With the option Show selected
areas only the work areas selected in the list will be plotted. Check Show
work area labels when the name of the work area has to be plotted with
the work area.
The work areas data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
22.4.33 XY Grid Layer

This layer plots a XY grid in the panel. In the XY grid properties the Grid
page is depending on the panel; the page for plan panel and key map
panel is different from the page for the different profile panels.
Figure 22-74 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the plan panel and key
map panel
For the plan panel and the key map panel select an interval and a grid
style to plot the grid in the panel. When the grid style is Ticks the option
Use long north tick becomes available. This option makes the north
oriented part of the plus sign longer than the other three parts. Behind the
label a mark can be plotted to distinguish the Eastings from the Northings.
Figure 22-75 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the different profile panels
For the different profile panels the interval for the X and Y can be
different, both has their own interval and style.
The XY grid can be plotted in the plan panel, in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel, in the profile cross series panel and in the key map
panel.

22.5 DXF Export Wizard
The DXF Export Wizard is a quick way to generate a DXF file from a
created plot. The export is an export to world coordinates and is only valid
for data that is placed in a plan panel. The export is identical with the
option Export to World DXF (see page 696).
The DXF Export Wizard can be started from the Plan View in the
Overview window or when the DXF is already created with the Edit option
of the DXF Export in the Explorer (see page 274).
Before the DXF Export Wizard can be started, the plot module has to be
opened with Processing > Plot from the menu bar or with from the
toolbar of the Control Center. A plot project can be opened or a new one
can be created with the menu option File.
Double click on Overview in the project tree to open the Overview. First
data (for instance a grid model) or a DXF file (background chart) has to be
added to the overview to know where the data or the area for the DXF
export is located.
Figure 22-76 Overview with a grid model
In the overview a drawn plan view will define which area will be used in
the DXF Export Wizard to create the DXF file. Select Place Plan View
from the overview context menu and draw the plan view over the data that
 has to be exported. In the Plan View Properties the exact size for the plan
view can be set with Size X and Size Y. Give also a well-defined name for
the plan view, because the settings for the DXF export will be saved
under this name in the DXF Export Files in the Explorer (see page 274).

Figure 22-77 Plan View Properties with an exact size for the plan view
The area covered by the plan view will be the area that is used in the DXF
Export Wizard to generate the DXF file.
Select the option Export to DXF in the context menu of the plan view to
start the DXF Export Wizard.
Click in the welcome page of the wizard on to start with the DXF
Export Wizard.
22.5.1 Output DXF File Page

The first page is the Output DXF File page, where the DXF file name has
to be defined. By default the name is based on the name of the plan view
with the date; ‘Example_2008-02-20’.
Figure 22-78 Output DXF file page of the DXF Export Wizard
Click on to continue with the DXF Export Wizard.

22.5.2 Select Data Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Select Data page, where
the data types can be selected that will be used to generate the plot for
the DXF export.
Figure 22-79 The Select Data page of the DXF Export Wizard
It is not possible to select At the moment only these five data types are available for the DXF export.
two the same data types. If In the future more data types will follow.
the user wants this, then
he can use the standard  Log Data; select a data item and a position track of that data item with
plot features to generate a or without labels will be plotted.
DXF from a plan panel.  Grid Model; a grid model will be plotted with or without colors and
depth labels.
 Contours; contours based on the data from a selected grid model will
be generated and plotted.
 Runlines; the selected runlines file with or without labels will be plotted.
 Waypoints: the selected waypoints with or without labels and tolerance
circles will be plotted.
 The wizard will open only the pages that are related to the selected data
types.
Click on to continue with the DXF Export Wizard.
In all the pages of the wizard the button is available. This means
that at any time when the user goes through the wizard and he knows that
the selections and settings in all other pages are OK, he can click on
to go directly to the Options and Preview page where the preview
or the DXF Export can be started (see page 744).

22.5.3 Plan Panel Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Plan Panel page, where
the settings for the plot have to be defined.
Figure 22-80 The Plan Panel page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Plan Panel page several tabs are available to define the settings
for the plot.
 Mapping
The scale will be used to generate the right labels sizes and line
widths so that these items are plotted with the right scale when the
DXF export is generated.
 Color Table
Select the color table that will be used for coloring the depths in the
plot.
 Label Mode
The definition for plotting the labels in the plot.
The coloring can be set on Use Text Color or on Use Color Table.
When Use Color Table is selected all the labels will be colored
according the color table. When Use Text Color is selected then for
each data type the coloring has to be defined.
The rotation can be fixed by selecting Constant and define an angle for
the rotation.
 Label Font
Select for the label the font type, the font style, the font size and the
color. The color is only valid when for Label Mode Use Text Color is
selected.
22.5.4 Log Data Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Log Data page, where
from a file set a data item can be selected. From this data item a position

will be calculated and the position track will be plotted with or without the
labels of the data item.
22.5.4.1 Log Data Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Log Data Settings page,
where the settings for the select data item of the Log Data can be defined.
Figure 22-81 The Log Data Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Log Data Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for the data item.
 Options
The user can select if the line of the track and the line labels are
plotted or not. If the data item is a sounding the user can select if the
soundings and labels are plotted or not.
The label spacing is the space between two plotted labels along the
track. This is specified in mm and is related to the selected scale in the
Plan Panel page (see page 738).
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the track.
 Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
generated. For each grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all grid cells.
generated. For each grid cell the deepest value will be plotted, starting
with the deepest value of all grid cells.

22.5.5 Grid Model Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Grid Model page, where
the grid model and the data type can be selected.
22.5.5.1 Grid Model Settings

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Grid Model Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the grid model can be defined.
Figure 22-82 The Grid Model Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Grid Model Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the grid model.
 Cells
If the option Use limits is checked, then only the grid model cells with a
depth between the minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If the option Show cells is checked, then the cells will be plotted with
the colors of the selected color table in the Plan Panel page (see page
With the option Points it 738). The option Points will plot a point in the center of each cell and
will take a long time before
the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
the Preview or the DXF is
generated. If the option Use Sun Illumination is checked, then the sun illumination
settings will be used to change the look of the grid model. This is only
working when for Show Cells the option Solid is selected.
If the option Show labels is checked, then depth values will be plotted
on top of the grid model with the label spacing as specified. The label
spacing is related to the selected scale in the Plan Panel page.
 Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be
plotted, starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.

22.5.6 Contours Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Contours page, where the
grid model and data type can be selected that will be used to generate the
contours.
22.5.6.1 Contours Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Contours Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the contours of the grid model can be
defined.
Figure 22-83 The Contours Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Contours Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the contours of the grid model.
 Contouring
Define the criteria for plotting the contours lines and the labels.
The option Suppress contours shorter defines that plot contour lines
shorter than the specified value will not be plotted.
The option Contour label spacing defines the spacing between two
labels on the same contour line. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Plan Panel page (see page 738).
The option Label orientation defines how the labels in the contours will
be plotted. Use Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the
orientation of the plan view to plot the labels. Slope Upwards and
Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards
up or downwards up.
The option Smoothing window can be used to smooth the generated
contours, from no smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in
between.
 Contour Levels
A contour definition file has to be selected. This file has to be
generated before the DXF Export Wizard is started. See page 273 for
information about the contour definition file.

22.5.7 Runlines Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Runlines page, where the
runlines file can be selected.
22.5.7.1 Runlines Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Runlines Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the runlines can be defined.
Figure 22-84 The Runlines Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Runlines Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the runlines file.
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the runlines.
 Labels
If the option Show runline labels is checked then the names of the
runlines will be displayed with the offset as specified.
 Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 738).

22.5.8 Waypoints Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Waypoints page, where
the waypoints file can be selected.
22.5.8.1 Waypoints Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Waypoints Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the waypoints can be defined.
Figure 22-85 The Waypoints Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Waypoints Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the waypoints.
 Options
Select a symbol for the waypoints, Circle or Cross. Specify the size for
the symbol in mm.
If the option Show tolerance circles is checked, the tolerance circles
will be plotted around the waypoint.
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the tolerance circles.
 Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 738).

22.5.9 Options and Preview Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Options and Preview
page, where the user can decide to preview the created plot before the
DXF file is created and in which DXF version has to be created.
Figure 22-86 The Options and Preview page of the DXF Export Wizard
Select under Options which DXF version has to be exported.

Click on to start the preview. It can take some time before the
preview is displayed, it will depend on which layers are selected in the
wizard.
The preview window can be closed and the user comes back in the
Preview page. If the plot is not OK click on to go back to the right
page to make the modifications. If the plot is OK click on to start
the DXF export.

23 Quick Profile Plot
23.1 introduction
The Quick Profile Plot is a tool to generate quickly profile plots based on a
plot template. The Quick Profile Plot uses the plot template in combination
with user specified data, like runlines and grid models.
Before the Quick Profile Plot can be started a plot project with a plot
template has to be created in the Plot (see page 689). The plot template
should be a profile plot based on runlines. Next to the runlines, file sets,
grid models, design models and text can be used to setup the plot
template. For each runline as selected in the runlines files a different
profile plot will be generated.
The Quick Profile Plot can be started with Tools > Quick Profile Plot from
the control Center menu bar.
23.2 Quick Profile Plot Setup

The Quick Profile Plot will be opened with no plot project and plot
template specified. Specify the plot project and from the plot project the
plot template that has to be used in the Quick Profile Plot. Automatically
all the runlines files used in the project that is related to the plot project
will be displayed.
Figure 23-1 Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Quick Profile Plot  745

In the tabs Filesets, DTM, Design and Text the right files for the profiles
plots can be selected and also the right text can be specified.
Under Select Runlines the runlines files or a set of runlines can be
selected which will be used to generate the profile plots.
23.2.1 Filesets
Figure 23-2 Tab Filesets in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template log data is specified as a layer
then with this tab the file set for the profile plots can be specified. Click on
to select an existing log data file set in the project for the
selected layer.
23.2.2 DTM
Figure 23-3 Tab DTM in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a grid model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the grid model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on to select an existing grid model in the
project for the selected layer.
746  Quick Profile Plot Teledyne PDS - User Manual

23.2.3 Design
Figure 23-4 Tab Design in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a design model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the design model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on the arrow in , select the model that will be
used (a profile design model, a grid model or a 3D design model) and
select then an existing model in the project for the selected layer.
23.2.4 Text
Figure 23-5 Tab Text in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a text block is specified as a

layer then with this tab the text for the profile plots can be specified. Click
on to set the text for the selected text block.

23.3 Quick Profile Plot Options
In the Quick Profile Plot the setup can be saved and opened again, the
profile plots can printed, plot files and DXF files can be generated.
 If the setup with the file selections is saved, the saved setup can be
opened again. Before
selected.
is used the plot project has to be
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with the name of the plot template.
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with a name specified by the user.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a preview
of the plot will be displayed. Click on in the preview file plot to
close the preview and continue with the preview of the next selected
runline. The preview can be stopped by closing the file plot preview
with .
For the selected runline in the General tab a preview of the plot will be
displayed. Click on or to close the preview.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file with the name of the plot template and a sequence number.
After the plot files are generated they will be printed.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file.
A dialog will be opened to define the plot file name. The name can be
the plot template name, the name of the runline or a name specified by
the user. The plot files will be generated with the defined name and a
sequence number. The plot files with the runline name do not have a
sequence number.
Before the DXF file can be created the plot files has to be generated
as discussed above in the option .
After the plot files are generated for each plot file a DXF file will be
created and will be placed in the plot project directory.
If a lot of DXF files has to be created, it can take a long time before the
 creation of all the DXF files is finished. Move the cursor over the plot
icon ( ) in the taskbar and a display will tell the user how many tasks
(DXF files) still have to be processed. In the example below still 176
DXF files has to be created.
Figure 23-6 Still 176 DXF files has to be created
748  Quick Profile Plot Teledyne PDS - User Manual

The Quick Profile Plot will be closed and the setup will not be saved.

24 Batch Plot
24.1 Introduction
The Batch Plot is a tool to generate a plot with grid model data based on
a plot template. The Batch Plot uses a plot template in combination with
user specified XYZ data.
Before the Batch Plot can be started a plot project with a plot template
has to be created in the Plot. The plot template should be a plot with a
grid model in the plan.
The Batch Plot is started with Tools > Batch Plot from the Control Center
menu bar.
24.2 Batch Plot Dialog

The Batch Plot will open without any data or information selected. When a
setup is saved it is possible to open a setup so all the data and
information is loaded.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Batch Plot  751

Figure 24-1 Batch Plot
Survey data
A XYZ file have to be selected with . From this XYZ data file a grid
model will be generated and that grid model will replace the grid model
in the plot template.
The Name Prefix is automatically generated when the XYZ data file is
selected. The user can modified the prefix if he wants. The prefix
name will be used in the plot file and in the DXF file.
Check the option XYZ file contains Depths when the Z values in the
XYZ data file are depths. This is necessary because the depths in the
 grid model are negative heights. So the Z values from the XYZ file get
a minus sign when the option is checked.
DTM
The generated grid model will Set the cell size for the grid model that have to be generated from the
be store with the name of the XYZ data file. The cell size doesn’t have to be the same as in the XYZ
XYZ file in the project. data file.
752  Batch Plot Teledyne PDS - User Manual

If there are gaps in the data or the grid model cell size is smaller than
the size in the XYZ data file then the data in the grid model can be
interpolated. As interpolation methods are available Circular and
Triangular. For more information about the interpolation (see page
659 and page 660).
In the grid model the Hit Count is always present. The user can select
which data types should be in the grid model, he can choose between
Z Average, Z Minimum (Deepest) and Z Maximum (Highest). The data
type that is used in the plot template should always be selected
otherwise no data will be plotted. The other two data types are extra.
 When there is an interpolation and all three data types are selected
then for all three an interpolation will be done.
Plot selection
Select a plot project with . In this plot project the plot template
should be available.
Add one or more plot templates from the selected plot project for which
the generated grid model is valid.
Text labels
The text labels as defined in the plot template can be modified in the
column ‘User Text’. This modified text will be used in the plot which will
be generated.
A Batch Plot setup file (BPP file) can be opened. This file contains all
the information to set all the items in the Batch Plot dialog.
Saves a modified setup to the related BPP file.
Saves the setup and specify the name for the BPP file.
Opens the Print Setup dialog to setup the printer.
Prints the generated plot to the printer that is selected in the Print
Setup dialog.
Creates a plot file with the prefix name, date and time in the selected
plot project.
Creates a DXF file with the prefix name, date and time in the project
folder.
Closes the Batch Plot dialog without saving the setup in a BPP file.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Batch Plot  753

25 Import
25.1 Introduction
On several places in PDS data files can be imported and converted to
information that can be used in PDS. The different import possibilities will
be discussed in the different modules of PDS.
From the PDS Control Center it is also possible to import files.
The import in the Control Center is made to convert data files to PDS log
data files.
If the Select Tool dialog is
not visible, select File > Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Import or click on in the
New from the menu bar or toolbar to open the PDS Import Utility. When the PDS Import Utility
click on in the toolbar window is opened it will be an empty window with the Select Tool dialog
to open the dialog. on top of it.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Import  755

25.2 Import Utility
Figure 25-1 PDS Import Utility
Select in the Select Tool dialog the type of import for which a new import
configuration has to be created or select an existing import configuration.
An existing import configuration can also be opened with File > Open from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar.
If a new import configuration has to be created it is also possible to use
an existing import configuration file as a base. Check the option Copy
from existing config file and select the file that has to be used as a start.
At the end of the configuration the new import configuration can be saved
by clicking on in the toolbar or select File > Save As… from the menu
bar.
If there is already an import configuration that can be used with the import
files check the option Open existing and select the right import
configuration.
At the moment the PDS Import Utility can import the following data:
 Single Beam XYZ (see below)
 XTF (see page 765)
 S7K (see page 766)
 SZ (see page 768)
 Simrad EM3000 (see page 769)
 GeoSwath (.rdf) (see page 770)
 BlueView (.son) (see page 772)
 EdgeTech (.jsf) (see page 773)
 Marine Sonic Technology (.mst) (see page 774)
756  Import Teledyne PDS - User Manual

 Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) (see page 774)
 Klein (.sdf) (see page 775)
25.3 Single Beam XYZ Import
Figure 25-2 First page of the Single Beam XYZ Import
The three different XYZ options are:

ASCII (X,Y,Z)
Contains X, Y, Z data with or without an ID to identify the line.
ASCII Customised
Contains X, Y, Z data. It is also possible to have in each line a date, a
time and an ID.
Navisoft PRD
This is the ASCII output file from Navisoft.
Select one of the three formats, select the number of channels in the data
file(s) and the sign convention for the Z-value. Click on to start
the setup of the import configuration or to check the import configuration if
an existing configuration. If an existing import configuration is selected or
the import wizard is finished, click on to start the import of the
data.
For the Navisoft PRD files it is not necessary to open the import
configuration file. The user can click on and select the PRD files
for the import.
With the import configuration will be opened. It will depend on the
selection of the XYZ format and the number of channels which pages will
appear before the actual import can be started.

25.3.1 ASCII File Options
Figure 25-3 ASCII File Options page in the import configuration
This page will only appear when ASCII Customised is selected.

The options are:
Parsing with filter ID’s
Check this option when ID’s are present in the data file(s) and the ID’s
will be used to specify the data lines.
Timetag parsing
Date and time are available in the data file(s).
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate
No date or time is available in the data file(s). With this option a date
and a time will be generated from the manual information which can be
set in one of the other pages in the import utility (see page 760).

25.3.2 Runline Options
Figure 25-4 Runline Options page in the import configuration
This page will appear when ASCII (X,Y,Z) or ASCII Customised is

selected.
The options are:
Pick runline from project
An existing runline from the project have to be selected in the next
page.
Parse X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 to generate runline
Extract from the data file(s) with the use of an ID the start and end
coordinates of the runline (s).
Create runline from rough estimate of XYZ data
Calculate the start and end coordinates of the runline from the first and
last X and Y in the data file.
There is a restriction in the order of information in the data file(s) when the
runline information is extracted from the data file(s) with option Parse X1,
Y1, X2 and Y2 … The data file(s) can contain more sets of XYZ data,
where the first line in the data set starts with the ID of the runline and the
X1, Y1, X2 and Y2. The following lines should contain the ID for the XYZ
data and the XYZ data. If after the XYZ data a line contains the ID for the
runline again then a new file with a new runline and XYZ data will be
created.

25.3.3 File Selection
Figure 25-5 File Selection page in the import configuration
This page will appear for all three formats. The number of columns on this
page depends on the selections in the pages before.
Click on to add a data file to the file selection. If in the runline
options page (see page 759) the option Pick runline from project is
checked and/or in the ASCII file options page (see page 758) the option
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate is checked, an Edit
Import File Settings window will be opened after the selection of the
file(s).
Figure 25-6 Import file settings for the import data file
Import file
The added data file from the File Selection page.
Runline File
Select with an existing runline from the project.
This option will be shown if the option Pick runline from project in the
run line options page is checked (see page 759).
The next three fields will be shown if the options Timetag generation from
start time and ping rate in the ASCII file options page (see page 758) is
checked or the ASCII (X,Y,Z) data file with or without an ID is selected.

Start date
Click on next to the date and select in the calendar the right start
date.
Figure 25-7 Calendar
Start time
Set the right start time of the first XYZ in the data file. Select the hours,
minutes or seconds with the mouse, type in the right value or use the
up and down arrows to change the numbers.
Ping rate (Hz)
Set the frequency for the XYZ data; how many times per second is the
XYZ data presented in the data file.
Click on in the Edit Import File Settings window to go back to the
file selection page. With in the file selection page, the Edit Import
File Settings window can be opened to check or modify the import file
settings. will only be active if a runline, date or time can be set.
If all the data files are added and the runline, date and time are set, click
on .
25.3.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards
Figure 25-8 ASCII parsing in the import configuration
To click on behind one of the options will start the wizard for the right
settings of the selected option. It depends on the selection of the ASCII
data file and on the selections made in the pages before which parsing
options will be available on this page.

The different parsing options can be:
1. Parsing Of Date, Time, X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
2. Parsing Of X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
3. Parsing Of X1, Y1, X2, Y2 For Runline
Option 1 and 2 starts with the parsing of the XYZ data (see below). After
that option 1 will continue with the parsing of the date and time (see page
764) and option 2 will be finished. Option 3 is a separate parsing option
(see page 765).
If the parsing of one of the options is finish a checkmark ( ) will be
placed before the option. If all the parsing is done will become
active. Click on and the first page of the import utility will be
opened again.
25.3.5 Parsing XYZ Data
Figure 25-9 Settings for parsing the XYZ data
On this page the settings for the XYZ data are set, so that on the next
page the right columns with XYZ data can be selected.
File
The filename displayed in the file box is the first file from the file
selection page. At the bottom, in ‘Preview Data’, the data of that file is
shown.
Original data type
Delimited. Check this option if the data is separated with a delimiter,
such as a comma, a tab or a space.
Fixed Width. Check this options if the data is aligned in columns with
spaces in between.
Skip lines
Check this option if the first line(s) of the data file(s) contains

information that is not runline data or XYZ data.
Give a number for the number of lines that have to be skipped.
Line ID
Give an ID for the lines that have to be extracted from the data file. If
an ID is given, the preview data will change and will only show the
lines in the data file with the given ID. In the example shown above,
the ID for the XYZ data is ‘EC’ and for the runline ‘RT’.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing XYZ data.
Figure 25-10 Select the delimited columns in the data file
This page will appear when Delimited is checked on the first page of
parsing XYZ data. If Fixed Width is checked the page will be similar as
the page for parsing the date and time, only the sub items will be X, Y, Z
and optional date and time (see page 764).
On this page the delimiter and the columns have to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data fields. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
If in the ASCII file options Fields
page (see page 758) the If a column is selected in ‘Select Column Names’, a column number
option Timetag parsing is will be added to the selected field name.
checked, also the date and
the time column have to be Select column names
selected. Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column.

If all the columns which are necessary for the import are selected, the
button will become active (only for parsing XYZ data). Click on
and go back to the first page of the import utility.
If the parsing contains a date and time, the ASCII Parsing Wizard will
continue with parsing date and time (see below).
25.3.6 Parsing Date And Time

The next type of page will appear when a date and a time column is
selected in parsing XYZ data on page 763 or when Fixed Width is
selected as delimiter in the first page of parsing XYZ data on page 762.
Figure 25-11 Select the month in the date column
The locations of the year, month and day in the date column are defined
with a start and end position in the column.
Double click in ‘Column For Field Name:’ on year, month or day and an
edit window will be opened.
Start Position
Set the start position of the item; in the example above the month
(here 02) starts at position 5.
Stop Position
Set the stop (end) position of the item; in the example above the
month (here 02) stops at position 6.
Factor
The multiplication factor should be 1.
Offset
An offset can be added to the selected item value to get the right
value. If for instance the year is presented in the data file as 05, then
with an offset of 2000 the year becomes 2005.
If the year, month and day are set, click on to go to the page for
parsing the time. This page works similar as the page for parsing the

date, only here are the items hour, minute, second and millisecond. If the
hour, minute and second is set (millisecond is optional) becomes
active.
25.3.7 Parsing Runline Data

If in the runline options page (see page 759) the option Parse X1, Y1, X2
and Y2 to generate runline is checked, a page will be opened to set the
settings for the runline data in the data file.
This page will be similar to the first page of the parsing XYZ data on page
762. Give on this page an ID for the line where the X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 are
defined.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing runline data.
This second page will similar to the second page of parsing XYZ data
(see page 762). On this page four columns have to be selected before
will become active.
25.4 XTF Import
Figure 25-12 XTF Import page
Click on to select the XTF file for the import. It is possible to add
more XTF files before the import is started.
Check one of the options Import sidescan data, Import snippet data or
Import tide data if side scan data, snippets or tide data is available in the
XTF file(s) and have to be imported.
Click on to start the import of the XTF file(s).

25.5 S7K Import
Figure 25-13 S7K Import page
Click on to select the S7K file for the import. It is possible to add
more S7K files before the import is started.
For bathymetry data at least the following records should be logged in the
 S7K file:
 For Position :1003; or 1015
  For Heading and Attitude: 1004; or 1011 and 1012; or 1016

 For Bathymetry: 7000, 7004 and 7006; or 7000, 7004 and 7027
Check one of the options Import sidescan data or Import snippet data if
side scan data or snippets data is available in the S7K file(s) and have to
be imported.
When the data is logged with a survey vessel check the option Surface
Vessel and when the data is logged with an underwater vehicle, like a
ROV or AUV, check the option Subsea Vessel.
Click on to start the import of the S7K file(s).
25.5.1 Offsets
When in the S7K file(s) the record 7030 is missing, automatically an
offsets dialog will be opened. The offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel can be added manually or loaded from a file.
In the file all the items in the dialog should be mentioned with the terms as
displayed below in the text file.

Figure 25-14 Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog
Figure 25-15 Offsets dialog in the Import
Check the option Apply to all files when for all the S7K files in the import
the same offsets have to be applied.

25.6 SZ Import
Figure 25-16 SZ Import page
Click on to add SZ files to the list. If the SZ data contains records

with survey data (record 2122), the ‘Grid model settings’ becomes
relevant. The survey data will be placed in a grid model. The default
setting for the ‘Interpolation’ is No interpolation. If the user wants to fill the
grid model, select the option Interpolate circular and the empty cells
between the runlines will be interpolated. This circular interpolation will
take a long time. The cell size of the grid model can be set, with the
smaller the cell size the more detailed the grid model is and the longer it
takes to fill the grid model.
Click on to start the import of the added SZ files. It will depend on
the information in the SZ file, what will be generated in the import. For SZ
files with design information the following files will be generated.
 3D Model file with the design profiles.
 3D Model file with the GLW values (levels).
 Track Guidance Route file with the route of the axis of the river.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river.
 Runline file with the reference lines for the left and right side of the
sailing channel, for the left and right side of the river and for the axis of
the river.

For SZ files with survey data the following files will be generated.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river. If also design
information is available in the SZ file, this file is identical with the
runline file mentioned above.
 Grid Model file with the survey data and with the interpolated data if
applicable.
 PDS log data files for each cross line.
 Log data file set with all the PDS log data files mentioned above.
25.7 Simrad EM3000 Import
Figure 25-17 Simrad EM3000 Import page
Click on to select the ALL files for the import. It is possible to add
more ALL files before the import is started.
Check the option Apply imported sound velocity profile to PDS file when
the imported sound velocity profile data from the ALL file has to be
 applied to the created PDS logdata file. When more ALL files have the
same sound velocity profile only one sound velocity profile file is created
in PDS.
Click on to start the import of the Simrad EM3000 file(s).

25.8 GeoSwath Import
Figure 25-18 GeoSwath Import page
Click on to select the Kongsberg Maritime GeoSwath RDF files. It is

possible to add more GeoSwath RDF files before the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the GeoSwath RDF files.
An offset dialog box will be opened.

Figure 25-19 Offsets dialog GeoSwath RDF import
The Offset dialog box contains the offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel as read from the GeoSwath RDF file.
When the RDF file(s) does not contain these offsets they are 0 in the
offsets dialog box. The user should enter them manually or load them
from a file.
Click to load the offsets from a file. Click to save
the offsets to a file.
Check the ‘Apply to all files’ checkbox to apply the offsets to

all GeoSwath RDF files as added to be imported.

25.9 BlueView Son Import
Figure 25-20 Blueview Son Import
Click to add BlueView Son Sonar files. It is possible to add more

SON files before the import is started.
Select the Import wedge checkbox to import also wedge (image) data
from the son file. (Only applicable if the file contains wedge data)
Select the Import water column checkbox to import water column data
from the son file. (Only applicable if the file contains water column data)
Importing wedge and / or water column data results in large file sizes.
Select the vessel type. (of the recorded son file)
Select the detection threshold. Detections lower as the set threshold are
rejected.
Click on to start the import of the BlueView (.son) file(s).
An offset dialog opens if the son file does not contain device offsets. Set
the offsets.
Press to load the offsets from a file.
Press to save the entered offsets in a file.
Press to continue the import.

Figure 25-21 Offsets dialog
25.10 EdgeTech (.jsf) Import
Figure 25-22 EdgeTech (.jsf) import page
Click on to select the EdgeTech (.jsf) file for the import. It is

possible to add more EdgeTech (.jsf) files before the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the EdgeTech (.jsf) file(s).

25.11 Marine Sonic Technology (.mst) Import
Figure 25-23 Marine Sonic Technologu (.mst) import page
Click on to select the Marine Sonic Technology (.mst) file for the
import. It is possible to add more Marine Sonic Technology files before
the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the Marine Sonic Technology (.mst)
file(s).
25.12 Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) Import
Figure 25-24 Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) import page

Click on to select the Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) file for the
import. It is possible to add more Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) files
before the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the Marine Sonic Data Stream
(.sds) file(s).
25.13 Klein (.sdf) Import
Figure 25-25 Klein (.sdf) import page
Click on to select the Klein (.sdf) file for the import. It is possible to
add more Klein (.sdf) files before the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the Klein (.sdf) file(s).

25.14 Pico MB Multibeam Data (.dat) Import
Figure 25-26 Pico MB multieam data import
Click on to select the Pico MB (.dat) file for the import. It is possible
to add more files before the import is started.
Click on to start the import of the Pico MB (.dat) file(s).
 Cancel the offset dialog. A Pico MB (.dat) file includes only multibeam
data and no navigation data.
Be aware to process data, is navigation data needed and must be added
in the post processing.
25.15 Save Import Configuration

When the import was successful the import configuration can be saved
with File > Save or File > Save As...from the menu bar or with from
the toolbar.
If the PDS Import Utility is closed without saving the import configuration,
the program will ask to save the import configuration.
The next time the same type of data files have to be imported the import
configuration can be selected.
For a single beam XYZ import click on and the file selection page
(see page 760) will be opened. After the to be imported files are selected,
click on and the import will start.
For a XTF, a S7K, a SZ and a Simrad EM3000 import add the files and
click on to start the import.

25.16 PDS Log Data File
The created PDS log data files are automatically placed in a File Set
which is used in the Editing (see pagexx).
The format of the created log data files is similar to the standard PDS log
data files. The log data file created through the import will look like:
Import name[Application type]_Runline name-date-time.pds
where:
Import name
ImportSingle Beam - 01; the import name is contains the file name of
the data file; here ‘Single Beam - 01.asc’.
Application type
The application type will be the application type of the active project.
Runline name
In the single beam XYZ import a runline name can be selected. This
runline name will be written in the log data file name.
If the runline is made with the start and end X and Y or the X1,Y1,X2
and Y2 from the XYZ data file, then the runline name will always be
‘Runline.0’. This runline will not be created in the project, but is only
available with the data of the log data file.
In the S7K import the runline name is always ‘Runline.0’, which is
generated from the start and end coordinates in the file.
In the SZ import the runline name is always the runline as used in the
SZ file. That means that for each runline in the SZ file a separate log
data file will be generated.
In the XTF import and in the Simrad EM3000 import the runline name
is always ‘NO_LINE’, which means no runline is defined.
date-time
The date and time of the import.

26 Export
26.1 Introduction
The export utility in Teledyne PDS (PDS) is made to export the PDS log
data files to file formats which can be used with external programs.
The export can be started with Tools > Export from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Control Center.
26.1.1 Export Configuration File

When the export utility is started the Export window is opened. In this
window a dialog is opened with the options to create a new export
configuration file or select one of the existing files.
Figure 26-1 Dialog in the Export window to select or create an export

configuration file
If an export configuration file is not created or selected in the dialog

shown above and the user clicks on , it is still possible through the
menu bar or the toolbar to create or select an export configuration file.
Select File > New from the menu bar or from the toolbar to create a
new export configuration file. Select File > Open… from the menu bar or
from the toolbar to open an existing export configuration file.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Export  779

26.1.2 Export Type
After a new export configuration file name is created the export type has
to be selected.
Figure 26-2 Selecting export type
The different export types available in PDS at the moment are:

Microsoft Excel has to be Excel
installed on the computer, One ‘Excel’ file is created with for each log data file, that is selected in
otherwise no Excel export the file set, a separate workbook page. See on page 782 for more
possible. details about this export type.
Simrad EM Datagram
‘Simrad EM3000’ format with a fixed filename and the extension .ALL.
This format is an industry accepted standard format for multibeam
data. Raw data files in this format can be processed with Caris HDCS
cleaning software. See on page 785 for more details about this export
type.
Comma Separated
One ASCII file with the extension .CSV is created with all the selected
data items. If this file is opened in ‘Excel’ there is only one workbook
page. See on page 782 for more details about this export type.
Multibeam points (ASCII)
A space separated XYZ ASCII file with a fixed filename and the
extension .XYZ. Optional the time of the sway, the beam number and
the quality flag can be exported. The data is filtered according the
criteria of the sensor computation. A further data reduction is possible.
Next to the normal file format, a Sonar Swath file (with .IDA extension)
and a latitude, longitude and Z in WGS’84 are possible. See on page
785 for more details about this export type.
XTF
A XTF file with a fixed filename and the extension .XTF. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data. This data can
contain multibeam, side scan sonar, and/or snippets data. See on
page 787 for more details about this export type.
S7K
A S7K file with a fixed filename and the extension .S7K. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data where a RESON
SeaBat 7K system is logged. The data can contain multibeam, side
scan sonar and/or snippets data. The same records as for the S7K
logging format (see page 152) will be exported. See on page 789 for
more details about this export type.
SDS
’Helical SDS’ (Self Defining Structure) file with a fixed filename and the
extension .SDS. This is a format to handle large amount of multibeam
data. Next to the SDS file, a CTL (Control) file will be exported. The
format of this CTL file will depend on the selected SDS settings. The
SDS file in combination with the CTL file can be read with the Helical
software. See on page 790 for more details about this export type.
SZ
An ASCII file with the extension SZ. This is a format for the
780  Export Teledyne PDS - User Manual

presentation and archiving of design information and echo sounder
measurements on the rivers and along the coast in Germany. See on
page 791 for more details about this export type.
Magnetometer DAT
A text file with the extension DAT. The file contains an order number
for the runlines, the distance over the runline and for each channel of
the magnetometer the X, Y and signal will be exported. See on page
792 for more details about this export type.
FAU
A binary file with the extension FAU. The file contains multibeam data.
See on page 793 for more details about this export type.
GSF
A file with the extension GSF. The file contains multibeam data. See
on page 793 for more information about this export type.
Backscatter points (ASCII)
An ASCII file with the extension XYZ. The file contains position and
backscatter data.
UKOOA P1/90
An ASCII file with the extension P190 the format contains besides
project configuration parameters, multibeam data which could
optionally be disabled.
26.2 Export Window

After the export type is selected the standard PDS File Set Editor is
opened (see page 493). Select the file set or create a new file set for the
export.
After a file set is selected for the export the export setup will be opened.
Figure 26-3 Export setup with a selected file set
It will depend on the export type which tabs (pages) are available in the
export setup. The File Sets page is identical for all the export types. On
the File Sets page the file set can be selected, modified or created. With
in the export window, with from the toolbar or with Actions >
Select Data from the menu bar the File Set Editor is opened.
The other pages will be discussed below with the different export types.

26.2.1 Excel and Comma Separated
The export types ‘Excel’ and ‘Comma Separated’ have nearly the same
export setup.
 For the Excel export it is necessary that Microsoft Excel is installed on the
computer. If not it is not possible to export to an Excel file.
The Options page of both export types is almost identical. In this page the
export format can be specified.
Figure 26-4 Options page for Excel and Comma Separated export
Correlated
In case two or more sensors are selected in the Data Selection page,
one of the sensors can be selected as reference at correlated. All the
other sensor data is recalculated for the time of the selected reference
sensor. The exported file includes now for the selected reference
sensor data the (in time) corresponding data of the other sensor(s). In
the example below a file was exported with the correlated option
selected and the positioning device selected as reference. For each
position the corresponding attitude and runline is shown.

Figure 26-5 Exported file with correlated option selected
If the correlated option is not selected the export file may contain lines
with ‘empty’ columns because the data of the various devices may be
recorded with a different interval.
In the next example the correlation option is not selected. The time
interval of the attitude sensor was shorter than that of the positioning
resulting in more attitude data. The attitude data column has more
data as the others. The position data does not correspond with the
attitude data (in time).
Figure 26-6 Exported file with correlated option not selected
It is possible to convert in Time

Excel ANSI time to Excel time If checked, every sensor gets its own time column. When ‘Correlated’
is checked there will be only one time column, the time of the

by applying in Excel the correlated sensor. The column ‘Time’ can be exported in Excel format
formula: (days since 1st of January 1900) or in ANSI format (seconds since 1st
Excel time=25569+(ANSI time/86400) of January 1970).
Select in Excel the cell format
custom and as type:
dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.00 ,to
display the Excel time
‘readable’ in Excel.
Header
A header line is written above the data with the file info.
Title row
Each column gets a title above the data with the name of the data.
Open output after export
For the Excel export is the This option is not available for the export type Comma Separated. The
option ‘Post export action’ export file will be opened in Microsoft Excel after the export is finished.
not necessary, because
the file can be opened Post export action
automatically with the If Enable is checked then the exported file will be opened with the
option ‘Open output after program that is specified behind ‘Execute’. If the file has to be opened
export’. in for instance Notepad, the command should be ‘Notepad %F’.
Timed Output
Instead of exporting all the selected data, a time interval can be
defined. If for instance the time interval is 10 sec then every 10 sec
one record of the data will be exported. When ‘Correlated’ is checked
then the time of the correlated sensor will be used as counter.
The Data Selection page is for both export types identical. With the data
selection a data item or a data block can be selected and placed in the
export list.
Figure 26-7 Data Selection page with an export list

26.2.2 Simrad EM Datagram
In the Options page for the export type ‘Simrad EM Datagram’ the depth
can be set.
Figure 26-8 Options page for Simrad EM Datagram export
Depth relative sea level

The depth values are computed relative to sea level.
Depth relative chart datum
The depth values are computed relative to the chart datum.
26.2.3 Multibeam Points

In the Options page for the export type ‘Multibeam Points’ the format type
and the data reduction can be specified.
Figure 26-9 Options page for Multibeam points (ASCII) export

Format type
Normal
A standard XYZ format is exported.
When the options Insert timestamp at start of swath and Insert
beam number and intensity are checked the time, the beam
number and the intensity will be inserted. At the start of each sway
the timestamp is added to the file, before the XYZ the beam
number is added and at the end the intensity of the beam.
The file contains per ping, if all the options are checked:
Date Time
Beam number Easting Northing Depth Intensity
Beam number Easting Northing Depth Intensity
...
Sonar swath (.IDA)
This a special format for the Sonar Swath utility.
Timed XYZ data with ping no. quality flag
This is a special format with for each XYZ the ping number, the
beam angle and a quality flag.
The beam angle is the launch angle.
The quality flag can be a number from 0 (zero) to 15. The number
is build up of 4 bits of 0’s (zero) and/or 1’s (one), with:
 Bit 0 – Brightness
1 = pass and 0 = fail.
 Bit 1 – Colinearity
1 = pass and 0 = fail.
 Bit 2 – Bottom Detect Process (Magnitude)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
 Bit 3 – Bottom Detect Process (Phase)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
A quality flag of 7 (= 1110) means brightness passed, colinearity
passed, magnitude used and phase not used.
The file contains per record:
Date Time Ping number Beam angle Northing
Easting Depth Quality flag
Timed XYZ data with Beam no. and quality flag
This is a special format with the time and ping number and for each
XYZ the beam number and the incident angle of the beam.
The quality flag can be a number from 0 (zero) to 15. The number
is buildup of 4 bits of 0’s (zero) and/or 1’s (one), see above.
The file contains per ping:
Ping number Date Time
Beam number Northing Easting Depth Incident angle
Beam number Northing Easting Depth Incident angle
…
Latitude, Longitude and Z (WGS 84)
This is a special format with for each beam the latitude, longitude
and depth. The latitude and longitude are in WGS’84 coordinates.
When the option Use project format settings is checked the latitude
and longitude will be exported in the format as defined in the
Formats of the Project Configuration(see page 73).
The file contains per record:
Latitude Longitude Depth

With the option Use project format settings not checked the format
is:
48.00216612 -7.07492140 -54.78
The format in the project configuration is geographicals in ‘Degrees
Minutes Seconds’ and the number of decimals for the
geographicals is 4.
Then with the option Use project format settings checked the
format is:
48°00’07.7980”N 07°04’29.7170”W -54.78
RWS XYZ Date Time
This is a special format for RWS. The file contains per ping Easting
Northing Depth Date Time
Data reduction settings
When the option Use data reduction is checked a data reduction can
be set.
Tolerance
Is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous Z-value
(in meters). If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.1m)
the data point is added to the file.
Minimum distance
The total distance between the start and end point of a sway is
defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance (e.g. 10%) a point
at every 10% is added to the file, even if the tolerance criteria is not
valid.
Post export actions
This option is only active when as format type Sonar swath (.IDA) is
selected. When the option Open output is checked then after the
export of the selected files the utility Sonar Swath will be opened.
26.2.4 XTF
In the Options page for the export type ‘XTF’ the XTF settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 26-10 Options page for XTF export
Click on to open the XTF settings wizard. The wizard contains

three pages where the data can be selected for the export.

Figure 26-11 First page of the XTF Settings Wizard
On the first page the data types have to be selected. For the export at
least one of the three data sources, multibeam, side scan or snippets,
have to be selected. If at least one of them is selected the user can also
choose to export the attitude and/or position data.
If the option Automatic selection of devices is checked, the export utility
takes always the primary data sources or the data sources that is set as
primary through the automatic switch in the data sources page of the
vessel configuration (see page 130). If the option is not checked the user
can select which data source is used for the export. The automatic switch
will be ignored.
Click on to go to the second page of the XTF settings wizard.
Figure 26-12 Second page of the XTF Settings Wizard

If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is not checked, the
user can select which device is used for the export.
Click on to select for the VRU, the compass or the position another
data source. For the multibeam, the side scan or the snippets the
selected device can be deleted or another one can be added to the list.
If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is checked, there is
nothing to select on this page, this page is then pure for information to the
user.
Click on to go to the last page of the XTF settings wizard.
Figure 26-13 Last page of the XTF Settings Wizard
The third and the last page of the wizard is for the altitude estimation. If a
side scan sonar is selected on the first page of the wizard, the user can
select how the altitude estimation is calculated for the side scan sonar.
For ROV operations the XTF format needs the depth of the ROV relative
 to sea level. If in the ROV configuration no depth sensor is used, the
option Vessel configuration is for ROV has to be checked.
Click on to finish the XTF settings wizard.
26.2.5 S7K
Next to the File Sets page nothing has to be specified for the S7K export.
The S7K export file contains the same records, if available, as specified
for the S7K logging (see page 152).
 There is difference between a s7k file recorded by the RESON multibeam

system and a s7k recorded/exported by PDS. PDS translates the
antenna position and attitude data to the vessel reference point because
PDS supports switching between positioning systems and attitude
systems (data source switching.) See S7K logging (on page 152).

26.2.6 SDS
In the Options page for the export type ‘SDS’ the SDS settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 26-14 Options page for SDS export
Click on to open the SDS settings.
Figure 26-15 SDS settings
It depends on the selected settings which CTL file will be exported next to
the SDS file. The four CTL files are:
 Grid coordinates with all the data (GridCoordsFull.ctl).
 Geographical coordinates with all the data (GeoCoordsFull.ctl).
 Grid coordinates with position, time and depth (GridCoordsBasic.ctl).
 Geographical coordinates with position, time and depth
(GeoCoordsBasic.ctl).
In all four CTL files the data will be as the selection for the depth
reference.

26.2.7 SZ
In the Options page for the export type ‘SZ’ the export file name can be
defined, the channels and the data reduction can be set.
The user has to fill in a list with SZ records, which are not available in the
PDS log data file.
Figure 26-16 Options page for SZ export
Channel
The user can select which channel or both channels has to be
exported from the PDS log data file(s).
Data reduction settings
If the option Use data reduction is checked the data will be reduced
with the value as defined with Interval in m. This means that each
interval value data will be exported.
Aufnameart
Select the measure method that was used during logging the echo
sounder data.
3D model GLW
The echo sounder data will be corrected for the GLW value(s)
belonging to be exported runline(s). This will be done with the GLW
value(s) as specified in the selected 3D model.

26.2.8 Magnetometer DAT
In the Options page for the export type ‘Magnetometer’ the export file
format can be selected.
Figure 26-17 Options page for Magnetometer export
The user can choose between an export in Bartel ASCII DAT format or in
Standard UXO format. If the user choose for the standard UXO format
some extra settings can be defined.
File header include file
It is possible the add a header file to the UXO export file. Click on
and select an UXO file as header file. The path and file
name will be displayed in the text field.
Decimal symbol
There can be chosen between a Dot or a Comma as decimal sign in
the numbers in the UXO file.
Relative coordinate origin
In the UXO file the local grid coordinates X and Y are written. If these
numbers are to big to use in other programs an origin can be defined
so the grid coordinates in the UXO file getting smaller. The Northing
and Easting as entered will be subtracted from the local grid
coordinates.
Sensor height
The sensor height will be written in the UXO file as the Z value.

26.2.9 FAU
In the Options page for the FAU export one of the two FAU formats can
be selected.
Figure 26-18 Options page for the FAU export
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
The FAU file will be identical with a logged FAU file and is explained in
the logging (see page 155).
26.2.10 GSF
In the Options page for the export type ‘GSF’ can be selected if the
multibeam data in the GSF file is uncorrected or fully corrected. The
corrected multibeam data is computed according the multibeam xyz
computation in the multibeam device data.
Figure 26-19 Options page for the GSF export
The GSF file will be identical with a logged GSF file and is explained in
the logging (see page 156).
26.2.11 Backscatter points (ASCII)

In the options page for the export type Backscatter points (ASCII) the
Backscatter source Multibeam, Snippets and/or Side Scan Sonar could
be selected.

Figure 26-20 Options page for the Back scatter points (ASCII) export
For each selected source a separate XYZ file will be exported, containing
backscatter points and magnitude values.
26.2.12 UKOOA P1/90

In the options page for the UKOOA P1/90, a description of the vessel
reference point and vertical datum could be given.
Figure 26-21 Options UKOOA P1/90 export
The logging of multibeam data can be disabled and optional data

reduction could be defined by means of the multibeam data log interval.

26.3 Exporting
If everything is set for the export, the selected data can be exported. Click
on from the toolbar or select Actions > Export from the menu bar to
start the export.
For the export types ‘Excel’, ‘Comma Separated’ and ‘SZ’ the standard
Save As dialog is opened and a default filename is given.
Figure 26-22 Save As dialog for the ‘Excel’ and the ‘Comma Separated’ export
Select the location and give a proper filename for the export file and click
on to start the export. For the other export types the files are
directly saved with a default filename in the LogData folder. A Progress
window will appear to show the progress of the export.

27 Clock Synchronization
27.1 Introduction
With this option in the Control Center an external clock can be selected to
synchronize PDS with this clock. With the output option other systems
can be synchronized with PDS. After the selection of the external clock,
the clock synchronization can be switched on / off.
For a good synchronization between an external clock and PDS a clock
with a 1PPS pulse is needed. It is also possible to use an external clock
without the 1PPS pulse, but this will not be that accurate as the clock with
the 1PPS pulse.
When no external clock and a time in message is used in PDS in
 combination with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar an alarm will be generated

to warn the user. PDS needs an external clock before proper survey can
be done with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Clock Synchronization  797

27.2 Clock Synchronization Settings
See the Technical Note ‘ Clock synchronization’ for full details.
Select System > Clock Synchronization from the menu bar or click on
in the toolbar to open the Clock Synchronization window.
Figure 27-1 Clock Synchronization window with a selected clock device
 Enable Clock Synchronization

Check this option to activate the clock synchronization.
This option may only be RESON 7k I/O module

used when the 7K I/O Select the option Use RESON 7k I/O module for clock synchronization
module runs on the same and the 7K I/O module will set the time of the PDS computer. The 7K
computer!!. I/O module will also update the time on a regular bases.
Clock Synchronization with Remote RESON 7kI/O module
Select this option to set the time of the TMC computer of a 7k I/O
module running on a different computer on the network.
Clock Synchronization module
Select the option Use Clock Synchronization module for clock
synchronization and the time of the PDS computer will be synced with
the time from the selected clock device.
Clock device
The leap seconds can be
Select one of the clock devices and click on to display the
set in the GPS Time clock device as the ‘Selected clock device’.
Parameters of the Project For the clock devices with a GPS time automatically an extra item
Configuration (see page will be displayed in the window; the leap seconds. With these leap
77). seconds the GPS time will be corrected to UTC time.
798  Clock Synchronization Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Input
Click on to select the right communication port and port
settings for the received time message.
When the pulse (PPS) is on the same port as the time message
then the pulse is automatically interfaced. If the pulse is on a
different port then click on the second to select the port for
the pulse.
If the clock device is connected to the system, click on to
check the communication port and the data received from the
selected clock device. The Clock Sync window is from the same
type as the Device Test window in the Equipment page (see page
119).
Output
Check the option Enable if a time output is wanted for another
system. Click on to select the clock output device and the
right communication port with the right settings for the output.
Click on to activate the clock synchronization.
If the clock synchronization is activated and the Clock Synchronization
window is opened, the clock synchronization will be inactivated. This is
done to run for instance the device test in the Clock Synchronization
window. Click on to activate the clock synchronization again.
27.3 Activate Clock Synchronization

PDS will display on two locations if the clock synchronization is activated,
in the Connections window of the Control Center and with in the
taskbar on the bottom right hand side. These two locations will only show
that the clock synchronization is activated, not that it is working properly.
 If the clock synchronization is activated but no data is received then it is

not possible to start the Acquisition in the Realtime mode!
Figure 27-2 Clock synchronization is activated in the Connections window
With double click on in the taskbar the Clock Sync window will be
opened. This is the same window (Clock Sync – System messages) as
when on is clicked in the Clock Synchronization window (see
page 798). The only difference is that in the menu bar the option Edit is
added.
Click with the right button of the mouse on and a context menu is
opened with the options Show and Exit. With Show the same window as
with the double click on the icon is opened and with Exit will disappear
from the taskbar but the clock synchronization will not be inactivated.
Figure 27-3 Icon in the taskbar with its context menu
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Clock Synchronization  799

The only way to inactivate the clock synchronization is to uncheck the
 option Enable Clock Synchronization in the Clock Synchronization
window (see page 798).
27.4 SetTime Service

During the installation of PDS the SetTimeService will be installed. This
service can modify the computer clock when the clock synchronization is
running and the computer clock has to be synced with the time from the
clock device.
When a new PDS version is installed while another version is already
installed then the SetTimeService will be uninstalled and installed again
for the new version. This is done to be sure that the latest version of the
SettimeService is running. It will still work for the older versions.
When the user decide to remove an older version of PDS then also the
SetTimeService will be uninstalled. It is possible that the service is still
available because Windows sometime does not allow to uninstall the
service. But in most cases the service is uninstalled thus not available
anymore for the other already installed versions of PDS.
The Clocksync will give a warning when the SetTimeService is not
available anymore. To make the service active again the user has to
 reinstall the PDS version that is already installed on the PC. Use during
the re-installation the option ‘Repair’ to get the service running again (see
page 7).
800  Clock Synchronization Teledyne PDS - User Manual

28 Geo Calculator
28.1 Introduction
The Geo Calculator is a tool for coordinate conversions. At the moment
two different manual coordinate conversions with a reporting capability
are available.
The first conversion is a conversion where only the project configuration
and the project coordinate system can be used. The second conversion is
a conversion between two selectable coordinate systems.
It is also possible to compute a 3 parameters shift from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid and to convert a file with coordinates using
the project coordinate system.
The values for the latitude and longitude in the different pages does not
 have to be in the format as displayed, it can be entered in several
formats. For example: 56°30’07.2” N, 56 30 7.2 N or 56.502 N.
The Geo Calculator is started from Tools > Geo Calculator from the
Control Center menu bar.
28.2 Manual Coordinate Conversion

The manual coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator can
convert satellite ellipsoid coordinates (like WGS’84 or ETRS89) with the
use of a datum transformation to local ellipsoid coordinates and projection
coordinates or vice versa.
When a route is selected the KP and offtrack will be calculated for the
coordinate that is used in the conversion. When a KP and offtrack is
entered the satellite ellipsoid coordinates, the local ellipsoid coordinates
and the projection coordinates will be calculated.
The coordinate system in this conversion is always the project coordinate
system. A report can be generated with the calculated conversion.
When the manual coordinate conversion is selected, the project
configuration with the project coordinate system will be displayed.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Geo Calculator  801

Figure 28-1 Manual Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
The Easting, the Northing and the height in projection coordinates will
be calculated automatically. When a geoid model is present in the
coordinate system the height becomes the geoidal height. If necessary
the coordinates and height can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically. The convergence
(see below) and point scale factor (see page 804) are always
calculated.
Route Coordinate
Select a route and the KP and offtrack will be calculated. If necessary
the KP and/or offtrack can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.
802  Geo Calculator Teledyne PDS - User Manual

28.2.1 Convergence
The grid convergence is the angle between grid north and true north, so
in fact the angle between the grid lines and the projection of the
meridians. When using a gyro compass, and its input is read by PDS, the
heading value cannot directly be used in the computations. The value has
to be corrected for the grid convergence to obtain a grid heading which
can be used for the computations.
The complete computation for the grid heading is:
Grid Heading = True Heading + Convergence + Heading Correction
For some projection there is a grid skew. This skew will be added to the
convergence.
The heading correction is the correction derived from a gyro compass
calibration.
Below an example for a Transverse Mercator (TM) grid convergence.
Figure 28-2 TM grid convergence

28.2.2 Point Scale Factor
For the projections a scale factor on the central meridian is defined. This
is done to minimize the distortion in the conversion from the latitude and
longitude on the local ellipsoid to the grid easting and northing.
For an UTM the scale factor is 0.9996 on the central meridian. When we
move to the east or west the scale factor will become bigger.
28.3 Advance Manual Conversion

The advance manual conversion page of the Geo Calculator can convert
from one local ellipsoid with its own projection to another local ellipsoid
with its own projection. The conversion from one ellipsoid to the other will
go via WGS’84 or ETRS89. All the coordinate systems in database can
be selected, that means that both coordinate system should have the
same satellite ellipsoid. A report can be generated with the calculated
conversion. Use to change the coordinate system.
Figure 28-3 Advance Manual Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Local ellipsoid coordinate

With the display The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
format for the coordinates will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
can be changed. added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates and height
can be added manually and all other coordinates will then be

calculated automatically. The convergence (see page 803) and point
scale factor (see above) are always calculated.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.
28.4 Compute 3 Shift Parameters

On this page of the Geo Calculator a 3 parameters shift can be computed
for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid. This
 3 shift parameters will be calculated for the satellite ellipsoid and local
ellipsoid as specified in the project coordinate system.
Figure 28-4 Compute 3 Shift Parameters page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will not be calculated automatically when the satellite ellipsoid is
entered. If the coordinates are entered the grid coordinates will be
calculated automatically.
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically when the local ellipsoid is entered. If the
coordinates are entered the local ellipsoid coordinates will be
calculated automatically.

3 Shift Parameters
The 3 shift parameters for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid
to the local ellipsoid.
28.5 File Coordinate Conversion

In the file coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator a file with
 coordinates can be converted to a file with converted coordinates using
the two selectable coordinate systems.
Figure 28-5 File Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Source Coordinate System

Click on to select the coordinate system that is used in
the ASCII file. Select then the coordinate type that is used in the file.
The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The coordinates should be WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates. The
The coordinates can be latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude
specified in different is available the conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
formats: 56°30’07.2” N, 56
30 7.2 N or 56.502 N. If no Local Ellipsoid
N,S, E or W is added PDS The coordinates should be in the local ellipsoid system that is
assumes that it is N or E. specified in the project coordinate system. The latitude, longitude
and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude is available the
conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
Grid
The coordinates should be in the projection that is specified in the
coordinate system. The Easting, Northing and height are required.

If no height is available the conversion assumes that the height is
0.
Route
The coordinates should be in KP, Offtrack and height. The KP and
Offtrack should be related to the route that selected. If no height is
available the conversion assumes that the height is 0.
Destination Coordinate System
Click on to select the coordinate system that has to be
used in the output file. Select then the coordinate type that has to be
used in the output file. The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in WGS’84 or
ETRS89, depends on what is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Local Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in the local
coordinate system as is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Grid
The Easting, Northing and height are in the projection as defined in
the destination coordinate system.
Route
The KP, Offtrack and height are related to the route that is
specified.
File Conversion
In the file conversion 4 At the moment only one output format is available, Comma Separated
extra fields can be
Volume (the output file is a CSV file).
converted from the source
file to the destination file. Click on to start the file conversion. The ASCII Import
Wizard will be open to select the right columns in the ASCII file.

29 Interfacing
29.1 Introduction
On the Equipment page an IO port has to be set when a sensor is added
to the device list (see page 119). When in the Equipment page on
is clicked only the communication ports for that specific
device driver are available and not all possible interfaces can be selected.
In the Interfacing window which can be opened in the Control Center all
the different communication ports are available.
29.2 Interfacing Page
Figure 29-1 Interfacing window
Select from the menu bar the option System > Interfacing or click on in
the toolbar to open the Interfacing window.
By default only the serial communication ports COM1 – 16 are displayed
in this window. If in the Equipment page for a specific device driver
another communication port is added then this new communication port
will be visible in the Interfacing window.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Interfacing  809

The visible ports can be selected and on the right side in the window the
settings will be displayed and can be modified if necessary. If a
 communication port is modified in the Interfacing window then the settings
of this port, if it is used in the Equipment page, will also be changed.
Click on to add a new port or a new type of port to the list. In the
Select Interface dialog one of the available types for the selected device
can be selected. Select one of the available interface types and a new
port name has to be entered for: a new network port, a new com port or a
new OPC port.
The different interfaces that are available are:
 XSE (see below)
 Socket (see page 811)
 Serial (see page 812)
 RTA (see page 812)
 RGL (see page 812)
 RESON Remote IO (see page 813)
 R7KI (see page 813)
 R7K (see page 814)
 OPC (see page 814)
 NCC (see page 815)
 EDGETECH (see page 815)
 BlueView (see page 816)
 FILE (see page 816)
It will depend on the device driver which interfaces will be available.
29.2.1 XSE
This type of communication port is only used for an Elac system. A
network port has to be entered and on the right side in the Interfacing
page an IP-address has to be entered for the XSE server.
Figure 29-2 Example of an IP-address for a XSE server
810  Interfacing Teledyne PDS - User Manual

29.2.2 Socket
This type of communication port is a network connection and can be used
for receiving and/or sending data through a network connection.
Figure 29-3 Example of a network settings for a socket communication port
Local Port
The network port on the PDS computer.
Host Address
The IP-address of the remote system. This is the system that sends
the data.
If the remote system is on the same computer as where PDS is
running, the host address is 127.0.0.1.
Host Port
The network port on the remote system.
Check host address
This option is only relevant if the protocol is UDP/IP.
If the option is checked, only the data from the host address will be
accepted.
Protocol
There are two network protocols available:
UDP/IP. This protocol will be used for the communication with the
RESON multibeam systems.
TCP/IP. If this protocol is used an IP-address has to be entered as
host address. This protocol checks the communication between the
two ports before it send or received data.
IP Multicast
This is broadcasting from/to a select group of recipients. Check the
option Join multicast to receive or send data in the group. The group
name has to be entered. Normally this name is created by the sender
of the data. The protocol for IP multicast is always UDP/IP.
The table below gives the setting for receiving and sending data:
Receiving Sending Receiving & Sending
Local Port local port number 0 local port number
Host Address empty host IP address host IP address
Host Port 0 host port number host port number
 The ‘empty’ mentioned above in the table can also be replaced by ‘host IP
address’ when only the data from the host address has to be accepted.

29.2.3 Serial
This type of communication port is a serial connection, called COM port,
and can be used for all the sensors with a serial connection.
If more than one COM port has to be used, serial extender cards have to
be installed. See in the chapter ‘Installation’ on page 10 for more
information.
Figure 29-4 Example of the settings for a serial port
29.2.4 RTA
The RTA communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the devices which are received from the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box
used for the Odom ES3.
Figure 29-5 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
The Base Port Number is by default set on the right number (2020), do
not change this!!
Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Interface Setup chapter Odom
ES3 (the file Interface Setup.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
29.2.5 RGL
The RGL communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the laser scan devices Riegl and Riegl Vline. The port cannot be selected

it will automatically selected when one of these laser scan types is
selected as device.
Figure 29-6 Example of the settings for a RGL communication
Host Address
The IP address is always from the Riegl laser scan.
29.2.6 RESON Remote IO

The RESON Remote IO communication port is a network connection and
is specific for the devices which are received from the SeaBat UI used for
the RESON SeaBat 7k systems.
Figure 29-7 Example of the settings for a RESON Remote IO communication
The Base Port Number should be the port number as specified in the raw
data distribution in the SeaBat UI.
 Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device. For each
device a separate RESON Remote IO interface has to be setup.
29.2.7 R7KI
The R7KI communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. This communication port is identical with
the socket port as described above.
Figure 29-8 Example of the settings for a R7KI communication
See socket on page 811 for an explanation of the view.

29.2.8 R7K
The R7K communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. The port cannot be selected it will
automatically selected when a RESON SeaBat 7K system is selected as
device.
Figure 29-9 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
Host Address
The host is always the 7K data server and, when it is running on the
same computer as PDS, the address is 127.0.0.1. If the 7K data server
is running on another computer then the address is the IP address of
the other computer.
Protocol
The protocol has to be UDP/IP.
This port can be used for all 7K drivers that need information from the 7K
data server, like the multibeam, the side scan sonar and the snippets, or
send information to the 7K data server, like the output to 7K.
29.2.9 OPC
The OPC communication port is a kind of network connection. The port
cannot be selected it will automatically selected when an OPC device is
selected.
Figure 29-10 OPC server has to be selected for the OPC communication
Before OPC (OPen Connectivity) can be used special software has to be

installed on the PDS or external computer.
Force OPC 1.0a connection
Check this option when an old 1.0a connection is used.
Server on local computer
Check this option when the OPC server is running on the PDS
computer.
Address
This will automatically be filled with ‘localhost’ when the option

Server on local computer is checked.
When the OPC server is running on an external; computer add
here the IP address of the external computer.
Server name
Select the server name as use on the PDS or external computer.
OPC Server brand: ArchestrA FSGateway
Check this option when as OPC server brand the ArchestrA
FSGateway is used.
29.2.10 NCC
This type of communication port is needed for the Navisound echo
sounders. The port is a dummy port which is used in PDS to
communicate with the Navisound. The actual port and settings are
defined in the Navisound Control Center (see page 122).
The NCC port is automatically created when a Navisound echo sounder is
selected in the Equipment. So it is not necessary to add a NCC port, but
when by accident the port is deleted while the Navisound is already
selected then the port can be added. It is not needed to define the baud
rate, etc. because this will be done in the Navisound Control Center.
There can be only one NCC port in the Interfacing available.
29.2.11 Edgetech
The Edgetech communication port is a network connection and is specific
for the Edgetech side scan sonar system. This communication port is
identical with the socket port as described above, only the Local port and
the multicast are disabled.
Figure 29-11 Example of the settings for an Edgetech communication

29.2.12 BlueView
Figure 29-12 BlueView
The BlueView communication port is a network connection and is specific

for the BlueView sonar system.
Set the TCP/IP address of the BlueView sonar as host address.
From the drop down menu it is possible to select a file to replay BlueView
sonar data or to restore the last TCP/IP address.
29.2.13 File
Figure 29-13 File logger
The file I/O port is used to log the output of the selected driver to a file.
The file name consists of a user defined part (output file base name) and
a Teledyne PDS part to make a unique name.
See Figure 29-13.

If day and week file logging is selected the format becomes:
xxxx_Portlog-YYYYmmDD
If User Period file logging is selected the file name becomes:
xxxx_Portlog-HHMMSS
With: xxxx = User defined output file base name.

YYYYmmDD = year month day
HHMMSS = hour minute seconds
Select the overwrite driver rate checkbox to overwrite the driver rate by a
defined overwrite log rate.

30 User Accounts
30.1 introduction
For the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation it is possible
to create user accounts. By default two accounts are already present,
Administrator and Basic Operator. The Administrator level has access to
all options in PDS while the Basic Operator has very limited access. The
administrator is set as the default user account.
To add and/or modified the user accounts select in the Control Center the
menu option Tools > User Accounts… and the User Accounts window will
be opened.
30.2 User Account window
Figure 30-1 User Accounts window
The two default user accounts, Administrator and Basic Operator, do not
have a password yet. If the user wants a password to protect these two
accounts, select a user account and click on to open the User
dialog to add a password.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual User Accounts  819

Figure 30-2 User dialog
Enter the password in the field Password and repeat this in Retype
password. With the option Show password the actual text of the password
is displayed, if this option is unchecked only dots will be displayed (see
above).
At the moment are two access level present. With a new
access level can be added or an existing user level can be modified (see
below).
30.3 Manage User Levels
Figure 30-3 Manage user level access window with the two default access
levels, Administrator and Basic Operator.
820  User Accounts Teledyne PDS - User Manual

In this window the menu options from the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation that can be switched on/off are displayed. The menu
options that are accessible in all different access levels are not displayed.
The access levels are only valid for one application type. Each application
 type has its own access levels, this is due to that menu options per
application type can differ.
The two default access levels, as displayed above, cannot be deleted or
modified. If the user wants for some menu options a different access as
defined with the two defaults then a new access level has to be created.
Click on and the Add user access level dialog will be opened.
Figure 30-4 Add user access level dialog
Check the option Make copy of access level if an existing access level
has to be used as base for the new one. If the option is unchecked all the
menu options in the new access level will be switched off (set on No).
Figure 30-5 Manage user level access window with new user level
Teledyne PDS - User Manual User Accounts  821

Click on a Yes or No in the window and the selected menu item can be
changed. So is in the figure above the menu item Logging/Logging
Settings in the Acquisition changed to Yes.
30.4 New User Account

If in the Manage user level access window a new user level is added, a
new user account with that new user level can be added to the user
accounts.
With in the User Accounts window a new user account can be
added to list.
Figure 30-6 New user account with the new user level
30.5 Changing User Account

After the different user accounts with the different user levels are setup,
the user can change the user account only in the Control Center,
Acquisition or Presentation.
Figure 30-7 User accounts can be changed
On the top right side in the application the user account can be changed.
Select the option and select one of the available user accounts. If for the
user account a password is added, then the user has to enter the
password before the selected user account becomes active.
822  User Accounts Teledyne PDS - User Manual

31 Options
31.1 Introduction
From the Control Center Tools>Options… menu it is possible to:
 Set the Language of PDS.
 Set the power management check.
 Show an Advanced tab in the PDS Explorer and / or show tooltips
in the Explorer.
 Do an OpenGL check when a PDS application starts.
 Show a user general tab in the PDS Explorer.
31.2 Language
At the moment, next to the English language, the other languages that are
available in PDS are Deutsch (German), Français (France), Italiana
(Italian), Nederlands (Dutch), Russian and Chinese.
If PDS is running in a not English language it is possible that not all items
in a menu or in the text of the menus are in the right language. The
translation is made for a specific version of PDS, so if software
modification took place after that version the new items or text will be in
English.
Select from the menu bar of the Control Center the option Tools >
Options…and in the Language tab select a different language for PDS.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Options  823

Figure 31-1 Language tab in Options window
After a language is selected and confirmed with a message will

Figure 31-2 Message to restart PDS to made the new language active
Restart PDS and the selected language will be the active language for
PDS.
31.3 Power Management

At the start of PDS a check will be done on the performance of the PC /
laptop on which PDS is running. Two checks are done; on the CPU
throttling and especially for the laptops if the AC adapter is connected.
The CPU throttling should be of to get a better performance of the system
and in PDS.
When the AC adapter is not connected the performance on a laptop is
less than with the AC adapter connected.
When at least one of these checks failed a message will popup when the
Control Center is started. If both are OK no message will be shown.
 The message is only a warning that the performance can be better if the
advice as mentioned in the message is followed.
824  Options Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Figure 31-3 Message when Control Center is started
In the figure above both checks failed. Click on to do a check the

next time the Control Center is opened, click on when no checks
have to be performed.
31.3.1 Power Management Check

The setup and the check can be started in the Control Center with the
menu option Tools > Options… and then selecting the Power
management check tab.
Figure 31-4 Power management check tab in Options window
By default the options Enable power management check on startup of the

Control Center is enabled. This means that the check is done each time
the Control Center is started.
When the Control Center is started and in the message (see Figure 31-3
above) on is clicked then the above mentioned option is
unchecked and no checks will be done when the Control Center is
started.

Click on to do a manually power management check. If everything
is OK then the following text will be displayed.
Figure 31-5 Power management check with everything is OK
When one of the checks failed the following text will be displayed.
Figure 31-6 Power management check with one check failed
In the message from a manually check also the power management

scheme is mentioned. The best performance is off course with the
scheme ‘High performance’ but when the scheme is something else, like
‘Balanced’, then it will be mentioned but no warning will be displayed.
31.4 Explorer View

From the Explorer view option it is possible to:
 Add the Advanced tab to the Explorer.
 Show tooltips in the Explorer View.
Figure 31-7 Option Advanced Explorer View

31.4.1 Show Advanced tab
From the Explorer Advanced tab page the user has access to:
 Camera Images files.
 PDS related files such as system files, device drivers, application
types etc.
 Project related files such as color tables, contours, cube models,
screen layouts, sound velocity profiles etc.
 Project Common related files such as Wireframe (DXF) drawings,
vessel contours, events etc.
 Sonar Targets files.
31.4.2 Show Tooltip

Enable this option to show a tooltip when the mouse is hoovered over a
file in the PDS Explorer (see page 231).
31.5 OpenGL Check

Features of Teledyne PDS may not function properly when the video card
does not support the correct OpenGL version. PDS requires OpenGL
version 3.3 or higher.
When the option OpenGL check is enabled then the version of OpenGL is
checked used by the video card when a PDS application starts. A warning
message opens when the OpenGL version is lower as 3.3
Figure 31-8 OpenGL Check
31.6 General Settings

For other users this tab is This option is only available for one specific client (Boraciet – Plot). It will
not visible in the Options add an extra node called ‘User General’ to the Explorer Advanced tab. In
window.! this node data from several projects can be stored and can be used in the
different projects.
The items that are available in this tab are: 3D Models, Contour
Definitions, Design Profile Templates, DXF Drawings, Profile Design
Models, Runlines and Track Guidance Routes.

Figure 31-9 General Settings tab in the Options window
Select the user general folder and automatically the selected folder will
become the folder used in the User General node in the Advanced tab of
the Explorer.
Figure 31-10 User General Node

32 Copyright Information
32.1 Glew
The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits <milan ikits[]ieee org>
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E. Magallon <mmagallo[]debian org>
Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of the author may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Copyright Information  829

Mesa 3-D graphics library
Version: 7.0
Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Brian Paul All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL
BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

copy of this software and/or associated documentation files (the
"Materials"), to deal in the Materials without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Materials, and to
permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials.
THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE
MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS.
830  Copyright Information Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Copyright Information  831
33 Amendment record sheet
Rev. Date Reason for Modifications

4.3.11 16/07/2018 Vessel configuration : Add note SketchUp support x64.
Installation: Add note about adding S57 chart files.
Import: Add Pico MB import.
Rope Excavator application changed to Wire Crane application.
Minor textual changes
4.3.0.10 14/05/2018 Documentation: Laser Scan added.
Installation: Add note Remote presentation Windows 10 private
network
4.3.0.9 26/03/2018 Starting Teledyne PDS: Projects – note added.

Control Center: Change PDS support mail address.
Documentation: MotionScan added.
Pile Driving added.
Sidescan sonar and mosaicking added.
4.3.0.8 04/11/2017 Coordinate system: Add Trimble Geoid Grid Format geoid model files.
Vessel Configuration: Logging – Add note to S7K format logging.
Views: Note added multiple sonar target views.
Sonar Contact View added.
Text modified range mode.
Starting Teledyne PDS: Text modified Sonar Target / Contact.
Configuration.
Control Center: Add text about mail to protocol handler for
created mail messages.
4.3.07 13/07/2017 Views: Text update 3D View Online Water column.

Text update Sonar Sidescan view.
Added SIDUS to pan and tilt controller view.
Vessel Configuration: Logging - Modified s7k format records table.
Explorer: Project page - text added.
Other page - text removed.
Export: ‘Correlate’ option better described.
Add note S7K export.
Coordinate system: Add chapter ‘DC files’.
Installation: Add text Soft Dongle.
Models: Add text ESRI grid import.
4.3.06 10/04/2017 All chapters: Minor textual changes and figure updates.
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Amendment record sheet  833

Vessel Configuration: Logging: Add margin notes record 1003, 1015 and
7030.
S7K Logging: Updated table.
Import: Section BlueView son import modified.
Views: Note added to TPE error views.
Grid Model Create page, TPE note added.
4.3.05 08/02/2017 Editing: List with short cut keys modified.

Grid Model Editor: Add text sonar target and contact.
Control Center: Menu bar - Text added new file menu functions.
Toolbar – Text added Screen capture function.
Editing: Text modified of Import Post-Processed GPS Data.
Add text ASCII height correction format.
Add section ‘IHO statistical report’.
Acquisition: Modified text ‘Measure with Dredge tool’.
Coordinate system: Add text 14parameter Bursa/Wolfe transformation.
Views: Sonar view – Add text mouse wheel scroll and zoom
function.
3D Online – Add text toolbar button ‘clear MB layer’.
Add section ‘Device Configuration – Pan and Tilt ROS
Positioners Control
4.3.04 11/01/2017 Explorer: Text modified:

Profile Design models moved from Advanced page to Project
page.
Add ‘Show project extents’ project toolbar button.
Views: Device configuration RESON 7K. Add ‘sonar gates’ description.
Modified Sonar –Sidescan view description.
Modified Sonar – Snippets view description
Installation: Chapter ‘Installing and using C-Map modified’. (C-map is now
also supported for PDS 64 versions)
Starting Teledyne PDS: Leap seconds modified (now 18).
Coordinate System: Add OSGM15
4.3.03 05/01/2017 Teledyne PDS documentation: Recovered broken pdf links.

4.3.02 11/11/2016 Explorer – Added Tooltip disable/enable option.
Options – Added OpenGL check.
Options – Added disable / enable tooltip.
Views – Plan View toolbar - Create Sonar Target contact button added.
TT 11071 Profile – Projected Runline View – Filter description added.
Recovered broken page links in the entire manual
4.3.01 14/06/2016 Explorer – Text modified.
4.3.00 25/04/2016 The entire manual is updated.
Explorer – Described the new PDS Explorer
Control Center – Described the new PDS control Center
Added chapter Editors.
Added chapter Quick Profile Plot
Added chapter Batch Plot
Added chapter Geo Calculator
Added chapter Clock Synchronization
Added chapter Interfacing
Added chapter User Accounts
Added chapter Options
Added chapter Import
4.2.31 02/02/2016 Added Appendix Copyright Information.
834  Amendment record sheet Teledyne PDS - User Manual

4.2.30 24/11/2015 Rope Excavator User manual added.
4.2.29 06/11/2015 Odom Multibeam manual removed.
Odom Multibeam Interfacing manual added.
4.2.28 28/10/2015 Editing – Text modified multi detect.
Views – Text modified Multibeam Filters view.
Block Placement manual added.
SBG Systems Inertial and Motion Sensors manual added.
4.2.27 21/09/2015 Editing – Text modified multi-detect.
Editing – Add text multi-detect control page.
Editing – Multibeam Filter mode, added text Area Filter and Show Filtered
control pages.
Views – Multibeam Filters view, added text Intensity and Sub Bottom filter.
TT 11619 Vessel configuration, text modified ‘Create a user defined output
driver’.
TT 11686 Grid Model, text added cell data total vert. and hor uncertainty.
Vessel Configuration: S7K file format, text modified.
4.2.26 09/09/2015 Views: Multibeam filters view, range filter text modified.
4.2.25 13/08/2015 Acquisition: Text modified WCS and IMG data logging method.
Installation: Text modified.
Installation: System requirements modified.
Using Teledyne PDS: New shortcut added.
4.2.24 17/07/2015 Vessel configuration: Text Logging – Grid Model added.
Grid Model Editor: Text ASCII Import modified.
New front page.
New Teledyne PDS logo.
Replaced PDS2000 to Teledyne PDS or PDS.
4.2.23 15/06/2015 TT 11014 Editing, water column samples mode added.

TT 11069 Views, text added symbols raw data standard view.
Explorer: Tide separators listed.
Grid Model: Import text modified.
Control Center: Interfacing text added BlueView and file logging.
Control Center: Clock synchronization text modified.
Logging: S7k format text modified.
Vessel configuration: Equipment text modified device offsets.
TT 11377 Editing: Text import POSPac modified.
Vessel configuration: text added; user created output driver.
Control Center: Added import formats.
4.2.22 26/02/2015 Editing: Multidetect text modified.

Installation: Text modified S-57.
Vessel configuration: Text modified alarms.
Explorer: Add text Geoid models tab.
Acquisition: Add text logging water column and image data.
4.2.21 15/01/2015 Explorer. Added section Tide gauge in Realtime.
Coordinate system: Added section VDatum.
4.2.20 19/12/2014 Explorer: Text modified sound velocity profiles
Views: Text modified Multibeam filters view (Use surface speed of sound
as firtst entry in the table)
4.2.19 15/12/2014 Explorer: Is now up to date with PDS2000 version 3.9.2.0 (Charts tab
added)
Renewed Pipe Position Monitor manual added.
Processing: Text modified. GPS user defined ASCII file added.

4.2.18 07/10/2014 Views: Text modified Section ‘Device configuration’.
Installation: Section ‘Add S-57 Charts in PDS2000’ modified.
4.2.17 30/09/2014 Introduction: Make a link to the PDS2000 instruction movies.

Export: Modified text S7k export -1008 record.
Guidance: Modified text Design model offset and Z-shift.
Installation: Modified text with correct ftp address.
Vessel configuration:Text statistics Report added.
Export:Text multibeam X,Y,Z RWS format added.
TT 10563 Description Statistic of Raw data added.
Installation: Added Section S-57 Charts.
Starting PDS2000: Modified text ‘Backup log directory’.
Editor: Add text beam color mode ‘Multidetection’.
Views: Add text beam color mode ‘Multidetection’.
Installation: Text ‘auto start’ added.
Installation: S-57 text now become available.
PDS2000 T20-P with POS MV setup guide. (as document only) added.
TT 10722 Installation: Section ‘changing etoken dongle’ added.
Control Center: Section import BlueView Son files added.
Control Center: Section import GeoSwath RDF file added.
Views: Add section ‘Device configuration BlueView View’ and section
‘Device configuration Interferometry GeoSwath View’.
TT 10711 Coordinate system: Text modified EGM2008 geoid model.
4.2.16 02/09/2014 Removed section Views – S-57 chart layer as it is not yet released.
4.2.15 21/08/2014 BlueView manual added
4.2.14 30/07/2014 New icons toolbar Control Center, acquisition and processing changed
Views: Limited S-57 chart layer text added
Vessel configuration: Sea level properties squat speed text added
Editing: keyboard shortcuts text added
4.2.13 16/07/2014 Export: updated to PDS2000 version 3.9.1.0
Views: Amplitude detection filter described.
Editing:all,amplitude or phase point selection description added.
4.2.12 03/07/2014 Removed ‘Multibeam Video View’ description.
Vessel configuration: squat table and visualization mode text added and
modified.
Grid model editor: Port export text modified.
Explorer: text modified. The tab ‘icon images’ has become ‘camera
images’.
4.2.11 12/05/2014 Monopile placement manual added.

ASCII import described in section ‘Explorer’.
4.2.10 14/04/2014 Text added regarding:
Views: description Water column data.
Explorer: Microstation Design file (DGN) format
Views: numerics primary data source name
TT: 10239 description ‘dredge tolerance’ added.
TT: 10240 description coverage settings ‘show no design data’ added.
TT: 10210 description ‘alarm on difference’ added
Section ‘Guidance’ modified.
836  Amendment record sheet Teledyne PDS - User Manual

4.2.9 31/03/2014 Views: Section added with description Plan View Survey coverage and
Edit.
4.2.8 06/03/2014 Odom multibeam added to PDS2000 documentation.
Grid model editor updated to PDS2000 version 3.8.2.2.
4.2.7 21/02/2014 Items added for PDS2000 version 3.8
4.2.6 23/01/2014 Port Entrance Simulation added to PDS2000 documentation.
4.2.5 03/01/2014 Grid model port export added.
Guidance editor added to PDS2000 documentation
4.2.4 14/03/2013 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.64
4.2.2 03/12/2012 Pipe Detection added to PDS2000 Documentation
4.2.0 30/08/2012 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.45; sonar targets are
updated to version 3.7.0.46.
4.0.2 28/10/2011 Tresco Charts added and some small modifications are added.
3.7.6 18/09/2010 Small modifications are added.
3.7.4 15/06/2010 New RESON logo and small updates are added.
3.7.2 04/02/2010 The complete manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.5.0.1
3.7.1 12/01/2010 Small updates
3.4.1 21/12/2007 The manual is updated for PDS2000 version 3.2.0.4. Parts of the manual
are already updated for the new version 3.3.0.0.

Alerts View - 309, 310, 347, 348
ALL File - 775
Amplitude Detection Filter - 418
Anchor Definition - 133
Angle to Detection Point - 412
Index Anomalies - 315, 489, 491, 498

application type - 302
Application Type - 65, 66, 67, 79, 81, 119, 128,
129, 131, 147, 151, 167, 271, 272, 308,
783, 827
area filter - 567
ASCII - 150, 226, 624, 648, 660, 674, 763, 764,
765, 767, 770, 786
ASCII File - 174, 207, 219, 251, 274, 522, 601,
608, 626, 629, 650, 674, 688, 786, 813
ASCII Import wizard - 277
─3─ Auto Pilot - 359
Auto Recache - 497
3D Box View - 518, 587, 633
Automatic Identification System - 443
3D Design Model - 179, 451, 522, 528, 536, 753
AVI File - 268, 308
3D Design Model Editor - 170, 171, 172
3D Model - 167, 170, 171, 172, 179, 240, 245,
428, 646, 655, 657, 683, 774, 798 ─B─
3D Models - 238
Backscatter - 152, 392, 626
3D Object Manager - 272, 309
Backscatter Processing - 489
3D Objects - 272
backup log directory - 74
3D Studio Model - 276
Bartel ASCII DAT Format - 799
3D View - 62, 309, 648
Basic Operator - 825
3D View – Online - 328, 345
Batch Plot - 757
3D View – Online Dredge - 328, 329, 346
Beam Color Mode - 521, 524, 526, 592, 600,
3D View – Online Water Column - 331, 470
607
3D View – Standard - 522, 523, 526
Beam Quality Filter - 405
Beam Reject Filter - 405
─7─ BITE - 386
BlueView - 816, 822
7K Center - 355
BlueView Son - 778
BlueView sonar - 349
─A─ BMP File - 268, 271, 272, 308, 344, 379, 381,
Absorption - 354, 360 436, 437, 460, 471, 474, 477, 520, 524,
Access Level - 827 587, 600, 603, 607, 611, 619, 622, 632,
Acquisition - 18, 66, 82, 84, 111, 121, 132, 134, 679, 714
135, 139, 148, 167, 170, 174, 175, 176, Bottom pane - 202
183, 184, 185, 188, 205, 251, 268, 272, BPP File - 759
275, 280, 305, 306, 308, 314, 316, 319, branch - 232
320, 325, 327, 328, 349, 370, 371, 382, BSB Chart - 257, 268
387, 423, 426, 428, 448, 450, 455, 459, Bursa Wolf - 95
480, 483, 484, 541, 564, 617, 629, 648,
825, 827, 828 ─C─
Active Editor - 496, 498
Camera Images Databases Files - 239
Active Vessel - 309, 310, 311, 368
Cassini-Soldner - 102
Administrator - 825
Chart Layer properties. - 50
Advanced Computation - 129, 499
Circular Interpolation - 555, 641, 661, 774
Advanced tab - 833
Clipping Polygon - 158, 171, 174, 218, 225, 240,
AIS Layer - 443
274, 440, 544, 621, 622, 627, 632, 635,
Alarm - 66, 83, 84, 158, 161, 170, 176, 180, 273,
645, 646, 647, 648, 651, 652, 653, 656,
308, 313, 347, 348, 462, 480
661, 683, 717
alarm on difference - 162
Clipping Polygon Editor - 218, 276
Alert Sounds - 76
Clipping Polygons - 239
Alerts - 313
Teledyne PDS - User Manual Index  839

Clock Synchronization - 803, 804, 805 Device Configuration – Interferometry GeoSwath
C-Map - 3, 6, 19, 21, 22, 26, 29, 32, 34, 35, 258, - 361
431, 437, 438, 717 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat View -
C-Map Chart Manager - 27, 29, 30, 32 358
Color Mapping Panel - 702, 713 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View - 350
Color Maps - 271 Device Configuration View - 349
Color Table - 240, 241, 243, 244, 274, 344, 346, Device Driver - 8, 119, 121, 150, 160
389, 390, 391, 403, 439, 520, 522, 524, DGN - 257
527, 528, 587, 589, 600, 604, 607, 622, Directional Interpolation - 662
623, 633, 652, 658, 674, 679, 713, 718, 743 Disk Space - 75
Color Table Generator - 241, 244 Display Mode - 388
Compass - 399 Dock Area - 60, 61
Compass View - 349 Docking - 60, 306, 307
Computation - 128, 129, 167, 309, 481, 487 Dongle - 7, 10, 12, 13, 79, 133, 272, 306, 308,
Condition - 130, 183, 184 492
Condition Check - 158, 169, 240 Drag & Drop - 419, 464, 484, 674
configuration - 301 Draping - 648
Configuration - 66, 67, 84, 111, 148, 273, 487 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View - 366
connection window - 202 Dredge – Bars Vertical View - 366, 367
Contour Definition - 273, 274, 722, 735, 747 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View - 366,
Control Center - 17, 18, 59, 65, 68, 69, 81, 82, 367, 368
84, 87, 111, 148, 183, 191, 272, 273, 275, Dredge – Load and Draught View - 366, 369
485, 491, 621, 630, 673, 682, 691, 739, Dredge – SCADA View - 272, 366, 370
761, 785, 803, 805, 815, 825, 827, 828, 829 Dredge Differential Color Table - 245
Convergence - 809 Dredge Instruction - 131, 167, 178, 311, 428
Coordinate System - 72, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 93, Dredge Instruction Editor - 178
95, 104, 105, 107, 108, 272, 514, 807, 810 Dredge Status - 718
Coverage - 149, 629 Dredge Status Configuration - 272
Coverage Settings - 172, 439, 446, 604, 622, Dredge Status View - 370
633 Dredge Track - 150
CRP - 117 DXF Export - 274, 739, 740, 749
CSV File - 250, 268, 281, 548, 558, 657, 688, DXF File - 9, 151, 171, 172, 180, 219, 252, 256,
786, 813 262, 274, 280, 431, 691, 699, 701, 704,
CTL File - 155, 786, 797 713, 718, 739, 749, 755, 759
CUBE Algorithm - 541 DXF Panel - 702, 713
CUBE Model - 540, 543, 544, 545, 547, 548, Dynamic Gridding - 627, 628
588, 589, 590
CUBE Synchronization - 548 ─E─
Cutter Dredge - 131, 167, 173
Echosounder Graphical Trace - 373
Echosounder Graphical Trace View - 371
─D─
Edgetech - 816, 821
DAT File - 787 EdgeTech (.jsf) file - 779
Data Source - 130, 131, 188, 309, 483, 488, Edit Alarm - 439
503, 504, 794, 795 Electronic Chart - 177, 219, 257
Data Source Switching - 529, 530 Ellipsoid - 89, 91, 95, 107, 313, 807, 808, 810,
Data Source Switching Editor - 530 812
Database - 26, 28, 32, 675 End Area Volumes - 490, 681, 682, 708
Datum Transformation - 92, 93, 94, 95, 107, 807 Equipment - 119, 121, 188, 272, 309, 443, 481,
DC file - 108 487
Dekdienst - 533 ESRI - 257, 647
Delimiter - 768, 769, 770 eToken Dongle - 19, 21, 26, 29, 259
Depth Filter - 406, 410 ETRS89 - 807, 808, 810, 812, 813
Design Model - 131, 167, 170, 450, 453, 753 Event Definition - 183, 185, 188
Design Profile Template - 219, 220, 222, 245, Event Definition Editor - 185
246, 248 Eventing - 183, 184, 311
Design Profile Template Editor - 219, 221, 223, Events - 66, 83, 183, 280, 308, 315, 316
246 Excluded Area - 240, 274, 544
Device Configuration – BlueView - 360
840  Index Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Explorer - 185, 188, 208, 223, 225, 231, 240, ─I─
248, 250, 273, 274, 276, 834
Export - 172, 489, 490, 629, 647, 699, 785, 787, Icon Image - 78, 239, 381, 437
802 Icon Image View - 381
Export Configuration File - 280, 785, 786 IHO Error Filter - 396, 402, 407, 414
IHO Order - 402, 414, 543, 655
Image Panel - 702, 714
─F─ Import - 207, 208, 629, 761, 763, 764, 766, 770,
FAU File - 156, 787, 800 782, 783
Feature Angle - 676 Import Configuration File - 276, 280
Feature Edge - 676, 677 Incidence Angle - 412
FILE - 816 intensity filter - 407
File Set Editor - 494, 625, 787 Interfacing - 121, 815, 816
Filter page - 565 Interferometry - 407, 414
F-Key - 317, 318, 319, 321, 322, 323, 324 Intersection Angle - 406
Flying Object Filter - 407, 411 Intersection Filter - 406, 410
Follow Vessel - 343, 346, 435, 437, 444, 459, Interval Logging - 138, 155
460, 461, 523, 527, 586 Interval Logging View - 139, 382
Frequency - 350
─J─
─G─ JPG File - 224, 268, 271, 308, 344, 379, 381,
Gain - 350, 351, 359, 476, 478, 611 436, 437, 460, 471, 474, 477, 520, 524,
Gates - 350 587, 600, 603, 607, 611, 619, 622, 632,
Geo Calculator - 807, 810 679, 714
Geographic Grid - 720
Geoid Model - 95, 98, 107, 629 ─K─
Geoid Model Grid Model - 96, 629, 650
GeoSwath RDF - 776 KAP File - 257, 268
GeoTIFF - 223 Key Map Panel - 698, 702, 714, 717, 719, 720,
GeoTIFF File - 223, 224, 247, 257, 281, 423, 722, 723, 724, 728, 730, 731, 732, 733,
436, 440, 479, 529, 597, 614, 632, 647, 738, 739
648, 730 Keyword - 696, 701
GLW Grid - 721 Klein (.sdf) file - 781
Grid Model - 149, 167, 170, 179, 329, 450, 451, KML File - 247, 647
453, 520, 522, 529, 536, 548, 549, 555, KMZ File - 247, 647
557, 587, 607, 621, 624, 626, 627, 629, Kongsberg Maritime GeoSwath sonar - 349
630, 639, 645, 647, 648, 652, 653, 655, KP - 807, 808
657, 660, 679, 681, 683, 699, 721, 724,
742, 745, 746, 753, 757, 774, 775 ─L─
Grid Model Editor - 170, 240, 257, 489, 627,
630, 632 Lambert One Parallel - 102
Grid Properties - 177 Lambert Two Parallel - 102
GSF File - 156, 787, 800 Lambert’s Law Correction - 477, 478, 611
Guidance - 131, 158, 167, 238, 247, 248, 249, Laser Scan - 521, 525, 592, 601, 607
254, 309, 310, 314, 428 Laser Scan – MDL View - 383
Guidance Editor - 180 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View - 383
Layer Control - 34, 43, 172, 173, 230, 344, 346,
366, 367, 401, 429, 437, 439, 442, 445,
─H─ 460, 461, 471, 474, 484, 522, 525, 527,
HDCS - 150, 624, 625, 786 596, 601, 604, 608, 611, 614, 622, 633
Helmsman View - 379 Layer Order - 443, 700, 701
Helpdesk View - 314 Layout - 66, 82, 305, 306, 307, 308, 327, 487,
Hotine Oblique Mercator - 102 490, 493, 496
HTML File - 9 Lead-in Line - 117, 169
Hypothesis - 541, 542, 545, 588, 591 Leap Seconds - 77, 805
Level Contact - 455
Line-Based Editing – Multiline View - 534, 537,
538

Line-Based Editing – Standard View - 534, 535, North Arrow Panel - 702, 704
538 Numerics – Sonar Targets View - 422, 597
Logdata File - 499, 635, 649 Numerics – Standard View - 419, 420, 464
Logging - 74, 147, 148, 158, 169, 305, 311, 315, Numerics View - 369, 422
316, 325, 482, 488, 631
─O─
─M─
Object Distance - 131, 167, 180
Main System - 119 Offtrack - 807, 808
Man Over Board - 310, 325 OPC - 816, 820
Manual Input – Dredge Status View - 272, 384, Open GL - 12
385, 618 OpenGIS - 247, 647
Marine Sonic Data Stream (.sds) file - 781 OpenGL - 833
Marine Sonic Technology (.mst) file - 780 Output Control View - 423, 424
Max. Ping Rate - 350 Output Messages - 122
Measure - 172, 435, 603, 613, 622, 632 Overwrite Suppression - 700
Memory - 4
Mercator - 102 ─P─
message window - 202
Messages – HydroBat View - 385 P190 - 787
Messages – I/O Port View - 386 PCI Card - 10
Messages – SeaBat 7K View - 385 PCMCIA Card - 10
Messages – System Messages View - 183, 185, PDF File - 6, 9, 208, 268, 506, 554, 619, 639,
306, 308, 387, 502, 538 655, 657, 658, 689, 808, 811
Minimization - 359 PDS Reporter - 554, 639, 655, 657
MS Windows 10 - 3 Pdsgeodatabase - 87, 90, 272
MS Windows 7 - 3, 9 Pdsusergeobase - 87, 90, 106, 272
MS Windows 8 - 3 Pico MB (.dat) file - 782
MS Windows Vista - 3, 9 Ping Rate - 351
MS Windows XP - 9 Ping View - 539, 597, 600
Multi Detect - 573 Pipe Detection - 583
Multibeam Area Editing – Ping View - 539 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View - 424
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View - 274, Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View - 424, 425
511, 518, 539, 540, 543, 544, 585, 597, 605 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View - 424, 426
Multibeam Calibration - 275, 489, 511 Pipe Route - 729
Multibeam Editor - 492 pipeline target - 436
Multibeam Filter - 387, 388, 393, 521, 525, 526, Placement Point - 176, 177, 247, 311
565, 596, 601, 608 Placement Points Editor - 177
Multibeam Filters View - 402, 404, 405 Plan Panel - 693, 697, 698, 699, 702, 703, 704,
Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View - 388, 402 705, 713, 714, 715, 717, 718, 719, 720,
Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength 722, 723, 724, 728, 730, 731, 732, 733,
Profile View - 392 735, 736, 737, 738, 739, 743
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Plan View - 34, 43, 223, 257, 314, 315, 422,
Errors View - 395, 402, 403 426, 442, 685, 691, 693, 694, 703, 714
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View - 392, 395 Plan View – Dredge Instruction - 310, 428
Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors View - Plan View – Dynamic Positioning - 310, 429,
395, 396, 541 431, 438
Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View - 400, Plan View – General Dredge Operation - 180,
402, 403 430, 450
Multibeam QC Views - 387, 403, 404 Plan View – Navigation - 257, 310, 431, 438
Multiping - 394, 402, 521, 526, 548, 558, 592 Plan View – Production - 432, 448, 450
Plan View – Survey Coverage - 432, 433, 448,
─N─ 450
Plan View – Survey Coverage and Edit - 434
Nadir Filter - 152, 406, 411 Plot Template - 751, 752, 753, 754, 757
Navisoft - 763 Polygon - 158, 167, 175, 437
NCC - 816, 821 polygon target - 436
New Project Wizard - 69 Position Editing – Standard View - 602, 603,
North Arrow - 9, 704 604, 616

Position Editor - 492 ─Q─
Positioning System XY – Manual Input View -
448 Quick Profile Plot - 751
POSPac - 507
Post Correction - 103 ─R─
Power - 350, 351, 359
Power Level - 359 R7K - 816, 820
Power Management - 830 R7KI - 816, 819
Power Management Check - 832 Range - 350, 351, 359, 470, 473
PRD File - 763 Range Filter - 405, 410
Presentation - 18, 66, 82, 272, 280, 306, 314, Range gate - 351
316, 325, 327, 629, 825, 827, 828 Raster Editor - 224, 225, 257
Primary Data Source Name - 420 Raw Data View - 139, 320, 419, 462, 464, 484
Profile - 724 Realtime - 305
Profile – Grid Model View - 437, 450 Recache - 497, 499, 514, 567
Profile – Multibeam View - 451, 460, 461 Reference Level - 655, 656, 658, 659, 683, 684,
Profile – Projected Runline View - 451, 460 687
Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View - 454 Remote Presentation - 16, 17, 18, 326
Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View - 455 Remote Vessel - 81
Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View - 456, 461 Replay - 148, 485, 486, 487
Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical View - RESON HydroBat - 120, 349, 385, 386
458 RESON Remote IO - 816, 819
Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View - 457 RESON SeaBat 7K - 120, 152, 156, 349, 385,
Profile – Realtime Design View - 180, 430, 453, 386, 394, 402, 472, 786, 803, 819, 820
454, 455, 457, 458, 461 RESON SeaBat 8K - 156
Profile – Sound Velocity View - 459 Restricted Area - 131, 167, 175, 176, 240
Profile Cross Series Panel - 698, 702, 710, 711, RGL - 816, 818
719, 721, 725, 726, 728, 729, 733, 734, 739 RijksDriehoek Meting - 102
Profile Design Model - 171, 219, 246, 248, 536, Route - 131, 167, 168, 173, 175, 184, 220, 223,
683, 686, 688, 689, 753 225, 248, 274, 315, 349, 379, 380, 400,
Profile Design Model Editor - 220, 248 437, 440, 450, 505, 529, 544, 632, 662,
Profile Info Panel - 702, 711 663, 699, 706, 728, 730, 807, 808
Profile Panel - 698, 702, 705, 707, 710, 711, Route Editor - 173, 276
719, 721, 725, 726, 727, 728, 729, 733, RTA - 816, 818
734, 739 Runline - 131, 160, 167, 169, 184, 220, 248,
Profile Series Panel - 698, 702, 709, 711, 719, 249, 310, 314, 315, 325, 379, 380, 437,
721, 725, 726, 727, 728, 729, 733, 734, 739 450, 451, 529, 534, 535, 659, 660, 662,
Profile View - 587, 605, 606, 633, 685 663, 681, 683, 685, 686, 687, 688, 706,
Profile Volume Panel - 706 709, 710, 725, 726, 728, 731, 742, 747,
Project Configuration - 68, 71, 84, 87, 105, 262, 751, 754, 755, 765, 766, 767, 769, 771,
272, 275, 807 774, 775, 783, 787
Project tab page - 236 Runlines Editor - 276
Project Wizard - 68, 111
Projection - 99, 100, 101, 102, 107, 807, 808, ─S─
810, 811, 812
S-57 - 257, 258, 261, 717
Projects List page - 234
S-57 chart layer - 48
Properties - 128, 173, 205, 208, 345, 346, 349,
S-63 - 259
368, 370, 380, 384, 386, 387, 392, 400,
S7K File - 152, 356, 772, 786, 796
402, 403, 420, 439, 444, 460, 461, 463,
S7K Import - 772, 783
471, 474, 484, 522, 525, 527, 538, 596,
Satellite Geographic Grid - 731
601, 604, 608, 614, 622, 633, 674, 679,
SBET File - 507
694, 695, 696, 697, 698, 699, 702, 703,
Scale Bar Panel - 702, 715
704, 705, 707, 710, 711, 712
Scale Factor - 810
PTS File - 508
Scatterplot View - 464, 465
Pulse Length - 350, 351, 359
SDS File - 155, 786, 797
Pulse Type - 350, 351
Sea Level - 64, 117, 387, 406, 447, 502, 529,
791
Selector - 205, 532, 537, 618
Serial - 816

Side Scan - 151, 152, 478, 608, 771, 772, 786, Text Block - 712, 754
794, 795, 796 Text Block Panel - 702, 712
Simrad EM3000 - 150, 786, 791 Text Box - 701, 702, 712, 733
Simrad EM3000 Import - 775, 783 Threshold - 476, 556, 611, 644
Singlebeam Filter Settings - 451 Tide Data - 502, 503, 514, 615
Singlebeam Interpolation - 663 Tide Manual Input View - 483
Slant Range Correction - 477, 478, 611 Tide Report - 208
Slant Range Distortion - 478 Tide Station - 204, 251, 275
Slope Angle - 406 Tide Station – Editor - 614
Slope Filter - 406, 410 Tide Station – Viewer - 502, 503, 614
Smart Filter - 407, 414 Tide Station Editor - 204
Snippets - 151, 152, 608, 771, 772, 786, 794, TIFF File - 223, 224, 714
795 Time Series View - 464, 483
Socket - 816 Time Stamp Error - 348
Sonar – Sidescan View - 475, 609, 612 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph View - 615,
Sonar – Snippets View - 476, 609, 612 619
Sonar – Wedge view - 467 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View - 615, 619
Sonar Contact view - 466 Time-Based Editing – Standard View - 502, 615
Sonar Target - 77, 281, 344, 436, 439, 466, 477, TIN Model - 275, 489, 621, 624, 627, 628, 662,
479, 596, 597, 603, 611, 612, 732 673, 674, 675, 679, 734, 735
Sonar Targets View - 466, 612, 613 TIN Model Viewer - 489, 628, 673, 674
SonarSwath - 792 Tolerance - 274, 683, 687, 748
Sound Velocity - 354, 355, 360, 584 tooltip - 833
Sound Velocity Editor - 584 Total Propagation Error - 396, 397, 398, 401,
sound velocity filter - 355 402, 407, 543
Sound Velocity Profile - 226, 229, 250, 408, 584, Track Guidance Route - 222, 632, 774
585, 586, 775 Tracking Point - 309, 310, 311
Sound Velocity Profile Editor - 276 Transverse Mercator - 102
Speed Correction - 477, 478, 611 tree view - 232
Spotlight - 344, 520, 523, 586, 606, 631 Tresco - 3, 36, 39, 43
Spreading - 354, 355 Triangle - 564, 627, 662, 675, 676, 677, 678
Standard Computation - 128, 129, 499 Triangular Interpolation - 662
Standard Deviation - 145, 463, 526, 628, 660 Trimble DC files - 108
Statistic Filter - 406, 413, 414 TVG - 476, 478, 611
Status – Alarms View - 308, 480 TXT File - 275
Status – Computations View - 481
Status – Equipment View - 481 ─U─
Status – Logging View - 316, 482
Status – Remote Connections View - 482 UDP/IP - 817, 820
Stereographic - 102 Uncertainty of the Hypothesis - 542, 545, 590
Strength of the Hypothesis - 542, 545, 588 Units - 72, 99, 102, 117, 120, 159, 160, 226, 272
Strictness - 407, 413 Universal Transverse Mercator - 102
sub bottom filter - 407 USBL Calibration - 489
Sub System - 119, 121 USBL Transceiver - 489, 501
Sun Illumination - 447, 622, 623, 632, 633, 648, USBL Transponder - 489, 501
722, 745 Use surface speed of sound as firtst entry in the
Svp Edit Profile View - 584, 585 table - 408
System Unit - 99, 120 User Account - 825, 828
SZ File - 774, 775, 787, 798 user defined GPS ASCII data format - 508
SZ Import - 774, 783 User defined Output Driver - 124
User Maps - 439, 440
USGS Dem - 624, 627
─T─
UXO Format - 799
Tangent Point - 167, 168
TCP/IP - 10, 817 ─V─
Team Viewer - 9
Template - 70, 185, 186, 220, 686, 688, 695, Vertex - 528, 676, 677, 679
701
TerraPos - 508

Vessel Configuration - 66, 81, 84, 111, 112, 132,
262, 273, 276, 309, 313, 481, 485, 487,
499, 500, 794
Vessel Contour - 117, 276, 280
Vessel Coordinate System - 117
Vessel Placement - 131, 167, 176
Volume Computation - 276, 629, 681, 682, 683,
684, 685, 688
VRU - 159, 396, 397, 399, 616, 795
─W─
Water Column Samples Mode - 583
WAV File - 76, 272
Wayline - 170, 184, 311, 349, 379, 380, 437,
438
Waypoint - 131, 167, 170, 310, 311, 325, 349,
437, 438, 465, 529, 737, 742, 748
Waypoints - 250, 281
Waypoints Editor - 276
WGS’84 - 156, 247, 647, 807, 808, 810, 812,
813
Winfrog - 149
Wireframe - 280, 528, 679
Work Area - 131, 167, 174, 240, 311
─X─
XSE - 816
XTF File - 151, 771, 786, 793, 794, 795, 796
XTF Import - 771, 783
XYZ - 150, 624, 627, 648, 660, 675, 681, 763,
765, 767, 768, 769, 783, 787
XYZ File - 150, 674, 758, 786

Teledyne PDS User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Teledyne PDS User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Teledyne PDS User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Teledyne RESON B.V.

Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

Amendment Record Sheet

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  i

3 Using Teledyne PDS 59

4 Starting Teledyne PDS 65

ii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

6 Vessel Configuration 111

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  iii

iv  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

9 Control Center 191

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  v

vi  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  vii

viii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  ix

x  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xi

xii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xiii

xiv  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

19 Grid Model 627

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xv

20 TIN Model Viewer 671

21 End Area Volumes 679

xvi  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xvii

23 Quick Profile Plot 745

24 Batch Plot 751

xviii  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

27 Clock Synchronization 797

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xix

28 Geo Calculator 801

30 User Accounts 819

xx  Contents Teledyne PDS - User Manual

32 Copyright Information 829

33 Amendment record sheet 833

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Contents  xxi

1.1 Teledyne PDS

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Introduction  1

Running Teledyne PDS in a virtual environment is known to work with:

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Installation  3

 The above system requirements may be subject to change. Check the

The requirements for the PC are depending on the application. A single-

 beam application requires less computer power then a multibeam

2.1.2 Memory Improvement

4  Installation Teledyne PDS - User Manual

 64 Bit Windows operating systems don’t need to be modified. They

2.2 Install PDS

2.2.1 Start PDS Installation

Figure 2-1 Welcome page of the PDS InstallShield Wizard

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Installation  5

Figure 2-2 Type of setup in the PDS InstallShield Wizard

 Client Control Center. A stripped Control Center made for Boraciet.

6  Installation Teledyne PDS - User Manual

g. Click on on the desktop to start PDS.

2.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS

Figure 2-4 Repair or Remove PDS in the PDS InstallShield Wizard

Teledyne PDS - User Manual Installation  7